Heller Center Rehabilitation - Main House rehab... · 2018. 4. 18. · Heller Center Main House Rehabilitation Bid Package 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01010

University of Colorado at Colorado SpringsColorado Springs, Colorado

SpecificationsMarch 2010Architect’s Project No. 0931

Bid Package 2

Heller CenterRehabilitation - Main House

Table of Contents - 1 Heller Center Rehabilitation Bid Package 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Division 1 UCCS General Requirements Section 01018 Historic Treatment Procedures 01020 Allowances 01022 Unit Prices 01030 Alternates 01041 Superintendent DIVISION 2 SITEWORK

Section 02070 Selective Demolition 02225 Structural Excavating, Backfilling and

Compacting 02230 Site Clearing 02300 Earth Moving 02500 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting 02510 Water Distribution 02515 Exterior Concrete Paving 02522 Aggregate Walks 02530 Wastewater Distribution 02553 Natural Gas Distribution 02612 Drainage Systems 02631 Permanent Erosion Protection 02810 Underground Irrigation System 02925 Turf Grass 02930 Exterior Plants 02931 Seeding DIVISION 3 CONCRETE

Section 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Concrete Reinforcing 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete DIVISION 4 MASONRY

Section 04100 Mortar and Masonry Grout 04220 Concrete Unit Masonry 04400 Stone Masonry DIVISION 5 METALS

Section 05120 Structural Steel 05521 Pipe and Tube Railings and Guardrails DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS

Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 06170 Prefabricated Structural Wood 06200 Finish Carpentry DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07210 Thermal Building Insulation 07220 Roof and Deck Insulation 07221 Tapered Rigid Insulation 07245 Exterior Portland Cement Stucco System

07536 Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing – Fully-Adhered

07621 Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim 07900 Sealants and Joint Fillers DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08210 Wood Doors 08515 Steel Sash Window Repair 08520 Aluminum Windows 08700 Finish Hardware 08800 Glass and Glazing 08810 Replacement Glass and Glazing DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09220 Skim Coat Plaster System 09260 Gypsum Wallboard 09310 Ceramic Tile 09550 Wood Flooring 09650 Resilient Flooring 09900 Painting 09905 Strippers and Paint Removers 09930 Transparent Finishes DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10440 Interior Signage 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL

Mechanical and Plumbing Specifications are located on the Drawings DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements 16020 Electrical Submittals and Shop Drawings 16040 Secondary Electrical Service 16120 Wire and Cable – 600 Volt and Less 16130 Raceways and Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16511 Interior Lighting 16700 Fire Alarm Control Panel APPENDIX A

Inventory of existing light fixtures, metal railings and other elements

Heller Center Main House Rehabilitation Bid Package 2

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01000 GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS Division 1 - General Requirements shall govern work under all Divisions of the Specifications. 1.02 SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE EXPLANATION

Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined type and include incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall," "in conformity therewith," "shall be," "as noted on the Drawings," "a," "the" are intentional. Supply omitted words or phrases by inference in same manner as they are when "NOTE" occurs on Drawings. Supply words "shall be" or "shall" by inference when colon is used within sentences or phrases. Supply words "on the Drawings" by inference when "as indicated" is used with sentences or phrases. Where reference is made to specifications, societies, institutes, or associations or manufacturer's directions, they are, except as may be inconsistent herewith, made part of specifications, to same extent as if written out in full herein. Use latest edition, at time of bidding, if a date is not given.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS

References in Contract Documents to trade associations, technical societies, recognized authorities and other institutions include following organizations, which are sometimes referred to only by corresponding abbreviations: AA Aluminum Association AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association ACI American Concrete Institute AIMA Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association (successor to AMA) AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AMA Acoustical Materials Association ANSI American National Standards Institute (successor to USASI and ASA) APA American Plywood Association ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing Materials AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWS American Welding Society CDA Copper Development Associations, Inc. CM/GC Construction Manager/General Contractor CRA California Redwood Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) DFPA Douglas Fir Plywood Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FIA Factory Insurance Association FM Factory Mutual Engineering Division FS Federal Specification MIA Marble Institute of America


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01000 GENERAL

MIL Military Specification MILMA Metal Lath Manufacturer's Association NAAMM The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NBS National Bureau of Standards NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEC National Electric Code (of NBFU) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NIOSH National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health NMWIA National Mineral Wool Insulation Association NPVLMA National Paint, Varnish and Lacquer Manufacturers' Association NTMA The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute PS Product Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) SCPI Structural Clay Products Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association SPA Southern Pine Association SPI The Society of Plastic Industry, Inc. SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation (U.S. Department of Commerce) SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council SWI Steel Window Institute TCA Tile Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. WCLA West Coat Lumbermen's Association WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute WWPA Western Wood Products Association

1.04 LAYING OUT WORK

The Contractor will furnish reference bench mark and maintain bench mark and all other grades, lines, and levels and dimensions as indicated in the Contract Documents. Report any errors or inconsistencies in above to Owner before commencing work.

Except as delegated by subcontract or normal trade practice, the Contractor will be responsible for all lines, elevations, and measurements of work indicated.

1.05 EXAMINATION OF SITE

Failure to visit the site will in no way relieve any Contractor from the necessity of furnishing materials or performing work that may be required to complete work in accordance with the Contract Documents without additional cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA The following Drawings, Project Manual, and Addenda from the Contract Documents.

A. Set(s) of Drawings & project manuals dated March 22, 2010. Drawing list is as follows: See Attached Sheet B. Project Manual titles: Heller Center Main House Rehabilitation Bid Package 2, dated March 22,

2010. C. Addenda: All Addenda issued prior to bidding. 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work covered: Work under this contract includes all materials, equipment and labor necessary to

complete the work indicated on the drawings, described in specifications, addenda or reasonably inferred.

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK

A. General: The work consists of the rehabilitation of the existing "Main House" at the Heller Center. Work includes removal of existing overframed gable and hip roof structures, north mud room and south porch enclosures. A new roof is to be installed over the original roof deck, reconstruction of several missing original windows, rehabilitation of the original steel sash windows, new hot water heating system, new electrical system and new site utilities including new fire main loop/domestic service, sanitary sewer service, gas service and some stormwater utility work. A new accessible parking lot and accessible path leading to the house is also included. 1. Restoration and Preservation Projects: All work of this project shall meet the

requirements of the Secretary of the Interior's Standards for Rehabilitation of Historic Buildings and the Colorado Historical Society.

2. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Contractor shall take all necessary care in selective demolition and construction of this project so as not to damage or destroy the historic fabric of the structure that is to remain.

B. Unless otherwise provided, Contractor shall provide, at his expense, all materials, labor, equipment, tools, transportation and utilities, including cost of connection necessary for successful completion of the project.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for seeing that all contractors, subcontractors, suppliers and workmen associated with the project conduct themselves in a professional, respectful and businesslike manner while on the site. 1. Firearms, alcoholic beverages and controlled substances are not permitted on

the premises. 2. Smoking or use of tobacco products shall only be allowed in designated areas,

and is prohibited within any structure. 3. All workers shall refrain from the use of profane or abusive language and other

forms of harassment on the site. 4. Other specific conditions of this Section shall be as arranged at the Pre-

Construction Conference. Refer to Section 01046 for specific rights of the Owner's principal representative.

D. Related requirements or conditions specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01018, Historic Treatment Procedures.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK

2. Section 01020, Allowances. 3. Section 01022, Unit Prices. 4. Section 01030, Alternates.

1.04 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. All work will be executed under one prime construction contract between the Owner and the Contractor.

B. Except as indicated otherwise, all work under this contract will be under the direction of the prime contractor.

C. Contractor Qualifications: General Contractor shall have completed at least three (3) projects requiring adherence to the Secretary of the Interior's Standards for Rehabilitation of Historic Buildings, or other projects of similar size and complexity under rehabilitation guidelines of the Colorado Historical Society in the past five (5) years.

D. Superintendent Qualifications: Refer to Section 01041. 1.05 FORM OF BID AND/OR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

A. The work of this Project shall be bid and construction contracts awarded on the following basis, unless otherwise modified in the General or Supplementary Conditions of the Contract: (select one) 1. Lump sum basis, including approved Alternates.

1.06 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Owner shall furnish all light fixtures except for exterior bollard lighting and exit/egress lighting. General Contractor to install.

B. Owner shall furnish all toilet accessories and tile for vanity countertops and backsplashes for installation by the Contractor.

C. Owner shall furnish and install all telephone and data/communications equipment. D. Owner shall furnish and install all residential appliances by separate contract. E. Owner shall furnish and install all computers and other movable equipment by separate

contract. F. Owner shall provide any applicable project or building inspection services as required by

Chapter 17 of the International Building code (IBC), current edition, by separate contract. The Architect and Engineers will not provide these services.

1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. The limits of staging, parking and construction will be defined on-site prior to commencing

construction. 1.08 PROTECTION OF WORK AND ADJACENT PROPERTY A. Buildings and property adjacent to work included in this project may be subject to damage due to

construction operations.

Prior to the start of the work included in this Contract engage the services of a photographer to record the existing condition of adjacent structures and property. Contractor shall provide one set of 3" X 5" prints or a set on disk to the Owner and retain negatives and one set of prints for their records. Sufficient photos with adequate detail to thoroughly document the conditions surrounding the work shall be provided.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 3 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK B. At the completion of the project, Contractor shall restore existing buildings, landscaping, parking

facilities and property to same condition as prior to the start of the work. C. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, the

Contractor shall: 1. Notify, in writing, the Owner of University or private property which interferes with the

work and arrange with them for disposition of such property. 2. Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing to prevent earth from caving or washing

into excavation. Provide temporary protection around openings through and at floors, roofs, and other openings.

3. Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing for existing underground utilities, sewers, etc., encountered during excavation work, to protect them from collapse or other type of damage until such time as they are to be removed, incorporated into the work of this project, or can be properly back-filled upon completion of new work.

4. Weather Protection: Provide protection against rain, snow, wind, ice, storms, or heat so as to maintain work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage. At the end of each day's work, cover new work likely to be damaged.

5. Provide and maintain adequate protection of the work from damage due to freezing, especially freezing earth and soils. Risk of proceeding with the work on or with freezing or frozen materials will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

6. Water Protection: Provide protection from damage at all times from rain water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and other water. Provide pumps and equipment enclosures to provide this protection.

7. The Contractor will maintain free of obstructions and debris, all designated corridors and emergency exits, handicap access ramps and sidewalks to building. Provide temporary directional handicapped signage for routing to the nearest accessible facilities.

1.09 EXISTING FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT

The Owner will remove or relocate existing movable furniture and equipment from the areas in which the Contractor is working. Notify the Owner not less than three days prior to starting work in areas where furniture and equipment require moving.

1.10 CONTRACTOR'S ACCESS PARKING AND STAGING AREAS A. Work included in this project will need to be performed within the limitations of available access at

the site. The University shall limit the area available for staging and parking due to the additional number of construction projects planned during the execution of this contract. Contractor shall adjust the means and methods of construction to allow for the restrictions surrounding the site.

1.11 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Owner may occupy designated areas for the purpose of storage of furnishings and equipment

and installation of equipment. B. Execute Certificate of Substantial Completion for each designated portion of work prior to Owner

occupancy. Contractor shall allow: 1. Access for Owner personnel. 2. Use of parking facilities. 3. Operation of HVAC and electrical systems.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 4 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK C. On occupancy, Owner will provide, for occupied areas: 1. Operation of HVAC and electrical systems. 2. Maintenance. 3. Security. 1.12 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC SERVICE A. Connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt owners need for

continuous service. Owner to pay for power consumed. Provide power outlets for construction operations, branch wiring, distribution boxes, and flexible power cords as required.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01020 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SURVEYS, LAYOUTS, AND LEVELS A. General: Working from lines and levels established by the existing building, and as shown in

relation to the work, establish and maintain bench marks and other dependable markers to set the lines and levels for the work of construction as needed to properly locate every element of the work of the entire project. Calculate and measure required dimensions as shown (within recognized tolerances if not otherwise indicated); do not scale the drawings to determine dimensions. Continuously advise tradesmen performing the work of the marked lines and levels provided for use in the layout of work.

1.03 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at job site, one copy of: 1. Contract Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Reviewed Shop Drawings 5. Change Orders 6. Other Modifications to Contract 7. Field Test Records 8. As-Built Drawings B. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition and do not use record documents for

construction purposes. Make documents available at all times for inspection by the Consultant and Owner.

C. Label each document "Project Record" in 1" or larger printed letters. D. Record drawing information in colored pencil with different colors for the various systems and

defined by color legend. E. Record drawings and specifications shall include the following: 1. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to

visible and accessible features of structure. Location of concealed valves, dampers, controls, balancing devices, junction boxes, clean-outs, and other items requiring access or maintenance.

2. Field changes of dimension and detail, changes made by Change Order or Field Order and details not on original contract drawings.

3. Fire protection and alarm systems shop drawings.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS _DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01020 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION F. Submit all record drawings to the Consultant at the completion of the project. 1.04 CLEANING A. Cleaning and Protection Work: At the time each unit of work or element of the construction is

completed (substantially) in each area of the Project, clean the unit or element to a condition suitable for occupancy and use (as intended), and restore minor or superficial damage. Replace units and elements which are damaged beyond successful restoration. Clean and restore adjoining surfaces and other work which was soiled or damaged (superficially) during the installation; replace other work damaged beyond successful restoration. Where the performance of subsequent work could possibly result in damage to the complete unit or element, provide protective covering or other provisions to minimize possible damage. Repeat cleaning and protection operations during remainder of construction period, wherever work might otherwise be damaged by sustained soiling or exposure.

B. During Construction: Oversee cleaning and ensure that building, grounds, and public properties

are maintained free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish. At reasonable intervals during daily progress of work, clean up site and access and dispose of waste materials, rubbish, and debris. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready and continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis until building is ready for acceptance or occupancy.

1.05 PROJECT SIGN

Erect no project sign or job-site sign of any kind, except warning signs as specified in Section 01500, without written authorization of the Owner.

1.06 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work so as not to interfere with the building custodian's

normal cleanup activities. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all the work of the project. The Contractor

shall coordinate the efforts of all subcontractor(s) and the deliveries of suppliers so that the work progresses in an orderly fashion without delay towards timely completion of a complete project in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

C. The Contractor shall note that concurrent with his work, other contractors, suppliers, and the

Owner's facilities and maintenance personnel may be working in relatively close proximity. The Contractor will be solely responsible for coordinating his work with that of other contractors and will make no claims for failure to do so.

1.08 METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION A. The procedure and method of construction is the prerogative and the responsibility of the

Contractor. If professional assistance is required to safely implement method of construction, the Contractor shall, on his own, employ professional help.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01041 PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. General Contractor is responsible for all of the work of this contract. 1. Assign and subcontract portions of the work as required to assure that all work is

constructed in compliance with these documents. 2. Coordinate the work of the several subcontractors for the project. 3. Coordinate work of this contract with work by separate contractors. B. Each subcontractor shall: 1. Coordinate work of his own employees and subcontractors. 2. Expedite his work to assure compliance with schedules. 3. Coordinate his work with that of other subcontractors and work by separate contractor. 4. Comply with orders and instructions of owner. C. Related Requirements 1. All Division 1 Sections. 1.02 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION AND START-UP A. Establish on-site lines of authority and communications. 1. Attend pre-construction meeting with subcontractors upon commencement of the project. 2. Establish procedures for intra-project communications. a. Submittals. b. Reports and records. c. Recommendations. d. Coordination Drawings. e. Schedules. f. Resolution of conflicts. 3. Interpret Contract Documents. a. Consult with Architect to obtain interpretation. b. Assist in resolution of questions or conflicts which may arise. c. Transmit written interpretations to subcontractors, and to other concerned parties. 4. Assist in obtaining permits and approvals. a. Obtain building permits and special permits required for work or for temporary

facilities. b. Verify that subcontractors have obtained inspections for work and for temporary

facilities. 5. Control the use of site. a. Supervise field engineering and site layout. b. Allocate space for each subcontractor's use for field offices, sheds, work and

storage areas. c. Establish access, traffic and parking allocations and regulations. d. Monitor use of site during construction.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01041 PROJECT COORDINATION 1.03 CONTRACTOR DUTIES A. Construction Schedules. 1. Coordinate schedules with several subcontractors. 2. Monitor schedules as work progresses. a. Identify potential variances between schedules and probable completion dates

for each phase. b. Recommend adjustments in schedule to meet required completion dates. c. Adjust schedules of subcontractors as required. d. Document changes in schedule. 3. Observe work of each subcontractor to monitor compliance with schedule. a. Verify that labor and equipment are adequate for the work and the schedule. b. Verify that product procurement schedules are adequate. c. Verify that product deliveries are adequate to maintain schedule. B. Process Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 1. Review for compliance with Contract Documents. a. Field dimensions and clearance dimensions. b. Relation to available space. c. Relation to other trades, equipment and systems. d. Submit to Architect. C. Monitor the use of temporary utilities. 1. Verify that adequate services are provided and maintained. D. Inspection and Testing. 1. Inspection work to assure performance in accord with requirements of Contract

Documents. 2. Administer special testing and inspections of suspected work. 3. Reject work which does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Coordinate testing laboratory services. a. Verify that required laboratory personnel are present. b. Verify that tests are made in accordance with specified standards. c. Review test reports for compliance with specified criteria. d. Recommend and administer required retesting. E. Monitor contractor's periodic cleaning. 1. Enforce compliance with specifications. 2. Resolve any conflicts. F. Coordinate changes. 1. Recommend necessary or desirable changes. 2. Assist owner in negotiating change orders. 3. Promptly notify all subcontractors of pending changes. G. Maintain Reports and Records at Job Site available to Architect and Subcontractors. 1. Log progress of work of each subcontractor. 2. Records a. Contracts. b. Purchase orders.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 3 SECTION 01041 PROJECT COORDINATION c. Materials and equipment records. d. Applicable handbooks, codes and standards. 3. Obtain information from subcontractors and maintain file of Project Record Documents. 4. Assemble documentation for handling of claims and disputes. H. Coordinate work of this Contract and requirements of this section with work by Separate

Contract including but not limited to: 1. Removal of asbestos containing materials by separate contract. 1.04 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT A. Coordinate equipment start-up. 1. Provide seven days notification prior to start-up of each item. 2. Ensure that each piece of equipment or system is ready for operation. 3. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible persons in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. 4. Perform required testing and balancing. 5. Record dates of start of operation of systems and equipment. Submit written report that

equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 6. Provide written notice of beginning of warranty period for equipment put into service. B. Demonstration and Instructions 1. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks

prior to Substantial Completion. 2. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing,

maintenance, seasonal operation, and shutdown of each item of equipment. C. At completion of work of each Section, conduct an inspection to assure that 1. Specified cleaning has been accomplished. 2. Temporary facilities have been removed from site. D. At completion 1. Conduct an inspection to list work to be completed or corrected. 2. Supervise correction and completion of work as established in Certificate of Completion. E. When a portion of the Project is occupied prior to final completion, coordinate established

responsibilities of each subcontractor. F. Final completion. 1. When each Subcontractor determines that work is finally complete, conduct an

inspection to verify completion of work. 2. Assist owner and architect in inspection. G. Administer contract closeout. 1. Receive and review Subcontractor's final submittals. 2. Transmit to architect with recommendation for action.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: This section establishes general requirements in addition to those indicated in

the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction pertaining to cutting, fitting, and patching of the work required to:

1. Make the several parts fit properly. 2. Uncover work to provide for installation, inspection, or both, of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Patch new construction into existing construction. B. Related Work: 1. In addition to requirements specified, upon the Consultant's request, uncover work to

provide for inspection of covered work, and remove samples of installed materials for testing.

2. Do not cut or alter work performed under separate contract without the Consultant's written permission.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform all cutting and patching in strict accordance with pertinent requirements of the

Specifications and, in the event no such requirements are determined, in conformance with the Consultant's written direction.

1. Use skilled workmen to perform all cutting and patching work. 2. Use methods least likely to damage existing surfaces and materials to remain, while

providing proper surfaces to receive installation of repair, patching, and/or new work. B. Visual Quality: 1. Do not cut and patch work exposed to public view, and the exterior and/or interior of the

building in a manner that will result in an unacceptable appearance as determined by the Consultant.

2. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that will result in obvious appearance that cutting and patching work was done.

3. When cutting existing structural concrete, do not extend saw cuts beyond the corners of the required opening on either side of the opening.

1.03 EXISTING CONSTRUCTION

A. Where cutting and patching of existing construction is required; prior to start of work, inform Owner of existing construction to be disturbed. Owner will determine if elements of existing construction contain asbestos. Do not proceed with work until after Owner has examined areas to be disturbed.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposed cutting and patching procedures in writing for the following categories of work

prior to proceeding with this work:


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1. Cutting new openings in existing structural concrete walls, parapets, and suspended

slabs. 2. Cutting new openings in existing roofs and roofing materials. B. Submittals shall comply with Section 01300. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated in pertinent sections of these specifications, or as directed by the

Consultant, use materials which are identical to existing materials in workmanship, appearance, and performance.

B. If identical materials are not available, match existing as closely as possible, especially existing

visual characteristics. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Before proceeding, inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or

damage during cutting, excavating, backfilling, and patching. B. After uncovering the work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new work. C. If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated or if existing construction is not as indicated on the

Drawings, immediately notify the Consultant for further instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide shoring, bracing, and support as required to maintain structured integrity of the project. B. Take all necessary action required to protect adjacent existing surfaces from damage due to the

work of this section. C. Take all precautions necessary to protect existing surfaces and materials, new work, and the

work of this section from damage due to adverse weather conditions. D. Provide temporary support of work to cut and adjacent work to prevent failure or damage due to

the work of this section. E. Properly prepare substrate surfaces exposed during cutting as required to receive the work of

this or other sections of these specifications in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 3 SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.03 EXECUTION A. Perform all required cutting and patching as required or reasonably implied under pertinent

sections of these specifications.

B. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and will provide proper finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes.

3.04 PERFORMANCE A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will

provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new work. Saw-cut and otherwise isolate areas to be demolished.

B. Repair or otherwise rebuild and/or construct all surfaces affected by cutting and demolition.

Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide totally finished installation to comply with tolerances, finishes, and profiles of adjacent surfaces, whether new or existing.

C. Restore work which has been cut or exposed by demolition; install new construction in

compliance with specifications for type of new work to be done or as required to match existing adjacent surfaces. In no case shall any exposed existing surface be left in a raw, marred, or unfinished surface.

D. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish. 1. Continuous Surfaces: To nearest intersections. 2. Assembly: Entire refinishing.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other Division

1 - Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. General administrative requirements and procedures and related applicable codes. 1.03 APPROVAL AND RECOMMENDATION AGENCIES: A. The University of Colorado at Colorado Springs has jurisdiction for the interpretation and

enforcement of code requirements for construction of projects. 1.04 CODES: A. All Contractors shall comply with all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations in

effect at the time of bid openings.

APPROVED STATE BUILDING CODES (updated July 2008) The following approved building codes and standards have been adopted by State Buildings Programs (SBP) as the minimum requirements to be applied to all state-owned buildings and physical facilities including capital construction and controlled maintenance construction projects. The 2006 edition of the International Building Code (IBC) (as adopted by the Colorado State Buildings Program as follows: Chapters 2-35 and Appendices C and I) The 2006 edition of the International Mechanical Code (IMC) (as adopted by the Colorado State Buildings Program as follows: Chapters 2-15 and Appendix A) The 2006 edition of the International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) (as adopted by the Colorado State Buildings Program) The 2008 edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) (National Fire Protection Association Standard 70) (as adopted by the Colorado State Electrical Board) The 2006 edition of the International Plumbing Code (IPC) (as adopted by the Colorado Examining Board of Plumbers as follows: Chapter 1 Section 101.2,102, Chapters 2-13 and Appendices B, D, E, F and G) The 2006 edition of the International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) (as adopted by the Colorado Examining Board of Plumbers as follows: Chapter 1 Section 101,102, Chapters 2-8 and Appendices A, B, C and D) The National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) (as adopted by the Department of Public Safety/Division of Fire Safety as follows with editions shown in parentheses: NFPA-1 (2006), 11 (2005), 12 (2005), 12A (2004), 13 (2002), 13D (2002), 13R (2002), 14 (2003), 15 (2001), 16 (2003), 17 (2002), 17A (2002), 20 (2003), 22 (2003), 24 (2002), 25 (2002), 72 (2002), 409 (2004), 423 (2004), 750 (2003) and 2001 (2004))


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

The 2004 edition of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (as adopted by the Department of Labor and Employment/Boiler Inspection Section as follows: sections I, IV, VIII-Divisions 1 and 2 and 3, X and B31.1) The 2004 edition of the National Boiler Inspection Code (NBIC) (as adopted by the Department of Labor and Employment/Boiler Inspection Section) The 2004 edition of the Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers CSD-1 (as adopted by the Department of Labor and Employment/Boiler Inspection Section) The 2004 edition of the Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazards Code, NFPA 85 (as adopted by the Department of Labor and Employment/Boiler Inspection Section) The 2000 edition of ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators (as adopted by the Department of Labor and Employment/Conveyance Section) The 2002 edition of ASME A17.3 Safety Code for Existing Elevators and Escalators (as adopted by the Department of Labor and Employment/Conveyance Section) The 2003 edition of ASME A18.1 Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chairlifts (as adopted by the Department of Labor and Employment/Conveyance Section) The current edition of the Rules and Regulations Governing the Sanitation of Food Service Establishments (as adopted by the Department of Public Health and Environment/Colorado State Board of Health) The 2003 edition of ICC/ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities (as adopted by the Colorado General Assembly as follows: CRS 9-5-101, as amended, for accessible housing) Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). In case of a conflict between references applicable codes, the one having the more stringent requirements shall govern. Where governing codes indicate that the drawings or specifications do not comply with the minimum requirements of the codes, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing an installation, which will comply with code requirements. Drawings and specifications shall be followed where they are superior to code requirements. Note: Additional codes, standards and appendices may be adopted by the state agencies and institutions in addition to the minimum codes and standards herein adopted by State Buildings Programs.

1. The 2006 edition of the IBC became effective on July 1 of 2007. Consult the state

electrical and plumbing boards and the state boiler inspector and conveyance administrator and the Division of Fire Safety for adoption of current editions and amendments to their codes.

2. Projects should be designed and plans and specifications should be reviewed based upon the approved codes at the time of A/E contract execution. If an agency prefers to design to a different code such as a newer edition of a code that State Buildings Programs has not yet adopted, the agency must contact SBP for approval and then amend the A/E contract with a revised Exhibit D, Approved State Building Codes. Please


note that the state plumbing and electrical boards enforce the editions of their codes that are in effect at the time of permitting not design.


3. The state’s code review agents, or the State Buildings Programs approved agency building official, shall review all documents for compliance with the codes stipulated herein. Note: The Department of Public Health and Environment, Division of Consumer Protection will review drawings for food service related projects.

4. This policy does not prohibit the application of various life safety codes as established by

each agency for specific building types and funding requirements. NFPA 101 and other standards notwithstanding, approved codes will supersede where their minimum requirements are the most restrictive in specific situations. If a conflict arises, contact State Buildings Programs for resolution.

5. It is anticipated that compliance with the federal Americans with Disabilities Act

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) and Colorado Revised Statutes Section 9-5-101 will be met by compliance with the 2006 International Building Code and ICC/ANSI A117.1. However, each project may have unique aspects that may require individual attention to these legislated mandates.

6. The 2003 edition of the International Building Code (IBC) is to be applied to factory-built

nonresidential structures as established by the Division of Housing within the Department of Local Affairs.

A. Appendices Appendices are provided to supplement the basic provisions of the codes. Approved IBC

Appendices are as follows:

1. Mandatory IBC Appendix Chapter C - Agricultural Buildings IBC Appendix Chapter I - Patio Covers 2. Optional

Any non-mandatory appendix published in the International Building Code may be utilized at the discretion of the agency. Use of an appendix shall be indicated in the project code approach.

B. Amendments

None C. Referenced Codes

1. While not adopted in entirety, portions of the following codes are referenced in the International Building Code (IBC), the International Mechanical Code (IMC), the International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) the International Plumbing Code (IPC), and the International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC). These following codes would be applied as reference standards.

2006 International Fire Code (IFC) 2006 International Existing Building Code (IEBC)


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 4

SECTION 01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

D. Referenced Standards

The IBC, IMC, IECC, IPC and IFGC standards shall be utilized to provide specific, or prescriptive, requirements on how to achieve the requirements established in the code. These standards may be unique to the code or may be derived from other established industry standards. Recognized standards may also be used to show compliance with the standard of duty established by the code.

Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). In case of a conflict between references applicable codes, the one having the more stringent requirements shall govern. Where governing codes indicate that the drawings or specifications do not comply with the minimum requirements of the codes, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing an installation, which will comply with code requirements. Drawings and specifications shall be followed where they are superior to code requirements.

1.05 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA): A. The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for compliance on the job site to all applicable

portions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act. The Contractor is responsible for other regulatory requirements as they relate to occupational Health and Safety requirements. For example, NIOSH, ANSI, and MSA.

B. Protection of life, health and public welfare as it relates to the execution of the construction

contract is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Owner’s Representative may, at their discretion, observe, inspect, or comment on plans, procedures, or actions employed at the project as they relate to safety of life, health or public welfare. If conditions are imposed by the Owner which interfere with, or imply actions detrimental to safety, written notice shall be returned to the Owner for action prior to affecting any unsafe conditions.

C. Contractors shall use OSHA Lock Out/Tag Out procedures when working with energized

equipment.

D. All contractors entering confined spaces owned by CU or while conducting work under contract with CU shall develop a written program and utilize procedures that, at a minimum, comply with all federal, state and local confined space standards and all applicable regulatory requirements. Contractors shall, independent of the University, monitor the space to obtain their own data to ensure a safe entry and exit. Any data generated by a contractor’s confined space entry, should be provided to the Facilities Management confined Space Program Manager.

E. When contractors perform work that may involve Facilities Management controlled permit

required confined spaces, Facilities Management will: 1. Inform contractors of permit required confined spaces and that entry is allowed only after

compliance with the confined space entry standard; 2. Require contractors planning to enter a confined space to provide the Facilities

Management Confined Space Program Manager in charge of that space, 48-hour advance notice of such planned entry. The contractors entry will be in accordance with the current Occupational Safety and Health Administration confined space entry standard and a signed document stating such, shall be provided to the FM Confined Space Program Manager prior to entry.

F. The FM Confined Space Program Manager, following receipt of notice of contractor planned

entry, will:


1. Apprise contractor of the hazards identified in the confined space and of any prior experience that is documented on the space;


2. Appraise the contractor of any precautions or procedures that CU has implemented for the protection of workers in or near the confined space;

3. Coordinate entry operations with the contractor when both Facilities Management and

contractor personnel are working in or around the confined space; 4. Debrief the contractor at the end of the entry operations regarding hazards

confronted or created. 1.06 HOT WORK PERMITS A. All contractors shall be required to obtained a Hot Work Permit, three (3) working days in

advance, for work that involves welding, heat treating, grinding, thawing pipe, hot riveting, soldering and brazing, power driven fasteners and similar activities involving spark, flame or heat. Compliance with the requirements of the applicable fire code, the International Building Code, and NFPA Standard 51B are mandatory and all contractors performing hot work activities shall read and understand these code requirements. To obtain a current Hot Work Permit, go to website:

http://fm.colorado.edu/firesafety/hotwork.html B. Contractors shall read and comply with the procedures and requirements for Fire Watch, Fire

Alarm Interruption and Fire Suppression Interruption as found on the following websites: Fire Watch Procedures: http://fm.colorado.edu/firesafety/firewatch.html Fire Alarm and Detection System Interruption/Outage: http://fm.colorado.edu/firesafety/firealarmdetectsys.html Fire Suppression System Interruption/Outage:

http://fm.colorado.edu/firesafety/firesupressionsystems.html C. No hot work shall be conducted in any campus facility without a hot work permit. Any person or

firm who conducts hot work without a permit shall be fined one thousand dollars ($1,000) for each occurrence and their non-permitted activities shall be stopped immediately until they obtain a hot work permit. Contractor shall be responsible for any damages caused as a result of improper hot work activities or the work stoppage.

D. Individuals or firms who obtain a permit shall fully read, understand and implement the

requirements of the permit. Any person or firm who conducts hot work without the full implementation of the permit requirements shall be fined five hundred dollars ($500) the first time and one thousand dollars ($1,000) for subsequent occurrences. When the requirements of the hot work permit are not being implemented, the improper activities shall be stopped immediately until a hot work permit is obtained. Contractor shall be responsible for any damages caused as a result of improper hot work activities or the work stoppage. Any contractor who is found to be in non-compliance a third time, will not be allowed to work on campus until further notice by Facilities Management.

E. The campus inspectors, project managers and fire marshal shall have the authority to stop

improper or non-permitted hot work activities. F. The Contractor shall notify the CU Fire Alarm Supervisor to deactivate all smoke alarms in the

vicinity of the work prior to any demolition and construction work activity. Failure of the

http://fm.colorado.edu/firesafety/hotwork.html

http://fm.colorado.edu/firesafety/firewatch.html

http://fm.colorado.edu/firesafety/firealarmdetectsys.html

http://fm.colorado.edu/firesafety/firesupressionsystems.html


Contractor to comply with the smoke alarm deactivation requirement and cause a false alarm and arrival of the Boulder Fire Department shall be a $400 fine per occurrence.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 7 SECTION 01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.07 PERMITS A. The contractor must post permit(s) in a prominent location at the jobsite including all inspection

reports. The contractor shall have an updated set of contract documents available at the jobsite for all inspections.

1.08 INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor must schedule all required inspections 48 hours in advance by calling UCCS Project Manager or directly contacting their designated inspectors. Inspectors will complete these inspections within 48 hours with the exception of weekends and state holidays.

B. The contractor is required to arrange for the all inspections as required by the Building Inspection

Record and CRS 24-30-1303 including but limited to Footings/Foundations, Concrete, Framing, Lath and Gypsum Board, Fire Resistant Penetrations, Mechanical/Energy Efficiency and Roofing.

C. Re-inspections: A re-inspection fee may be assessed for each inspection or reinspection when such portion of work for which inspection is called is not complete or when corrections called for are not made.

D. The Contractor will be responsible for all cost related to re-inspections and will be billed at the

testing agency bill-out rate for re-inspections. 1.09 UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO SEXUAL HARASSMENT POLICY

A. Contractors should be aware of and review the University of Colorado at Colorado Springs policies that prohibit discrimination and harassment on the basis of race, color, national origin, sex, age, disability, creed, religion, sexual orientation or veteran status. These policies are located on the web at: http://www.uccs.edu/hr. Contractor personnel must adhere to these policies and conduct themselves in a manner that does not discriminate or harass as a result of interacting with an around the University of Colorado faculty, staff and students and visitors.

1.10 FIRE ALARM INTERRUPTION A. Contractor shall contact UCCS Fire Alarm Systems Supervisor at 719-262-3201 prior to all

interruptions or shutdowns of fire alarm systems. Interruptions or shutdowns shall be scheduled three (3) working days in advance with UCCS Department of Public Safety and UCCS Project Manager. Contractor shall provide a fire watch as directed by UCCS Fire Alarm Systems Shop during interruption or shutdown.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing nuisance alarm due to activities at their work

site. Common sources of nuisance alarms are: 1. Smoke (soldering, welding, cooking, etc.) 2. Grinding 3. Dust (drilling, sweeping, canister vacuums, sand blasting, etc.) 4. Water leaking (plumbing leaks, overflows) 5. Water sprayed on or near detectors (pressure washing or cleaning with water) 6. Popcorn or other food burning in microwaves 7. Static electricity (covering or uncovering detectors) 8. Changing filters on air handling units (dust) 9. Steam (leaks, pressure pop-offs) 10. Broken or frozen sprinkler heads 11. Sprinkler drain valves turned by mistake 12. Vandalism



Precautions to prevent nuisance alarms are:

1. During construction projects, treat all buildings, except totally new construction, as though they were occupied buildings with live systems.

2. Do not assume that all detectors are in plain sight. Contact University personnel for verification.

3. Maintain dust control measures per UCCS Standards: a. Maintaining barriers b. Covering air returns c. Asking UCCS personnel to cap or disable smoke detectors (Note any capping or

disabling of fire safety devices is to be done ONLY by UCCS personnel, not contractors.)

d. Avoiding recirculation of dust or smoke through the building air handling system. 4. Follow campus hot work procedures. Refer to specification Section 01060, paragraph

1.06. 3. Do not expose fire alarm devices to water or extreme temperatures. 4. Contact Alarm Systems Supervisor for any actions that affect fire detection, alarm, and

suppression systems.

1.11 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT PLAN (SWMP) A. Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP): Prior to any construction activity disturbing one acre of

land or more, an approved SWMP and a Stormwater Permit for Construction Activity application from the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE) are required. The SWMP shall be prepared in accordance with the CDPHE requirements for “Contents of the Stormwater Management Plan” and the UDFCD’s Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, Volume 3, “Best Management Practices” (UDFCD Drainage Criteria Manual). Stormwater quality management and erosion control measures are to be constructed and maintained in accordance with the SWMP and the UDFCD Drainage Criteria Manual.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01075 SPECIFICATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Specification system format. 2. Grammar (syntax) description. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. These specifications have been derived from automated specification systems, and include minor

deviations from format and traditional writing forms. Such deviations must be recognized as a normal result of this production technique, and no other meaning will be implied or permitted.

B. Imperative language of the technical sections is directed to the Contractor. The term "provide"

used repeatedly in the text is defined to mean..."furnish and install, complete, in place and ready for operation and use unless specifically indicated otherwise."

C. Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined type and include incomplete

sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall" "in conformity therewith," "shall be," "as noted on the Drawings", "A", "The", are intentional. Supply omitted words or phrases by inference in same manner as they are when "Note" occurs on Drawings. Supply words "on the Drawings" by inference when "as indicated" is used with sentences or phrases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01100 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Remodel Work scheduling. 2. Construction sequence scheduling. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. An essential condition of this Contract shall be the scheduling and conduct of all phases of

construction operations in such a manner that the Owner's operations and use of the existing buildings and campus shall be uninterrupted at all times, except for such limited interruption as is required and approved by the owner.

B. Contractor shall repair at his own expense all damage done to Owner's property, unknown

utilities and adjoining public property as a result of Contractor's construction activities. 1.03 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Access and use of site: 1. Contractor shall use the designated site access for construction offices and material

storage in such a manner that access to existing buildings and campus remain accessible at all times for use.

2. Confine operations to as limited a use of the existing building and campus as possible. A route of access to and from the work for employees shall be agreed upon and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that the agreed route is maintained in order to prevent unwarranted or unnecessary traffic through the existing buildings or site.

B. Owner notice and approval: 1. All arrangements and scheduling in connection with the work of this Contract shall be

made with and subject to the approval of the Consultant and the Owner. 2. All work under this Contract which will require interruption of service of the existing

building shall be scheduled to suit the need and convenience of the Owner's operation, and arrangements shall be made with the Owner and the Architect at least eight (8) working days in advance of the start of such work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REMODELING A. Construction activities of all areas to be constructed in existing facilities shall be completely

separated from the rest of the building by dust-proof enclosures erected by Contractor.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01100 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES B. All surfaces in existing facilities not indicated to be remodeled, or removal of existing items by

any Contractor, shall be repaired by the responsible Contractor to match existing adjoining similar surfaces.

3.02 CLEAN-UP A. All areas within existing facilities, which are not within enclosed areas to be constructed used for

access to work areas shall be completely cleaned of all debris and made "broom-clean" at the end of each day's work.

B. Dust, which permeates areas of existing facilities because of improperly constructed dust-proof

barriers, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall employ the services of a professional cleaning company to clean any area outside of the designated construction dust barriers that are contaminated by Contractor’s operations. Completely clean all such areas to the satisfaction of the Owner at no additional cost.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01121 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 - Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. General administrative requirements and procedures for Hazardous Communication

Program. B. Related Sections: 1. Summary of Work: Section 01010. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER: A. Asbestos: 1. Where asbestos materials or other hazardous conditions are known to exist in locations

affected by this project, remediation measures will be taken by the Owner under separate contract. The Contractor shall coordinate his sequence and schedule with that of the environmental remediation work.

2. In the event that the Contractor encounters any material on the site which is reasonably believed hazardous, which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall:

a. Stop work immediately in affected areas. b. Report the condition in writing to the Department of Facilities Services Project

Manager. c. Report the condition in writing to the Architect. d. Resume work only under the provisions of this section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): 1. Copies of all material safety data sheets for all applicable products, including but not

limited to; paint, adhesives, mastics, solvents, and finishes, etc., shall be retained on site by the Contractor for all applicable products used during the construction and/or remodeling work. Furnish copies of all MSDS’s to the Owner and Architect and include in the Project Record Document submittal.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Asbestos containing materials may exist within the general project area where such materials are

not expected to be disturbed during the work. The Contractor shall review the Environmental Health and Safety Environmental Site Assessment Form at the project site and become familiar with known asbestos and hazardous containing materials in the work areas.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01121 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS: A. Hazard Communication Requirements: 1. All Contractors are responsible for compliance with mandatory federal rules and

regulations concerning Hazard Communication, including, but not limited to those regulations contained in 29 CFR 1910.1200 Hazard Communication, 1910.146 Confined Space, 1910.147 Lock-out Tag-out, 1910.1101 Asbestos, and 1926.62 Lead. Contractor and all subcontractors working at sites under the control of the Owner shall make available to the Architect, upon request, copies of the Hazard Communication Program used by their firm. In addition to this requirement, all regulations related to Multi-employer workplaces shall be adhered to. These regulations are found in 29 CFR 1910.1200, (e) (2) (I) through (e) (4) specifically:

(e) (2) Multi-employer workplaces. Employers who produce, use, or store hazardous chemicals at workplace in such a way that employees of other employer(s) may be exposed (for example, employees of a construction contractor working on site) shall additionally ensure that the hazard communication programs developed and implemented under paragraph (e) include the following:

(e) (2) (i) The methods the employer will use to provide the other employer(s) with a copy of the material safety data sheet, or to make it available at a central location in the workplace, for each hazardous chemical the other employer(s)’ employees may be exposed to while working;

(e) (2) (ii) The methods the employer will use to inform the other employer(s) of any precautionary measures that need to be taken to protect employees during the workplace’s normal operating conditions and in foreseeable emergencies; and,

(e) (2) (iii) The methods the employer will use to inform the other employer(s) of the labeling system used in the workplace (e) (3) The employer may rely on an existing hazard communication program to comply with these requirements, provided that it meets the criteria established in this paragraph (e). (e) (4) The employer shall make the written hazard communication program available, upon request, to employees, their designated representatives, the Assistant Secretary and the Director, in accordance with requirements of 29 CFR 1910.20 (e).

2. The referenced regulations were excerpted from 29 CFR 1910.1200. This excerpt shall not be relied upon for compliance with mandatory federal, state and local regulations. The Contractor shall comply with all such regulations and shall be solely liable for insuring that all requirements under applicable regulations are met.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Asbestos and Hazardous Materials Discovery: 1. The Contractor is cautioned to be alert to the possibility that his work may uncover

asbestos- containing or hazardous materials. If suspected materials are found, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and stop all work in the area immediately. If the


suspected materials prove to contain asbestos or hazardous materials, the Owner will arrange to have the materials abated in a timely manner.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 3 SECTION 01121 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES 3.02 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS/EQUIPMENT REMOVAL: A. Definition: 1. Removal of hazardous materials/equipment is extremely dangerous. Hazardous

materials/equipment is defined to include, but not limited to the following: a. Fume hoods

b. Hood exhaust duct work c. Exhaust fans d. Laboratory casework and equipment e. PCB ballast’s f. Mercury and Sodium Vapor Lights g. Adjacent material that could come in contact with workers or public.

B. Protection:

1. Hazardous materials/equipment removal shall include the protection of personnel,

material, environment and safe legal disposal of the equipment; and further includes the following: a. Notification of Project Administrator and appropriate Environmental Health and

Safety Unit b. Proper protective clothing for personnel involved in the removal. c. Appropriate emergency and first aid facilities. d. Removal procedures shall be accomplished during minimal occupancy of the

remainder of the building on the weekends or at night. C. Disposal:

1. All equipment related to the use, storage or processing of hazardous materials/equipment shall be removed and properly disposed of under the direct, full-time supervision of a qualified Laboratory Specialist fully conversant with the chemistry and properties of the material/equipment involved. Certification is required. Contractors are responsible for the removal of all hazardous materials/equipment and chemicals from the work site as well as proper disposal of all hazardous waste generated by their project.

2. Hazardous chemicals, waste, and other pollutants may not be discharged to the sanitary

or storm sewer systems at anytime. Releases to the environment must be reported to CUPD/EH&S immediately.

3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Environmental and Safety Issues and Practices.

Contractors working on the UCCS campus are required to comply with all applicable University, City, State and Federal environmental regulations and safety standards. Hazardous and regulated materials must be managed and disposed of properly. Work sites must control dust, debris and run-off, and pay special attention to preventing any pollutants from entering the storm sewer or surface water collection systems. These systems ultimately drain into our creeks and waterways.

B. Contractor will be required to sign an Environmental Responsibilities form. The contractor is

responsible for notifying all subcontractors of the responsibilities identified on the form. A copy of


this form must be posted, throughout the duration of the project, in a visible area for all workers to see.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE1 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. The types and minimum requirements for project meetings are included but are not necessarily

limited to the following categories: Pre-construction meeting Progress and Coordination meetings Specially called meetings B. The pre-construction meeting will be scheduled within fifteen days after date of Notice to

Proceed, at a central site location designated by the Owner and convenient for all parties. 1. Attendance: a. Owner's Representative b. Consultant and his sub-consultants, as applicable c. Contractor's Superintendent d. Major Subcontractor(s) e. Others as appropriate 2. Suggested Agenda: a. Distribution and discussion of: List of major subcontractors and suppliers Projected construction schedules Critical work sequencing Major equipment deliveries and priorities Project Coordination Designation of responsible personnel b. Procedures and processing of: Field decisions Proposal requests Submittals Change Orders Applications for Payment c. Adequacy of Distribution of Contract Documents d. Procedure for Maintaining Record Documents e. Inspections f. Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP) C. The Architect/Engineer will: Record the minutes; including significant proceedings and decisions. D. The Contractor shall schedule and administer subcontractor and vendor pre-construction

meetings throughout progress of the work. He will: 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meeting. 5. Record the minutes; including significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Representatives of Contractors, Subcontractors, and Suppliers attending meetings shall

be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 7. Use of Premises: Office, work, staging and storage areas Owner's requirements 8. Temporary construction Facilities, Utilities, Controls and Construction Aids 9. Safety, First-aid, Security and Housekeeping Procedures 10. Administrative Procedures and Documents as Required by Owner 1.02 PROGRESS AND COORDINATION MEETING The Contractor will schedule and administer job progress and coordination meeting at the site. A. Attendance: 1. Owner as needed 2. Consultant and his sub-consultants as needed 3. Subcontractor as appropriate to the agenda 4. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda 5. Others B. Suggested Agenda: 1. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 2. Field observations, problems and conflicts. 3. Problems which impede Construction Schedule. 4. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 5. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 6. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 7. Coordination of schedules. 8. Progress and schedule during succeeding work period. 9. Review submittal schedules and expedite as required. 10. Maintenance of quality standards. 11. Pending changes and substitutions. 12. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project.

B. The Contractor or CM/GC shall record and distribute the minutes of all progress meetings throughout the construction period.

C. The Architect/Engineer shall visit the site a minimum of once every two weeks. The Architect/Engineer shall average one site visit per week during construction.

D. The structural engineer shall visit the site immediately prior to every major structural concrete

slab pour; every major foundation wall pour; at least twice for each major segment of work [i.e., caissons, columns, steel roof joists, etc].

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples as required by various sections of the specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Shop Drawings: 1. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner. 2. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet, detail, schedule, or room numbers

shown on drawings. B. Product Data: 1. Preparation: a. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models. b. Show performance characteristics and capabilities. c. Show dimensions and clearances required. d. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 2. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams. a. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information that is not applicable to the

work. b. Supplement Standard information to provide information specifically applicable

to the work. C. Samples: 1. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: a. Functional characteristics of the product with integrally related parts and

attachment devices. b. Full range of color, texture and pattern D. Mock-ups: 1. Provide complete mock-up of exterior materials to be incorporated into the work. a. Mock-up shall include a sample of all materials used in exterior construction,

whether specified elsewhere or not in these documents, including but not limited to, masonry, stone, window systems, precast concrete, roof systems, flashing, sealants, masonry paving, paint and other readily visible materials.

b. Secure Owner approval of mock-ups prior to ordering and placement of materials. Modify mock-ups as directed by the Architect or Owner until acceptable.

c. Confirm exact mock-up(s) required by Owner prior to fabrication of mock-up(s). 2. Remove mock-up at the conclusion of the project or when directed by the Architect. a. Restore or finish site to finish condition indicated on the Drawings. E. Responsibilities of the Contractor: 1. Review shop drawings, product data, samples and project record drawings for

specification performance prior to submission.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 2. Determine and Verify: a. Field measurements b. Field construction criteria c. Catalog numbers and similar data d. Conformance with specifications 3. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. 4. Notify the Consultant in writing, at the time of submission, of any deviations in the

submittals for requirements of the Contract Documents. 5. Begin no fabrication or work that requires submittals until return of submittals with

Consultant's acceptance. 6. Contractor’s responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract

Documents is not relieved by Consultant’s review of submittals. 7. Contractor shall stamp, sign or initial, and date each submittal to show compliance with

the Contract Documents prior to submittal to the Consultant. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule and in such sequence as to

cause no delay in the work. B. Number of Submittals Required: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit five opaque reproductions. Three copies will be retained by the

Consultant. 2. Product Data: Submit seven copies, three of which will be retained by the Consultant. 3. Samples: Submit the number stated in each specification section. C. Submittals shall contain: 1. Date of the submission and dates of any previous submissions. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contract identifications. 4. Names of: a. Contractor and Subcontractor(s), if applicable. b. Supplier c. Manufacturer 5. Identification of product with the specification section number. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 11. An 8"x3" blank space in lower right-hand corner for review stamps. D. Resubmission Requirements: 1. Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Consultant and

resubmit until accepted. 2. Shop drawings and product data: a. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for initial submittal.


b. Indicate any changes that have been made, other than those requested by the Consultant.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS _DIVISION 1 - PAGE 3 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 3. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. E. Distribution: 1. Distribute reproductions of approved shop drawings and copies of product data to

affected subcontractors and retain one copy for use at the job-site. 2. Distribute approved samples as directed. F. Consultant's Duties: 1. Review submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with schedule. 2. Review of separate item does not constitute review of an assembly in which item

functions. 3. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal or

acceptance of submittal. 4. Return submittals to the Contractor for distribution or for resubmission. G. Schedule of Values and pay applications: 1. Submit typed schedule on State Form SC7.2; Contractor's standard form or media-driven

printout will be considered on request. 2. Format: Table of Contents of this Project Manual.

3. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.

H. Schedule of Submittals: The Contractor shall submit the submittals required by the

specifications. The Contractor shall develop a submittal schedule that confirms the submittals and the time frame for review by the consultants.

I. Construction Schedule: 1. The Contractor shall submit a critical-path method (CPM) construction schedule prior to

start of construction activities. The CPM schedule shall include notice to proceed, submittal activities, construction activities, change order work (when applicable), close-out, testing, demonstration, and acceptance. The CPM shall correlate specifically to the schedule of values line items and be cost loaded.

Float, slack time, or contingency within the schedule (i.e., the difference in time between the project's early completion date and the required contract completion date), and total float within the overall schedule, is not for the exclusive use of either the principal representative or the Contractor, but is jointly owned by both and is a resource available to and shared by both parties as needed to meet contract milestones and the contract completion date. The Contractor will be required to submit an as-built progress CPM schedule with each progress billing. This CPM schedule will be the basis for making progress payments. The level of detail and quantity of work activities in the CPM schedule should be negotiated with the principal representative prior to starting construction.

J. Progress Photos 1. The Contractor shall submit up to 12 - 3x4 inch progress photos with each progress

payment. The photos should demonstrate the work in place and be dated with a short description of the photographed item.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS _DIVISION 1 - PAGE 4 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES K. Coordination Drawings: 1. The Contractor shall submit coordination drawings with all mechanical, electrical, fire

protection, and building monitoring systems prior to the Consultant review of any shop drawings or submittals for work in those trades. Approval of required shops and submittals must be obtained prior to starting work, and must be obtained prior to approval of pay applications of the work. The drawings shall be created to include all trades on a particular level of the building on one drawing. Identify conflicts between the systems or between the systems and architectural elements such as ceiling heights, ceiling types, or walls. Conduit routing for electrical, mechanical, energy management system, and security trades shall be included. Identify potential solutions to the conflicts for the Consultant and Owner to review during the submittal process. Revise the coordination drawings to show any comments made during the submittal review process, and reissue for use by all affected trades, Owner and Consultant.

2. The Coordination drawings shall include sectional coordination documents. Identify elevations of systems A.F.F. (above finish floor) and component dimensions. Show elevations whenever component changes height.

L. Request for Information (RFI): 1. The Contractor will be responsible for submitting RFIs on AIA form G716 or similar. The

RFI should identify in writing any unclear, inconsistent, or conflicting item in the documents that could not be answered by thorough review by the Contractor or subcontractors. The RFI should include a description of the item and a proposed solution. The RFI should indicate schedule or cost impact, if any. Contractor shall be required to submit cost or schedule impact within seven days of receipt of the RFI response. Each RFI shall be numbered in sequence.

M. Weekly Logs: 1. The Contractor shall provide an updated RFI, change request, and submittal logs at

weekly construction meetings. Contractor shall provide a 2-week detailed construction schedule at the weekly construction meeting.

PART 2 - MATERIALS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS _DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTAL TESTING

If required, the following testing shall be performed at the expense of the contractor installing the material being tested:

A. Material Substitution: Any tests of basic material or fabrication equipment offered as a substitute for specified item on which a test may be required in order to prove its compliance with the specifications.

B. Mechanical/Electrical: Tests on mechanical and electrical systems required to insure their proper

installation and operation. C. Any test that fails shall be paid for by the installing contractor subject to the following conditions: 1. Quantity and nature of tests will be determined by the Consultant. 2. All test shall be done in the presence of the Owner or his representative. 3. Proof of noncompliance will make the installing contractor liable for any corrective action

which the Owner feels is prudent including complete removal and replacement of defective material.

Nothing contained herein is intended to imply that the installing contractor does not have the right to have tests performed on any material at any time for his own information and job control so long as the Consultant or Owner does not assume responsibility for costs or for giving them consideration when appraising quality of materials.

D. The Consultant shall determine the type and number of tests to be performed on the project. 1.02 TEST REPORTS

Reports of all tests made by testing laboratories shall distributed by the testing laboratory as follows: 1 copy - Contractor 1 copy - Applicable supplier or subcontractor 1 copy - Owner 1 copy - Consultant Other copies - as directed

1.03 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM A. General: The contractor shall establish a quality control system to perform sufficient inspection

and tests of all items of work, including that of all subcontractors, to ensure conformance to the Contract Documents for materials, workmanship, construction, finish, functional performance and identification. This control shall be established for all construction except where the Contract Documents provide for specific compliance tests by testing laboratories or Consultants employed by the Owner.

The quality control system is the means by which the Contractor assures that construction complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Controls shall be adequate to cover all construction operations and should be keyed to the proposed construction schedule.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL B. The Contractor shall designate a quality control representative on staff to review the work to

insure compliance with the contract documents by weekly jobsite visits for observation. The designated employee shall not be involved in the performance of the work. The quality control representative shall review the work and make necessary corrections to bring the work into compliance prior to scheduling the Architect for the final punchlist review.

C. Records: The Contractor shall maintain correct records on an appropriate form for all inspections

and tests performed, instruction received from the Owner and actions taken as a result of those instructions. These records shall include evidence that the required inspections or tests have been performed (including type and number of inspections or tests, nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.) proposed or directed remedial action, and corrective action taken. The Contractor shall document inspections and tests as required by each Section of the Specifications.

1.04 INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY SERVICES A. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent Testing Agency to perform the

Inspections, special inspections, tests and other services when required by sections of the specification. Services shall be performed in accordance with requirements of governing authorities and with specified standards.

1. Contractor shall cooperate with Testing Agency personnel and shall furnish tools, sample of materials, design mixes, equipment and assistance as requested.

2. Contractor shall provide and maintain, for the sole use of the Testing Agency, adequate facilities for the safe storage and proper curing of concrete testing cylinders on the project site for the first 24 hours after casting as required by ASTM C 31, Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the field.

3. Contractor shall notify Testing Agency sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for completion of initial tests and proper assignment of inspection personnel.

4. Contractor shall notify the testing agency sufficiently in advance of cancellation of required testing operations. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for costs incurred due to the failure to provide such notice.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. This section of the General Requirements outlines the basic requirements for temporary services,

utilities, and facilities which will indirectly enable adequate construction progress and processes, and will accommodate other necessary activities at the project site except as otherwise indicated, the costs of providing and using temporary services are included in the Contract Sum.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing regulations and utility company regulations and recommendations for the

construction of temporary facilities, including but not necessarily limited to, code compliance, permits, inspections, testing, and health and safety compliance.

1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide Temporary facilities and services at the time first needed at the site and maintain,

expand, and modify the facilities as needed throughout the construction period and do not remove until no longer needed.

PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. Use qualified tradesmen for the installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will

serve the total project construction work adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the work. Relocate, modify, and extend facilities as required during the course of the work to properly accommodate the entire work of the project.

2.02 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Temporary Water: Connect to existing water source as designated by the Owner for construction

operations. B. Temporary Telephone: Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of

project mobilization. If a mobile phone is designated as the field office phone then it shall be a local number.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Comply with governing regulations, including safety and health codes for the

type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install sanitary facilities in available locations which will best serve the needs of personnel at the project site. Toilet rooms in existing buildings or in new construction may not be used without written approval of the Owner.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES D. Temporary Heat and Ventilation: Provide such OSHA approved heat and fuel, heating units,

equipment as necessary to provide the required environmental conditions and to protect the work from damage due to cold. Maintain equipment in a clean, safe condition.

E. Sanitary Facilities: Comply with governing regulations, including safety and health codes for the

type, number location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install sanitary facilities in available locations which will best serve the needs of personnel at the project site. Toilet rooms in existing buildings or in new construction may not be used without written approval of the Owner.

F. Fire Extinguisher: 1. Except as otherwise indicated or required, comply with the applicable recommendations

of NFPA No. 10 "Portable Fire Extinguisher" for each area of each construction activity whenever combustible materials, flammable liquids, and similar exposures to possible fires are present.

2. Locate extinguisher where most convenient and effective for the intended purposes. Store combustible materials in recognized fire-safe locations and containers.

G. Protection 1. Barricades, Walkways, Warning Signs, and lights: Comply with recognized standards

and code requirements for the erection of substantial and structurally adequate barricades wherever needed to prevent accidents and losses. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel at the site and the general public where exposure exists of the hazard being protected. Provide lighting where appropriate and needed for the recognition of the facility, safe public passage and include flashing red lights where appropriate.

H. Temporary Enclosure: Wherever required, provide temporary enclosure of materials, equipment,

work in progress, and completed portions of work, so as to afford protection for both the work and employees.

I. Miscellaneous Facilities: 1. Provide ladders, ramps, and temporary stairs for access to all levels of the construction

for general access by all trades, Individual contractors and subcontractors shall furnish their own stepladders, scaffolds, staging, work platforms, and other facilities for use of their workmen and as necessary for safety of all personnel.

J. Field Office: 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain a suitable temporary field office for his own

use. Offices and all other temporary structures shall be removed from the site upon completion of the work.

2. Temporary structures or storage used for storage and offices for contractors shall be located on the site in an orderly manner as determined by the Owner.

2.03 OPERATIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in the use of temporary facilities at the project site. Limit

availability of facilities to essential and intended uses, so as to minimize waste and possibility of abuses and the resulting unsanitary and hazardous or dangerous conditions.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 3 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES B. Maintenance: Operate and maintain temporary facilities in good operating condition through the

time of use and until removal is authorized. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements at the site.

C. Termination and removal: At the time the need has ended for each temporary facility, or when it

has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or at the time of Substantial completion, promptly remove the facility unless requested by the Consultant to be retained for a longer period of time. Complete or restore permanent work which may have been delayed or otherwise affected by the temporary facility. Replace work which cannot be satisfactorily restored. Except as otherwise indicated, the materials and equipment of temporary facilities remain the property of the contractors.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN PART 1 - GENERAL A. Provide labor, equipment, and materials for fabrication of a project sign as specified by the

Project Architect. B. Project sign(s) shall be required for all major renovation and new construction projects. The

location(s) shall be at a point on or adjacent to the worksite where its visibility to the passing public is most apparent.

C. The maximum size of project sign backgrounds shall be 40 sq. ft. In most cases, an 8' x 4'

plywood panel is recommended. For smaller projects, sign backgrounds may be less, but in no case shall be smaller than 16 sq. ft.

PART 2 -- PRODUCT A. Fabricate project sign of three (3) treated 4" x 4" wood posts for 4'-0" x 8'-0" backgrounds or two

(2) treated 4" x 4" wood posts for smaller backgrounds. Posts shall be set in 12" diameter holes at least three (3) feet deep and filled with concrete. Backgrounds shall be at least 3/4" thick exterior A/C plywood, "Duraply" pre-treated surface, sheet metal overlay cemented to background, or other approved surface. Seal edges of plywood with paint. Supporting posts shall receive two coats of exterior grade paint or stain.

B. Design of the sign, including graphics, lettering, and colors, shall be furnished by the Project

Architect and approved by the University. At a minimum, the sign shall include the following information:

1. An artist's conception of the completed building or other facility as envisioned by the Project Architect.

2. Project name in prominent sized lettering. 3. Name of principal occupant or use. 4. Owner's name: "University of Colorado at Colorado Springs." Use approved style

lettering and "UCCS" logo. 5. Under owner's name add: "Project Manager: Department of Facilities Services." 6. Project Architect and Principal Consultants' names. Include city and state of each, and

telephone number of Project Architect. 7. Include "Project Start [date]," and "Project Completion [date]." PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Project sign shall be in place prior to the start of construction, and shall not be removed until the

point of substantial completion. B. Location(s), number(s), size, configuration, and other details of the installation, including height

above grade, shall be furnished and approved by the Project Architect with the approval of the University.

C. An experienced professional sign painter shall be hired and approved by the Project Architect

and the University to prepare the graphics and lettering for the sign. D. If, at the end of the project, the sign is re-usable, it shall be disposed of as directed by the

University.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Products. 2. Transportation and Handling. 3. Storage and Protection. 4. Manufacturer's Instructions. 5. Product Options. 6. Products List. 7. Substitutions. 8. Systems Demonstration. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01400 - Quality Control. 2. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. B. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the

Consultant. C. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: 1. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. 2. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to

unless variations are specifically approved in writing. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict

with work and conditions at the site. B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are

correct, and products are undamaged. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer' instruction, with seals and labels intact and

legible. B. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are

undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's

printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including one copy to the Consultant and one copy to the Contractor.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 – PAGE 2 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT B. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or

installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. 1.06 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those

standards. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:

Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named. C. Consultant will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and notify, by

Addendum, of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution. 1.07 PRODUCT LIST A. Within 15 days after signing of agreement, submit complete list of major products proposed for

use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Will only be considered prior to bid or in the event that Equipment is not available. 1.09 SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION A. Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to Consultant and Owner. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and

systems, using the operation and maintenance data as the basis of instruction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 – PAGE 1 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL INSPECTION

A. The Contractor shall comply with procedures stated in the General Conditions of the Contract for Notice of Completion, Final Inspection, Notice of Substantial Completion and Notice of Acceptance.

B. Should the Architect/Engineer or the Principle Representative determine that the work is not

substantially complete, or the punch list items exceed 25, he will immediately notify the Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. After Contractor completes work, he shall resubmit certification and request for final inspection. The Contractor will be responsible for all costs beyond two Architect/Engineer walk-throughs.

C. Owner may occupy designated portions of the Project under provisions stated in the General

Conditions of the Contract. 1.02 CLOSE-OUT FORMS

The Architect/Engineer will complete the Notice of Approval of Beneficial Occupancy, Closing-out Checklist and Contract Close-out forms and forward them to the Contractor. Comply with procedures stated in General Conditions of the Contract.

1.03 FINAL SETTLEMENT AND PAYMENT A. Contractor shall comply with procedures stated in the General Conditions of the Contract before

final settlement and payment are made. B. The Contractor shall also submit the following prior to the final application for payment: 1. Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debit and Claims: AIA G706. 2. Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens (claims): AIA G706A, with: a. Consent of Surety to final payment: AIA G707 b. Contractor’s release of waivers of claims. c. Separate release of waivers of claims for subcontractors, suppliers and others

with claim rights, against property of owner, together with list of those parties. 1.04 GUARANTEE INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall comply with procedures stated in the General Conditions of the Contract for

Guarantee Inspections after completion of the work. 1.05 WARRANTIES AND SPECIAL GUARANTEES

The Contractor shall comply with procedures and criteria outlined in the General Conditions of the Contract for all warranties and special guarantees of the work.

1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Refer to Section 01730 - Operating and Maintenance.

B. Mechanical - By Mechanical Contractor: See Division 15 ?????


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 – PAGE 2 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT C. Electrical - By Electrical Contractor: See Division 16 1.07 DEMONSTRATIONS A. Refer to Section 01730 - Operating and Maintenance B. Mechanical - By Mechanical Contractor: See Division 15 C. Electrical - By Electrical Contractor: See Division 16. 1.08 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each Section, in addition to that used for construction of work. Coordinate with Owner, deliver to Project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment.

B. At the completion of the project, all loose keys for hose bibs; adjustment keys and wrenches for

door closers and panic hardware; and keys for electric switches, electrical panels, etc., shall be accounted for by the Contractor and turned over to the Owner.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01710 CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CLEANING A. Clean-up During Construction: Each contractor shall keep the building and premises free from all

surplus material, waste material, dirt and rubbish caused by his employees or work, and at the completion of his work he shall remove all such surplus material, waste material, dirt and rubbish, as well as his tools, equipment and scaffolding, and shall leave his work clean and spotless, unless more exact requirements are specified. In case of dispute, the owner may remove all such items and charge the cost of such removal to the contractor.

Each sub-contractor shall perform his clean-up daily and shall transport his rubbish to an on-site location designated by the Contractor who will arrange for its removal.

B. Cleaners: With the exception of clean-up of the site and cleaning specifically assigned to

Contractors under various sections of the specifications, all final clean-up of exterior and interior of the building shall be done by professional cleaners.

C. Final Clean-up: 1. Exterior: In addition to items specified below, any new surfaces on exterior, concrete,

metal, etc., shall be carefully and thoroughly cleaned. 2. Glass: Both sides of all glass in work areas shall be carefully and thoroughly cleaned by

professional window cleaners and left absolutely clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc.

3. Hardware: Clean and polish all hardware and leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc.

4. Plumbing: Clean and polish all plumbing fixtures, fittings, and exposed plated piping. Leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. Remove all labels.

5. Electrical: Clean and polish all electric fixtures, including glassware, switch plates, etc. and leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc.

6 Equipment: Carefully and thoroughly clean all items of equipment, mechanical, electrical, cabinets, ductwork, etc.

7. Floors: Thoroughly clean all floors. Vacuum and clean carpeting. Shampooing of pre-existing carpet is required once project is complete. Contractor is responsible for this.

a. Contractors are responsible for cleaning (stripping floors if necessary) then applying the required two coats of sealer and three coats of finish before releasing the building for occupancy. Facilities Services will provide a contact person for help concerning campus standards free of charge. Or Custodial floor care services may be sub-contracted out through Facilities Services work order system.

b. Facilities Services Approved Sealers and Finishes for Vinyl Tile Flooring:

UCCS requires floor care products to be from the same product line. (Different brands may interact disastrously).


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01710 CLEANING JohnsWax Butchers: Airkeim: Strippers: Freedom Time Buster Air Strip Full Impact Sealers: Over & Under Iron Stone Laser, Gemini Technique Finishes: Show Place MainStay Laser, Gemini Above

Campus safety standards require at least TWO (2) coats of Sealer be applied to a cleaned floor, and at least THREE (3) coats of Finish must be applied on top of the sealer.

c. Floor Cleaning Procedures: 1. Sweep floor clean of debris

2. Cord off area if necessary 3. Put up Caution signs 4. Mix Stripper or Cleaning solution according to label 5. Apply solution to floor 6. Start setting up equipment 7. Place RED abrasive pad on buffer (buffer less than 300 rpms) 8. Begin stripping or cleaning floor working with buffer moving it side to side

across the floor. 9. Use HEPA filtered water vacuum to begin to suck up slurry*

*use of HEPA filtered water vacuum is required on existing floor tile which contains asbestos.

10. Apply additional coats of water and re-vacuum up floor 11. Mop floor with clean water, change rinse water often 12. Mop floor a second time 13. Mop floor to dry completely 14. Clean up equipment 15. Wash red pad with clean water.

d. Sealing Procedures: 1. Using a new mop head or clean wax mop and clean bucket, apply first

coat of approved sealer to floor 2. Allow floor to dry completely (at least 20 minutes) 3. Apply second coat of sealer 4. Allow floor to dry

e. Finishing (Waxing) Procedures: 1. Using a clean wax mop and bucket apply first coat of approved finish

(wax) 2. Allow floor to dry completely (at least 20 minutes) 3. Apply second coat of finish (wax) 4. Allow floor to dry completely (at least 20 minutes) 5. Apply third coat of finish (wax) 6. Allow floor to dry completely (at least 30 minutes) 7. Wash mop and bucket with clean water 8. If floor is dry - remove caution signs and open area up


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 3 SECTION 01710 CLEANING f. Burnishing Procedures:

The next working day 1. Sweep floor clean of debris 2. Spot mop floor to remove spots and dirt 3. Set up High Speed Burnisher to make for a safe environment 4. Start Burnishing. Walk forward in a straight line 5. At end of row, turn around and start forward again 6. Repeat steps 5 & 6 until finished 7. Clean up equipment and pad.

E. Completion: The entire work inside and out, and the entire premises shall be in first-class, clean

condition upon completion before being accepted by the Owner.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section describes the definitions, recording and maintenance requirements and the submittal

requirements for record documents. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. The Project Record Documents are intended to indicate all changes and deviations from the

original contract documents and permanently record the “as-built” condition of material, equipment and structure. The project record documents shall include the contract drawings, project manual, addenda, change orders, modifications and clarifications, field directives, approved shop drawings, approved product data, manufacturer’s certificates and project test results.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the project record documents in conformance with Section 01700 and prior to the final

applications for payment. The final application for payment will not be approved prior to the submittal of record documents.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The project record documents shall be updated at a minimum on a weekly basis and shall be

readily available for inspection by the owner and consultants. Maintain a separate set of complete documents for exclusive use of record documents and protect the documents from damage in a clean, dry location. Note: Progress applications for payment will not be approved if record documents are not current.

B. The record documents shall contain a clear, legible record of all detail and dimensional changes

and locate all concealed work including, but not limited to: 1. Interior and Exterior Utilities 2. Valves 3. Dampers 4. Controls 5. Junction Boxes 6. Clean-outs 7. Access Doors C. The project manual (specifications) shall indicate all manufacturers’ products complete with

catalogue number and trade name of products installed. All changes and corrections to the project manual shall be clearly indicated.

END OF SECTION

Enter Project Name + PR # here

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for the University of Colorado's

maintenance and operation of products furnished. B. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this section and as referenced in other

pertinent sections of specifications. C. Instruct the UCCS, Facilities Services personnel in the maintenance of PRODUCTS and in the

operation of equipment and systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of the described products. 2. Completely familiar with requirements of this section. 3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by the University of Colorado,

Facilities Services personnel. Quantities are listed in Part 1.07. B. Format: 1. Submit electronically in PDF format as one document, bookmarked according to CSI

standards. 2. Title shall be "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", and shall include:. a. Name of project and date of completion (month and year). b. Project number. c. Identify of general subject matter covered in the manual (e.g., Architectural,

Mechanical, Electrical and/or Civil). 1.04 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. An electronically-written table of contents shall be provided for each volume, arranged according

to CSI standards. Include the following: 1. Name of responsible installing principal contractor, address, and telephone number. 2. A list of each product being included, indexed to the content of the volume. 3. List with each product, the name, address, and telephone number of: a. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. b. Identity of the area of responsibility of each. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE B. Product Data: 1. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 2. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to the specific product, with the following

information. a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. c. Delete references to inapplicable information. C. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information in project record drawings to ensure correct

illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use project record drawings as maintenance drawings. D. Provide written text, as required, to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. E. Provide a copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued. Provide information sheets

for the University of Colorado, Facilities Services personnel and give: 1. Proper procedures in the event of failure. 2. Instances that might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. 1.05 MANUALS FOR ARCHITECTURAL MATERIAL AND FINISHES A. Submit copies (per schedule) of complete manual in final form. B. Content for architectural products including applied materials and finishes. 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special manufactured products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to the

product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. 3. Schedules and Samples a. Finish schedule for all materials b. Samples of all finish materials labeled and keyed to the finish schedule. C. Content for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products: 1. Provide manufacturer's data, giving fully information on products. a. Applicable standards b. Chemical composition c. Details of installation 2. Provide instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 3 SECTION 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE 1.06 MANUAL FOR NON-ARCHITECTURAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit copies (per schedule) of complete manual in final form. B. Content for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate shall contain: 1. Description of unit and component parts (Consultant-approved submittals).

a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and Commercial number of all replaceable parts.

2. Operating Procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine, and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions.

3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to troubleshooting. c. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjustment, and checking.

4. Servicing and Lubrication Schedule, including a list of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required

for maintenance and replacement. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

8. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

C. Content for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate, shall contain: 1. Description of system and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and Commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Operating Procedures:

a. Routing and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions.

3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routing operations. b. Guide to troubleshooting.

c. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. e. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. f. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and

recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during

instruction of the University of Colorado, Facilities Management's personnel.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 4 SECTION 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE 1.07 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL QUANTITIES / SCHEDULE A. If not compiled into two CD’s or DVD’s, provide two each per discipline: Architectural Electrical (Including as-built drawings) Mechanical & Controls (Including shop drawings) Elevators (Including shop drawings) Fire Alarms (Including shop drawings) Fire Protection (Including shop drawings) 1.08 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit one electronic copy to the Consultants and one to the University of draft of proposed

formats and outlines of contents upon completion of the submittal process. The Consultants and the University staff will review the draft and will submit comments through the consultants.

B. Submit electronic copies of complete manual(s) in final form 15 days prior to final inspection or

acceptance. Comments will be submitted after final inspection. C. Submit specified number of CDs or DVDs of approved data in final form prior to acceptance. 1.09 INSTRUCTION OF UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO, FACILITIES SERVICES PERSONNEL A. Fully instruct the University of Colorado, Facilities Management personnel's designated operating

and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of all products, equipment, and systems as required elsewhere in the specification.

B. Operating and Maintenance manual may be required as the basis of instruction. PART 2 - MATERIAL Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 1 SECTION 02050 BASIC SITE MATERIALS & METHODS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Construction Storm Water Requirements 2. Post-Construction Storm Water Requirements B. Related Sections 1. Section 02200 - Earthwork 2. Section 02221 – Trenching, Backfilling, Compaction 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All construction sites 1. All construction sites that disturb any land must take appropriate erosion control and

stormwater detention measures to contain water run-off from site. B. Construction sites – one acre and larger 1. All construction sites that are one acre and larger must prepare and submit a Storm

Water Management Plan (SWMP) for approval before any work begins. The SWMP must conform to all the requirements contained herein.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP)

Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP): Prior to any construction activity disturbing one acre of land or more, an approved SWMP and a Stormwater Permit for Construction Activity application from the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE) are required. The SWMP shall be prepared in accordance with the CDPHE requirements for “Contents of the Stormwater Management Plan” and the UDFCD’s Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, Volume 3, “Best Management Practices” (UDFCD Drainage Criteria Manual). Stormwater quality management and erosion control measures are to be constructed and maintained in accordance with the SWMP and the UDFCD Drainage Criteria Manual.

PART 2 – MATERIALS 2.01 Storm Water Management Plan A. Preparation Standards: Design of the SWMP and the Storm Water Quality and Erosion Control

Plan shall include the following elements: 1. Protection for adjacent properties (including public right-of-way) from erosion and/or

sediment deposition. 2. Protection for public streets from the deposit of sediment from run-off or vehicles tracking

mud at construction access routes. 3. Stabilization for all disturbed areas as defined in the UDFCD Drainage Criteria Manual.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 2 SECTION 02050 BASIC SITE MATERIALS & METHODS 4. Protection for all storm sewer inlets from the entry of sediment-laden water. 5. Long-term stability of cut and fill slopes and the successful establishment of permanent

vegetative cover on exposed soil. 6. The following standard notes:

a. “All temporary erosion control facilities shall be installed before any construction activities take place”.

b. “Solid waste, industrial waste, yard waste and any other pollutants or waste on any construction site shall be controlled through the use of BMP’s. Waste and/or recycling containers shall be provided and maintained by the owner or contractor on construction sites where there is the potential for release of waste. Uncontained waster that may blow, wash or otherwise be released from the site is prohibited. Sanitary waste facilitates shall be provided and maintained by the owner or contractor”.

c. “Ready-mixed concrete, or any materials resulting from the cleaning of vehicles or equipment containing or used in transporting or applying it, shall be contained on construction sites for proper disposal. Release of these materials is prohibited”.

d. “Cover shall be applied within 14 days to inactive soil stockpiles, and shall be maintained for stockpiles that are proposed to remain in place longer than 30 calendar days”.

e. “BMP’s shall be implemented to prevent the release of sediment from construction sites. Vehicle tracking of mud shall not be allowed to enter the MS4 or waters of the State. Sediment tracked onto public streets shall be removed immediately”.

f. “Techniques shall be used to prevent dust, sediment or debris blowing from the site”.

g. “Stormwater discharges from construction activities shall not cause or threaten to cause pollution, contamination or degradation of waters of the State”.

h. “All earth disturbances shall be designed, constructed and completed to limit the exposed area of any disturbed land to the shortest possible period of time”.

i. “Bulk storage structures for petroleum products and other chemicals shall have adequate protection so as to contain all spills and prevent any spilled material from entering the MS4 or waters of the State”.

j. Any disturbance to temporary and permanent BMP’s resulting from construction activity shall be repaired or replaced within 48 hours.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PERMITTING A. Contractor shall develop the SWMP in accordance with all of the requirements herein and

utilizing the most recent SWMP guidance document prepared by the CDPHE and good engineering hydrologic and pollution control practices and submit to the University for approval.

B. Contractor shall apply for and obtain a CDPHE storm water general permit for construction

activities. Provide copies of the permit to the University prior to the start of construction operations.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1 - PAGE 3 SECTION 02050 BASIC SITE MATERIALS & METHODS 3.2 CONSTRUCTION A. The Contractor will be required to have the SWMP on site at all times and shall be prepared to

respond to maintenance of specific BMP’s. B. The Contractor shall inspect all BMP’s at least every 14 days and within 24 hours after any

precipitation or snow melt event that causes surface run-off. Inspections of BMP’s shall be conducted by an individual who has successfully completed formal training in erosion and sediment control by an organization acceptable to the University. A certification of successful completion of such training shall be provided upon request.

C. The Contractor shall amend the SWMP whenever there is a change in design, construction,

operation, or maintenance, which has an effect on the potential for discharge of pollutants to the MS4 or receiving waters, or if the SWMP proves to be ineffective in achieving the general objectives of controlling pollutants in stormwater discharges associated with construction activities.

D. Records of inspection are to be maintained on site with the SWMP. Inspection records are to be

available at the project site at all times and shall be made available to the University upon request.

E. Prior to commencement of work, all general contractors, subcontractors and utility agencies shall

obtain and comply with the approved, current SWMP for the project. 3.3 POST CONSTRUCTION

At the conclusion of all construction activities and as a part of construction close-out, contractor shall remove all temporary BMP’s and inactivate the stormwater permit.

END OF SECTION

01018 - 1 Heller Center Rehabilitation Bid Package 2

SECTION 01018 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Special procedures for historic treatment on the Project including, but not limited to: 1. Storage and protection of existing historic materials. 2. Temporary protection of historic materials during construction. 3. Protection during application of chemicals. 4. Protection during use of heat-generating equipment. 5. Historic treatment procedures. 6. Removal of bird, bat or rat excrement.

B. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1, General Requirements. 3. Section 02070, Selective Demolition. 4. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Adhesives and wood epoxy repair materials. 5. Section 08515, Steel Sash Window Repair. 6. Section 08810, Replacement Glass and Glazing. 7. Section 09905, Strippers and Paint Removers.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. "Preservation": To apply measures necessary to sustain the existing form, integrity, and materials of a historic property. Work may include preliminary measures to protect and stabilize the property.

B. "Rehabilitation": To make possible a compatible use for a property through repair, alterations, and additions while preserving those portions or features that convey its historical, cultural, or architectural values.

C. "Renovation" has the same definition as "rehabilitation"; the term "rehabilitation" is preferred. D. "Restoration": To accurately depict the form, features, and character of a property as it appeared

at a particular period of time by means of the removal of features from other periods in its history and the reconstruction of missing features from the restoration period.

E. "Reconstruction": To reproduce in the exact form and detail a building, structure, or artifact as it appeared at a specific period in time.

F. "Stabilize": To apply measures designed to reestablish a weather-resistant enclosure and the structural reinforcement of an item or portion of the building while maintaining the essential form as it exists at present.

G. "Protect and Maintain": To remove deteriorating corrosion, reapply protective coatings, and install protective measures such as temporary guards; to provide the least degree of intervention.

H. "Repair": To stabilize, consolidate or conserve; to retain existing materials and features while employing as little new material as possible. Repair includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading materials. Within restoration, repair also includes limited replacement in kind, rehabilitation, and reconstruction, with compatible substitute materials for deteriorated or missing parts of features when there are surviving prototypes.

I. "Replace": To duplicate and replace entire features with new material in kind. Replacement includes the following conditions: 1. Duplication: Includes replacing elements damaged beyond repair or missing. Original

material is indicated as the pattern for creating new duplicated elements.


2. Replacement with New Materials: Includes replacement with new material when original material is not available as patterns for creating new duplicated elements.

3. Replacement with Substitute Materials: Includes replacement with compatible substitute materials. Substitute materials are not allowed, unless otherwise indicated.

J. "Remove": To detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

K. "Remove and Reinstall": To detach items from existing construction, repair and clean them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

L. "Existing to Remain" or "Retain": Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

M. "Material in Kind": Material that matches existing materials, as much as possible, in species, cut, color, grain, and finish.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Historic Treatment Specialist Qualifications: A firm that employs personnel, including supervisory personnel, experienced and skilled in the processes and operations indicated.

B. Historic Treatment Pre-Construction Conference: UCCS shall conduct a conference at the site for purposes of compliance with the special requirements of this Section and other related Sections of the Specifications. 1. Review manufacturer's written instructions for precautions and effects of products and

procedures on building materials, components and vegetation. 2. Record procedures established as a result of the review and distribute to UCCS, Architect

and all affected Subcontractors and trades. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Historic Treatment Program: Submit a written plan for each phase or process including protection of surrounding materials during operations. Describe in detail materials, methods, and equipment to be used for each phase of work.

B. Alternative Methods and Materials: If alternative methods and materials to those indicated are proposed for any phase of work, provide a written description including evidence of successful use on other, comparable projects, and program of testing to demonstrate effectiveness for use on this Project.

C. Qualifications: Submit resumes of proposed historic treatment specialists and supervisory personnel, including a list of similar completed projects with the scope of work and budget for each, if requested by UCCS.

D. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by historic treatment operations. Submit before work begins.

E. Record Documents: Include modifications to manufacturer's written instructions and procedures, as documented in the historic treatment pre-construction conference and as the Work progresses.

1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF HISTORIC MATERIALS

A. Existing Historic Materials to be Removed and Salvaged: 1. Clean salvaged historic items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning, and individually identify the contents of each

container. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to UCCS. 4. Transport items to UCCS's designated storage area. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 6. Do not dispose of items removed from existing construction without prior written consent

of the Owner.


B. Existing Historic Materials to be Removed and Reinstalled: 1. Clean and repair historic items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing, and individually identify contents of each

container. Store items in a secure area. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for their intended use.

C. Existing Historic Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during construction and/or historic treatment. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during historic treatment (and cleaned) and reinstalled in their original locations after historic treatment operations are complete.

D. Existing Historic Materials to be Reinstalled (Currently Stored Off-Site): 1. Owner shall provide itemized inventory of historic items to be reinstalled. 2. Clean and repair historic items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

Historic light fixtures will be rewired and tested by the Owner. 3. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing, and individually identify contents of each

container. 4. Protect items from damage and deliver from Owner's off-site storage location. 5. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for their intended use.

E. Storage and Protection: When removed from their existing location, store historic materials within a weathertight enclosure where they are protected from exposure to rain, snow, or ground water, and temperature variations. Secure stored materials to protect from theft. 1. Identify removed items with an inconspicuous mark indicating their original location.

1.06 PROJECT-SITE CONDITIONS

A. Exterior Cleaning and Repair: Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable. 1. Wet Weather: Do not attempt repairs during rainy or foggy weather. Do not apply primer,

paint, putty, or epoxy when the relative humidity is above 80%. Do not remove exterior elements of structures when rain is forecast or in progress.

2. Do not perform exterior wet work when the air temperature is below 40° F. 3. Do not begin cleaning, patching, or repairing when there is any likelihood of frost or

freezing. 4. Do not begin cleaning when either the air or the surface temperature is below 45° F, unless

approved means are provided for maintaining a 45° F temperature of the air and materials during, and for 48 hours subsequent to, cleaning.

5. Perform cleaning and rinsing of the exterior only during daylight hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RESTORATION AND REHABILITATION PRODUCTS

A. General: Refer to specific Sections of these Specifications for specified preservation materials and products, including but not limited to: 1. Wood epoxy repair materials specified in Section 06100. 2. Steel sash window repair specified in Section 08515. 3. Replacement glass and glazing specified in Section 08810. 4. Paint strippers specified in Section 09905.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for precautions and effects of products and procedures on historical building materials, details and features, adjacent building materials, components, and vegetation.

B. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when work begins and during its progress. C. Temporary Protection of Historic Materials during Construction:

1. Protect existing materials during installation of temporary protections and construction. Do not deface or remove existing materials.

2. Attachments of temporary protection to existing construction shall be approved by Architect prior to installation.

D. Protect landscape work adjacent to or within work areas as follows: 1. Provide barriers to protect tree trunks. 2. Bind spreading shrubs. 3. Use coverings that allow plants to breathe and remove coverings at the end of each day.

Do not cover plant material with a waterproof membrane for more than 8 hours at a time. 4. Set scaffolding and ladder legs away from plants.

E. Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work or any cleaning operations, test drains and other water removal systems to ensure that drains and systems are functioning properly. Notify the Owner immediately of drains or systems that are stopped or blocked. Do not begin Work of this Section until the drains are in working order. 1. Provide a method to prevent solids including stone or mortar residue from entering the

drains or drain lines. Clean out drains and drain lines that become blocked or filled by sand or any other solids because of the work of this Project.

2. Protect storm drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean water to pass.

3.02 PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS

A. Protect persons, vehicles, surrounding surfaces of the building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm or damage resulting from applications of chemical cleaners and paint removers.

B. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical cleaners selected for the Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use covering materials that contain only waterproof, UV-resistant adhesives. Apply masking agents to comply with the manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining.

C. Do not clean surfaces during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces.

D. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes and dispose of off of the Owner's property. E. Dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil

erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.

3.03 PROTECTION DURING USE OF HEAT-GENERATING EQUIPMENT

A. Comply with the following procedures while performing work with heat-generating equipment, including welding, cutting, soldering, brazing, paint removal with heat, and other operations where open flames or equipment utilizing heat are used: 1. Obtain UCCS's approval for operations involving use of open-flame or welding equipment.

Notification shall be given for each occurrence and location of work with heat-generating equipment.


2. As far as practical, use heat-generating equipment in shop areas or outside the building. 3. Before work with heat-generating equipment commences, furnish personnel to serve as a

fire watch (or watches) for location(s) where work is to be performed. 4. Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas where

flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or thought to be present. Use a combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe.

5. Remove and keep the area free of combustibles, including rubbish, paper, waste, paints, solvents, etc., within area of operations. If combustible material cannot be removed, provide fireproof blankets to cover such materials.

6. Where possible, furnish and use baffles of metal or gypsum board to prevent the spraying of sparks or hot slag into surrounding combustible material.

7. Prevent the extension of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors, holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings, roofs and other openings.

8. Inspect each location of the day's work not sooner than 30 minutes after completion of operations to detect hidden or smoldering fires and to ensure that proper housekeeping is maintained.

3.04 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES

A. One of the principal aims of preservation work is to halt the process of deterioration and stabilize the condition of an item, component or system, unless otherwise indicated. Repair is required where specifically indicated. The following procedures shall be followed: 1. Retain as much existing material as possible; repair and consolidate rather than replace. 2. Use additional material or structure to reinforce, strengthen, prop, tie and support existing

material or structure. 3. Use reversible processes wherever possible. Consult with the Architect as necessary to

determine appropriate reversible treatments. 4. Use traditional replacement materials and techniques. New work shall be distinguishable

to the trained eye, on close inspection, from old work. 5. Record the work before the procedure with preconstruction photos and during the work

with periodic construction photos. B. Prohibit smoking by personnel performing work on or near historic structures. C. Obtain UCCS's and the Architect's review and written approval before making changes or additions

to construction or removing historic materials. D. Notify the Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether due to

environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing or thawing, or due to structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion.

E. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by the Architect. F. Where missing features are indicated to be repaired or replaced, provide features whose designs

are based on accurate replications rather than on conjectural designs, subject to the approval of the Architect and Preservation Specialist.

G. Where Work requires existing features to be removed, cleaned and reused, perform these operations without damage to the material itself, to adjacent materials or to the substrate.

H. Identify new or replacement materials and features with inconspicuous, permanent marks to distinguish them from original materials. Record the legend of identification marks and the locations of these marks on the Record Drawings.

I. When cleaning, match samples of existing materials that have been cleaned and identified for acceptable cleaning levels. Avoid overcleaning to prevent damage to existing materials during cleaning.

3.05 REMOVAL OF BIRD, BAT OR RAT EXCREMENT

A. General: Before disturbing accumulated bird, bat or rat excrement, consult with an occupational medicine physician, industrial hygienist, and authorities having jurisdiction to determine


acceptable removal procedures and appropriate protective measures for personnel. B. Removing Excrement: Treat excrement before its removal as required by authorities having

jurisdiction. 1. Prior to removal, dampen excrement to prevent it from becoming airborne. 2. Use only nonmetallic tools (plastic spatulas and brushes with natural fiber or nylon bristles,

or their equivalent) to remove excrement. 3. Collect removed excrement and legally dispose of off-site. 4. Perform excrement removal work from the outside of the building with windows and other

openings in the building closed.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01020 ALLOWANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This Section identifies each Allowance by number, as referred from specific Sections, including but not limited to: 1. Section 16511, Interior Lighting.

B. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Bidding Documents: Bid Form. 2. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Incorporation of Allowances into the Work. 3. Sections of the Specifications as referenced. 4. General and Supplementary Conditions.

1.02 ALLOWANCE PROCEDURES

A. Allowances shall be included in the Base Bid and shall include the costs of materials and delivery of materials to the site. Allowances shall not include installation unless so indicated, and the Contractor shall include the cost of installation in the Base Bid.

or A. Allowances shall be included in the base Bid and shall include the costs of materials, delivery of

materials to the site, labor and installation. B. Allowances shall include the costs for any overage of material as required for cutting, etc. C. If the actual cost of material selected by the Owner is less than the Allowance, the Contractor shall

credit the Owner the difference; if the actual cost of the material selected is greater than the Allowance, the Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment to the base price.

D. Any extra material shall become the property of the Owner or restocked and credited to the Owner, at the Owner's option.

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance No. 1: New interior light fixtures and ceiling fans, to be selected by the Architect and Owner: $5,000 installed. The original reconditioned light fixtures provided by UCCS are to be installed per the base bid and is not a part of this Allowance.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01022 UNIT PRICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This Section identifies each Unit Price by number, as referred from the Drawings and/or specific Sections of these Specifications, including but not limited to: 1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry. 3. Section 09310, Ceramic Tile. 4. Section 09550, Wood Flooring. 5. Section 09650, Resilient Flooring.

B. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Bidding Documents: Bid Form. 2. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Incorporation of Unit Prices into the Work. 3. Sections of the Specifications as referenced.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF UNIT PRICES

A. The Contractor shall furnish the following Unit Prices for addition and/or deletion of bid items by the Owner. Unit Prices shall include all labor, materials, tools, equipment and supervision necessary for each item to be installed, and all mark-ups for the Contractor and Subcontractor, completely finished, operational and coordinated with related work. Unit Prices requested shall not be construed as all-inclusive, and the Owner reserves the right to add or delete from the project using these Unit Prices in any order or quantity. Base Bid shall include all items shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

Item Description

1. 8" PVC WATERMAIN ($/LF INSTALLED for either ADDITIVE or DEDUCTIVE conditions):

Provide and place 8" PVC water main within the project limits consistent with conditions represented on the bid documents. The scope of work includes providing pipe and typical appurtenances (bends) in conformance with CSU specifications with cover of 5’ to 6’, excavation, pipe placement, tracer wire, backfilling, compacting and reclaiming disturbed corridor with native grass reseeding. The price shall include material, delivery, and installation of the pipe and appurtenances, and any other incidentals required to complete the placement. The price shall be based per linear foot installed for either an additive or deductive condition.

2. INSTALL 8" WATERMAIN VALVE ($/EACH INSTALLED for either ADDITIVE or DEDUCTIVE

conditions: Furnish and provide 8" valve within the project area where directed by engineer. The scope of work includes furnishing 8" valve in conformance with CSU specifications, installing valve, includes excavation, backfilling, furnishing and installing valve box, and repair of surfacing pavement or material. The price shall include valve, delivery, and installation of valve, and any other incidentals required to complete the valve installation for either an additive or deductive condition.

3. CDOT CLASS 6 BASE COURSE ($/TON INSTALLED for either ADDITIVE or DEDUCTIVE

conditions: Provide and place CDOT class 6 base course within the within the project limits. The scope of work includes providing class 6 base course, removing soils, placing and compacting the base course. The price shall include material, delivery, and placement



of the base course, and any other incidentals required to complete the placement. The price shall be based per ton installed for either an additive or deductive condition. Final quantity shall be determined based on delivery load tickets provided by Contractor to support quantity installed.

4. 4" PVC COMMUNICATION CONDUIT ($/LF INSTALLED for either ADDITIVE or DEDUCTIVE

conditions): Provide and place 4" PVC conduit within the project limits consistent with conditions represented on the bid documents. The scope of work includes providing pipe with pull tape and pull vaults every 400 linear feet, excavation, pipe placement, backfilling, compacting and reclaiming disturbed corridor with native grass reseeding. The price shall include material, delivery, and installation of the pipe and appurtenances, and any other incidentals required to complete the placement. The price shall be based per linear foot installed for either an additive or deductive condition.

5. Reconstruction of wood vigas 18"-24" in length: L.F.

6. Replacement of existing 1" wood plank roof decking: S.F.

7. Repointing of existing CMU masonry: S.F.

8. Install concrete stain at the existing concrete slab-on-grade to the depth required. Prep surface as required: S.F.

9. Install new ceramic tile on existing concrete slab-on-grade: S.F. 10. Install new ceramic wall tile and 1/4" cementation backer

board on new/existing plaster walls: S.F. 11. Install new VCT resilient flooring and 1/4" thick underlayment

on new OSB subfloor with pattern design utilizing three (3) standard colors: S.F.

12. Install new random width No. 1 Fir flooring on OSB subfloor. Wood

plank shall be 3/4" thick with widths ranging from 3-1/4"-7-1/4", with staggered lengths. Provide per specifications: S.F.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. This section identifies each Alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the work only when that Alternate is made a part of the work by specific provisions in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.

B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly integrate the work under each Alternate for the complete construction required by the Contract Documents.

C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Bidding Documents: Method of quotation of the cost of each Alternate and the basis of the

Owner's acceptance of Alternate. 2. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Incorporation of Alternates into the work. 3. Bid Form and Bid Schedule. 4. Sections of the Specifications as listed under the respective Alternates. Referenced

Sections of Specifications stipulate pertinent requirements for products and methods to achieve the work stipulated under each Alternate.

D. Alternates will be accepted as follows, unless otherwise modified by the General or Supplementary Conditions to the Contract. (select one) 1. Alternates will be accepted in the order listed.

E. The Owner will consider the price quotation for each Alternate, in addition to the Base Bid, in determining the apparent Low Bidder, unless otherwise modified by the General or Supplementary Conditions to the Contract. Refer to Information for Bidders.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1 (Deduct): Patch and repair areas of stucco that have been damaged and install new stucco at areas that are reconstructed. Build out the reconstructed areas with brown coat(s) as required to flush out with the thickness of the existing stucco. New stucco finish to match the existing.

Base Bid: Install new 2-coat, Portland cement-based stucco system with elastomeric finish coat on the entire house exterior frame over new metal lath mechanically fastened to the existing exterior stucco on concrete masonry unit (CMU) substrate. New stucco finish to match the existing.

B. Alternate No. 2 (Deduct): The existing east bathroom is to remain as is in place along with the adjoining south wall. Provide new domestic hot and cold water to the existing south wall of the bathroom only.

Base Bid: Provide demolition of the existing bathroom and install all new plumbing fixtures, finishes, plumbing and electrical work, and new concrete floor as part of completing the Restroom No. 10 improvements.

C. Alternate No. 3 (Deduct): The existing large fixed window at the west exterior wall of Conference Room No. 2 is to remain in place.

Base Bid: Remove the existing fixed window and prepare opening for new CMU wall infill at the sill with new exterior stucco and interior plaster finishes to match the existing texture. Provide and install new combination fixed/operable aluminum window to match the existing steel sash windows in design and profile.



D. Alternate No. 4 (Deduct): Delete the 1,920 lin. ft. of 4" communication conduit noted "CI" on Shet C1.0, Proposed Utility Plan.

Base Bid: Provide and install conduit per the proposed utility plan.

E. Alternate No. 5 (Deduct): Delete all of the exterior bollard lighting and associated conduit and wiring. Base Bid: Provide and install all exterior bollard light fixtures shown on Sheet E3.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01041 SUPERINTENDENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, who shall be in attendance at the project site during performance of the work.

B. Superintendent shall be on the jobsite to the minimum level specified herein, but in all cases whenever a Subcontractor is working on the project.

C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. 2. Section 01010, Summary of Work: Contractor Qualifications.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Superintendent Qualification Requirements: Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent to supervise and coordinate all construction and jobsite administration tasks for the duration of the project. 1. Superintendent shall be a regular employee of the Contractor's firm, unless the use of a

contract employee is approved and authorized by the Owner in writing. 2. Superintendent shall have a general knowledge of the building type and type of

construction proposed for this project, and shall have successfully completed at least one (1) project of similar size and complexity in the past five (5) years, serving in a similar capacity.

3. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Superintendent shall have completed at least one (1) project requiring adherence to the Secretary of the Interior's Standards for Rehabilitation of Historic Buildings, or other project under rehabilitation guidelines of the Colorado Historical Society in the past five (5) years.

4. Contractor shall submit a written resume, references for similar completed projects and other supporting documents to verify the qualifications of the person(s) to be employed as superintendent for this project, if requested by the Owner.

B. General Contractor Qualification Requirements: Refer to Section 01010, Summary of Work. 1.03 REQUIRED LEVEL OF SUPERVISION

A. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite until Substantial Completion on a full-time basis. 1. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite whenever a Subcontractor is working on the

project. 2. Superintendent shall be present during any municipal or utility inspection. 3. Superintendent shall be present at any scheduled or Owner- or Architect-requested

meeting. B. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite after Substantial Completion and through project

close-out as follows: 1. Superintendent need not be on-site full time during this period, except as noted below. 2. Superintendent need not be present at the jobsite when any punchlist work is being

completed. END OF SECTION


SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish equipment and labor to demolish and remove materials, equipment, fixtures, accessories and systems, including related utilities, to the extent shown on the Drawings or required for new construction. Selective demolition includes but is not limited to: 1. Demolition of portions of building structures as required for new construction. 2. Demolition of existing over-framed wood gable and hip roofed structures. 3. Demolition of existing plumbing, mechanical, and/or electrical systems to the extent

shown on the Drawings, or as required to make connections to new work. 4. Demolition of existing site improvements as required for new construction. 5. Miscellaneous demolition work related to construction of the project, as indicated on the

Drawings. B. General extent of demolition work is indicated on the Drawings. Work may include the removal

and protection of existing materials or equipment to be relocated into the new construction or salvaged by UCCS, as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.

C. After removal of demolition work, leave surfaces or substrates prepared for new materials, equipment, finishes or other construction as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 01018, Historic Treatment Procedures. 3. Division 15, Mechanical: Demolition related to mechanical and plumbing systems. 4. Division 16, Electrical: Demolition related to electrical systems.

1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor shall contact local building and fire authorities to become familiar with local laws and regulations governing work of this Section.

1.03 COORDINATION AND PROTECTION

A. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Contractor shall take all necessary care in selective demolition and construction of this project so as not to damage or destroy the historic fabric of the structure that is to remain.

B. Provide, erect and maintain barricades, lighting and guardrails as required by applicable regulatory requirements to protect occupants of the building, construction workers and the public.

C. Protect and maintain plumbing, mechanical, natural gas and electrical services encountered during demolition that are to remain in use.

D. Coordinate and pay for disconnecting, removing and capping any utility services encountered within areas of demolition. Notify the affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval prior to starting this work. Flag locations of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capping locations on Project Record Documents.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DEMOLITION

A. General: Furnish labor, equipment and materials as required to complete demolition as described in the Contract Documents.

2.02 SALVAGED MATERIALS

A. General: Materials, fixtures and equipment to be removed from the demolished work may be salvaged by UCCS or salvaged for reuse in the new work, as scheduled below. Exact disposition of these materials will be determined at the Pre-Construction Conference.

B. UCCS shall remove furniture and equipment from areas of demolition work prior to start of construction.

C. UCCS shall salvage the following materials, equipment and fixtures from the demolished work. Contractor shall deliver these items to a location as directed by UCCS. 1. None.

D. Items to be salvaged from demolished work for relocation in new work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Existing steel sash window. 2. 3. 4. 5.

E. Contractor may salvage remaining demolished material and equipment, unless specifically noted otherwise in this Section or on the Drawings. Immediately remove from the site. All other material shall be removed from the site and disposed of.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. General: Coordinate and execute demolition work in an orderly, neat and timely manner. UCCS may occupy the existing parking areas and grounds during construction of this project, except for specific areas designated strictly for use by the Contractor.

B. Ensure that all utilities and services to remain in use have been adequately marked and protected and will be maintained during construction.

C. Ensure that structures have been adequately supported and braced during removal of any structural system or component. Consult with the Structural Engineer as needed before commencing work.

D. Ensure that dustproof and weathertight enclosures have been erected. Cover and protect furniture, equipment and fixtures that cannot be removed from the area of demolition work.

E. Ensure that hazardous material abatement, if applicable, has been completed in accordance with applicable regulations.

F. Restoration and Preservation Projects: If historical or archaeological resources are encountered during excavation or construction of this project, the Contractor shall stop work and notify UCCS. Work shall not proceed until authorized in writing by UCCS.

3.02 DEMOLITION

A. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic, orderly and careful manner. 1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry using power-

driven masonry saw or hand tools. Do not use power-driven impact tools in buildings. 2. Locate demolition equipment throughout the structure to avoid imposing excessive loads



on supporting walls, floors or framing. 3. Construct chutes as required to conduct debris safely to grade disposal areas. 4. Do not cut or alter any structural member without authorization of the Structural

Engineer. B. General Contractor shall be responsible for removing and separating any materials, fixtures or

equipment with hazardous material content, i.e. freon, mercury, sodium lamps, ballasts containing PCBs, etc. from the waste stream. UCCS shall arrange for removal from the site and disposal by others.

C. Verify and ensure required dimensions and tolerances for new construction. D. Restore adjacent areas and damaged areas as a result of fixed furnishings or equipment being

removed to original condition. E. Leave surfaces or substrates prepared for new materials, equipment, finishes or other construction

as indicated on the Drawings. 3.03 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Promptly remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations from the building site. Use trash receptacles with tightly fitted covers. Do not allow debris to be blown onto adjacent properties.

B. Deliver materials to be salvaged to a location as directed by UCCS. C. Deliver materials to be salvaged for reuse in the new work to a secure and weather-protected

location until ready for refurbishing and reinstallation. D. Keep general construction site area reasonably clean, to the satisfaction of UCCS's principal

representative. E. Transport and dispose of materials offsite in a legal manner. F. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on the project site. G. Recycling of Construction Waste: Contractor shall endeavor to recycle as much construction debris

and waste materials as practicable.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02225 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Excavating, backfilling, grading and compacting of site work for new foundation and retaining walls.

B. Prepare subgrade for new terraces, patio slabs, walks and other improvements. C. Shore and brace excavations as required. D. Shore and underpin foundations of existing structures adjacent to new excavations as required. E. Dewater excavations as necessary. F. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 02515, Exterior Concrete Paving: Scarifying and compacting subgrade below

pavements. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.

B. Soil Compaction Tests: 1. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99: Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils

Using a 5.5 lb. Rammer and a 12 inch drop. a. Use method A, B, C or D, as appropriate, based on soil condition and judgment of

the testing laboratory. b. Sample tests will be representative of materials to be placed. c. Determine and provide optimum density curve for each type of material

encountered or utilized. d. Include Atterberg Limits, grain size determination and specific gravity.

2. ASTM D2049: Test for Relative Density of Cohesion less soils. C. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to enable Architect/Engineer to determine compliance

with the Specifications for imported materials from each proposed source of supplier. 1. Provide with this certificate a density test of a typical sample, in accordance with the

following reference standards. a. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99. b. ASTM D2049.

D. Underpinning of Existing Structures: Contractor shall be solely responsible for design of shoring and underpinning system as required to resist lateral earth pressure and surcharges due to traffic, storage of materials, adjacent structures and all other loads imposed on adjacent soil during construction. Type of system used must be compatible with the Drawings and acceptable to the Structural Engineer.

1.03 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Site Information: No Geotechnical Soils Report has been prepared for the property. B. The Contractor shall examine the site and then determine for himself the character of materials to

be encountered. Should subsurface conditions normally considered foreign to the locality be encountered, the Contractor may be compensated for additional expenses resulting from such conditions.

C. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings.


D. Underground Obstructions: 1. Underground obstructions known to Architect/Engineer are shown on Drawings. However,

locations shown may prove inaccurate and other obstructions not known to Architect/Engineer may be encountered.

2. Notify each utility owner and request that utilities be field located by surface reference using flags at least 48 hours prior to trenching or excavation.

3. Expose and verify size, location and elevation of underground utilities and other obstructions where conflicts might exist sufficiently in advance to permit changes in the event of conflict. a. Notify UCCS in case of conflict. b. In case of conflict the proposed Work may be changed by the Architect/Engineer.

4. Maintain, protect and support by shoring, bracing or other means existing utilities and appurtenances.

5. If Contractor elects to remove underground obstructions, the following conditions shall apply: a. Replace all other underground obstructions with new materials. b. Restore to original conditions or better.

6. Clean subsurface drainage systems so they are free of sediment after construction. E. Classification of Excavated Material: Excavated materials will not be classified. Excavation

includes the removal and subsequent handling of all materials excavated or otherwise removed in performance of the work, regardless of the type, character, composition or condition thereof. Refer to paragraph 3.01.A.

1.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect benchmarks and existing improvements to remain against damage from equipment and vehicular traffic.

B. Protect existing trees to remain. Take all necessary care to prevent compaction of existing soil within the drip line of existing trees.

C. Verify all utilities with appropriate authorities before proceeding with work, in accordance with requirements of Division 1. Protect all utilities which are to remain.

D. Protect excavations by shoring or bracing as required to maintain banks of excavation in safe and stable condition and to protect adjacent existing and new construction.

E. Provide suitable protection against bodily injury in accordance with applicable codes and governing authorities.

F. Underpin or otherwise support adjacent structures, service lines and pipe chases which may be damaged by excavation work.

G. Protect bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath foundations from frost. H. Notify UCCS of any unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue work in the area until UCCS

provides notification to resume work. I. Restoration and Preservation Projects: If historical or archaeological resources are encountered

during excavation or construction of this project, the Contractor shall stop work and notify UCCS. Work shall not proceed until authorized in writing by UCCS.

1.05 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING

A. Notify UCCS at completion of each phase of excavation prior to placement of formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Also notify the Architect/Engineer prior to placement of backfill of all foundations. Notification shall be at least 48 hours prior to proceeding with the next phase of work.

B. Testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory submitted by the Contractor and approved by UCCS. Testing fees shall be paid in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions. 1. The Contractor will pay for costs of additional testing required due to improper


performance of the work. C. When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing laboratory to

perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of work until results have been verified.

D. Compaction Tests: 1. Concrete Flatwork: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate of one

(1) test for each 5,000 sq. ft., or portion thereof, of surface area for interior or exterior concrete slabs-on-grade, sidewalks, aprons, or other flatwork, unless otherwise modified by the Soils Report.

E. If tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to UCCS.

1.06 WARRANTIES

A. Maintain and repair backfill, fill compaction and embankment settlement and make necessary repairs to pavement, sidewalks or other structures which may be damaged as a result of settlement for a period of one (1) year after Substantial Completion and acceptance of the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SELECTED FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Use onsite or imported soil approved by the Structural Engineer for rough fill and for backfill against the outside of foundation walls except as specified below. Material shall be clean, compactable earth, free of frozen material, debris, deleterious or organic substances or large rocks.

B. Structural Fill: On-site natural soils, devoid of debris or imported granular materials approved by the Soils Engineer, mechanically compacted as specified below and extended to original undisturbed soil. Use under floor slabs and exterior concrete where approved on-site material is available or where shown on the Drawings. 1. Material shall be uniformly graded of low permeability and a swell potential of less than

1%. C. Imported Structural Fill: Imported fill required to supplement acceptable on-site material shall be

clean, devoid of debris and organic material, and shall conform to the following minimum specifications: 1. Class 1 structural backfill or roadbase conforming to Colorado Department of

Transportation standards, class to be determined by Structural Engineer. 2. Gradation, conforming to ASTM C136:

3" 100% No. 4 Sieve 100% No. 200 Sieve 35% maximum

3. Liquid Limit: 30 maximum. 4. Plasticity Index: 15 maximum. 5. Group Index: 10 maximum.

D. Existing On-site Fill: Existing on-site fill previously placed on the site in an uncontrolled manner to construct parking areas and landscape slopes. Considered unsuitable for support of foundations, wall backfill and slabs-on-grade. May be used as structural fill underneath exterior concrete flatwork or general overlot fill provided all debris, overside material (greater than 6 inches) and organic matter is removed.


E. Native Sands: On-site excavated native granular materials generally usable for fills and embankment construction with drying, wetting or other reworking as necessary to obtain conformance to the Drawings and Specifications. May be used as structural fill beneath concrete floor slab or as wall backfill. The Soil Engineer must approve all materials before use.

F. Bedrock: On-site sandstone and claystone bedrock, medium hard to very hard. Utilizing heavy duty excavation equipment should be anticipated when excavations extend into hard to very hard bedrock. May be placed in landscape areas.

G. Coarse Granular Fill: Clean, crushed, non-porous rock, crushed or uncrushed gravel graded from 3/8" to 1-1/2".

H. Fine Granular Fill: Natural or manufactured sand and pea gravel, clean and free of organic debris graded from 3/8" to No. 100 sieve.

I. Topsoil: Topsoil stripped and stockpiled on-site may be used if it meets the requirements of these Sections. Topsoil shall consist of selectively excavated, loose, friable loam reasonably free of admixtures of subsoil, refuse, stumps, roots, rocks, brush, weeds or other material which would be detrimental to the proper development of vegetative growth.

J. Drainage Fill: Natural or crushed stone or gravel with 100% passing a 1" sieve and not more than 5% passing a No. 4 sieve.

K. Unsuitable Materials: All material removed in stripping and all material containing perishable matter such as roots, sod, grass, decayed vegetable matter, debris or materials having unsatisfactory compaction characteristics shall be classified as unsuitable for use in the work. All excavation of unsuitable material shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor. 1. Materials which are temporarily unusable due to excessive moisture or improper gradation

will not be classified as unsuitable unless such material cannot be satisfactorily reclaimed by screening, manipulation, aerating or blending with other materials as determined by the Soils Engineer.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Silt Fence (Erosion Control): Woven filter fabric, type and size as required by the City of Colorado Springs and/or the State of Colorado.


A. Classification of Excavation: The following definitions shall only apply when additional excavation is authorized by UCCS and/or the Structural Engineer and/or rock excavation is encountered. Do not proceed with the work until the material has been cross-sectioned and classified. 1. Earth Excavation: Removal and disposal of on-site soils and other materials indicated on

the Drawings, and all other material as indicated by the subsurface soil data and not classified as rock excavation.

2. Rock Excavation: Removal and disposal of materials that cannot be excavated without drilling, blasting or ripping, or boulders larger than 1/2 cu. yd. in volume.

B. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Section.

C. Silt Fence: Install silt fence fabric using wooden posts and straw bales or other required accessory erosion control materials where required by the authority with jurisdiction over the work of the Project. Maintain in place until such authority permits its removal.

D. Clear and strip surface vegetation, sod and organic topsoil for subgrades for areas within construction boundaries as shown on the Drawings or directed by UCCS. The stripped topsoil shall be stored for later use in the site finish grading. 1. Extent of Stripping: As required for new construction, as shown on the Drawings, or as


directed by UCCS. Topsoil shall not be stripped or existing vegetative cover disturbed in excess of these limits without written approval of UCCS.

E. Contractor shall take all necessary safety precautions to ensure the safety of all workers and the public in and around excavations, including shoring, bracing and barricades.

F. Brace and properly support all structural elements, including foundation walls and footings prior to beginning and continuously during backfilling and compacting operations.

G. Restoration and Preservation Projects: If historical or archaeological resources are encountered during excavation or construction of this project, the Contractor shall stop work and notify UCCS. Work shall not proceed until authorized in writing by UCCS.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. General: Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing

grade elevations and constructing the shallow foundation insulation systems. 1. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade

elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Architect/Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by UCCS and/or the Architect/Engineer, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

2. All excavation adjacent to the existing historic building shall be by hand. 3. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of +/- 0.10' and extending

a sufficient distance from existing footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction and inspection.

4. Do not interfere with normal 45° bearing splay of any foundation. 5. Bottom of perimeter drain shall be sloped uniformly at 0.5% minimum to sump pump or

gravity discharge, as shown on the Drawings. B. Blasting: No blasting will be permitted as a part this Project without written authorization from

UCCS. C. Stability of Excavation:

1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.

2. Ensure the stability of materials under foundation structures of the existing building adjacent to new excavations. Shore and brace as required during excavation and maintain until new foundations or compacted backfill materials are in place.

3. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling. D. Sheeting and Shoring:

1. Sheet, shore or brace banks and trenches not cut back to a stable slope as necessary to prevent sliding or caving to protect workmen and the work.

2. Design and build sheeting and shoring to withstand loads which might be caused by earth movement and pressure and to be rigid, maintaining its shape and position.

3. Support sheeting in excavation in a manner so as not to concentrate loads or horizontal thrusts on piping. Do not brace sheeting against the pipe.

E. Dewatering: 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface ground water from flowing into excavations and from

flooding project site and surrounding area. 2. Conduct dewatering operations in addition to good, positive drainage and eliminate

standing water. Dewater excavations for concrete structures extending below ground water level by lowering and maintaining the water level beneath such excavations minimum 24".

3. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and adjacent foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.


4. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.

5. Keep excavations dry during subgrade preparation and continuously thereafter to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation or other cause will result.

F. Material Storage: 1. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials and topsoil until required for backfilling. Place,

grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 3. Dispose of excess soil materials and waste materials as specified in paragraph 3.09.

G. Weather Protection: 1. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than

35° F. 2. Do not backfill or construct fills or embankments during freezing weather. 3. Do not place backfill on frozen surfaces. 4. Do not place frozen materials, snow or ice in backfill, fill or embankment. 5. Do not deposit, stamp, roll or otherwise mechanically compact backfill in water.

3.03 BACKFILLING

A. Do not start backfilling until subsurface drainage, dampproofing or waterproofing systems have been inspected.

B. Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, snow, ice and water and that ground surfaces are not in a frozen condition.

C. Do not backfill over existing subgrade surfaces which are porous, wet or spongy. D. Compact existing subgrade surfaces if densities are not equal to that required for backfill

materials. E. Cut out soft areas of existing subgrade, backfill with subsoil and compact to required density. F. Backfill areas to grades, contours, levels and elevations. Backfill systematically and as early as

possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement and compaction. G. Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8" loose depth. Use a method

so as not to disturb or damage building drainage system. H. Where temporary unbalanced pressures are liable to develop on walls, erect necessary shoring to

counteract imbalance and leave in place until their removal is approved by the Structural Engineer. I. Maintain 2% wet of OMC of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. J. Building Slab Backfill: Verify removal of existing material below slabs-on-grade, as specified in

paragraph 3.02 above. 3.04 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION

A. Structural Backfill below Footings and Foundations: On-site natural soils, devoid of debris, or imported, non-expansive granular materials approved by Soils Engineer, mechanically compacted to a minimum of 98% of SPD.

B. Building Slabs: On-site natural soils or select granular non-expansive materials approved by the Soils Engineer to underside of stabilizing base course, mechanically compacted to a minimum of 95% of SPD.

C. Backfill Around Structures: Mechanically compact to a minimum of 95% of SPD. D. Walks and Trails: Subsoil or approved fill to underside of stabilizing base course. Compact each

layer of fill material at 2% wet of OMC to a minimum 95% of SPD per ASTM D698-78. E. Lawn and Landscaped Areas: Subsoil to top of subgrade elevation, compacted to 90% of SPD.


F. Compaction Equipment: Use compaction equipment suitable for the types of soils and materials being compacted. 1. Vibrating plate compactors. Ensure that no damage occurs to the adjacent historic

building structure. G. Ponding or flooding is not allowed for any compaction.

3.05 FINISH GRADING

A. Rough grade subsoil systematically to allow for a maximum amount of natural settlement and compaction. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, etc. in excess of 3" in size. Remove subsoil which has been contaminated with petroleum products.

B. Bring subsoil to required levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradually and blend slopes into existing areas. Maintain tolerance within .10' of required subgrade, except under building slabs where final grades shall be within 1/2" of required elevation.

C. Slope finish grade away from the building as indicated on the Drawings. D. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 6" where topsoil is to be placed and compact as specified. Provide

depth allowances for topsoil placement. 3.06 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. See UCCS Campus landscape guidelines for required amendments. B. General: Spreading of topsoil shall be the responsibility of this Section, unless arranged for

otherwise. C. Place and spread topsoil with minimum depth of 6", using suitable stockpiled, on-site material,

supplemented with imported material as required. D. Use topsoil in relatively dry state. Place during dry weather. E. Fine grade topsoil to within 1" of finish contours unless otherwise required for areas receiving sod,

mulch or other landscape treatment, eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive drainage. Maintain levels, profiles and contours of subgrades to tie new work into existing.

F. Remove stones, roots, grass, weeds, debris and other foreign materials while spreading. G. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants and buildings to prevent compaction and damage

which may be caused by grading equipment. H. Do not change elevation of finish grade around existing trees to remain more than 6" without

specific approval of the Architect. I. Lightly compact placed topsoil and leave prepared for soil preparation and seeding specified in

other Sections of Division 2. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Compaction Control: Field tests shall be conducted to determine compliance of compaction methods with specified density in accordance with: 1. ASTM D2922 (AASHTO T238): Tests for Density of Soil and Soil - Aggregate In-Place by

Nuclear Methods, or, 2. ASTM D1556 (AASHTO T191): Tests for Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone Method. 3. ASTM D2167 (AASHTO T205): Tests for Density of Soil In-Place by Rubber-Balloon Method.

B. Compaction shall be to the minimum densities specified in paragraph 3.06 above. C. Moisture Content: Compact soils within +/- 2% of optimum moisture. Add water, harrow, disc,

blade or otherwise work material as required to insure uniform moisture content and adequate protection.



3.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified tolerances until Substantial Completion and acceptance of the work of this Section by UCCS.

B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, or where topsoil has been compacted in excess of the specified limits, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density prior to further construction.

3.09 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Excess Fill: Remove and waste excess materials on site as directed by UCCS.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02230 – SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section includes work related to the demolition, destruction, removal and disposal of structures, including foundations, signs, pavement, abandoned pipelines, sidewalk, curbs, gutters, lights, fencing, vegetation and any other obstructions which are not designated to remain. It shall also include the salvaging of designated materials and backfilling the resulting trenches, holes and pits.

B. Any items specifically indicated to be re-used or designated to be salvaged for OWNER=S

own purposes shall be carefully removed, and relocated to designated storage areas. CONTRACTOR shall protect salvaged equipment and materials from weather, staining, construction damage, theft, and vandalism. The CONTRACTOR shall be held responsible for the safekeeping of all material. The CONTRACTOR shall make good or replace at his own expense any such materials damaged, stolen or otherwise lost prior to receipt by the OWNER or reset into project.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract and other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 02300 Earth Moving. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall diligently protect existing structures and property of the OWNER while proceeding with the work of this section and the entire contract. All damage shall be repaired at once to the satisfaction of the OWNER. All such repairs shall be at the expense of the CONTRACTOR and no claims for additional payment will be accepted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. AFlowable-Fill@ shall meet the following requirements:

INGREDIENTS LBS./C.Y. Cement 42 (0.47 sack) Water 325 (39 gallons or as needed) Coarse Aggregate (Size No. 57) 1700 Sand (ASTM C-33) 1845

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMOLITION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

B3PE UCCS 02230 - 1

B3PE UCCS 02230 - 2

A. SALVAGE: Coordinate with OWNER on salvage of any equipment, materials or products

prior to demolition.

B. UTILITIES: Locate all utilities within project limits. Coordinate with OWNER and utility company for utility disruptions. Disconnect, cap or seal off utilities to be removed.

C. STRUCTURE REMOVAL BENEATH BUILDINGS: structures that are in the way of new building

and within 10 feet of the building perimeter shall be removed completely.

D. STRUCTURE REMOVAL OUTSIDE BUILDINGS: Structures not in the way of proposed construction, but designated to be demolished or removed shall be removed to a point three feet below existing or proposed grade, whichever is lower. 1. If the remaining structures are pipes, the CONTRACTOR shall fill any open ends of the

pipe with Aflowable-fill@ or the CONTRACTOR has the option to remove the pipe in its entirety.

2. Any other remaining structure shall be backfilled and compacted in accordance with specification Section 31 20 00.

E. PARTIAL STRUCTURE REMOVAL: Where portions of structures are to be removed, the

remaining portions shall be prepared to fit new construction. The materials left in place shall be protected from damage. All damage to portions of structure to remain in place shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at his expense. Where old construction abuts new construction, edges of pavement, sidewalks, curbs, etc., to be left in place shall be saw cut to a true line with a vertical face. All cuts into concrete shall be full depth unless the reinforcing steel is to be reused in which case the cut shall be to the depth of reinforcing.

F. DISPOSAL: Broken concrete, asphalt, rubble or any other debris may not be used in the

backfill. Remove and haul any demolished material away from the site and properly dispose of.

G. Use mechanical equipment to perform demolition. Do not blast unless prior written

permission has been obtained from OWNER and ENGINEER.

END OF SECTION 02230

SECTION 02300

EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract, and other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Objective: The work covered in this specification consists of excavating, removing, filling, and compacting embankment for and adjacent to the site, in accordance with these specifications and in conformance with the dimensions and typical sections shown on the plans and with the lines and grades established by the plans.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Sections 02230 Site Clearing; 02500 Trenching, Backfilling,

Compacting. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

A. WATER: The CONTRACTOR shall be cognizant and responsible for the acceptance and control of storm flows and ground water in and entering trenches and excavation areas. Maintain the excavations and site free from water throughout the work. Utilize pumps as required to remove water from trenches and excavations. Dispose of water in a legal and safe manner. The CONTRACTOR will consider in his bid all costs associated with controlling the water flows for all construction. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for obtaining any needed permits for the discharge of groundwater, if site conditions warrant.

B. SOILS: The CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly familiarize himself with the field conditions and

anticipate the potential variation in methods required to excavate, handle, waste, place, and compact the material as required by these specifications and the location and amount of groundwater which is to be expected. The CONTRACTOR is cautioned to make such independent soil investigations as he deems necessary to satisfy himself as to the subsurface conditions to be encountered in the performance of the work.

C. UTILITIES: The CONTRACTOR shall at all times take extreme and proper precautions for the

protection of utility lines, the presence of which are known or can be determined by the examination of appropriate maps of the OWNER or utility companies. Prior to construction, the CONTRACTOR shall contact the OWNER, private locate company, and any applicable local utility companies for field location of utilities within the construction limits. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the repair of any damaged service or utility lines, and any utility line damaged by construction operations shall be repaired at the CONTRACTOR's expense and in compliance with the requirements of the public utility company or the OWNER.

D. CONSTRUCTION STAKING: The CONTRACTOR shall provide the field survey work for the project

construction, including horizontal and vertical control. Benchmarks for the site are indicated on the construction plans. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully preserve the benchmarks. If the benchmarks are destroyed, the CONTRACTOR shall be charged with the expense for replacement and will be responsible for any errors or loss of time that the project may experience as a result.

E. SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS: Protect from damage or restore to their original conditions all surface

improvements encountered during construction. Said improvements shall include but not be limited to

B3PE UCCS 02300-1

the following: sidewalks, curbs, valley gutters, trees and shrubs, sod, landscape rock, other surface vegetation, driveways, mailboxes, utilities, signs, or other improvements.

F. SHEETING, SHORING AND BRACING: Except where banks are cut back on a stable slope, furnish,

place and maintain all sheeting, shoring and bracing necessary to protect adjoining grades, improvements and structures from caving, sliding, erosion or other damage, and suitable forms of protection against bodily injury, all in accordance with applicable codes of governing authorities. The adequacy of any sheeting, shoring or bracing shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

G. EROSION PREVENTION: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the prevention of erosion at

the project site. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for obtaining any needed permits from the State relative to erosion prevention or storm water discharges associated with construction activity, if site conditions warrant.

H. DUST: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the prevention or alleviation of dust generated

from the project site operations. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for obtaining any needed permits from the County, City or State relative to air quality or fugitive dust, if site conditions warrant.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following, if needed: 1. Imported Fill. 2. Imported Select Fill.

B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.


A. In accordance with these specifications the Soil Engineer shall evaluate earth material prior to its use, the methods of placing, and the degree of compaction obtained for compliance with the intent of the contract documents.

B. The Soil Engineer shall be the OWNER's representative for all excavation, compacted fill, and/or

compacted backfill on the project. The soil engineer shall approve all earth material prior to its use, the methods of placing, and the degree of compaction obtained.

C. The OWNER shall employ an independent testing agency to perform testing throughout the project.

The OWNER shall pay for the initial tests. Any retests required for work done by the CONTRACTOR which failed shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING: Organic materials, root mat, soils and other deleterious material unsuitable for embankment construction shall be removed prior to site grading. All material removed in stripping and all material containing perishable matter such as roots, sod, grass, decayed vegetable matter, debris, or materials having unsatisfactory compaction characteristics shall be classified as unsuitable for use in the work. All excavation of unsuitable material shall be removed from the site and shall be disposed of by the CONTRACTOR.

B. TOPSOIL: Topsoil shall consist of selectively excavated, loose, friable loam reasonably free of

admixtures of subsoil, refuse, stumps, roots, rocks, brush, weeds, or other material which would be detrimental to the proper development of vegetative growth.

B3PE UCCS 02300-2

C. EXISTING ON-SITE FILL: Existing on-site fill was previously placed on the site in an uncontrolled manner to construct parking areas and landscape slopes. Considered unsuitable for support of foundations, wall backfill, and slabs on grade. May be used as structural fill underneath exterior concrete flatwork or general overlot fill provided all debris, oversize material (greater than 6 inches) and organic matter is removed.

D. NATIVE SANDS: Onsite excavated native granular materials will generally be usable for fills and

embankment construction with drying, wetting or other reworking as necessary to obtain conformance to the drawings and specifications. May be used as structural fill beneath concrete floor slab or as wall backfill. The Soil Engineer must approve all materials before use.

E. BEDROCK: Onsite sandstone and claystone bedrock, medium hard to very hard. Utilizing heavy duty

excavation equipment should be anticipated when excavations extend into hard to very hard bedrock. May be placed in landscape areas.

F. IMPORTED SELECT FILL: Granular, non-expansive soil with 100 percent passing the 2 inch sieve

size, and between 10 to 30 percent passing the No. 200 sieve; a liquid limit of 30 percent or less, and a plasticity index of 10 percent or less. The Soil Engineer must approve all materials before use.

G. IMPORTED FILL: Granular, non-expansive soil, free of organic matter, and containing no material

over 2 inches in greatest dimension. The Soil Engineer must approve all materials before use. H. UNSUITABLE MATERIALS: All material removed in stripping and all material containing perishable

matter such as roots, sod, grass, decayed vegetable matter, debris, or materials having unsatisfactory compaction characteristics shall be classified as unsuitable for use in the work. All excavation of unsuitable material shall be removed from the site and shall be disposed of by the CONTRACTOR.

Materials which are temporarily unusable due to excessive moisture or improper gradation will not be

classified as unsuitable unless such material cannot be satisfactorily reclaimed by screening, manipulation, aerating, or blending with other materials as determined by the Soil Engineer.

I. UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION: When unauthorized excavations are made below indicated

elevations, restore to proper elevations as specified for compacted backfill. No additional payments shall be made for unauthorized excavation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. UTILITIES: Verify existing public and private utility locations. Contact utility locating service and Campus staff for area where project is located. Complete abandonment and or relocation of existing facilities prior to beginning earthwork activities.

B. SITE CLEARING AND STRIPPING: All areas to be occupied by permanent construction,

embankments or to be excavated shall be cleared and stripped of all surface vegetation, organic topsoil, trees, roots, pavements, curbs, and other objectionable materials and debris that might interfere with the proper bonding of the embankment or proper compaction, or that may be otherwise objectionable as determined by the Soil Engineer. All other waste materials shall be removed from the site and disposed of by and at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.

1. Suitable topsoil from the stripping operation shall be stockpiled for use in top soiling operations, if available. Topsoil stockpiled for later use in the work shall be stored where directed by the OWNER.

C. HILLSIDES: Where steep slopes are on or adjacent to the site, the CONTRACTOR shall construct

temporary fencing or controls to keep excavation or other materials from rolling off of the work area. Steep slopes shall be considered 25% or greater.

B3PE UCCS 02300-3

D. WATER: CONTRACTOR shall control stormwater flows and ground water from entering trenches and

excavation areas. Surface flows shall be redirected away from excavation areas. Install dewatering system if groundwater is present during excavation.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate to subgrade elevations as indicated on the plans. Extend excavations beyond structure to allow for formwork and other construction to occur.

B. The excavations shall be finished to reasonably smooth and uniform surfaces. C. Excavation operations shall be conducted so that material outside of the limit of slopes will not be

disturbed. D. Segregation of the on-site native sands from the on-site fill will be required during excavation.

Stockpiles shall be protected from surface water and covered to prevent dust. E. Bedrock: The bottom of slab-on-grade floors shall be situated at least 6 feet above the bedrock on the

site. Over-excavation may be required to provide 6 feet of separation between the bottom of the slab and the underlying bedrock.

F. Notify the soil engineer when excavations have reached the required subgrade. 1. Where excavation to the finished graded section results in a subgrade or slopes of unsuitable soil,

the Soil Engineer may require the CONTRACTOR to remove the unsuitable material and backfill to the finished graded section with approved material.

2. Whenever excavation below subgrade elevation to remove muck or other material is ordered by the Soil Engineer, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the same to the satisfaction of the Soils Engineer and shall replace it with satisfactory material in layers not to exceed eight (8) inches in thickness and shall thoroughly compact each layer before the next layer is placed.

3.3 SUBGRADE

A. Prior to placement of fill, the exposed subgrade soils shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches, moisture conditioned and compacted.

3.4 PLACEMENT OF FILL

A. Embankments shall be formed of satisfactory materials placed in successive horizontal layers of not more than eight (8) inches in loose depth for the full width of the cross section. The material in the layers shall be of the proper moisture content before rolling to obtain the prescribed compaction. Wetting or drying of the material and manipulation to secure uniform moisture content throughout the layer shall be required.

B. No fill shall be placed on frosted or frozen ground. Frozen material shall not be used in construction of

embankments or for backfilling trenches or structures. Frozen ground should be allowed to thaw or be completely removed prior to placement of fill.

C. The earthwork operations shall be suspended at any time when satisfactory results cannot be

obtained on account of rain, freezing weather, or other unsatisfactory conditions of the field. At all times, the CONTRACTOR shall drag, blade or slope the embankment to provide proper surface drainage.

D. Should the material be too wet to permit proper compaction or rolling, all work on all portions of the

embankment thus affected shall be delayed until the material has dried to the required moisture content. Sprinkling shall be done with sprinkling wagons, pressure distributors, or other approved

B3PE UCCS 02300-4

equipment that will sufficiently distribute the water. Sufficient equipment to furnish the required water shall be available at all times.

E. During construction of the embankment, the CONTRACTOR shall route his equipment at all times,

both when loaded and when empty, over the layers as they are placed and shall distribute the travel evenly over the entire width of the embankment. The compacting equipment shall be of such design, weight and quantity to obtain the required density.

F. In the construction of the embankments, starting layers shall be placed in the deepest portion of the

fill, and, as placement progresses, layers shall be constructed approximately parallel to the finished grade line. Plow, step or bench sloped surfaces steeper than 4 to 1 on which fill or backfill is to be placed in such manner that fill material will adequately bond with existing surfaces. Fill shall be finished to reasonably smooth and uniform surfaces.

G. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the stability of all embankments made under the contract

and shall replace any portion which, in the opinion of the OWNER or ENGINEER, has become displaced due to carelessness or negligence on the part of the CONTRACTOR.

H. Do not place fill around, against or upon any structure until the structure has attained sufficient

strength to withstand the imposed loads, or until the related work has been completed and accepted. I. Immediately prior to placing building floor slabs, pavements or sidewalks, shape the areas to the

required lines, grades and limits to provide finish elevations indicated and roll with an approved heavy vibratory roller until compacted as specified. Maintain optimum moisture content during final rolling and until subgrade is covered by subsequent construction. Remove loose material and protect subgrade until covered.

J. Disposal of Excess Material: It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to remove and

dispose of all excess material off the site. 3.5 COMPACTION

A. Compact fill materials to the following densities (ASTM D1557): Fill Location Percent Compaction Moisture Content Concrete Floor Slab-on-Grade 95% min. +/- 2% of optimum Wall Backfill 92% min. +/- 2% of optimum Exterior Flatwork 92% min. +/- 2% of optimum Utility Trenches 92% min. +/- 2% of optimum Pavement Areas 92% min. +/- 2% of optimum Non-structural/Landscape 85% min. +/- 2% of optimum

B. Perform all compaction with approved equipment well suited to location and material being

compacted. Use heavy vibratory rollers where heavy equipment is authorized. C. Do not operate heavy equipment closer to foundations than a horizontal distance equal to height of

backfill above bottom of foundation. Compact remaining area with hand tampers suitable for material being compacted. Place and compact backfill around pipes with care to avoid damage.

D. Notify testing agency as required, and allow agency to inspect and test. Rework areas that do not

meet requirements until compaction meets the requirements. 3.6 WATERING

A. This item shall consist of furnishing and applying water required in the compaction of embankment, trench backfill, and for other purposes as directed by the Soil Engineer.

B3PE UCCS 02300-5

B. Water, when required, shall be applied at the locations and in the amounts as directed by the Soil Engineer. The equipment used for watering shall be of ample capacity and of such design as to assure uniform application of water in the amounts directed by the Soil Engineer.

C. No payment will be made separately or directly for watering on any part of the work. All watering will

be considered a necessary and incidental part of the work, and the cost thereof shall be considered by the CONTRACTOR and included in the unit cost of compacting embankment and structural backfill.

D. The amount of water used in compaction shall be sufficient to obtain the percent relative compaction

required for each soil class encountered. The amount of water may be varied by the Soil Engineer to meet changing moisture conditions as exist throughout the job.

3.7 SOIL STERILIZATION

A. Apply soil sterilant or herbicide, when indicated on the plans, uniformly at the manufacture=s recommended rate to:

1. Compacted subgrade prior to the placement of aggregate base or sand. 2. Beneath concrete slabs-on-grade, including sidewalks. 3. On-grade slabs adjacent to building slabs for a distance not less than 3 feet from the building. 4. Below expansion or control joints. 5. Areas where pipe, ducts, or other features penetrate slabs.

3.8 SURFACE RESTORATION

A. FINISH GRADING: Uniformly smooth grade all areas covered by the project, including excavated

sections, filled sections, and adjacent transition areas. Make finished surfaces reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes.

1. Grading between established elevations shall be uniform and gradual. 2. Landscape areas within 10 feet of the structure should slope away at a minimum of 8%. 3. Paved areas adjacent to the structure should slope away at a minimum of 2%. B. TOLERANCES: 1. Excavation and embankments for the site grading shall be graded to within +/-0.1= (1@) of the

elevation as shown on the drawings. 2. Finish grading adjacent to sidewalks, curbs and other surface features shall be: a. 1" below for sod b. 3/4" below for seeded areas c. 1 2" below for ground cover areas

END OF SECTION

B3PE UCCS 02300-6

B3PE UCCS 02500 - 1

SECTION 02500

TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included: This section covers site preparation, earthwork, trenching, backfilling, compacting and surface restoration for underground pipelines, and appurtenances shown on the drawings and required by the specifications.

B. Related Work:

1. Quality Control. 2. Colorado Springs Utilities Water Line Extension and Service Standards, latest edition. 3. City of Colorado Springs - City Engineering Division General Provisions Standard Specifications.


A. Maintain all backfill and resurfacing in a satisfactory condition for a period of one year after final acceptance by the OWNER.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Surface Improvements: Protect from damage or restore to their original conditions all surface improvements encountered during trenching or construction. Said improvements shall include but not be limited to the following: surfacing; sidewalks; curbs; valley gutters; trees and shrubs; other surface vegetation; driveways; mailboxes; utilities; signs; or other improvements.

B. Notify ENGINEER of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue work in affected area until

notification to resume work.

C. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from frost.

D. Underground Obstructions: 1. Protect from damage any underground pipes, utilities or structures encountered during

construction. Restore any damaged underground obstructions to their original condition at no cost to the OWNER unless evidence of other arrangements satisfactory to all parties is presented to the OWNER.

2. Before commencing work, obtain information concerning location, type and extent of concealed existing utilities on the site and adjacent properties. Consult records and personnel of local utility companies, municipal utility departments and telephone company. File Notice of Excavation with these agencies prior to commencing work.

3. Underground obstructions known to the ENGINEER, are shown on the drawings or otherwise referred to in the specification. The locations shown may prove to be inaccurate, and other obstructions not shown may be encountered. In any case, it shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to protect or restore all underground obstructions encountered.

4. Conduct exploratory excavations and pot-holing as noted on the plans and as required to confirm proposed pipeline corridor is clear prior to commencing construction. a. No excavation shall occur until utility locates have been provided by Utility Notification Center

of Colorado. b. No excavation shall occur outside the area covered by utility locates. c. CONTRACTOR shall acquire all necessary permits, excavate all materials to expose utilities,

survey the location (horizontal and vertical) of the utilities, and backfill the excavation to existing grade lines with the excavated material or other approved materials. CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify verbally and in writing the ENGINEER and OWNER if utilities are discovered that are not on the plans or in a position different from that shown on the plans.

B3PE UCCS 02500 - 2

d. CONTRACTOR shall use extreme caution during this work. All damage to existing utility lines or adjacent facilities shall be repaired promptly at the CONTRACTOR=S expense, and in accordance with requirements of damaged utility.

E. When construction operations are located within streets, make provisions at cross streets and walks

for free passage of vehicles and pedestrians by bridging or other approved methods. Do not block streets or walks without prior approval.

F. Water: The CONTRACTOR shall be cognizant and responsible for the acceptance and control of

storm flows and ground water in and entering trenches and excavation areas. Such water may be utilized for construction except for use in concrete mixes or as otherwise directed by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR will consider in his bid all costs associated with controlling the water flows for all construction.

G. Soils: The CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly familiarize himself with the field conditions and anticipate

the potential variation in methods required to excavate, handle, waste, place, and compact the material as required by these specifications and the location and amount of groundwater which is to be expected. The CONTRACTOR is cautioned to make such independent soil investigations as he deems necessary to satisfy himself as to the subsurface conditions to be encountered in the performance of the work.

H. Sheeting, Shoring and Bracing: Except where banks are cut back on a stable slope, provide and

maintain all sheeting necessary to protect adjoining grades and structures from caving, sliding, erosion or other damage, and suitable forms of protection against bodily injury, all in accordance with applicable codes of governing authorities.

I. DUST: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the prevention or alleviation of dust generated

from the project site operations. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for obtaining any needed permits from the County, City or State relative to air quality or fugitive dust, if site conditions warrant.

J. EROSION PREVENTION: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the prevention of erosion at

the project site. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for obtaining any needed permits from the State relative to erosion prevention or storm water discharges associated with construction activity, if site conditions warrant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STABILIZATION, BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIALS

A. Materials shall be provided in accordance with Colorado Springs Utilities Wastewater Line

Extension and Service Standards, latest edition and the City of Colorado Springs - City Engineering Division General Provisions Standard Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify those areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice, or water, and that the ground surface is not frozen.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

B. Clearing: 1. Remove all stumps, roots, brush, other vegetation, and debris from areas that will be

disturbed by the construction operations. 2. Legally dispose of all cleared materials at public or private dumping areas off the OWNER's

B3PE UCCS 02500 - 3

property. 3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. Excavation: 1. No classification of excavated materials will be made. Perform excavation of every

description and of whatever substance encountered to the depths indicated or as otherwise specified.

2. Trenching: Excavate trenches by open cut except where tunneling is indicated on plans or considered necessary and proper by the ENGINEER. The pipe must be safely and properly installed and backfill properly tamped in the tunnel sections.

3. Stockpiling Excavated Material: a. Pile suitable material for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from banks

of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins. b. Remove any waste excavated materials not suitable or not required for backfilling off the

site. 4. Excavation to Grade: Accurately grade trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and

support for each section of pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length, except portions of pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for bell holes and for proper sealing of pipe joints. Remove stones as necessary to avoid point bearing.

5. Bell Holes: Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after trench bottom has been graded. Bell holes and depressions shall be only of such length, depth and width as required for properly making the particular type of joint. The use of earth mounds for bedding the pipe will not be allowed.

6. Unstable Pipe Subgrade: Whenever wet or otherwise unstable material that is incapable of supporting pipe is encountered in the bottom of the trench, over excavate such material to a depth suitable for construction of a stable pipe bedding. Bed pipe to proper grade with compacted granular material and stabilization material, if necessary. Backfill of trench will be select fill.

7. Limiting Trench Widths: a. Excavate trenches to provide adequate working space and pipe clearances for proper

pipe installation, jointing and embedment. Provide a minimum clearance of 6 inches on each side of the pipe for pipe 12 inches in diameter or less, 8 inches for pipe between 14 inches and 30 inches in diameter and 12 inches for pipe larger than 30 inches in diameter.

b. Maximum trench width measured at the top of the pipe shall not exceed the outside diameter of the pipe plus 24 inches for pipe 24 inches in diameter or smaller and plus 30 inches for pipe larger than 24 inches.

8. Excavation for Appurtenances: Make excavations for manholes, vaults and similar structures sufficient to leave at least 12 inches clear space between outer surface of structure and the bank shoring material that may be used to hold and protect the banks.

B. Bedding Pipe:

1. Place material under and around the pipe as shown on the drawings using the bedding material specified or as indicated by CSU inspector.

2. Employ a placement method so as not to disturb or damage pipe. 3. Support pipe during placement and compaction of bedding fill. 4. Hand chink bedding around and under pipe to compact bedding material around the

haunches of the pipe.

C. Backfilling: 1. Backfill to contours and elevations. Do not backfill over porous, wet or spongy subgrade

surfaces. Backfill as early as possible. 2. Place and compact select fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches loose

depth. 3. Place and compact common fill material in continuous layers. 4. Remove surplus backfill materials. 5. Leave stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.

B3PE UCCS 02500 - 4

6. Water, when required, shall be applied at the locations and in the amounts as directed by the Soil Engineer. The equipment used for watering shall be of ample capacity and of such design as to assure uniform application of water in the amounts directed by the Soil Engineer. No payment will be made separately or directly for watering on any part of the work.

D. Compaction:

1. In general, backfill shall be mechanically compacted by means of tamping rollers, sheeps foot rollers, pneumatic tire rollers, vibrating rollers, or other mechanical tampers.

2. Within 1 foot of the top of the pipe, care should be taken to avoid damage to the pipe through compaction.

3. Compaction shall be provided in accordance with Colorado Springs Utilities Wastewater Line Extension and Service Standards, latest edition and the City of Colorado Springs - City Engineering Division General Provisions Standard Specifications.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Density Testing and Control: Refer to Quality Control.

B. Soil Compaction Tests shall be provided in accordance with Colorado Springs Utilities Wastewater Line Extension and Service Standards, latest edition and the City of Colorado Springs - City Engineering Division General Provisions Standard Specifications.

3.05 SURFACE RESTORATION

A. Final Grading: Fine grade all areas disturbed by the construction operations after completion of backfilling and compacting. Areas which are to receive pavements, surfacing, topsoil, or landscaping shall be graded as required to allow installation of the specific surface treatment. Grade all other areas to match the existing ground line.

B. Surface Improvement Repair and Replacement: Replace and repair any surface improvements

damaged or removed. Meet the requirements specified for the particular type of improvement to be repaired or replaced in accordance with City of Colorado Springs - City Engineering Division General Provisions Standard Specifications.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02510 – WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and specialties outside the building for the

following: 1. Water mains (public and private) and services. 2. Fire service mains.

B. New installation, replacement/repair or relocation of existing facilities or any other work involving the Colorado Springs Utilities (CSU) water distribution system shall be done only with CSU approved plans, inspected and approved by a CSU Inspector. This shall include any work performed on both Public and Private mains, including service lines.

C, CSU furnished products include water meters. All service taps shall be tapped by CSU. The Contractor is responsible for the excavation of the tapping hole in a safe manner, barricading the hole, backfilling and compacting the hole.

D. Owner shall pay all Development and Tap fees to CSU prior to commencing construction. E. Related Sections: 1. Section 02500 Pipeline Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting

1.2 REFERENCES A. Colorado Springs Utilities “Water Line Extension and Service Standards”, latest edition. The

standards of CSU shall take precedence over the information contained within this specification and the details shown on the plans in the case of discrepancies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for the following: 1. Piping specialties. 2. Valves and accessories 3. Fire hydrants. 4. Blow-off Assemblies. 5. Fire department connections.

B. Shop Drawings: As required by CSU.

C. Coordination Drawings: For building entrance of all piping. Show piping, valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations.

D. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: As required by the CSU and Quality Control.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures” and “Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following

1. Valves. 2. Fire hydrants.

B3PE UCCS 02510 - 1

3. Blow-off Assemblies. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.

2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.

3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. VALVES, HYDRANT & APPURTENANCES: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to

the following: 1. Ensure that valves and hydrants are dry and internally protected against rust and

corrosion. Protect against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. Set valves and hydrants in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

2. Protect from weather during storage. Support off the ground or pavement. 3. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane

or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

B. PIPING: Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,

storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless

permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services and fire protection according to requirements indicated.

1. Notify Owner and CSU not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s permission. 1.7 COORDINATION A. PRIVATE VALVE OPERATION: Do not operate any of the valves on the private water main

system on the UCCS Campus without prior arrangement with the OWNER. Meet with the OWNER to determine what portion of the private water system will be affected by the proposed project. Develop a sequence of work which delineates water services (fire and domestic) to be interrupted by project, duration of interruptions, and include a valve sequencing plan.

B. Coordinate all water main installations, meter requirements and inspections with CSU.

B3PE UCCS 02510 - 2

B3PE UCCS 02510 - 3

C. Coordinate connection requirements at building interface for domestic and fire services between site contractor and building plumbing installer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 All water main products shall meet the requirements of Colorado Springs Utilities as outlined in

the Water Line Extension and Service Standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All water main products shall be installed according to the requirements of Colorado Springs Utilities as outlined in the Water Line Extension and Service Standards.


SECTION 02515 EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install exterior concrete paving, extent as shown on the Drawings, unless furnished under Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. Work shall include but is not limited to: 1. Concrete aprons and pavements at handicapped vehicle parking areas, complete with

reinforcing. 2. Concrete plazas, terraces and other areas of decorative exterior concrete flatwork. 3. Concrete stoops, ramps and miscellaneous exterior concrete work not included in other

Sections of these Specifications, complete with required reinforcing. B. All applicable portions of the following shall be considered as included with this Section:

1. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcing. 3. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Scarify and compact subgrade under concrete paving, unless arranged for otherwise. D. Furnish and place granular sub-base under slabs, patio terraces and other flatwork. E. Finishing and application of integral surfacing as scheduled, curing and sealing of slabs and other

flatwork. F. Furnishing and placing joint materials. G. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.

1.02 SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Information: No Geotechnical Soils Report has been prepared for the property. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards: Standards and requirements specified under Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete, shall apply to this Section, except as otherwise modified. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. City of Colorado Springs Standard Specifications for Streets and Roads are hereby incorporated into

these Specifications in their entirety, unless modified by this Section. 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Inspection and testing will be performed as specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Mix Designs: Submittals shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.


1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Requirements for concreting in hot and cold weather and other environmental conditions shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver reinforcement to site in strongly tied bundles with metal tags corresponding to bar schedules and diagrams. Store on the site free of rust, scale, oil or other coating. Store bars off the ground and protect from moisture, dirt, oil or deleterious coatings.

B. If concreting is delayed for any considerable period of time after reinforcing is in place, it shall be protected by suitable covering.

C. Protect exposed reinforcement intended for bonding with future extensions by suitable covering. D. Store cement in watertight enclosures and protect against dampness, contamination and warehouse

set. E. Stockpile aggregates to prevent excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or

other sizes of aggregates. Use only one (1) supply source for each aggregate stockpile. F. Store admixtures to prevent contamination, evaporation or damage. Protect liquid admixtures

from freezing or harmful temperature ranges. G. Allow a maximum of 90 minutes between the time water is added and the time the concrete is

completely placed. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. General: All materials shall be in conformance with the standard specifications of UCCS or the City of Colorado Springs.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150; normal, Type II. C. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand conforming to ASTM C33. D. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Clean, strong crushed gravel or stone conforming to

ASTM C33. Gradation shall be as specified under concrete mixes. E. Water: Clean, fresh potable supply, free from oil, acid, alkali, organic materials or other

deleterious substances. F. Admixtures: Use only when specified or approved by the Architect/Engineer.

1. Air-Entraining Agent: ASTM C260, manufactured by Master Builders MBVR, Sika AER, Grace Darex AEA, Protex or equal.

2. Non-Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E. 3. Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B or D. 4. Water Reducer: ASTM C494, Type A, manufactured by Master Builders Pozzo-Lith, Grace

WRDA, Protex PDA 25XL, Sika Plastocrete or equal. 5. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 6. Calcium Chloride, or admixtures containing calcium chloride, is specifically prohibited. 7. Color Additive: ______________________ by Davis Colors, or approved equal. Provide

colored concrete where shown or scheduled on the Drawings. Color to be selected from manufacturer’s full line of colors.

8. Fiber Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200 and paragraph 3.05 of this Section. 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Bars: ASTM A615-B2, 60 KSI grade, deformed billet steel bars, plain finish, as indicated on the Drawings. Bars shall be free of scale or other bond-reducing coatings. 1. Ties, stirrups and field bent bars, #3 or smaller may be ASTM A615, 40 KSI grade.


B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 or A497, plain type in flat sheets, plain finish, welded intersections, in sizes as indicated on the Drawings. Use of coiled rolls shall only be permitted when approved by the Engineer.

C. Steel Wire: Provide plain cold-drawn wire conforming to ASTM A82. D. Fiber Reinforcing: Collated, fibrillated polypropylene fiber, Fiber Mesh I, Fiber Mesh, Inc.,

Chattanooga, TN, or equal. 2.03 FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Accessories shall be of suitable type conforming to ACI 315 and shall include spacers, chairs, tie bars, support bars and all other devices for properly assembling, placing and supporting reinforcement, weight of concrete and workmen without displacement of reinforcement. Wood, brick, block, concrete chips and other non-metallic devices are not acceptable.

B. Exterior Concrete Flatwork: For concrete slab-on-grade use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. Concrete brickets for support of reinforcement for slabs-on-grade shall be at least 2" wide x 3" long and of proper height.

C. Formwork: Matched, tight fitting and adequately stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of concrete. Also refer to Section 03100.

D. Isolation Joint Filler: As specified in Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 2.04 HARDENING, SEALING AND FINISH MATERIALS

A. General: Apply all hardening, sealing and finishing treatments in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to the Schedule in Section 03300 for specific applications. Supplier/Installer of slab finish materials shall certify that materials specified and/or furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications, for the following criteria: 1. Compatibility of finish material with concrete mix specified. 2. Compatibility of finish material with type and degree of weather exposure. 3. Compatibility of finish material with expected use. 4. Compatibility of finish material with expected exposure to chemical, acid, oil, fat or other

deleterious material.


A. If subgrade and backfill work has been performed by others, inspect the work for trueness of grades, compaction and depth of base material. Report any deficiencies or inconsistencies with the Drawings and Specifications to the Contractor. Ensure proper moisture content of subgrade just prior to placement of base course and concrete. Do not install concrete over soil or base which is unstable or frozen. Proceeding with installation of concrete work shall indicate acceptance of site conditions.

B. Surfaces shall be true to line and grade and free from loose earth, frost, ice, mud and standing or running water. Protect bottom of excavation against freezing. Do not deposit concrete against frozen ground.

C. Scarify subgrade where asphalt and/or concrete pavement is to be placed, to a depth of minimum 6" and compact to 95% SPD, ASTM D698-78 at 2% wet of optimum moisture content.

D. Notify any trades that may have items to be embedded in concrete or that may require openings in concrete. Coordinate work to avoid cutting of concrete and to avoid delays in the work.

E. Make all preparations required for protection of concrete during placing and curing under detrimental weather conditions.

F. Notify the Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours prior to placing any concrete. Do not deposit any concrete before the Architect/Engineer has inspected reinforcement and other work in place and


given permission to proceed. Such inspection and permission to proceed shall in no way relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for proper placement of reinforcement and placing of concrete and of responsibility for adherence to other requirements of the Construction Documents.

G. Form and install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, except as amended by this Section. Concrete formwork shall be as specified in Section 03100.

3.02 PLACING REINFORCING

A. Reinforce concrete sections as indicated on the Drawings or as specified in Section 03200. Allow for minimum 1-1/2" concrete cover.

3.03 PLACING FIBER REINFORCING

A. General: Place fiber reinforcing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 1. 1-1/2 lbs. per cu. yd., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.

B. Fiber reinforcing shall be placed as scheduled in Section 03200. 3.04 FORMING JOINTS

A. Control Joints at Concrete Aprons and Slabs: Formed to produce weakened joint minimum 1/4 of slab thickness. Place longitudinal and transverse joints spaced uniformly as shown on the Drawings. Joints shall be cut within 24 hours of pouring, at earliest point concrete is accessible without causing chipping at the control joints. Joints wider than 1/4" shall be cleaned and sealed before opening to traffic.

B. Control Joints at Plazas, Terraces and Other Flatwork: Same as specified for slabs, spacing as noted on the Drawings, but in no case greater than the following: 1. Exterior Concrete Flatwork: Pattern as shown on the Drawings, but in no case greater than

15'-0" x 15'-0". C. Isolation or Expansion Joints: Joints shall be full depth of slab, recessed 1/2" below finished

concrete surface. Provide at all joints between slabs and vertical surfaces or as indicated on the Drawings. Place joint filler as specified in Section 03100 and leave joint recess clean to receive sealants specified in Section 07900.

3.05 DESIGN MIXES

A. General: Concrete mixes shall be as itemized on the Drawings or specified herein or in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Concrete which does not meet the minimum requirements for strength at 28 days shall be reviewed and is subject to removal at the option of the Architect.

C. Proportion normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 211.1. Concrete for all parts of the work shall be of the specified quality, capable of being placed without excessive segregation and, when hardened, of developing all characteristics required by these specifications and the contract documents. Proportion ingredients to produce a mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcements, by the methods of placing and consolidation employed on the work.

D. Design mixes shall be made and reported by an approved testing laboratory for each class of concrete, at the Contractor's expense.

E. Design mixes shall contain all admixtures required by these specifications and/or proposed by the Contractor to be used in concrete.

F. Concrete Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200 and as specified herein. G. Concrete Testing: Refer to Section 03300.

3.06 PLACING CONCRETE


A. General: Place Portland Cement concrete paving materials in accordance with the standard

specifications of the City of Colorado Springs. 1. Pavement and Slab Thicknesses: Parking and Patio Areas Drives/Loading Aprons 5" 7"

B. Subgrade temperature shall be minimum 40° at 6" depth prior to pouring concrete. C. Place concrete, screed and wood float surfaces to a smooth and uniform finish free of open

texturing and exposed aggregate. D. Where paved surfaces are adjacent to walks, make curbs and gutters integral with walks. Ensure

that joints of curbs coincide with walk joints. Provide dummy joint at line between walks and curbs.

E. Provide exposed surfaces of aprons, walks, curbs and gutters with broom finish, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

F. Apply curing compound as specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete, on finished surfaces immediately after placement. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

3.07 TOLERANCES

A. Maintain the following tolerances for all concrete site work. Defective work shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense. 1. Variation from Plumb:

a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum. b. 20' or more: 3/8" maximum.

2. Variation in Thickness: 1/4" to 1/2" standard. 3. Variation in Grade:

a. 0-10': 1/4" standard, 1/8" for slabs. b. 10-20': 3/8" standard, 1/4" for slabs. c. 40' or more: 3/4" standard, 3/8" for slabs.

4. Variation in Plan: a. 0-20': 1/2". b. 40' or more: 3/4" standard.

5. Variation in Eccentricity: 2% for footings. 6. Variation in Openings:

a. Size: + 1/8". b. Location: 1/4".

B. Exterior Slab Tolerances: 1/4" in 10'. 3.08 PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of freshly placed concrete from vandalism, accidental damage by workmen or equipment, or damage resulting from subgrade settlement or subsequent construction traffic. Take adequate precautions to restrict traffic in the area of fresh concrete during the curing period. Damaged concrete shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the Owner's discretion.

C. Comply with the requirements of ACI 305 when hot weather conditions exist. Temperature of concrete when placed shall be less than 90° F. When necessary to prevent premature drying, arrangements for installation of windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding or a wet covering of light color shall be made in advance of placement, and such protective measures shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow.



D. Comply with the requirements of ACI 306 when cold weather conditions exist. When atmospheric temperature is 40° F and below, maintain concrete temperature at not less than 50° F for at least six (6) days. When necessary, make arrangements before concrete placing for heating, covering insulation or housing as required to maintain specified temperature and moisture conditions without injury due to concentration of heat.

E. Maintain protective cover on concrete so that changes in temperatures of concrete shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5° F in any one (1) hour or 50° F in any 24-hour period.


A. Contractor shall verify all lines, levels and elevations of completed Portland Cement concrete sitework with requirements of the Drawings and approved field modifications prior to final inspection by UCCS and/or the Architect/Engineer.

B. Contractor shall correct all areas of the concrete sitework not in compliance with the Drawings or approved field modifications at no additional cost to UCCS.

C. Remove and replace defective concrete not conforming to required line, detail and elevation as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

D. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural concrete, except upon express direction of the Architect.

E. Concrete damaged after placement shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at UCCS’s discretion.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02522 – AGGREGATE WALKS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Decomposed granite paved areas.

2. Steel edging.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 3 Section "Excavation and Grading" for excavation and compacted sub-grade.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.

B. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, according to ASTM C 136.

C. Samples for aggregate paving materials.

1. 5 lb (2.2 kg) of mineral mulch for each color and texture of stone required, in labeled plastic bags for each type of material indicated.

D. Stabilizer Binder: Product information for materials.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of aggregate material from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

2. Provide minimum 3 foot x 3 foot mockup of each type of Aggregate paving.

02522 - 1 AGGREGATE WALKS

C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace work damaged by frost or freezing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATE PAVING MATERIALS

A. Aggregate Paving with Stabilizer. Decomposed granite of crushed 3/8” minus aggregate material in accordance with ASTM C 136:

Sieve Designation Percent Passing

3/8-inch 100

No. 4 95 – 100

No. 8 75 – 80

No. 16 55 – 65

No. 30 40 – 50

No. 50 25 – 35

No. 100 20 – 25

No. 200 5 – 15 1. Color. Brown or buff color.


2.2 Stabilizer Binder. Non-Toxic binder that is colorless and odorless concentrated powder that binds decomposed granite or crushed 3/8” minus aggregate together to produce a uniform, firm surface.

2.3 Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications; made from polyolefins or polyesters, with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

2.4 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS

A. Steel Edging: Standard commercial-steel edging, rolled edge, fabricated in sections of standard lengths, with loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes.

1. Edging Size: 1/8 inch wide by 6 inches deep. 2. Stakes: Tapered steel, a minimum of 15 inches long. 3. Accessories: Standard tapered ends, corners, and splicers. 4. Finish: Zinc coated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Division2 Section "Earthwork" to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with aggregated paving installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.

3.3 AGGREGATE PAVING SUB-BASE PREPARATION

A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 laboratory density.

B. Proof-roll prepared subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Owners Representative and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.



C. Place separation geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm).

3.4 AGGREGATE PAVING WITH STABILIZER

A. Blending Stabilizer Binder. Blend Stabilizer Binder per manufacturer’s recommendations. It is critical that the binder be mixed thoroughly and uniformly throughout the 3/8” minus aggregate material.

B. Placing Aggregate. Place to avoid segregation, in maximum layers of 4 inches. Compact by wetting. Roll with a hand operated power roller of type and weight as approved to obtain a dense, smooth, uniform texture.

C. Compaction. Compact each layer of aggregate to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.5 FINISHING

A. Grade smooth to required grade and crossection as shown on drawings. Surface shall be free of irregularities and/or areas that will form puddles.

3.6 INSPECTION

A. Final thickness of completed paving shall not vary more than 1/2 inch from indicated. Make measurements by means of test holes taken at random in finished paving surface. Correct any variations in the thickness beyond the allowable 1/2 inch by adding material, shaping, and compacting.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owners Representative; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.


SECTION 02530 – WASTEWATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and specialties outside the building for the following:

1. Sanitary sewer mains (public and private) and services.

B. New installation, replacement/repair or relocation of existing facilities or any other work involving the Colorado Springs Utilities (CSU) wastewater distribution system shall be done only with CSU approved plans, inspected and approved by a CSU Inspector. This shall include any work performed on both Public and Private mains, including service lines.

C. Owner shall pay all Development and Tap fees prior to commencing construction. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 02500 Pipeline Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting

1.2 REFERENCES A. Colorado Springs Utilities (CSU) “Wastewater Line Extension and Service Standards”, latest

edition. The documents of CSU shall take precedence over the information contained within this specification and the details shown on the plans in the case of discrepancies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for the following: 1. Piping 2. Manholes

B. Shop Drawings: As required by CSU.

C. Coordination Drawings: For building entrance of all piping.

D. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: As required by the CSU and Quality Control.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: comply with requirements of CSU. 1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying wastewater. 2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for piping, including materials,

installation, testing, and disinfection. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,

storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

B3PE UCCS 02530 - 1

B3PE UCCS 02530 - 2

B. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless

permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.


2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s permission. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate connection to wastewater main and inspections with CSU. B. Coordinate connection requirements at building interface between site contractor and

building plumbing installer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 All wastewater main products shall meet the requirements of Colorado Springs Utilities as

outlined in the Wastewater Line Extension and Service Standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All wastewater main products shall be installed according to the requirements of Colorado Springs Utilities as outlined in the Wastewater Line Extension and Service Standards.


SECTION 02553 – NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section includes natural gas piping outside the building.

B. New installation, replacement/repair or relocation of existing facilities or any other work

involving the Colorado Springs Utilities (CSU) natural gas distribution system shall be done only with CSU approved plans, inspected and approved by a CSU Inspector. This shall include any work performed on service lines.

C. Owner shall pay for all gas main extensions by CSU, Development and connection fees.

D. CSU requires service installers to be licensed by CSU. E. Related Sections: 1. Section 02500 Pipeline Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting

1.2 REFERENCES A. Colorado Springs Utilities (CSU) “Natural Gas Standards”, latest edition. The documents of

CSU shall take precedence over the information contained within this specification and the details shown on the plans in the case of discrepancies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For natural gas service piping and service meter assembly at building entry. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work, or as required by CSU.

B. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: As required by the CSU and Quality Control.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: comply with requirements of CSU. 1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying natural gas. 2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for piping, including materials,

installation and testing. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless


B3PE UCCS 02553 - 1

B3PE UCCS 02553 - 2


2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s permission. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate connection to gas main, meter requirements and inspections with CSU. B. Coordinate connection requirements at building interface between site contractor and

building plumbing installer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 All gas piping products shall meet the requirements of Colorado Springs Utilities as outlined in

the Natural Gas Standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All gas piping products shall be installed according to the requirements of Colorado Springs Utilities as outlined in the Natural Gas Standards.


SECTION 02612

DRAINAGE SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract, including Construction Manager/ General

Contractor (CM/GC) Agreement including Exhibits and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Comply with Section 630 – Storm Drains and Culverts of the City of Colorado Springs City

Engineering Division, Standard Specifications, latest version, which shall be made a part of these specifications by reference for all work within public street right-of-ways and at the project site.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. This work shall consist of excavation, backfill, furnishing and installation of drainage piping and

appurtenances in accordance with these specifications and in reasonably close conformity to the lines and grades shown on the plans or established by the ENGINEER.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings and data showing details of pipe materials, joints, gasket material and concrete structures.

B. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: As required by this section and Quality Control.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not damage the pipe and fittings by impact, bending, compression or abrasion during handling

and storage. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless


1. Notify Owner not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s permission. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate connection requirements at building interface between site contractor and building

plumbing installer. B. Obtain excavation permits, street cut permits, and any other required permits prior to construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe 1. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO Designation M 294-90.

B3PE UCCS 02612 - 1

B3PE UCCS 02612 - 2

2. PE Pipe shall be type C or CP unless otherwise noted. 3. Pipe and fittings shall be made of virgin PE compounds which conform to the requirements of

Type III Category 4 or 5, Grade P 33, Class C; or Grade P34, Class C as defined in ASTM 1248.

4. Perforations shall be cleanly cut so as not to restrict flow into the pipe. a. Circular perforations 3/8 inches in diameter. b. Slotted perforations shall be 1/8 inch in width, 2.5 inches in length. B. Joints for PE pipe shall be rubber gasket type conforming to ASTM C-443. C. Grated Inlets: For non-street areas only

1. NDS cast iron grates with NDS risers, adapters, and outlets. 2.2 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Reinforced Concrete Drainage Pipe 1. Circular RCP shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-76; minimum Class II.

2. Elliptical RCP shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-507; Class HE-II or VE-II. B. Joints

1. Joints for all RCP shall be bell and spigot or tongue and groove. 2. Flexible Watertight Gaskets for bell and spigot or tongue and groove shall meet AASHTO

C198. 3. Rubber Gaskets shall meet ASTM C-433.

2.3 MANHOLES

A. Manholes shall be constructed of precast concrete manhole rings and bases as shown. Manholes shall be precast and manufactured in accordance with ASTM Standard C478 Precast concrete rings and bases shall be manufactured by a process that will produce a dense, homogeneous concrete ring of first quality. The rings shall have a minimum wall thickness of 4 inches if steel-reinforced and 6 inches if not reinforced. Cement used in manufacturing the rings shall be Type II portland cement as specified in ASTM C 150. Manhole sections shall be provided with plastic-encapsulated steel or fiber glass reinforced plastic steps cast in place, with maximum spacing of 12 inches. Mortar for bonding joints shall consist of one part cement to 2-1/2 parts of sand, by volume. All manholes shall have concrete bases as shown.

B. Castings for manhole frames and covers shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 48 Class 30.

Cast iron covers and frames shall be heavy traffic type, diameter as noted, to meet the requirements of the city or the local utility company. Manhole frame and covers shall be double lid frost-proof design.

C. Castings Suppliers, or equal: 1. Maclear, Inc., 2. Neenah Foundry Co., D. Steps: 1. Material: Aluminum, Fed. Spec. QQ-A-200/A. 2. Provide plastic coating or bituminous coating to protect from corrosion with concrete or

mortar. 3. Manufacturers: Comco 12653B, Neenah R-1982-W, or equal.

2.4 CONCRETE STORM SEWER INLETS

A. Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm drains and Storm sewers shall meet ASTM C-789.

B3PE UCCS 02612 - 3

B. Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains and Storm Sewers with less

than 2 feet of cover shall meet ASTM C-850. C. Curb inlets shall meet the Standard Specifications of the City of Colorado Springs Engineering

Division. 2.5 GRAVEL

A. Gravel shall be washed, 3/4" to No. 4 Concrete aggregate, with less than 3% passing the No. 200 sieve.

2.6 FRAMES, GRATES, COVERS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Gray iron castings shall conform to ASTM A48. Ductile iron castings shall conform to ASTM A536. B. Casting Suppliers, or equal:

1. Neenah Foundry Company 2. Urban Accessories

2.7 FILTER FABRIC

A. Filter fabric shall be "Mirifi 140N" as manufactured by Mirifi, Inc. or approved equal. 2.8 DRAIN BOARD

A. Drainage board shall be Mira-drain or approved equal. B. Drainage board shall be single-sided where used adjacent to walls or structures. Double sided

board shall be used in non-supported applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Trenches shall be excavated in accordance with the requirements of Section 02300 – Earth Moving to a width sufficient to allow for proper jointing of the culvert and thorough compaction of the bedding and backfill material under and around the pipe.

B. Bedding material shall meet the requirements of Section 02300 – Earth Moving and the details

shown on the drawings. C. Placing Culvert - The culvert laying shall begin at the downstream end of the conduit line. The

lower segment of the pipe shall be in contact with the prepared bedding throughout its full length. D. Jointing:

1. Concrete pipe sections shall be joined in such manner that the ends are fully entered and the inner surfaces are reasonably flush and even.

2. Joints for concrete pipe shall be made with pipe joint sealing compound. Primer shall be furnished when recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe joint sealing compound. Primer shall conform and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to both surfaces of the pipe sections being joined, for the full circumference.

3. Sealing compound shall be applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations. E. Installation of underground drainage systems:

1. Perforated pipe shall be used along gravel drains and/or drain board. Non-perforated pipe shall be used in all areas where piping is intended only to convey flows to storm sewers and/or outfalls.

2. Drain board shall be placed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Gravel packing around pipe shall be sufficient to transmit flows from either gravel drain or drain board.

3. Filter fabric shall be installed along all interface of drain board, perforated piping, and/or gravel with the surrounding soil or backfill.

4. Gravel and materials shall be installed carefully so as not to tear or damage fabric, pipe or board.

F. Backfill material and backfilling procedures shall meet the requirements of Section 02500.


B3PE UCCS 02612 - 4

SECTION 02631 – PERMANENT EROSION PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install permanent erosion protection as shown on the Drawings or specified herein, or as required to complete the Work. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. City of Colorado Springs Drainage Criteria Manual Volume 2 – Stormwater Quality Policies, Procedures and Best Management Practices, latest revision.

B. City of Colorado Springs Engineering Division Standard Specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's published descriptive literature and complete specifications for: 1. Riprap. 2. Erosion Control Mat. 3. Native Grass Seed. 4. Boulders.

B. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store matting, fabrics, seed and bales protected from weather, support off the ground or

pavement. B. All aggregate material shall be delivered, stored and handled in a manner to prevent

segregation of sizes and changes in the original gradation reviewed and approved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RIPRAP

A. Riprap shall consist of field stone or rough, unhewn quarry stone predominantly cubical in shape.

B. The stone shall be hard and of such quality that it will not disintegrate on exposure to

erosion or chemical weathering, and it shall be suitable in all other respects for the purpose intended.

C. The specific gravity of the individual stones shall be at least equal to 2.50.

D. The largest dimension of the stone shall not be greater than three (3) times the smallest

dimension.

B3PE UCCS 02631 - 1

E. Gradation: Use riprap of gradation noted on drawings. Refer to Section 624 City of Colorado Springs Engineering Division Standard Specifications.

Riprap Mean Particle Size Designation d50 (Inches) VL 6 L 9 M 12 H 18

2.2 GRANULAR BEDDING MATERIAL

A. Granular bedding shall meet the following gradations for the particular type noted on the drawings:

U.S. Standard Percent Passing By Weight Sieve Size Type I Type II 3" -- 90 - 100 1-1/2" -- -- 3/4" -- 20 - 90 3/8" 100 -- #4 95 - 100 0 - 20 #16 45 - 80 -- #50 10 - 30 -- #100 2 – 10 --

#200 0 – 2 0 – 3

2.3 FILTER FABRIC

A. MIRAFI 140 N or equal. 2.4 EROSION CONTROL MATTING

A. Low Velocity Channels: American Excelsior Curlex I with biodegradable netting, or equal. B. Slopes of 3H:1V or less: Curlex Net Free, or equal. C. High Velocity Channel Bottoms: Curlex HV HD, or equal.

2.5 SILT FENCE

A. Silt Fence shall be a synthetic fabric for the purpose of retaining silt that meets the following requirements. 1. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 4632) – 90 lbs. minimum

2. Elongation (ASTM D 4632) – 50% maximum 3. Ultraviolet Degradation at 500 hours (ASTM 4355) – minimum 70% strength retained 4. Apparent Opening Size (ASTM D 4355) - #30 maximum sieve size

B. Stakes shall be minimum 42" steel or wooden posts (rebar not allowed), 10 foot on center. Metal stakes shall be “Studded T” or “U” type with minimum weight of 1.33 pounds linear foot. Wood stakes shall have a minimum diameter or cross section dimension of 2 inches.

2.6 NATIVE GRASS SEED

B3PE UCCS 02631 - 2

A. All areas indicated on Civil Grading plan shall be seeded with the following seed mix: "Nature's Choice Mix", available at Arkansas Valley Seed Company (303) 320-7500 or approved equal. The seed mix should be mechanically drill seeded at a rate of 5 lbs. per 1000 s.f.

B. All seed shall be furnished in bags or containers clearly labeled to show the name and

address of the supplier, the seed name, the lot number, net weight, origin, the percent of weed seed content, the guaranteed percentage of purity and germination, and the pounds of Pure Live Seed of each species in the container.

C. All brands furnished shall be free from such noxious seeds as Russian or Canadian Thistle,

European Bindweed, Johnson grass leafy spurge. The Contractor shall furnish a signed statement certifying that the seed furnished is from a lot that has been tested by a recognized laboratory for seed testing within six months prior to the date of delivery.

D. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or in storage will not

be acceptable. 2.8 BROADMOOR DRAINAGE CHANNEL BOULDERS

A. Boulders shall be large, 4'x30”x18” minimum size, and have rectangular faces. B. Boulder type shall be Broadmoor. C. Boulders shall be clean, uniform in type and shall be free of abrasions, marks, and drill

holes. 2.9 BROADMOOR RIPRAP

A. Riprap type shall be Broadmoor when indicated on plans. B. Riprap shall be 4” to 18” in diameter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

B. Additional erosion control measures may be required based on the Contractor’s construction process. The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling erosion throughout the construction progress and shall install any needed facilities to accomplish erosion control on the project site.

3.2 RIPRAP

A. Riprap shall be placed to conform as close as practical to the plan details.

B3PE UCCS 02631 - 3

B. The material shall be placed and arranged in close contact. The spaces between and beneath the larger stones shall then be filled with smaller stones of suitable size so as to leave the surface even and conforming to the contour required.

C. The material may be machine placed with sufficient handwork to accomplish

requirements of this specification and plan.

3.3 FILTER FABRIC

A. Excavation shall be finished to a smooth and uniform surface conforming to the dimensions and typical sections shown on the plans and within the lines and grades established by the plans.

B. Place the fabric over the surface as smooth as possible. Allow fabric to conform to the surface.

C. Secure fabric in place with until cover material can be applied. D. Place cover material without damaging fabric.

3.4 EROSION CONTROL MATTING

A. Areas to be matted shall be prepared, free of obstructions, and seeded. B. Matting at the upper end of embankments shall be earth anchored according to

manufacture’s guidelines. C. Edges shall be overlapped and secured according to manufacture’s guidelines. D. In drainage channels, matting shall be unrolled in the direction of the flow of water.

3.5 NATIVE GRASS SEED

A. Native grass seed shall be mechanically drilled on all slopes 3:1 and flatter. Seed shall be covered by at least one-quarter inch of soil.

B. All slopes greater than 3:1 shall be hydraulically seeded. C. Seeding shall not take place on windy days. Inaccessible areas may be hand

broadcast. D. All seeded areas shall be mulched by crimping with straw or hay, or by hydraulic

method unless area is to be matted.

3.8 BROADMOOR DRAINAGE CHANNEL BOULDERS

A. Excavation shall be finished to a smooth and uniform surface conforming to the dimensions and typical sections shown on the plans and within the lines and grades established by the plans.

B. Bedding coarse(s) and filter fabric shall be installed if indicated on the plans. C. Boulders shall be set perpendicular to channel flowline. Boulder face shall be plumb.

B3PE UCCS 02631 - 4

B3PE UCCS 02631 - 5

Adjoining boulders shall be interlocked to form a flush face and to minimize openings. D. Voids shall be filled with like material.

3.9 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall maintain all erosion control measures throughout the duration of the project until final surfacing, landscaping and adequate vegetation cover is complete and accepted by the Owner.

B. At a minimum, all erosion control measures shall be inspected by the Contractor on a

weekly basis and after significant precipitation events. Accumulated sediment and debris shall be removed when the sediment level reaches half the height of the erosion control measure or at any time that the sediment or debris adversely impacts the functioning of the device. Damaged or ineffective erosion control measures shall promptly be repaired.

C. Protect completed work from damage due to subsequent construction or finishing activities.

D. DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE WORK: Repair to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Architect, or replace at no additional cost, work which has been damaged or found to be defective prior to final completion and acceptance of the Work by the Owner.


SECTION 02810 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Design/Build: Design and installation of underground irrigation system. Work shall include all labor, material and all equipment necessary for a complete system installation. This shall include all items of a minor nature necessary to complete the installation and usually included in similar work, whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not. 1. Extent of work shall be limited to the site area around the Main House only, as shown

on the Site and/or Landscape Drawings. B. Construction of the irrigation system shall include the installing and testing of all mains,

laterals, risers and fittings and installation of irrigation heads, control valves, controllers, electric wire, controls, etc. It shall also include excavation and backfill and all other work in accordance with this Specification and the Drawings.

C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 02930, Sodding and Seeding. 3. Section 02950, Trees, Plants and Ground Covers.

1.02 REFERENCE MATERIALS

A. Soils Report: No Geotechnical Soils Report was prepared for the property. 1.03 PROTECTION

A. Irrigation contractor shall maintain adequate protection of all his work from damage and shall protect UCCS's property from injury or loss arising from this work.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Design Drawings: Irrigation contractor shall submit design drawings to the Architect for approval prior to commencing work of this Section. Submittal is to include complete installation drawings showing irrigation head sizes and locations, pipe sizes and layout, sleeve locations, valves, backflow preventer and other accessory devices, controls and controller(s), catalog cut sheets and all other documentation necessary for review of design. Contractor shall field determine water pressure and other existing site conditions as required prior to commencing work. 1. Design Intent: Turf areas as indicated on the Drawings to be seeded or sodded shall be

irrigated by a combination of pop-up spray and rotary heads, as recommended by the Irrigation Contractor. Shrub beds and other areas indicated for mulching shall be irrigated by drip irrigation.

2. Areas of native turf grasses not to be irrigated are as shown on the Drawings. 1.05 PERMITS

A. Irrigation Contractor shall obtain all necessary licenses and permits required to perform work. 1.06 TESTING

A. Inspection and Testing: UCCS shall at all times have access to the work wherever it is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and inspection. Such representatives shall have the right to reject materials and workmanship or


require their correction. Any rejected or faulty work shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to UCCS.

1.07 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE

A. Warranty: It shall be the responsibility of the Irrigation Contractor to ensure the satisfactory operation of the entire system and the workmanship and restoration of the site area. The entire system, including material, shall be guaranteed to be complete and remain operable in every detail for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Contractor shall agree to repair any defects occurring within that year.

B. Contractor shall service the system at UCCS's request during the guarantee period. He shall be paid for any work performed which is not covered by the guarantee and shall so notify UCCS of such operations before doing such work.

C. Maintenance Program: No maintenance contract is desired by UCCS. 1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Immediately upon installation of any piping, valves, wiring or irrigation heads in locations or sizes other than shown on the approved design drawings, the Contractor shall clearly indicate such changes on the Record Drawings.

PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 IRRIGATION HEADS

A. Pop-Up Spray Heads: 2. Irrigation heads shall be of the fixed-spray type designed for in-ground installation. The

irrigation shall be capable of covering 12' radius at 50 psi. 3. Nozzles shall be comprised of 1 or 2 orifices at two radius ranges and shall be

adjustable from full on to full off. Nozzle heights shall be 3" to 15", as appropriate for plant materials. Retraction shall be achieved by a heavy-duty stainless steel spring. The nozzle piston shall have a smooth external surface operation in a resilient guide. A riser wiper shall be included in the irrigation for continuous operation under the presence of sand and other foreign material.

4. Coverage shall be either full or part circle. The part circle coverage shall be available in arcs of 90°, 120°, 180°, 240° and 270°. Also included shall be special patterns, including an end strip and center strip nozzle configuration. Nozzle delivery shall be such as to allow circle patterns to match full circle patterns in precipitation rates.

5. Body of the irrigation heads shall be constructed of non-corrosive heavy-duty Cycolac. A filter screen shall be in the nozzle piston. All irrigation parts shall be removable through the top of the unit by removal of a threaded cap.

B. Rotary Heads: 1. Irrigation heads shall be of the planetary gear-driven stream rotary type capable of

covering 24' radius at 50 psi. Rotation shall be accomplished by a sealed oil-packed planetary gear assembly isolated from the water supply. The irrigation shall be available in three (3) ranges with standard arcs of 360°, 180° and 90°, intermediate arcs of 270°, 225°, 202-1/2°, 157-1/2°, 135° and 112-1/2° shall also be available with the changing of an arc disc.

2. Nozzle shall be comprised of 12 orifices which rotate at the top of the unit and shall pop up 3" or 12" when in operation. Retraction shall be achieved by means of a heavy-duty stainless spring.

3. Body of the irrigation heads shall be constructed of non-corrosive heavy-duty Cycolac. A large filter screen shall be a part of the irrigation. All irrigation parts shall be removable through the top of the case. Maximum working pressure at the base of the irrigation shall be 75 psi.

C. Drip Emitters: Manufacturer's standard spray emitters with minimum 36" long irrigation tubing, elevated on 12" high plastic stakes, 1 gal/hr. minimum rate.


D. Accessories: Provide emitter stem extensions and other accessory materials required for a complete and operational system.

E. LEED Design Criteria: 1. Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2, Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor

to provide information on recycled content. 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For adhesives, indicating that product contains no urea

formaldehyde. 3. Credits MR 5.1, Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured Locally: Required. Contractor

to provide information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01015.

4. Credit MR 5.2, Local/Regional Materials, Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01015.

F. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Toro Company Irrigation Division, Riverside, CA, (714) 688-9221. 2. Rain Bird Corp., Azusa, CA, (800) 724-6247. 3. L.R. Nelson Corp., Peoria, IL, (309) 692-2200. 4. Hunter Industries, San Marcos, CA, (619) 744-5240. 5. Manufacturers providing systems, materials and components of the same type, design,

function, quality, performance and range of service are acceptable upon approval by UCCS and the Landscape Architect. Submit materials cut sheets, including warranty information, for approval with the design submittal specified in paragraph 1.04 above.

2.02 IRRIGATION CONTROLLERS

A. Controller(s): The irrigation controller(s) shall provide for completely automatic timed operation of the irrigation system. 1. Controller(s) shall be computer-controlled, with keypad controls on the face of the

unit. Mechanical controllers are not acceptable. a. Controller keypad shall be protected by a hinged cover panel.

2. Controller(s) shall have a minimum 12-station capacity. Each station shall have an independent time control with infinite time settings up to 60 minutes maximum per station. Minor timing adjustments shall be made from the face of the controller with no disassembly necessary. The controller shall provide for rapid advance between stations. Stations may be omitted with time settings of 0 minutes programmed on them. The controller shall provide for manual operation when particular stations require special irrigation. Also manual activation of the entire program may be achieved for semi-automatic operation. The controller shall provide for schedules up to minimum 14 days and permit multi-cycle operation as often as every hour.

3. Controller(s) shall be equipped with rain sensor, water efficiency and other control options to minimize water consumption.

4. Fused circuit protection shall be provided to prevent damage due to excessive voltage surges. A pump start circuit which can also be used to control a master valve shall be included in the unit. The controller shall have UL approval.

B. Control Wire: All wiring to be used for connecting the electric valve to the electric controller shall be type UF, 600 Volt Number 14 Single Strand Copper. It shall bear UL approval for direct underground feeder cable.

C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Rain Bird ESP-SMT (Smart Control System) Series, Azusa, CA, (800) 724-6247, as the

basis of design. 2. Irritrol by Hardie Irrigation, Carson City, NV, (800) 634-8873. 3. Toro Company Irrigation Division, Riverside, CA (714) 688-9221. 4. L.R. Nelson Corp., Peoria, IL, (309) 692-2200. 5. Manufacturers of controllers shall match the manufacturer of the balance of the

irrigation system, unless specifically approved otherwise by the Owner and Landscape Architect.


2.03 PIPING

A. PVC Pipe: PVC piping shall be Class 160 NSF approved. Pipe may be bell end or ring tite. Main line shall be Class 200, 2".

B. Polyethylene Pipe: Shall all be NSF 100#. Contractor may use either PVC or poly lateral lines. C. Fittings: Use all Schedule 40 PVC fittings. D. Drip Irrigation Line Tubing: 1/2" poly line, industry standard.

2.04 VALVES

A. Electric Valves: The automatic remote control valve shall be an electrically activated combination angle/globe 150 psi rated, Cycolac and glass-filled nylon plastic construction. Diaphragm shall be of polyurethane material. Solenoid shall be 3.5 watt, 24 volt A.C. with waterproof-molded coil capable of being removed from the valve with turning coil and twisting wire or removing two screws. Valve shall be equipped with a hand-operated flow control stem, a manual bleed plug and all internal parts shall be serviceable from top of valve without removing the body from the line. Pressure loss at 30 GPM shall not exceed 7.0 psi.

B. Valve Boxes: Each valve shall be installed inside an Ametec Standard Valve Box with locking lid, model #10-170, or approved equal.

C. Main Valve: Main valve installation shall be in accordance with UCCS and/or the City of Colorado Springs codes and standards and shall provide a tee at the vacuum breaker to affix an air compressor for the purpose of blowing all water out of the valves and lines in the fall. A blowout tube constructed of 1/2" Schedule 40 pipe with a threaded cap at the top will be installed next to the sleeve over the main valve to allow draining of the main valve. Both the sleeve and the tube will be installed in an Ametec Standard Valve Box with locking lid at the location of the tap or equal.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Irrigation Tubing Anchors: U-shaped, galvanized metal stake anchors, minimum 6" long. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Irrigation system shall be constructed using the irrigations, valves, piping, fittings, controllers, wiring, etc. of sizes and types as shown on the approved design drawings submitted by Irrigation Contractor. The system shall be constructed to grades and conform to areas and locations as shown on the Drawings.

B. Irrigation lines shown on approved design drawings shall be essentially diagrammatic. Locations of all irrigation heads, valves, piping, wiring, etc. shall be established by the Irrigation Contractor at the time of construction.

C. Irrigation Contractor shall field verify existing water pressure prior to installation of system and modify design as required.

D. Irrigation system shall be designed so that all turf areas are completely covered by two (2) different heads.

E. Irrigation system shall be designed to allow gravity draining, unless otherwise approved. 3.02 EXISTING UTILITIES AND SYSTEMS

A. Exact locations of existing and new utilities and irrigation system piping shall be verified by the Irrigation Contractor, and he shall conduct his work so as to prevent interruption of service or damage to them. Contractor shall be responsible for the repairing of any damage to utilities.


3.03 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND HEADS

A. Trenches: Trenches for plastic pipe irrigation lines shall be excavated of sufficient depth and width to permit handling and installation of the pipe and fittings, and to allow for aeration of turf areas. Interior of pipes shall be kept free from dirt and debris, and when pipe laying is not in progress, open ends of pipe shall be closed by an approved means. The backfill shall be thoroughly compacted and evened off with the adjacent soil level. Selected fill dirt or sand shall be used if soil conditions are rocky. In rocky areas, the trenching depth shall be 2" below normal trench depth to allow for this bedding. The fill dirt or sand shall be used in filling 4" above the pipe. The remainder of the backfill shall contain no lumps or rocks larger than 3". The top 6" of backfill shall be free of rocks over 1". All trenches that are opened during any particular working day shall be closed and backfilled the same day. Irrigation contractor will water-settle all trenches and leave the soil in an even and fine-graded condition.

B. Lines and Mains: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all plastic irrigation lines or mains shall be installed with maximum cover of 18" based on finished grades.

C. Sleeving: All sleeving will be provided and installed by Irrigation Contractor as indicated on the Drawings, or as required by project conditions. All sleeving will be Class 160 PVC in noted sizes. Installation of sleeving will be coordinated with the General Contractor and with the paving contractor for time scheduling. It will be the Irrigation Contractor's responsibility to assure that all sleeves are placed prior to concrete and paving work.

D. Heads: 1. All irrigation heads will be elevated 3" above final finished grade to accommodate

mulch for planting bedding. 2. Set irrigation heads and quick-coupling valves perpendicular to finish grade. 3. Set lawn irrigation heads adjacent to existing walks, curbs and other paved areas to

grade. 4. Place 1 cu. ft. (0.028 cu.m) minimum of 3/4" to 1" (19 to 25 mm) washed gravel around

each rotor pop-up irrigation head for drainage of water from irrigation case. E. Drip Irrigation Tubing: Install in strict accordance with standard industry practice. Anchor

main tube lines with minimum 6" galvanized metal stake anchors, spaced not more than 48" apart.

F. Drip Emitters: Install stakes for drip emitters as required for adequate coverage. Placement shall allow for spray to be directed away from building foundations, porches, patio slabs and sidewalks. Mature sizes of shrubs and other plant materials shall also be taken into account when layout out emitters. 1. Provide 12" (24") high stem extensions where shrubs, flowers from bulbs, etc. are

anticipated to be more than 18" high. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL VALVES AND CONTROLLER

A. General: Install controller, control wires and valves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Controller(s) shall be installed in locations shown on the Drawings, or as directed by

the Owner. B. Install valves in a plastic box with reinforced heavy-duty plastic cover. Locate valve box tops

at finish grade. C. Install remote control valves in a valve box positioned over valve so all parts of valve can be

reached for service. Set cover of valve box even with finish grade. Install valve boxes over 9" (225 mm) of gravel for drainage and reasonably free from dirt and debris.

D. Install a 1/2" (13 mm) brass gas cock drain in valve box on downstream side of automatic valves.

3.05 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Electrical Wire Connections: Wire connections to remote control electric valves and splices of wire in the field shall be made in the following manner, using Spear's or equal wire connectors and sealing cement. 1. Strip ends of wires and push wires through the holes of the base socket.



2. Twist wires together and mechanically bond together using crimp sleeves and crimp pliers.

3. Pull wire connection back into base socket as far as possible. 4. Apply solvent cement to outside of sealing plug and then fill cavity of sealing plug

completely with solvent cement. 5. Push sealing plug into base socket using slight twisting motion until it bottoms. 6. Push wires down into base plug as far as they will go without unseating sealing plug.

This assures cement completely sealing around wire insulation and waterproofing the connection.

3.06 FLUSHING AND TESTING

A. After piping, risers and valves are in place and connected, but prior to installation of irrigation heads, thoroughly flush piping system under a full head of water.

B. Make an operational test of the entire system after installing irrigation heads. C. Test pressure lines and make certain there are no leaks before backfilling.

3.07 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT AND TESTING

A. Adjustment of the irrigation heads, control systems and performance tests shall be done by the Irrigation Contractor to provide UCCS with a professional, complete installation. All performance tests shall be made in the presence of UCCS project manager.

B. Irrigation contractor shall pay particular attention to coverage and system operation. Any areas that do not conform to designed operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or poor installation practices shall be immediately corrected by the contractor at no additional cost to UCCS. 1. Adjust heads to proper grade when turf is sufficiently established to allow walking on it

without appreciable harm. Such lowering or raising of head shall be part of original contract with no additional cost to UCCS.

2. Adjust irrigation heads for proper coverage and distribution, so spray does not fall on buildings, and to minimize overspray on patio slabs, walks, parking areas and driveways.

3. Adjust watering time of valves to provide proper amounts of water to all plants.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02925 - TURF GRASS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sodding.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading. 3. Section "Porous Unit Paving" for concrete grid-type pavers shaped to provide open areas

between units, planted with grass or other plants. 4. Section "Planting Irrigation" for turf irrigation. 5. Section "Exterior Plants" for border edgings. 6. Section "Subdrainage" for subsurface drainage.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

TURF GRASS 02925 - 1

G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

I. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project.

B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.

1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer.

D. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer.

E. Material Test Reports: For existing in-place surface soil and imported or manufactured topsoil.

F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment.

1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.

2. Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's personnel assigned to the Work shall have certification in one of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network:


a. Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation specialty area(s), designated CLT-Exterior.

b. Certified Turfgrass Professional, designated CTP. c. Certified Turfgrass Professional of Cool Season Lawns, designated CTP-CSL.

5. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

6. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of the soil.

1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60.

2. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Architect. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes.

3. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth.

a. Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying.

C. Bulk Materials:


1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.


A. Planting Restrictions: Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods:

1. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TURFGRASS SOD

A. Turfgrass Sod: Certified, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.

B. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed:

1. Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis), a minimum of three cultivars, suitable for both full sun and shady locations.


2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-mm)] [3/4-inch (19-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or

source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

2.3 FERTILIZERS

A. Refer to UCCS Campus landscape guidelines for fertilizer requirements.

B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil

moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.

B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.

2. Spread organic amendment to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm) but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

a. Spread approximately 1/2 the thickness of organic amendment soil over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches (50 mm) of subgrade. Spread remainder of organic amendment.

b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows:

1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches (150 mm). Apply soil amendments and

fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.

a. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening.

3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter.

4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property.

D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.


E. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

F. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 SODDING

A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.

1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as

recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.

C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) below sod.

3.5 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.

3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm).

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.

2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.



C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:

1. Mow Kentucky bluegrass to a height of 1-1/2 to 2 inches (38 to 50 mm).

D. Turf Post-fertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.

1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) to turf area.

3.6 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

3.7 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.

C. Remove non-degradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.


SECTION 02930 – EXTERIOR PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plants material. 2. Planting soils. 3. Amendments. 4. Fertilizer 5. Mulch 6. Stakes and guys. 7. Tree stabilization. 8. Landscape edgings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section "Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting, trimming, pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work.

2. Section "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with ball size not less than sizes indicated wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

C. Clump: Where three or more young trees were planted in a group and have grown together as a single tree having three or more main stems or trunks.

D. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

E. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 1

F. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

G. Multi-Stem: Where three or more main stems arise from the ground from a single root crown or at a point right above the root crown.

H. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

I. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

J. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

K. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

L. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.

M. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

N. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.

O. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

P. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

Q. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.

1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials. 2. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application

instructions specific to the Project.

B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1. Organic Compost Mulch: 1-pint (0.5-liter) volume of each organic mulch required; in

sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and


source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.

2. Mineral Mulch: 5 lb (2.5 kg) of each for each size and texture of stone required, in sealed plastic bags labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered and installed on the site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and makeup of the material.

3. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following:

1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods

established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

E. Material Test Reports: For existing in-place surface soil and imported or manufactured topsoil.

F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of required maintenance periods.

G. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time

supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Soil Analysis: For each un-amended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of the soil. 1. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth State recommended quantities of

nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory topsoil.

a. Based upon the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.


b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1 “American Standard for Nursery Stock.”

1. Selection of exterior plants purchased under allowances will be made by Architect, who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting.

E. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes.

1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch (100-mm) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above the root flare for larger sizes.

F. Plant Material Observation: Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.

1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.

C. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide


protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

D. Handle planting stock by root ball.

E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other

acceptable material. 2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 3. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray.

Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly-wet condition.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.

B. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

D. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.

1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.


c. Faulty performance of edgings. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion:

a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months.

3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:

a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season.

b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period.

c. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below.

1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Initial Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below.

1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated


when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter; or with stem girdling roots will be rejected.

2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

D. Labeling: Label at least one plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant as shown on Drawings.

E. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well-established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery.

2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or

source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

C. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth.


2.3 FERTILIZERS

A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.


C. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.


2.4 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Type: Natural Cedar or Pole Bark Mulch: Mulch shall be free from noxious weed seed and all foreign material harmful to plant life. Chipper chips or other angular bark chips are not acceptable.

2. Size Range: 3 inches (76 mm) maximum, 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum. 3. Color: Natural.

2.5 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.


2.6 TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS

A. Stakes and Guys:

1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal (38-by-38-mm actual) by length indicated, pointed at one end.

2. Flexible Ties: Wide rubber or elastic bands or straps of length required to reach stakes or turnbuckles.

3. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch (2.7 mm) in diameter.

4. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches (150 mm) long.

2.7 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS

A. Steel Edging: Standard commercial-steel edging, rolled edge, fabricated in sections of standard lengths, with loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Border Concepts, Inc. b. Collier Metal Specialties, Inc. c. Russell, J. D. Company (The).

2. Edging Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) wide by 4 inches (100 mm) deep. 3. Stakes: Tapered steel, a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) long. 4. Accessories: Standard tapered ends, corners, and splicers. 5. Finish: Zinc coated. 6. Paint Color: Green.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil

moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.


B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required.

D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.

E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation.

1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.

F. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.

3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend

planting soil.

a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days.

b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.

B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.


3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped and container-grown stock.

2. Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.

3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball.

4. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.

5. Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements.

6. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 7. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected after working hours. 8. If drain tile is shown on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to top of

porous backfill over tile.

B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil.

C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- (150-mm-) diameter holes, 24 inches (600 mm) apart, into free-draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.

D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits.

E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.

3.5 TREE STABILIZATION

A. Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch (50- through 125-mm) caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch (50-mm) caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches (450 mm) below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend to the dimension shown on Drawings above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses.


2. Use two stakes for trees up to 12 feet (3.6 m) high and 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) or less in caliper; three stakes for trees less than 14 feet (4.2 m) high and up to 4 inches (100 mm) in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees.

3. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

4. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

3.6 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in even rows with triangular spacing.

B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

C. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that will minimally disturb the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes.

D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.

E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.

3.7 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) and secure seams with galvanized pins.

B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

1. Trees in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 3-inch (75-mm) average thickness, with 36-inch (900-mm) radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems.

2. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch (75-mm) average thickness of organic mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems.

3.8 EDGING INSTALLATION

A. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30 inches (760 mm) apart, driven below top elevation of edging.



3.9 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.

B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.

3.10 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground-cover areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.11 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.

C. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.

3.12 DISPOSAL

A. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.


SECTION 02931 SEEDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Prepare soil surfaces as specified. B. Furnish soil amendment materials, fertilizers and other specified chemicals. C. Furnish and install seed for lawn areas as shown on the Drawings. D. Maintain landscaping for minimum 60 days after acceptance. E. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 02950, Trees, Plants and Ground Cover.

1.02 INSPECTIONS

A. Pre-Maintenance Inspection: 1. As soon as all seeding is completed, a planting review and preliminary inspection to

determine the condition of the plantings will be held by UCCS. 2. The Contractor shall have all planting areas free of weeds and neatly cultivated. All plant

basins shall be in good repair. Irrigation systems shall be fully operational with all heads properly adjusted. All debris and litter shall be cleaned up, and all walkways, plazas, terraces, etc. shall be cleaned of soil and debris left from planting operations. The inspection shall not occur until these conditions are met.

3. If, after the inspection, UCCS is of the opinion that all work has been performed as per the Contract Documents and that all plant materials are in satisfactory growing condition, he will give the Contractor written notice of acceptance, and the 60-day maintenance period shall begin.

4. Work requiring corrective action in the judgment of UCCS shall be performed within the first ten (10) days of the maintenance period. Any work not performed within this time will necessitate an equivalent extension of the maintenance period. Corrective work and materials replacement shall be in accordance with the contract documents and shall be made by the Contractor at no cost to UCCS.

B. Final Inspection: 1. At the completion of the maintenance period, final inspection shall be performed by UCCS. 2. If, after the inspection, UCCS is of the opinion that all work has been performed as per the

Contract Documents and that all plant materials are in satisfactory growing condition, he will give the Contractor written notice of acceptance and completion of the formal maintenance period.

3. Final approval will not be given until all deficiencies are corrected. 1.04 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE

A. Warranty: All seed materials shall be guaranteed to take root, grow and thrive for the following periods: Spring planting shall be until June 1 of the following year; fall planting shall be for one (1) calendar year from final acceptance, or October 1 of the following year, whichever is later. During this period, remove all materials which die or which in the opinion of the Owner are in an unhealthy or impaired condition. At the appropriate planting time, all previously removed materials shall be replaced with sod or seed materials of the same kinds as the original specifications at no additional cost to UCCS.

B. Maintenance Program: None required beyond the initial 60-day maintenance period and warranty


period specified above. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED

A. All seed shall be mixed by wholesale dealer. Contractor shall furnish the dealer's guaranteed statements of composition of mixture, percentage of purity, germination and maximum weed of each seed mix.

B. Seed Mix Design: #2642 Shortgrass Mixture; 6 lb. per acre (includes Blue Grama, Sideoats Grama, Sand Dropseed, Prairie Junegrass). Install at a rate of 3 lbs. per 1,000 sq. ft.

C. Supplier: Applewood Seed Co., 5380 Vivian Street, Arvada, CO, 80002. 2.02 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: ASTM D5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4% organic material content; free of

stones 1" or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled onsite. Verify suitability of stockpiled

surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

a. Amend existing soil to produce topsoil. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

2.03 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well-composted, stable and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture

content of 35% to 55% by weight; 100% passing through 3/4” sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5% inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 40% to 60% of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source-

separated or compostable mixed solid waste. 2.04 PLANTING ACCESSORIES A. Selective Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for

application. 2.05 SATISFACTORY GRASSES A. Satisfactory Seeded Grasses: At the end of the maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close

stand of grasses has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 75% over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 6” x 6”.

B. Reestablish grass areas that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until satisfactory grass stand is established.


2.06 PRAIRIE MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish meadow by watering, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting and other

operations. Roll, regrade and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch. 1. Control weeds by mowing grass stand to a height between 6" and 12" throughout the first

growing season. Adjust mower to cut higher than 6". B. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion and displacement of seed or mulch. Water

per seed vendor’s written recommendations. 2.07 MULCH

A. Hydro Mulch: 100% virgin wood fiber mulch containing a specified range of fiber lengths, with a minimum of 25% of the fibers averaging 0.4 inches long. Wood fibers shall have the following properties: 1. Moisture Content: 12.0% ± 3% 2. Organic Matter: 99.3% 3. Inorganic (Ash) Content: 0.7% 4. pH at 3% Consistency in water (average): 4.7 5. Water-Holding Capacity: 1000g/100g

(1.2 gal/lb fiber) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Ensure that grading has been established to within +/- 1" of required finished grades. Notify the Contractor in writing prior to commencing soil preparation work if existing grades are not satisfactory, or assume responsibility for conditions as they exist.

B. Before proceeding with work, check and verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between the Drawings and the site to UCCS before proceeding with work.

C. Landscape Contractor shall inspect and approve in writing installation of site irrigation system prior to beginning work, if irrigation system is furnished and installed by separate contract by UCCS.

3.02 FINISH GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION

A. Prior to any soil preparation, existing vegetation not to remain and which might interfere with the specified soil preparation shall be moved, grubbed, raked and the debris removed from the site. Prior to grading or tillage operations, the ground surface shall be cleared of materials which might hinder final operation.

B. Over all areas to be planted, well-decayed cow manure or equivalent organic matter shall be applied uniformly at the rate of 3 cu. yds. per 1,000 sq. ft. Super phosphate shall be broadcast at the rate of 25 lbs. per 1,000 sq. ft. Areas to be planted shall be tilled to a depth of 6" and raked to a suitable finish grade. All clods, debris and rocks not passing through a hand rake shall be removed from the surface.

C. Apply fertilizer formulation of 18-46-0 spread to ensure one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 sq. ft., with one-half being spread and incorporated into the soil during tilling. The second half will be spread just prior to laying the sod.

D. Finish grade for areas to be planted shall be 3/4" to 1" below all adjacent curbs, headers, walls or paved surfaces. Finish grade for areas to be mulched with rock or gravel shall be 3" below adjacent curbs or paved surfaces. Finish grades shall conform to site grading plans and produce a smooth surface without abrupt changes. All grades shall provide for natural run-off of water without low spots or pockets. Flow-line grades shall be accurately set and shall be not less than 2% gradient



wherever possible. 3.03 SEEDING

A. Provide new seeding at all areas disrupted onsite during construction. B. Seed shall be distributed at the rate of 3 lbs. of pure live seed per 1,000 sq. ft. C. Seeded areas shall be hydro mulched in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions

and recommendations. D. Contractor shall water the seeded areas as required to ensure germination and healthy growth. E. Four (4) weeks after germination, the seeded areas shall be fertilized.

3.04 MAINTENANCE

A. Landscape Contractor shall continuously maintain all seed in turf areas included in the work during the progress of the work and for a period of 60 days after completion of all work until final acceptance of all Contract work by UCCS.

B. Clean-up of all debris shall be performed by the Landscape Contractor daily and a complete cleanup accomplished upon completion of the job.

C. Protection: Protect planted areas against traffic or other use immediately after seeding is completed by placing adequate warning signs and barricades.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02950 TREES, PLANTS AND GROUNDCOVER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Excavate shrub and tree planting holes. B. Furnish and install plant materials, weed barrier, edging, mulch and all other items necessary to

complete the installation and normally included in similar work, whether specifically shown on the Construction Documents or not.

C. Furnish and install wire mesh protection fencing around groupings of plant materials, complete with all accessories.

D. Maintain landscaping for minimum 60 days after acceptance. E. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 02810, Underground Irrigation Systems. 3. Section 02930, Seeding.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Plants shall meet standards as set forth in the current edition of "American Standard for Nursery Stock" published by the American Association of Nurserymen.

B. Nomenclature shall be as set forth in the current edition of "American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature".

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature, specifications, installation and

maintenance instructions for the fencing system. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Prepare, handle and pack plants for delivery with reasonable care and skill in accordance with recognized standard practice for the type of plant concerned.

B. Whenever practicable, all material shall be planted the same day as delivered. If not possible, protect all stock by placing in shade where possible, out of drying sun and wind.

C. Cover soil balls with mulch or dampened tarps and moisten tops and balls as necessary. D. Lift and handle plants from the bottom of the ball only. E. Conduct pruning only after delivery to the site.

1.05 INSPECTION

A. Pre-Planting Inspection: 1. All plant material must be inspected at the place of growth and/or on the project site

before planting commences. Plants shall be inspected for size, variety, condition, defects or injury. UCCS reserves the right to reject unsatis-factory plant material at any time during the work.

2. Notify UCCS of the source of material no later than 30 days after award of the contract. 3. All fertilizers, pre-mixed backfill mixes, mulches and soil amendments will be inspected at

the site by the Architect before they are used in planting operations. B. Planting Inspections: UCCS and/or the Landscape Architect shall approve the staked location of all


trees before digging for those trees occurs. C. Pre-Maintenance Inspection:

1. As soon as all planting is completed, a planting review and preliminary inspection to determine the condition of the planting will be held by UCCS.

2. The Contractor shall have all planting areas free of weeds and neatly cultivated. All plant basins shall be in good repair. Irrigation systems shall be fully operational with all heads properly adjusted. All debris and litter shall be cleaned up, and all walkways, plazas, terraces, etc. shall be cleaned of soil and debris left from planting operations. The inspection shall not occur until these conditions are met.

3. If, after the inspection, UCCS is of the opinion that all work has been performed as per the Contract Documents and that all plant materials are in satisfactory growing condition, he will give the Contractor written notice of acceptance, and the 60-day maintenance period shall begin.

4. Work requiring corrective action in the judgment of UCCS shall be performed within the first ten (10) days of the maintenance period. Any work not performed within this time will necessitate an equivalent extension of the maintenance period. Corrective work and materials replacement shall be in accordance with the contract documents and shall be made by the Contractor at no cost to UCCS.

D. Final Inspection: 1. At the completion of the maintenance period, final inspection shall be performed by UCCS. 2. If, after the inspection, UCCS is of the opinion that all work has been performed as per the

Contract Documents and that all plant materials are in satisfactory growing condition, he will give the Contractor written notice of acceptance and completion of the formal maintenance period shall begin.

3. Final approval will not be given until all deficiencies are corrected.

1.06 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE

A. Warranty: All trees, shrubs, groundcovers and other plant materials shall be guaranteed to take root and grow and thrive for a period of one (1) calendar year after final acceptance of the work.

B. Any trees or other plant materials that die back and lose the form and size originally specified shall be replaced, even though they have taken root and are growing after the die-back.

C. Within 15 days of written notification by UCCS, remove and replace all guaranteed plant materials which for any reason fail to meet requirements of guarantee. Replacement planting for trees shall be done in the spring planting season only, except as approved otherwise. Replacements shall be made to same specifications required for original materials and shall carry the same guarantee from the time they are replaced.

D. Maintenance Program: None required beyond the initial 60-day maintenance period and warranty period specified above.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PLANT MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Plant List on the Drawings for specified types of plants, plant sizes, quantities and location. UCCS and/or the Landscape Architect may modify location or spacing to suit field conditions when the final field layout is made.

B. Furnish plant materials in quantities and sizes as per Plant List or as shown on the Drawings. Plants larger in size than specified may be furnished with the approval of UCCS, but at no change in contract price. For larger plants, the ball of earth or spread of roots shall be proportional as specified in AAN standards.

C. All plants shall be first-class representatives of their normal species or varieties, healthy, shapely and with well-developed branches and vigorous root systems. Roots shall show no evidence of


being restricted, deformed or rootbound, free from disfiguring knots, sunscale, insects, bark abrasions, wind or freezing injury or other objectionable disfigurations.

D. Furnish plants either balled and burlapped (B & B) or in containers, as specified in the Drawings. 1. Conform to standards for minimum size of ball for B & B plants. Securely burlap B & B

plants to prevent cracking or mushrooming of balls during transit, handling and planting. 2. Container plants shall meet standards as specified for specific plants, shall be well

established and typical of such plants. Container plants shall have been growing in the container for one (1) growing season prior to planting.

E. Ground Covers: Container-grown, unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. Space evenly to produce a uniform effect, staggered in rows and intervals shown.

F. All plants shall be certified as having had at least one (1) complete growing season in Colorado prior to delivery for this project.

G. Substitutions of plants other than those named in the Plant List will not be acceptable, unless specifically approved in writing by UCCS. If proof is submitted that specified plants or sizes are unobtainable, proposals will be considered for the nearest equivalent variety of size with equitable adjustment of the contract.


A. Peat: Peat shall be a natural local product of Mountain Peat free from lumps, roots, stones or other debris detrimental to the landscape planting.

B. Composted Manure: Composted dairy cow or sheep manure, free from lumps, stones or other foreign matter and free from mineral matter or chemical composition harmful to plant life. Manure that has received treatment with a bacterial enzyme culture raising the manure temperature to 145° F minimum for three (3) weeks minimum, aged at least 18 months, yielding a soil amendment with the following properties: 1. Organic Matter: 35-40% (over-dry basis). 2. Total Nitrogen: 1.6-2.0%. 3. Conductivity: 50.0 EC's (maximum). 4. Submit analysis as required by 1.04.

C. Fertilizer: Fertilizer for planting pits shall be a slow-release type similar to Agriform Planting Tablets, tightly compressed, long-lasting, slow-release fertilizer tablets and having an analysis of 20-10-5.

D. Edging: Steel edging shall be 14-gage minimum steel strap, to be installed vertically, bolted or welded at joints. The top of edging shall be 1/2" above sod grade, and covered in protective sleeving. Edging shall be notched for drainage where needed.

E. Weed Barrier: Typar, Mirafi, or Dewitt filter fabric or similar product. F. Mulch:

1. Fibrous Wood Mulch: Natural Red Cedar peelings or fibrous mulch, free from weeds, seeds or other foreign matter. Bark or chip mulch is not acceptable.

2. Gravel Mulch: River washed gravel, 1-1/2" nominal size (7/8" to 1-1/2" size range), approximately 35% fractured faces maximum. Acceptable colors are gray or tan; pink is not acceptable. Submit sample for approval.

3. Mulch shall be carefully hand-placed around plants in a uniform 3" thick compacted layer over fine graded planting areas, 1"-2" in ground cover areas.

G. Materials for Staking, Guying and Wrapping Trees: 1. Tree Stakes: 6' long metal T-posts. 2. Guy Anchors: 24" long #3 rebar. 3. Guying and Staking Wire: Galvanized iron or steel 12-gage wire. 4. Webbing: 2" nylon webbing or rubberized cloth. 5. Tree Wrap: 4" minimum width commercial tree wrap.

2.03 LANDSCAPE PROTECTION FENCING


A. General: Furnish and install 1-1/2" steel "T"-stakes and 1" x 2" heavy-gage wire mesh fencing system to protect trees, shrubs and other landscape materials from damage by wildlife.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Ensure that grading has been established to within +/- 1" of required finished grades. Notify UCCS prior to commencing soil preparation work if existing grades are not satisfactory, or assume responsibility for conditions as they exist.

B. Before proceeding with work, check and verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between the Drawings and the site to UCCS before proceeding with work.

C. Verify locations of all existing and new utility lines and services prior to excavation. D. Landscape Contractor shall inspect and approve in writing installation of site irrigation system prior

to beginning work, if irrigation system is furnished and installed by separate contract by UCCS. 3.02 FINISH GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION

A. Finish grade for areas to be planted shall be 3/4" to 1" below all adjacent curbs, headers, walls or paved surfaces. Finish grade for areas to be mulched with rock or gravel shall be 3" below adjacent curbs or paved surfaces.

B. Finish grades shall conform to site grading plans and produce a smooth surface without abrupt changes. All grades shall provide for natural run-off of water without low spots or pockets. Flow-line grades shall be accurately set and shall be not less than 2% gradient wherever possible.

3.03 PLANT MATERIAL ACCLIMATION

A. High Altitude Installations (above 5,000 ft. elevation): Plant materials grown and shipped from nurseries at lower elevations shall be acclimated to the elevation of the project site prior to planting.

B. Treat root balls or containers with specified chemical additives. Allow plant materials to acclimate in containers for _____ days prior to planting.

3.04 PLANT MATERIAL INSTALLATION

A. General: Do not install plant materials until all construction work has been completed and sprinkler systems have been installed and tested. Planting areas shall have been graded and prepared as herein specified and shall have been approved by UCCS.

B. Plant conifers so that the top of the ball is higher than ground level and cover with 1/2" of conditioned soil, gently sloping down to ground level. All other plants shall be placed in pits at such level after settlement that will have the same relation to the finished ground and exposure as original growing location.

C. All planting holes shall be half again deeper and wider than the root ball of the plant. One (1) unit of peat moss to three (3) units of topsoil shall be incorporated together for each planted item. Add fertilizer tablets, following manufacturer's suggestions as to amount for various sized plants. The plant shall be watered in thoroughly, leaving a mulched tree basin around each plant, after settling and final backfilling.

D. Weed Barrier Installation: Shall be placed in all shrub beds except those containing ground covers or perennials. At all edges of curbs, walls and edging, weed barrier should be turned down 8" minimum into soil or overlap 8" and staple 18" o.c. with 11-gage 12" long staples.

E. Staking: Stake or guy trees in a vertical position. Guy all coniferous trees. Stake or guy all trees immediately after planting. Drive stakes perpendicularly 3' into ground at edge of root ball. Securely nail or bolt rubber straps to stakes, leave loose enough for 3" lateral movements.



F. Wrapping: Wrap all deciduous trees no sooner than October 1st and no later than November 30th. G. Mulching: All shrub beds shall be mulched with a 3" layer of specified mulch as indicated on the

Drawings. All tree basins shall be mulched with a 3" layer of mulch, minimum 3'-0" diameter around trunk.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF LANDSCAPE PROTECTION FENCING

A. General: Install wire mesh fencing system in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

B. Install fencing around all groupings of trees/shrubs and other landscape materials. 3.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance of plant materials shall be the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor during the installation and for a period of 60 days after completion of all work until acceptance by UCCS.

B. Replace any trees or other plant materials damaged during plating or by subsequent construction activities.

C. Cleanup of all debris shall be performed by the landscape contractor daily and a complete cleanup accomplished upon completion of the job.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish labor, materials and equipment necessary for the complete construction of required formwork for cast-in-place concrete.

B. Furnish and install anchor bolts, connectors, embedded plates and other accessories required to be cast into concrete work.

C. Furnish materials and equipment necessary to strip and remove formwork. D. Install embedded items furnished by other Sections. E. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting. 3. Section 02515, Exterior Concrete Paving. 4. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 5. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.


A. General: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete in Buildings", and ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork", unless otherwise shown. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Contractor shall be responsible for the design and engineering, construction and maintenance of

formwork, as well as its adequacy and safety. C. Contractor shall design formwork for all loads and lateral pressures before and during placement of

concrete. Maintain position and shape of formwork at all times. Provide positive means of adjustment for shores and forms which rest on compressible material.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, specifications and installation instructions for all form-coating materials, manufactured form systems, form ties and accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE

A. Construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with prefabricated sections of metal-framed/plywood-faced, metal or plastic panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, solid exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. Do not use any forms having defects on contact surfaces. 1. Plywood forms will only be acceptable upon specific approval of the Architect, and then

only after visual inspection on the job site. 2. Plywood shall be sufficiently thick to withstand pressure of wet concrete without bow or

deflection but shall not be less than 5/8" thick, complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1, "B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form, Class 1", or "B-B Exterior Type DFPA Plyform,


Class 1". B. Chamfer exposed external corners and edges, using chamfer strips accurately fabricated to produce

uniform smooth lines and tight-edge joints. C. Refer to the Drawings for locations where special joints may be required. D. Arrangement for sheets or liner sheets shall be orderly and symmetrical. Form ties shall be spaced

uniformly and aligned horizontally and vertically where locations are exposed to view in the completed project.

2.02 FORMWORK FOR UNEXPOSED CONCRETE

A. Form concrete which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, boards, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber that is dressed on at least two (2) edges and one (1) side for a tight fit.

B. Earthen or trenched forms shall not be used for vertical formwork. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Premolded Joint Fillers: In joints caulked or sealed with silicone or thiokol-based compound, filler shall be non-bituminous, non-extruding, conforming to ASTM D1752. In all other joints, filler shall be bituminous type conforming to ASTM D1751. Filler shall be 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Non-Bituminous Filler: Sonoflex F by Sonneborne or equal.

B. Premolded Fiberboard Joint Fillers (Bituminous-Type): Preformed rigid cane fiberboard material, impregnated with a durable asphaltic compound, conforming to AASHTO-M213. Fillers shall be 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Bituminous Filler: Flexcell by Celotex or approved equal.

C. Bond Breaker: Where shown on the Drawings or required by the work, provide minimum two (2) layers 15-lb. non-bituminous felt bond breaker.

D. Form Ties: Provide factory-fabricated break-back, removable, or snap-type form ties designed to prevent spalling concrete surfaces on removal and which will leave no metal within 1/2" of concrete surface. Use stainless steel, plastic-coated or hot-dipped galvanized at exposed concrete with cone-shaped tie heads, manufactured by Dayton, Gates, Heckman, Richmond or approved equal.

E. Release Agent: Provide commercial formulated synthetic resin or oil-type form coating compounds that will not bond with or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent finish treatment of surfaces, manufactured by Protex Pro-Coat, Euclid Eucoslip, J & P Tex-Mastic or approved equal.

1. Contractor shall ensure that release agent is compatible with the finish requirements of concrete to be exposed to view.

F. Metal Inserts: Provide adjustable wedge inserts of malleable cast iron complete with bolts, nuts, washers, 3/4" bolt size, unless otherwise shown, manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Gateway, Dayton or approved equal.

G. Embedded Connector Plates or Sleeves: Embedded plates, sleeves or other accessory items as shown on the Drawings and as coordinated with the approved precast concrete shop drawings. Plates connecting precast to cast-in-place concrete shall be furnished by the precast fabricator and installed by the Contractor.

H. Embedded Plates, Sleeves and Anchor Bolts: Miscellaneous embedded items furnished by other Sections. Refer to the appropriate Section(s) in these Specifications.



A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 02225. If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section.

B. Expansion, Construction and Other Joints: Properly lay out work and make necessary preparations for construction of specified joints in cast-in-place concrete work. 1. Take special care to provide joints to allow for removal of sections of concrete

foundations, walls or flatwork for future construction where shown on the Drawings. C. Ensure that connector plates, sleeves, dovetail anchor slots and other concrete accessories

embedded in concrete are properly located, aligned and secured prior to placing concrete. 3.02 FABRICATION

A. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions as shown on the Drawings and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Use selected material to obtain the required finishes. Concrete tolerances shall be as specified in Section 03300.

B. Construct formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.

C. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt all joints and provide backup materials at joints as may be required to prevent leakage. Ensure that formwork is properly braced and tied.

D. Provide openings in forms as required to accommodate other work. Accurately place and securely support all items required to be built into the forms. Size and locations of openings, recesses, chases and other built-in items shall be obtained from the Contractor or the trades involved.

3.03 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES

A. Prior to each use, coat contact surfaces of forms with release agent prior to placement of reinforcement, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not allow excess coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.

B. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings which are affected by agent. Refer to Section 03300 for required concrete finishes.

C. Ensure that all debris and frost has been removed from forms before placing concrete. D. Clean, repair and recoat surfaces of forms that are to be reused. Split, frayed, delaminated or

otherwise damaged form facing materials will not be acceptable. E. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove

fins and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure all joints to avoid offsets. 3.04 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK

A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete such as sides of grade beams, walls and similar parts of work may be removed 48 hours after placing concrete, providing concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by removal operations and providing that curing and protection operations are maintained. Refer to specific requirements for hot- and cold-weather concreting in Section 03300.

B. Whenever formwork is removed during the curing period, cure exposed concrete as specified in Section 03300.



C. Contractor shall verify required tolerances specified in Section 03300 immediately after removal of forms.

D. Carefully remove fins or other minor surface defects from concrete to remain exposed in the final construction, and leave surfaces prepared for sealers, paint, skim coats or other finishes. Repair minor imperfections as specified in Section 03300.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish, bend and install all reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, ties and supports. B. Furnish and install fiber reinforcing materials. C. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting. 3. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 4. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 5. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry.


A. General: Fabricate and place reinforcing steel in accordance with the latest edition of ACI 315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures", and as detailed on the Drawings.

B. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Refer to Section 03300 for requirements. C. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards,

codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ACI 318, "ACI Standard Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". 2. ACI 315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". 3. ACI 301-72, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 4. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice". 5. CRSI "Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars". 6. CRSI "Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports". 7. AWS D12.1, "Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and

Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction". 8. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. D. Contractor shall obtain specific approval from the Structural Engineer for the following items:

1. Relocation of bars to an extent that causes placement tolerances to be violated. 2. Bar chairs and spacers. 3. Splices not shown on the Drawings and mechanical connectors. 4. Bending of reinforcement embedded in hardened concrete.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all reinforcing steel larger than #3 bars, indicating bending and cutting, preformed corners and intersections. Comply with ACI 315 showing bar schedules, stirrup or tie spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement and assemblies as required for the fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement. 1. Shop drawing submittal may be waived for reinforcing bars small enough to be field bent, if

requested by Contractor in writing and approved by Structural Engineer. Structural Engineer must observe reinforcement prior to concrete placement.

B. Certificates: Furnish, prior to fabrication, certified mill test reports covering physical and chemical tests of reinforcing steel, if requested by the Structural Engineer.

1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING


A. Notify UCCS's testing and inspection agency and the Structural Engineer at least 48 hours in

advance of closing of forms and/or placing concrete so that inspection of reinforcement in place can be made. Do not cover any reinforcement with formwork or concrete until reinforcement has been checked and approval given to proceed with formwork and/or concreting operations.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver reinforcement to site in strongly tied bundles with metal tags corresponding to bar schedules and diagrams. Store on the site free of rust, scale, oil or other coating. Store bars off the ground and protect from moisture, dirt, oil or deleterious coatings.

B. If concreting is delayed for any considerable period of time after reinforcement is in place, it shall be protected by suitable covering.

C. Protect exposed reinforcement intended for bonding with future extensions by suitable covering, if applicable.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Bars: ASTM A615-82, 60 KSI grade, deformed billet steel bars, plain finish, as indicated on the Drawings. Bars shall be free of scale or other bond-reducing coatings.

B. Ties, Stirrups and Field Bent Bars: ASTM A706, 60 KSI Grade. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 or A497, plain type in flat sheets, plain finish, welded

intersections, in sizes as indicated on the Drawings. Use of coiled rolls shall only be permitted when approved by the Structural Engineer.

D. Steel Wire: Provide plain cold-drawn wire conforming to ASTM A82. E. Fiber Reinforcing: Collated, fibrillated polypropylene fiber, Fiber Mesh I, Fiber Mesh, Inc.,

Chattanooga, TN, or equal.


A. Accessories shall be of suitable type conforming to ACI 315 and shall include spacers, chairs, tie bars, support bars and all other devices for properly assembling, placing and supporting reinforcement, weight of concrete and workmen without displacement of reinforcement. Wood, brick, block, concrete chips and other non-metallic devices are not acceptable.

B. For concrete slab-on-grade use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. Concrete briquettes for support of reinforcement for slabs-on-grade shall be at least 2" wide x 3" long and of proper height.

C. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot-dipped galvanized, plastic protected or stainless steel protected.

D. Wire Ties: Wire for tying shall be annealed, cold-drawn wire of at least 16-gage. 2.03 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions with fabrication tolerance complying with ACI 315. Cold bend bars in a manner which will not injure material.

B. Straightening or rebending at site will not be permitted unless using ASTM A706, 60 KSI reinforcing.



A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 02225. If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to this requirement, advise UCCS and the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section.

3.02 SPLICES

A. Splices not shown on the Drawings must be approved by the Structural Engineer. B. Lapped splices shall be securely wired together. Minimum laps shall be in accordance with

requirements of ACI 318 and ACI 301-72 and as shown on the Drawings. Offset vertical lap splices at least one bar diameter.

C. Lapped splices for welded wire fabric shall be made so that overlap of outermost wires is not less than two (2) full mesh spaces. Lace splices together with 16-gage wire.

3.03 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL

A. Prior to placing into position, thoroughly clean reinforcement of mill and excessive rust, scale, dust, mud, oil, ice and all other deleterious coating which may destroy or reduce bond.

B. All reinforcing shall be placed in accordance with the Drawings and the "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures", ACI 315, ACI 301 and ACI 318.

C. Accurately place and support reinforcing steel with chairs, bar supports, spacers or hangers as recommended by ACI detailing manual except in slab-on-grade work. Support bars in slabs-on-grade and footings with approved accessories.

D. Place reinforcing bars to a tolerance of +/- 1/4", except that minimum spacings between bars shall be to a tolerance of +/- 1/4". Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduit or embedded items. The Structural Engineer's approval must be obtained prior to moving bars under these circumstances.

E. Securely anchor and tie reinforcing bars and dowels prior to placing concrete. F. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverage for concrete protection shown on the

Drawings and specified. Do not place reinforcement with additional concrete cover unless expressly approved by the Structural Engineer.

G. Install dowels before any concrete is placed. Locate column dowels accurately with aid of template before concrete starts to set.

H. Steel reinforcing bars shall run continuous through cold joints. 3.04 PLACING WELDED WIRE FABRIC

A. Welded wire fabric shall be placed 2" below slab surface or as indicated on the Drawings and shall not be permitted to be placed on subgrade prior to concrete placement and hooked into position. Reinforcement shall be fully supported at required elevation prior to concrete placement. Use continuous chairs or support bars in structural slabs to maintain proper locations as shown on the Drawings.

B. Install welded wire fabric using full sheets as large as possible. Lap adjoining pieces as specified herein. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 1. If use of coiled rolls is approved, unroll and allow rolls of welded wire fabric to relax prior

to placement.



3.05 PLACING FIBER REINFORCING

A. Place fiber reinforcing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 1. 1-1/2 lbs. per cu. yd., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.

PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 SCHEDULE OF REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing materials shall be placed in quantities, sizes and spacing as shown on the Drawings and/or as scheduled herein: 1. Reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric shall be installed where shown or scheduled on the

Drawings. 2. Fiber reinforcing shall be placed in all poured-in-place concrete flatwork, including

exterior concrete plazas, terraces and apron pavements, etc., regardless of whether these already are reinforced with steel or wire materials.

3. Fiber reinforcing is not required in footings, foundation walls, grade beams and piers.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete for footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs-on-grade and any other concrete work required but not itemized.

B. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete as part of replacement floor deck system. C. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete for new interior concrete stairs. D. Furnish and place granular sub-base under slabs-on-grade. E. Furnish and install cast-in-place exterior concrete flatwork and other site concrete work, unless

furnished and installed by Section 02515. F. Finishing and application of integral surfacing as scheduled, curing and sealing of slabs. G. Furnishing and placing joint materials. H. Apply cementitious smoothing and resurfacing coating for vertical surfaces where specified and/or

indicated on the Drawings. I. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting. 3. Section 02515, Exterior Concrete Paving. 4. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 5. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. 6. Section 05120, Structural Steel. 7. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. 8. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 9. Section 09220, Skim Coat Plaster System. 10. Section 09310, Ceramic Tile.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 3. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforcing Concrete". 4. ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing

Concrete". 5. ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting". 6. ACI 306, "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting". 7. ASTM C94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete". 8. ASTM C33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates". 9. ASTM C150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement". 10. ASTM C260, "Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete". 11. ASTM C494, "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete". 12. ASTM C618, "Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for

Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete". 13. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project.


B. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Contractor shall have in place a quality assurance program to monitor the composition of the ready-mixed concrete provided for this project. The quality assurance program shall detail:

1. Quality and types of aggregates, cement, mineral admixtures, chemical admixtures and water.

2. Batching of these materials, including properties of the batched mix(es). 3. Delivery and placement requirements for the batched mix(es). 4. Regular contractor monitoring and testing of batched materials.

C. Contractor shall maintain a copy of ACI SP-15-72, "Field Reference Manual" in the field office at all times.

D. Contractor shall employ an experienced and competent foreman for all concrete work. The foreman shall be thoroughly familiar with all phases of concrete construction, including formwork. Upon request submit records of qualifications and experience of the foreman to the Architect.

E. All concrete work which does not conform to specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes, shall be corrected or removed and replaced as directed by UCCS and/or the Archi-tect/Engineer, at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from correction to concrete work and for any additional testing of work in place which may be required.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Mix Design: Submit proposed mix design(s) in accordance with ACI 301 for approval by the Structural Engineer. Submit written design mix reports for each class of concrete at least fifteen (15) days prior to start of work. Include the following in each report: 1. Project identification. 2. Concrete class. 3. Specified properties for concrete. 4. Source of concrete aggregate and cement. 5. Cement type and brand. 6. Manufacturer and brand name of admixtures. 7. Proportions of concrete mixed per cubic yard. 8. Required strength qualification data for each property specified for design mix in

accordance with ACI 301. 9. Unit weight.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, color additives and concrete stains, sealers, hardener and finishing compounds.

C. Certificates: 1. Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates. 2. Certification of appropriate use for hardening and sealing products, as specified in

paragraph 2.05. D. Contractor shall retain for Architect/Engineer’s review, if requested, all delivery tickets for each

load delivered to the site. Tickets shall show truck number, concrete strength, cement brand and type, cement content, water content (also expressed as water/cement ratio), amount of course aggregate and fine aggregate, name and amount of admixture, number of yards delivered, time of arrival at site and mixing time.

1.04 INSPECTION

A. Provide free access for the Structural Engineer to locations where concrete materials are stored, proportioned or mixed.

1.05 TESTING


A. Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by an independent testing agent approved

by UCCS. Testing fees shall be paid as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with the appointed firm. C. Submit proposed concrete mix design to the inspection and testing firm for review prior to

commencement of work. D. Field Quality Control Testing: Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during the

placement of concrete, as follows: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM

C94. 2. Slump: ASTM C143; one (1) test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, one (1) test each set of compressive test

specimens, or when the indication of change requires. 4. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31; one (1) set of four (4) standard cylinders for each

compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. 5. Cast and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens and field-cured test specimens

as specified in ASTM C31. E. Compressive Strength Tests:

1. ASTM C39: One (1) set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction thereof of each mix design placed in any one day, or for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; one (1) specimen tested at seven (7) days, two (2) specimens tested at 28 days, and one (1) specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

2. Report test results in writing to UCCS, Architect, Structural Engineer, Contractor and ready-mix supplier on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, the name of contractor, name of the concrete supplier and truck number, name of the concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

3. The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. The testing agency shall conduct tests to determine the strength and other characteristics of the in-place concrete by compression tests on cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, by load testing specified in ACI 318 or other acceptable non-destructive testing methods, as directed. The Contractor shall pay for this additional testing.

F. Slump Test: One (1) slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. G. Air Entrainment Test: One (1) air entrainment test will be taken for each set of test cylinders

taken. H. Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40° F and below, and when 80° F and above and

each time a set of compression test specimens are made. 1.06 EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement which has slump or total air content outside the specified values.

B. Compressive strength tests for laboratory-cured cylinders will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive compressive strength tests results equal or exceed the 28-day design compressive strength of the type or class of concrete and no individual strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi.


C. If the compressive strength tests fail to meet the minimum requirements specified, the concrete represented by such tests will be considered deficient in strength and subject to additional testing as herein specified or removal and replacement of the concrete which the test represents.

1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store cement in watertight enclosures and protect against dampness, contamination and warehouse set.

B. Stockpile aggregates to prevent excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or other sizes of aggregates. Use only one (1) supply source for each aggregate stockpile.

C. Store admixtures to prevent contamination, evaporation or damage. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing or harmful temperature ranges.

D. Allow a maximum of 90 minutes between the time water is added and the time the concrete is completely placed.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Do not place concrete during rain, sleet or snow, unless adequate protection is provided. Do not allow rainwater to increase the mixing water or damage the surface finish.

B. Cold Weather Concreting: 1. Refer to ACI 306, "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting". 2. Temperature of concrete when placed shall not be less than the following:

Minimum Concrete Temp. Degrees

Air Temp. F Section with Least Dimension Degrees F Under 12" 12" and Over 30 to 45 60 50 0 to 30 65 55 Below 0 70 60

3. When placed, heated concrete shall not be warmer than 80° F. 4. Prior to placing concrete, all ice, snow, surface and subsurface frost shall be removed and

the temperature of the surfaces to be in contact with the new concrete shall be raised above 35° F.

5. Protect the concrete from freezing during specified curing period. 6. Heated enclosures shall be strong and windproof to ensure adequate protection of corners,

edges and thin sections. Do not permit heating units to locally heat or dry the concrete. Do not use combustion heaters during the first 24 hours, unless the concrete is protected from exposure to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide.

C. Hot Weather Concreting: 1. Refer to ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting". 2. Take precautions when the ambient air temperature is 90° F or above. Temperature of

concrete when placed shall not exceed 85° F. 3. Cool forms and reinforcing to a maximum of 90° F by spraying with water prior to placing

concrete. 4. Do not use cement that has reached a temperature of 270° F or more. 5. Do not place concrete when the evaporation rate (actual or anticipated) equals or exceeds

0.20 pounds per sq. ft. per hour. 6. Approved set-retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used with the Archi-

tect/Engineer's approval when ambient air temperature is 90° F or above to offset the accelerating effects of high temperatures.

1.09 WARRANTIES


A. Provide Installer’s written warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship, and subgrade

failure for a period of one (1) year from final acceptance. UCCS’s Representative shall determine needs for repairs or replacement, and his/her decision shall be final and obligatory upon the Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. Use only one (1) brand of cement in any individual structure.

B. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand conforming to ASTM C33. C. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Clean, strong crushed gravel or stone conforming to

ASTM C33. Gradation shall be as specified under concrete mixes. D. Water: Clean, fresh potable supply, free from oil, acid, alkali, organic materials or other

deleterious substances. E. Admixtures: Use only when specified or approved by the Structural Engineer.

1. Air-Entraining Agent: ASTM C260, manufactured by Master Builders MBVR, Sika AER, Grace Darex AEA, Protex, or equal.

2. Non-Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E. 3. Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B or D. 4. Water Reducer: ASTM C494, Type A, manufactured by Master Builders Pozzo-Lith, Grace

WRDA, Protex PDA 25XL, Sika Plastocrete, or equal. 5. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 6. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride are specifically prohibited. 7. Color Additive: To be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of color(s),

Davis Color or equal. Provide colored concrete where shown or scheduled on the Drawings. 8. Fiber Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200 and paragraph 3.02 of this Section.

2.02 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Provide premixed, factory-packaged non-shrink, non-metallic grouting compounds specified in Section 05120.

2.03 CONCRETE BONDING AGENTS

A. Provide an aqueous phase, film forming, freeze-thaw resistant compound suitable for brush or spray application, complying with Military Specification MIL-B-19235.

1. Chem Master Polyweld, Grace Daraweld-PBA, Larson Weldcrete, Euclid Eucoweld, Protex Proweld-D, or equal.

B. Provide a two-component all-purpose epoxy bonding agent for structural repair or corrections. 1. Protex Probond ET-150, Sika Colma-Dur, or equal. 2.04 SMOOTHING AND RESURFACING COATING

A. General: A blend of white and gray Portland cement, dry polymers and aggregates providing a smooth, textured patching material for thin, vertical surface repairs and coating applications. Product shall not contain gypsum.

B. Compressive Strength: 800 psi at 1 day; 3,000 psi at 7 days; 4,000 psi at 28 days. C. Adhesion: Polymer modified for increased adhesion. D. Color: To match concrete. E. Approved Manufacturers:


1. 3-2-1 by U. S. Spec, Denver, CO, (303) 778-7227. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality, appearance and performance

are acceptable. 2.05 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

A. Expansion and Isolation Joint Fillers: Refer to Section 03100. B. Fiber Reinforcing: Polypropylene fiber reinforcing, specified in Section 03200.

2.06 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS

A. Provide moisture-retaining cover of waterproof sheet materials complying with ASTM C171, Type I or Type II, polyethylene sheeting complying with AASHO M-171, polyethylene coated burlap.

- or, at Contractor's option -

A. Provide membrane-forming curing compound conforming to ASTM C309, Type I, specified below.

Where used, curing compound must be compatible with applied finishes. B. Refer to Section 09800, Special Coatings, for specific requirements for curing of cast-in-place

concrete slabs to receive roll-on floor finish. 2.07 HARDENING, SEALING AND FINISH MATERIALS

A. General: Apply all hardening, sealing and finishing treatments in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to the schedule below for applications. Supplier/Installer of slab finish materials shall certify that materials specified and/or furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications, for the following criteria: 1. Compatibility of finish material with concrete mix specified. 2. Compatibility of finish material with type and degree of weather exposure. 3. Compatibility of finish material with expected use of space. 4. Compatibility of finish material with expected exposure to chemical, acid, oil, fat or other

deleterious material. B. Liquid Acrylic-Based Curing, Sealing and Dustproofing: Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborne or equal. C. Liquid Water-Based Curing, Sealing and Dustproofing: Kure-N-Seal W by Sonneborne or equal.

1. Color: Clear. D. Liquid Chemical Hardener: Lapidolith by Sonneborne or equal.

1. Color: White or gray, as scheduled. E. Liquid Silicate-Based Chemical Curing, Hardening and Dustproofing: Sonosil by Sonneborne or

equal. 1. Color: Clear.

F. Sealing and Dustproofing: Son-No-Mar by Sonneborne or equal. 1. Color: Gray.

G. Polyurethane Dustproofer and Sealer: Sonothane by Sonneborne or equal. (Not suitable where exposed to sunlight).

H. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 835-3434. 2. Thoro System Products, Miami, FL, and represented locally by The Rio Grande Co., Denver,

CO, (303) 825-2211. 3. L.M. Scofield Company, Los Angeles, CA, (800) 800-9900, represented locally by Conrep

West, Englewood, CO, (303) 740-7787.


4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality, appearance and performance are acceptable, except as limited above.

2.08 UNDER-SLAB MATERIALS

A. Granular Sub-Base: 3/8" to 3/4" gravel or crushed rock, extent and thickness as shown on the Drawings or as required by the Soils Report.

B. Vapor Barrier: None. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION

A. Notify any trades that may have items to be recessed or embedded in concrete, or that may require openings in concrete, of placing schedule. Coordinate work to avoid cutting of concrete and to avoid delays in the work.

B. Surfaces shall be true to line and grade and free from loose earth, frost, ice, mud and standing or running water. Protect bottom of excavation against freezing. Do not deposit concrete against frozen ground.

C. Make all preparations required for protection of concrete during placing and curing under detrimental weather conditions.

D. Form and install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, except as amended by this Section. Concrete formwork shall be as specified in Section 03100.

E. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements Section 02225.

F. Ensure that form inserts for all exposed edges and corners requiring chamfers are properly placed, as specified in Section 03100.

G. Ensure that sleeves and other site items to be installed under concrete work are properly located and installed, as specified in other Sections.

H. Smoothing and Resurfacing Coating: All surfaces in contact with coating shall be free of dirt, oil, grease, laitance and other contaminants.

3.02 DESIGN MIXES

A. Concrete mixes shall be as itemized on the Structural Drawings or specified herein for specific locations.

B. Concrete which does not meet the minimum requirements for strength at 28 days shall be reviewed and is subject to removal at the option of the Architect/Engineer.

C. Proportion normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 211.1. Concrete for all parts of the work shall be of the specified quality, capable of being placed without excessive segregation and, when hardened, of developing all characteristics required by these Specifications and the Contract Documents. Proportion ingredients to produce a mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcements by the methods of placing and consolidation employed on the work.

D. Design mixes shall be made and reported by an approved testing laboratory for each class of concrete, at the Contractor's expense.

E. Design mixes shall contain all admixtures required by these specifications and/or proposed by the Contractor to be used in concrete.

F. Proportion concrete design mixes so that compressive strength of laboratory-cured cylinders will be at least 15% greater than minimum specified strength. Refer to paragraph 1.05 for testing requirements.


G. Concrete Mixes: Contractor shall submit proposed design mixes for each type of concrete required for the work for approval by the Structural Engineer. Structural requirements shall be as specified on the Structural Drawings.

H. In lieu of designing new mixes for this project, existing mix designs meeting all requirements specified for each concrete mix and used successfully on previous projects under conditions similar to those anticipated on this project may be used, providing the following are submitted for the Structural Engineer's approval for each class of concrete: 1. Reports of concrete mix design and test results. 2. Reports of sufficient consecutive sets of 7- and 28-day concrete strength test made during

the last six (6) months and the calculations of standard deviation for these tests. 3. Reports of compliance tests of fine and coarse aggregates made during the last six (6)

months. 4. Mix submittals and required statistical strengths shall be in accordance with ACI 301.

I. Concrete Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200. 3.03 CONCRETE BATCHING AND MIXING

A. Ready-mixed batch plant equipment and facilities must comply with the requirements of ACI 614 and ASTM C94. The plant must have sufficient capacity to produce and deliver concrete of specified qualities in quantities required to meet the construction schedule.

B. Site-mixed concrete will not be permitted. Measure, mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, except as specified herein.

C. All concrete not placed within 90 minutes of initial contact of cement and water shall be rejected. D. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump is prohibited. Obtain the Architect/Engineer's

approval for any addition of water. Do not exceed the maximum permissible water/cement ratio or maximum slump under any circumstances.

3.04 PREPARATION OF INSERTS, EMBEDDED ITEMS AND OPENINGS

A. Provide formed openings where required for pipes, conduits, sleeves and other work to be embedded in and passing through concrete members.

B. Coordinate work of other Sections and cooperate with trades involved in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts.

C. Accurately position and securely fasten all anchor bolts, castings, steel shapes, conduit, sleeves, masonry anchorages and other materials to be embedded in the concrete.

D. Install conduits between reinforcing steel in walls, slabs or columns with reinforcing in both faces and below reinforcing in slabs with only one (1) layer of reinforcing steel.

E. Embedments shall be clean when installed. Remove concrete spatter from all surfaces not in contact with concrete.

3.05 PLACING UNDER-SLAB MATERIALS

A. Granular Sub-Base: Place a minimum of 4" (200mm) of gravel over compacted sub-base, level and compact thoroughly, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

3.06 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Transit-mixed concrete shall be truck-mixed in accordance with "Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete", ASTM C94-67.

B. Concrete shall have a temperature of 70° F +/- 20° F at the time of placing, unless prior permission has been granted in writing by the Architect/Engineer to exceed these tolerances.

C. Transport the concrete from mixer to final position as rapidly as practical without segregation, contamination or loss of material. Maximum not-to-exceed from introduction of water to placement of concrete is 90 minutes. Place concrete in forms with drop chutes, baffles or other


methods which will prevent segregation. Comply with the requirements of ACI 614. 1. Contractor shall assess the placement requirements of the site, construction staging and

other factors, and provide concrete pumping equipment for concrete placement as may be necessary, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Concrete foundation structures shall be placed on undisturbed, clean surfaces free from frost, ice, mud, standing or running water.

E. Ensure that hardened concrete, wood chips, shavings and other debris have been removed from the interior of the forms and all hardened concrete and foreign materials have been removed from the inner surfaces of the mixing and conveying equipment. Forms shall be wetted, oiled or treated with an approved form-coating material prior to placing concrete. Reinforcement shall be cleaned and secured in position before starting the placing of concrete.

F. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms as nearly as practical in its final position so as to avoid rehandling. Special care shall be exercised to prevent splashing the forms or reinforcement with concrete in advance of pouring.

G. Place concrete in horizontal layers not more than 24" thick, unless otherwise required by specific conditions of the work. Place successive layers at such speed so that the preceding layer is still plastic.

H. Immediately after depositing, the concrete shall be compacted to force out all air pockets, working the mixture into corners, around reinforcement and inserts to prevent the formation of voids. Consolidate concrete by vibration. Do not over-vibrate or use vibrators to transport concrete. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. 1. Mechanical vibrators need not be used for thrust restraints. 2. When vibrating is not practical, concrete shall be consolidated and all faces well spaced by

continuous working with a suitable tool in a manner acceptable to the Structural Engineer. 3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Complete finishing operation within 24 hours after stripping forms. Patch repairable defective areas immediately after form removal.

B. Subgrade Surfaces: Rough form finish is acceptable on all subgrade surfaces, except as indicated otherwise. Patch all defective areas.

C. Exposed Surfaces: Provide smooth rubbed finish on any formed surfaces exposed to view, including but not limited to the following: 1. Foundation walls with 12" or more of exposed vertical surface shall receive rubbed finish. 2. Retaining walls.

D. Strip forms while concrete is still green and steel trowel surfaces to a dense, hard finish with corners, intersections and terminations chamfered 1/2" and smooth. 1. Repair and patch all tie holes and defects with mortar. Remove all fins and projections. 2. Tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces

shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed and floated to a texture consistent to that of formed surfaces. Final treatment of formed surfaces shall continue uniformly across unformed surfaces.

3. Strike chamfered edges and corners of exposed concrete clean, straight and true to line. E. Honeycombing or spillage through forms shall be repaired or replaced as specified below in this

section. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF JOINTS

A. Joint Materials: Refer to Section 03100, Concrete Formwork, and paragraph 2.05 of this Section.


B. General: Locate and install construction joints which are not shown on the Drawings so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure. In general, locate near the middle of the span of slabs, beams and grade beams, unless a beam intersects a girder at this point. Obtain the Architect/Engineer's approval for joint locations.

C. Pour floor slabs in pattern indicated on the Drawings. Form control joints and place expansion joints as indicated on the Drawings, but in no case exceed the following requirements: 1. Control joints shall be spaced at 15'-0" maximum intervals each way so as not to encompass

an area to exceed 225 sq. ft., or other spacing and pattern(s) as shown on the Drawings. 2. Place control joints at internal corners, columns or other points of natural weakness.

D. Before depositing new concrete, remove all laitance and loose aggregates immediately before placing fresh concrete. Dampen but do not saturate the joint surface. At slabs and beams, apply a neat cement grout.

E. Expansion or Isolation Joints: Where expansion joints are indicated on the Drawings, place filler strips to within 1/2" of finished surface. Joint recess shall be formed with a separate removable filler section to provide a clean, true recess to receive sealant as specified in Section 07900.

F. Interior Construction and Control Joints: Keyed construction joints shall be formed with prefabricated joint materials and shall adhere to the control joint pattern shown. 1. Refer to the Drawings for special control joint patterns.

G. Bond Breaker: Where shown on the Drawings, provide minimum two (2) layers 15# non-bituminous felt bond breaker between interior or exterior slabs-on-grade and vertical wall surfaces.

H. Column Isolation Joints: Joints around columns may be formed with minimum 30# non-bituminous building felt left in place with neatly trimmed top edge or approved joint filler material.

I. Exterior Slab, Curb and Gutter Control Joints: Tool or saw joints to a depth of one-fourth (1/4) the thickness of the slab, where indicated on the plans. Refer to Section 02515 for joint spacing in exterior flatwork sections.

3.09 FINISHING FLATWORK

A. General: Verify all flatwork finishes with UCCS and/or the Architect in the field prior to proceeding with this work.

B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to required tolerance. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin film finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when the surface produces a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate the concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor coverings system.

D. Non-Slip Broom Finish: After completion of floated finish, draw a broom or a burlap belt transversely across the surface perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use broom finish after floating for surfaces to receive topping or cementious finishes. Coordinate final texture with the Architect prior to application.

E. Finishing Slabs at Floor Drains: Hold elevation of concrete slabs-on-grade around floor drains level to within 16" around each drain location, then shape surface to elevation of drains as shown on the Drawings. Refer to the Drawings for special sloped areas of concrete slabs-on-grade to floor or trench drains.


F. Slab Finish Schedule: Refer to Part 4, Schedules, at the end of this Section. 3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Maintain the following tolerances for all cast-in-place concrete work. Defective work shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1. Variation from Plumb:

a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum. b. 20' or more: 3/8" maximum.

2. Variation in Thickness: 1/4" to 1/2" standard, 5% for footings. 3. Variation in Grade:

a. 0-10': 1/4" standard, 1/8" for floor slabs. b. 10-20': 3/8" standard, 1/4" for floor slabs. c. 40' or more: 3/4" standard, 3/8" for floor slabs.

4. Variation in Plan: a. 0-20': 1/2". b. 40' or more: 3/4" standard, +1/2" for footings.

5. Variation in Eccentricity: 2% for footings. 6. Variation in Openings:

a. Size: +1/8". b. Location: 1/4".

B. Slab Tolerances: 1. Interior Floor Slabs: 1/8" in 10' maximum. 2. Exterior Terraces, Plazas, Slabs and Ramps: 1/4" in 10' maximum. 3.11 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening.

B. Refer to Section 03100 for stripping and removal of formwork after curing. C. Refer to the manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations for curing of concrete slabs-

on-grade to receive stains, sealers or other special finishes. D. Start curing immediately after finishing. Cure for at least seven (7) days, not necessarily

consecutive, during which air temperature surrounding concrete is above 50° F. Wood forms shall be kept wet. If forms are removed during curing period, an approved curing method must be started immediately.

E. Cure slabs by approved moisture-retaining coverings, lapped and sealed, and kept continuously wet. Approved curing compounds may be used if compatible with specified finishes. Specific approval is required from the Architect/Engineer. Curing compounds shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of freshly placed concrete from vandalism, accidental damage by workmen or equipment, or damage resulting from subgrade settlement or subsequent construction traffic. Take adequate precautions to restrict traffic in the area of fresh concrete during the curing period. Damaged concrete shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at UCCS's discretion.

G. Comply with the requirements of ACI 305 when hot weather conditions exist. Temperature of concrete when placed shall be less than 90° F. When necessary to prevent premature drying, arrangements for installation of windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding or a wet covering of light color shall be made in advance of placement, and such protective measures shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow.


H. Comply with the requirements of ACI 306 when cold weather conditions exist. When atmospheric temperature is 40° F and below, maintain concrete temperature at not less than 50° F for at least six (6) days. When necessary, make arrangements before concrete placing for heating, covering insulation or housing as required to maintain specified temperature and moisture conditions without injury due to concentration of heat.

I. Maintain protective cover on concrete so that changes in temperatures of concrete shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5° F in any one (1) hour or 50° F in any 24-hour period.

3.12 SEALING AND FINISH APPLICATIONS

A. General: Consult with the manufacturer's representative prior to application. Follow the manufacturer's printed instructions for applying materials.

B. Schedule of Exterior Hardening and Sealing Materials: Furnish and apply concrete curing, sealing and hardening products for exterior concrete in accordance with the following schedule: 1. Concrete Terraces, Plazas, Slabs and Aprons: Damp cure and Lapidolith, white pigment. 2. Exposed Surfaces of Retaining Walls: Kure-N-Seal. 3. Concrete not Scheduled for Other Finishes: Kure-N-Seal.

C. Schedule of Interior Hardening and Sealing Materials: Furnish and apply concrete curing, sealing and hardening products for interior floor slabs in accordance with the following schedule. Refer to paragraph 2.06 for certification of appropriate use. 1. Slabs to Receive No Flooring (Basement): Kure-N-Seal. 2. Slabs to Receive No Flooring (Dining Room): Damp cure and Lapidolith, gray pigment.

Follow with a polyurethane dust-proofer/sealer to create a tough, hard, deep gloss surface: Sonothane.

3. Slabs to Receive Carpeting or Resilient Flooring: Kure-N-Seal. 4. Slabs to Receive Ceramic, Porcelain or Quarry Tile: Sonosil. 5. Concrete Not Scheduled for Other Finishes: Kure-N-Seal.

D. Application Process: Apply curing, hardening and sealing products in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

E. Apply materials only after concrete surfaces are completely cured and dry. Follow the manufacturer's recommended application instructions, generally applying it in three (3) coats with ample drying time between coats. Remove surplus hardener after final application has dried.

3.13 APPLICATION OF SMOOTHING AND RESURFACING COATING

A. General: Prepare surfaces to receive coating per manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. 1. Surfaces shall be free of dirt, oil, grease, laitance and other contaminants. 2. Remove unsound concrete to ensure a good bond. 3. Mechanically abrade smooth, dense surfaces to provide necessary bonding. 4. Moisten area prior to application. 5. Maintain contact areas between 40° F and 90° F prior to repair and during initial curing

period. B. Mixing: Use a mechanical mixer with rotating blades on low rpm for 3-5 minutes to achieve desired

consistency. C. Placing: Place material consistently without multiple layers, using a putty knife, trowel or sponge

float. 1. Apply in applications from feather edge to 1/8" thickness. 2. For areas greater than 1/8" thick, apply U. S. Spec Quickset 20 to within 1/16" of final

repair, then apply finish coat. D. Finishing: Follow standard ACI curing practices.



3.14 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Remove and replace defective concrete not conforming to required line, detail and elevation as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural concrete, except upon express direction of the Architect.

C. Concrete damaged after placement shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at UCCS's discretion.

3.15 PATCHING AND POINTING

A. Patch and point all vertical and horizontal formed concrete surfaces where exposed to view, as defined in paragraph 3.07.

B. Fill holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after such work is in place.

C. Mix, place and cure concrete to blend with in-place construction. D. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the work.


A. Exposed cast-in-place concrete work shall be subject to evaluation to the satisfaction of the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: 1. Slab finishes specified in paragraphs 3.07 and 3.09. 2. Tolerances specified in paragraph 3.10. 3. Wall and corner surfaces, including patching and pointing specified in paragraph 3.15. 4. Joint materials and placement.

B. Power wash, or clean by other acceptable means, all dampproofing or waterproofing overspray or other surface visual defect.

PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 EXTERIOR FLATWORK FINISHES

A. Exterior Walks and Ramps: Non-slip broom or sweat finish. B. Exterior Terrace and Plaza Slabs: Non-slip broom or sweat finish.

4.02 INTERIOR FLATWORK FINISHES

A. Interior Floor Slabs: Troweled finish.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04100 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install mortar and grout materials for new concrete block masonry units. B. Furnish and install mortar materials for resetting existing masonry units, repointing existing joints

and other specified masonry repair. C. Obtain independent mortar analysis of the existing mortar, for use in formulating mortar for

repointing existing joints. D. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry. 3. Section 04400, Stone Masonry. 4. Section 05120, Structural Steel: Non-shrink Structural Grout.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM, American Society of Testing and Materials. 2. ASTM C144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 3. ASTM C150, Portland Cement. 4. ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 5. ASTM C270, Mortar Mix. 6. ASTM C476, Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry. 7. PCA, current edition. 8. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and specifications for each type of mortar specified, including certification that each type complies with the specifications.

B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full range of mortar colors for selection by the Architect.

C. Sample Panel: Refer to Section 04220 for sample panel requirements. Mortar color shall be reviewed for approval by the Architect.

D. Mortar Analysis: Submit three (3) copies of the existing mortar analysis specified in paragraph 1.04.

1.04 TESTING

A. Inspection and testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Architect, conforming to ASTM E149 and C270. Testing fees shall be paid as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. Test samples shall be taken at random to provide sampling over the course of work. Materials not conforming to these specifications shall be removed from the job and replaced.

1. Refer to Section 04220 for testing requirements.


B. Mortar Analysis: Contractor shall obtain an independent mortar analysis of the existing mortar to determine the composition and proportions of materials in the mortar. Mortar shall be sampled in a minimum of three (3) random locations throughout the existing building for verification and averaging of these results. Submit the results of the mortar analysis in written form to the Architect as specified above.


A. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 70° F and 100° F. B. Contractor shall use only one (1) type mortar to ensure uniform color. Masonry cement is not

permitted. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, natural. 1. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Use white and/or gray, as determined by mortar

analysis and replication mix design. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S for new construction.

1. Restoration and Preservation Projects: ASTM C207, Type N, or as required by mortar analysis.

C. Aggregate Sand: ASTM C144. 1. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Select source to match existing mortar to the

extent possible. D. Coarse Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404, less than 3/8". E. Water: ASTM C270, clean and suitable for domestic consumption. F. Mortar Coloring:

1. Concrete Unit Masonry: Natural. G. Admixtures: Pozzolan with approval; calcium chloride not permitted. H. Water Repellant: Integral polymeric-based water repellant admixture, conforming to ASTM E514,

RainBlok by ACM Chemistries, Inc., Norcross, GA, (877) 226-1766, or approved equal. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Mortar Mixes: ASTM C270, Type S mortar with hydrated lime for all new masonry construction. Minimum compressive strength of 1,800 psi at 28 days, or as indicated on the Structural Drawings: 1. 1 part Portland Cement, Type 1. 2. 1/4 to 1/2 part hydrated lime. 3. 2-1/4 to 3-1/2 parts damp, loose sand.

B. Mortar Mixes for Restoration and Preservation Projects: ASTM C270, Type N mortar tempered with hydrated lime for resetting existing units, repointing and masonry repair of the existing building. Compressive strength shall be 450 psi +/- 15%. 1. Components of mortar mix shall be as determined by mortar analysis required by paragraph

1.04 above. C. Masonry Grout Mix: Minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days:

1. 1 part Portland Cement, Type 1. 2. 2-1/4 to 3 parts damp, loose sand. 3. 1 to 2 parts coarse aggregate. 4. Pozzolan as per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Air entrainment shall be not more than 5% by volume.

D. Mixtures may change as per manufacturer's recommendations to meet requirements. E. Non-Shrink Structural Grout: Refer to Section 05120.



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Masonry installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which masonry is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the masonry installer.

B. Clean existing concrete unit masonry units prior to resetting. 3.02 BATCH CONTROL

A. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight such that the required proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained.

B. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of five (5) minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Do not use mortar which has begun to set or if more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. Retemper mortar during 2-1/2 hour period as required to restore workability.

C. Colored Mortar: If colored mortar is specified in paragraph 2.01 above, mortar color shall be pre-blended, not field mixed.

D. Use mortar within two (2) hours of mixing at temperatures over 80° F, and 2-1/2 hours at temperatures under 50° F.

3.03 JOINTS

A. General: Lay coursed modular units with 3/8" joints, unless otherwise indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment.

B. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Lay units with joint thickness to match existing, unless otherwise indicated to maintain bond alignment with existing brick masonry work.

C. Bond Pattern and Joint Type: Refer to Section 04220. D. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. E. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of work. F. Point out or replace defective mortar to match adjacent work. G. Clean soiled surfaces using a non-acidic solution which will not harm adjacent surfaces. Consult

masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install concrete unit masonry, including units and special shapes, mortar, ties, anchors and accessories.

B. Furnish and install concrete unit masonry horizontal joint and vertical reinforcing. C. Install all bolts, nailing blocks, inserts, door frames, steel lintels, vents, conduits and other related

work furnished by others to be built into concrete unit masonry. D. Furnish and install masonry grout for grouted cells of concrete unit masonry. E. Furnish test specimens and samples of materials to be built into work. F. Install composite wall and pourable masonry cell insulation materials, furnished by others. G. Clean new and/or existing concrete unit masonry and remove surplus material and waste. H. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 04100, Mortar. 3. Section 04400, Stone Masonry. 4. Section 05120, Structural Steel. 5. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation. 6. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim. 7. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM C90, Standard Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 2. ASTM C150, Portland Cement. 3. ANSI A-41.1, Building Code Requirements for Masonry. 4. ACI 530.1, Standard Specification for Tolerances. 5. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) "Specification for the Design and

Construction of Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry". 6. Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute. 7. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. 1.03 TESTING

A. Test reports for each type of concrete masonry unit shall be submitted to the Structural Engineer for approval. Testing is to be performed by an independent testing laboratory, in accordance with ASTM C140-63T. Reports shall include the following:

1. Compressive strength. 2. Water absorption. 3. Complete identification of units, including size, grade and type.

B. If results of test and/or inspections do not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents or are otherwise unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall proceed as directed by the Structural Engineer. Additional costs resulting because of retesting, load testing, removal and replacement of masonry, damage to the work of other trades shall be borne by the Contractor.


C. Structural Engineer shall have the right to order tests of any material entering into the masonry work or any other tests deemed necessary to determine whether materials and methods in use are such as to produce work of necessary quality, to order test under load of any portion of completed structure when conditions have been such as to leave doubt as to adequacy of the structure to serve purposes for which it is intended and to order change in proportions or material at Contractor's expense, if work of required quality cannot be obtained with materials and/or proportions furnished by the Contractor.

D. Materials or proportions of materials entering into masonry walls shall not be changed, unless approved by the Structural Engineer. Materials from any new source or changes in proportions shall be subject to all required tests, which shall be made at the Contractor's expense.

E. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Cooperate and provide every assistance to facilitate inspection and testing. 2. Furnish mix designs for mortar and grout prior to commencement of work, submit to the

Architect mix designs and test results for each type of grout, all with materials and in proportions proposed to be used in the actual construction. No work shall commence until the mix designs have been reviewed and approved by the Structural Engineer.

3. Furnish materials and labor required to make and handle test specimens at the project site under proposed job conditions.

4. Furnish temporary facilities for field-cured specimens. 5. Advise testing agency sufficiently in advance of operation to allow for completion of

quality tests. 1.04 CERTIFICATION

A. Prior to delivery, furnish Structural Engineer with certificates or test reports attesting compliance with the applicable specifications for the following: 1. Masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout materials. 3. Reinforcing steel.

B. Prior to installation, provide Structural Engineer with certificates or other documentation attesting to date of block casting.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit samples of each specified masonry unit for approval before delivery to the site, unless only standard, plain concrete unit masonry is used. Samples shall include shapes, sizes and kinds in sufficient number to show full range of color and texture of each type of masonry unit specified. Final approval shall be by the Architect. One (1) color and size for each different type of unit specified shall be used throughout the project.

B. Certificates: Submit certificates or other documentation attesting to test reports and date of block casting, as specified above.

1.06 TESTING OF MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Mortar: Make one (1) set of three (3) 2" x 4" cylinders for each type of mortar each day that mortar is laid. Break one (1) cylinder at seven (7) days and two (2) at 28 days. 1. Spread mortar on masonry units between 1/2" and 3/4" thick and allow to stand one (1)

minute. 2. Remove mortar and place it in a 2" x 4" cylinder in two (2) layers, compressing mortar into

cylinder using a flat-end stick or fingers. 3. Lightly tap mold on opposite sides, level off and immediately cover molds and keep them

damp until taken to laboratory. 4. Contractor’s Option: Contractor may substitute a prism test of in-place concrete unit

masonry construction, in lieu of specified mortar testing, upon prior approval of the


Architect/Engineer and Owner. B. Grout: Make one (1) set of three (3) 3" x 3" x 6" high specimens for each type of grout and type of

wall where used each day grout is poured. Break one (1) specimen at seven (7) days and two (2) at 28 days. 1. On a flat non-absorbent base, form a space 3" x 3" x 6" high, using masonry units having

same moisture condition as those being laid. 2. Line the space with permeable paper or porous separator so that water may pass through

the liner into masonry units. 3. Thoroughly mix the grout to obtain fully representative mix and place into molds in two (2)

layers. Puddle each layer with 1" x 2" stick to eliminate air bubbles. 4. Level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until taken to the laboratory.

C. After 48-hour set, remove molds, cap the specimens and place them in fog room until tested in damp condition, in accordance with ASTM C31.

D. Test in accordance with ASTM C39. From each set of cylinders, break one (1) at seven (7) days and two (2) at 28 days.

E. Reports shall include location and description of wall, dates, weather conditions, temperature of mortar and grout, description of mortar and grout mixes, description of masonry prisms, breaking stresses and nature of break.


A. Deliver materials to the site on platforms or pallets. Keep masonry units completely covered and free from frost, ice and snow. Handle masonry units carefully to avoid chipping, breakage, contact with soil or contaminating materials. Protect steel materials from moisture and keep free from rust or scale. Store mortar materials in dry place. Damaged materials shall not be used.

B. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work.

C. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.


A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50° F prior to, during and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

B. During freezing or near-freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to maintain a minimum temperature of 50° F and to protect masonry work completed or in progress.

C. Protect partially completed masonry against weather when work is not in progress by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2' down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place.

D. Walls which may be exposed to high winds during erection shall be adequately braced until permanent support is provided at floor or roof level immediately above the story under construc-tion.

E. Cold Weather Masonry Installation: 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. 2. Do not use antifreeze compounds, calcium chloride or substances containing calcium

chloride in mortar or grout. 3. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or

freezing. 4. Protect masonry being placed from wind with enclosures or shields when air temperature is

below 32° F. 5. Do not heat water above 106° F. 6. When mortar or grout materials have been combined, temperature of the mixture shall not

be less than 50° F nor more than 100° F. 7. Masonry materials shall be preconditioned and completed masonry protected as follows:


a. When air temperature is below 40° F and above 32° F, heat mixing water. Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by means of waterproof covers.

b. When air temperature is below 32° F and above 20° F, heat both sand and mixing water. Maintain a temperature of at least 40° F on both sides of walls by means of suitable covers or enclosures for 24 hours.

c. When air temperature is 20° F and below, heat sand, mixing water and block and provide heated enclosures. A temperature of at least 40° F shall be maintained within enclosures for 48 hours.

d. Periods required for protection and maintenance of specified temperatures may be reduced to 1/2 of those specified herein before if Type III Portland cement is used with the Engineer's approval.

F. Hot Weather Masonry Installation: 1. During very hot weather and drying wind, the Architect may order very light fog spray of

mortar bedding areas several times during the first 24 hours to prevent premature drying of mortar.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Plain Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C90, Grade N, minimum 2,000 psi light-weight load-bearing units. 1. Size: Nominal 8" high x 16" long face dimension x 8" deep units, unless otherwise

indicated. 2. Color: Natural. 3. Integral Water Repellant: Integral polymeric-based water repellant admixture, conforming

to ASTM E514, RainBlok by ACM Chemistries, Inc., Norcross, GA, (877) 226-1766, or approved equal.

4. Appearance: Units shall have smooth, dense, exposed surfaces free of cracks, chips or deleterious matter. Representative sample in sample panel subject to approval by Architect.

5. Special shapes as shown on the Drawings or as required: a. Knock-out bond beam units at bearing and top course of walls and in other

locations shown on the Drawings. B. Bond Beam Units: All bond beam units shall have knockout webs and open bottoms, except at

masonry lintels over openings. Match unit sizes and appearances specified in paragraph 2.01. C. Lintel Units: All lintel units shall have solid bottoms, cast as U-shaped units in lengths as required

for project conditions. Match unit sizes and appearances specified in paragraph 2.01. D. Tolerances: No overall dimension of width, height or length shall vary by more than 1/8" from the

specified standard dimension. E. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Robinson Block Co., Colorado Springs, CO, (719) 390-5477, (800) 284-8037. 2. Valley Block Co., Loveland, CO, (970) 667-4480. 3. Powers Masonry Supply, Fort Collins, CO, (970) 484-1292. 4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, appearance, quality, performance and

range of selection, including matching the selected product(s) specified above in the sole opinion of the Architect, are acceptable.


2.02 REINFORCING STEEL, ANCHORS AND TIES

A. General: Corrosion-resistant metal meeting or exceeding applicable standards ASTM A153 and ASTM A116.

B. Reinforcing Steel: Refer to Section 03200. C. Veneer and Horizontal Reinforcing Types:

1. Wire Mesh: Minimum 30-gage plain wire. Mesh shall be 1/2" width, 1" (25mm) less than width of masonry.

2. Ladder Type for Single Wythe Masonry: Prefabricated welded wire units, 6" wide x not less than 10'-0" long for 8" deep structural units, with matching corner and tee units. Wire shall be 9-gage, with single pair of deformed side rods and continuous plain cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c.

D. Veneer Ties: Standard 7/8" x 6-3/4" long, 18-gage rigid hot-dipped galvanized wall ties. E. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc., Arlington Heights, IL, and distributed locally at Denver, CO, (303) 321-1836.

2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL, (800) 621-4140. 3. Manufacturers providing products of same performance and function are acceptable.

2.03 INSULATION

A. Pourable Masonry Cell Insulation: Refer to Section 07210, Building Insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION, COORDINATION AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Ensure items built-in by other trades for this work are properly located and sized. B. Establish all lines, levels and coursing. Protect from disturbance. Place concrete unit masonry in

accordance with lines and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of

uniform thickness. D. Chases and recesses shall be built in and not cut in. Provide not less than 16" of masonry between

chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. E. Unfinished masonry walls shall be stepped back for joining with new work. Do not tooth. F. Cutting and fitting of masonry, including that required to accommodate the work of other Sections,

shall be done by masonry mechanics with masonry saws. G. Bearing for horizontal load-carrying members shall be of grouted masonry as shown on the

Drawings. If no detail is shown, bearing under beams shall consist of grouted masonry at least 8" x 16" in plan and 16" deep.

3.02 CURING OF MASONRY UNITS A. General: Concrete masonry units shall be cured for minimum of 28 days from the date of casting

before being delivered to the site and installed in masonry walls. Consult with Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute as necessary.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

A. Refer to Section 04100, Mortar, for installation and workmanship requirements for mortar and grout mixes.


B. Ensure that concrete masonry units have properly cured prior to installation, as specified in 3.02 above.

C. Lay, level and align corner units first. Lay concrete unit masonry in running bond, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Course one (1) block unit and mortar joint to equal 8" vertically. Lay external and internal courses as shown on the Drawings.

D. Lay first course of concrete unit masonry in full bed of mortar, except at locations of filled cores. Lay subsequent courses in face-shell mortar bedding properly jointed with other work. Fully mortar webs around each core to be grouted. Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections.

E. Align cells to be filled with grout to provide continuous, unobstructed vertical space. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper power tools to provide straight, true and

unchipped edges. G. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be

made, remove mortar and replace. H. Where knock-out bond beams are specified, place wire mesh in joints below bond beam to stop

flow of grout, except at reinforced vertical cells. I. Remove excess mortar and projections. Take care to prevent breaking block corners. Clean excess

mortar from cores to be grouted. J. Tolerances: Maximum variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit: 1/8". K. Tooling and Joints: Refer to paragraph 3.06.

3.04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS

A. Head joints shall be well buttered for thickness equal to face shell of unit and shall be shoved tightly so that mortar bonds well to both units. Do not slush head joints.

B. Hollow Concrete Masonry Units: Lay with full mortar coverage over horizontal and vertical face shells.

C. Starting Joint: Provide full mortar coverage on bed, except that area where grout occurs shall be kept free from mortar.

D. Mortar protrusions extending more than 3/8" into cells or cavities to be reinforced and/or filled, or into air space for veneer masonry, shall be removed.

E. Joint width shall be 3/8", unless otherwise shown. 3.05 TOOLING

A. Exposed Joints: Tool joints as scheduled. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where required.

B. Concealed Joints: Cut joints flush, unless otherwise shown. C. Joints to be covered with paint shall be filled flush and then sacked to produce dense surface

without sheen. D. Joints which are not tight at the time of tooling shall be raked out, pointed and then tooled.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Reinforce all walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcement, unless specifically shown otherwise. Provide special shapes where shown on the Drawings. Lap reinforcement minimum 6" at splices.

B. At each level, place reinforcement in bed joint between first and second course and then at regular intervals not exceeding 16" o.c. vertically.

C. Place reinforcement so that longitudinal wires are located over face-shell mortar beds and are fully embedded in mortar for their entire length with minimum mortar cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations.

D. Unless otherwise shown, provide reinforcement in first and second bed joints immediately above and below openings or recesses in walls. Reinforcement shall extend minimum 24" beyond end of


sills or lintels or to end of panel if distance to end of panel is less than 24". E. Use only prefabricated "L" and "T" units at corners and intersections, respectively. F. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcement, unless shown on the Drawings.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING BARS

A. Reinforcing bars shall be straight, except for bends around corners and where bends or hooks are detailed. Bars partially embedded in masonry shall not be field-bent, except as shown on the Drawings or specifically permitted by the Structural Engineer.

B. Bars shall be free of loose rust, mud, oil or other coatings that would destroy or reduce bond. C. Splices shall be made only at locations shown on the Drawings or where specifically permitted by

the Structural Engineer. Bars shall be lapped as specified in the Structural Drawings and be separated by 1 bar diameter or wired together.

D. Reinforcement shall be accurately placed into position indicated on the Drawings using reinforcing bar positioners and secured rigidly against displacement within a tolerance of 1/4".

E. Vertical reinforcing shall have a minimum clearance of 1/2" from masonry and not less than 1 bar diameter between bars.

F. Vertical reinforcing shall be placed in masonry cores as shown or specified on the Drawings, including but not limited to the following locations: 1. Load-bearing masonry walls, reinforcing bars spaced as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Cores in jambs of all door and window openings in load-bearing walls. 3. Cores below bearing of structural members, as indicated on the Drawings and specified in

paragraph 3.01 above. G. Horizontal bars shall be placed in continuous masonry courses, consisting of bond-beam or through-

block units and shall be solidly grouted in place. H. When foundation dowel does not line up with a vertical unit core, it shall not be sloped more than

1 horizontal in 6 vertical. Dowel shall be grouted into core in vertical alignment, even though it is in an adjacent cell to vertical wall reinforcing.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF VENEER TIES

A. Refer to Section 04400, Stone Masonry.

3.09 GROUTING OF MASONRY UNITS

A. General: Grout cells of hollow concrete unit masonry where indicated on the Drawings or required by project conditions, including but not limited to the following locations: 1. All vertical cells to be reinforced as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. 2. All horizontal cells of bond beam or lintel beam units as indicated on the Drawings or

specified herein. B. When laying masonry units, extreme care shall be taken to prevent excess mortar from squeezing

out and falling into air space or cells to be grouted or sand-filled. Mortar which projects more than 3/8" into grout space shall be removed.

C. Grout shall be puddled or vibrated in place. D. To control area to be grouted, use metal lath or masonry dam. Do not use paper or wood. E. Pour grout into horizontal members at maximum 48" o.c. F. Grouting of beams over openings shall be done in one (1) continuous operation. G. Vertical cells containing reinforcement and cells of walls scheduled to be filled shall be grouted

solidly. Pours shall be stopped 1-1/2" below top of course, except at top of wall, to form a key at pour joints. Provide clean-out openings at bottom of each pour for inspection.

H. Grouting Masonry of Hollow Units: Walls shall be erected and grouted in lifts not higher than 8'. Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment and shall have clear unobstructed cell area of at least 2" x 3".

I. Grout Spaces Less Than 2" in Width: Walls shall be grouted in heights of less than 8" or six (6) times


the grout joint thickness, whichever is less. Pour grout up to 1" from top of lower wythe. One (1) wythe of wall shall be laid up higher than the other, but not more than 16". Grout joint shall be at least 1" wide and shall be filled solidly with grout.

J. Grout Spaces 2" or More in Width: Grout space must be cleaned and inspected before grouting. Wall shall be grouted in heights of 2' or less for spaces less than 4" wide and in heights of 4' or less for spaces 4" or wider.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF LINTELS

A. General: Install loose lintels where shown on the Drawings or required for a complete installation. B. Masonry Lintels: Provide masonry unit lintels where shown and whenever openings of more than

12" but less than 30" are shown without steel or other lintels. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels. 1. Refer to the Structural Drawings for loose lintel schedule.

C. Bearing: Unless otherwise shown, provide minimum bearing of 6" for openings less than 6'-0" wide and 8" for wider openings.

D. Place control joint materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, recessed in joint for caulking as specified in Section 07900.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Locate vertical control, expansion and isolation joints in concrete unit masonry as shown on the Drawings. Joints shall be continuous through depth of the masonry work, unless otherwise detailed.

B. Maintain control joint voids clear of mortar, grout and debris. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking and sealants.

C. Control Joint Spacing: Refer to the Drawings. If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints maximum 20'-0" o.c. for unbroken lengths of concrete unit masonry, except as specified herein: 1. Wall Openings: Where doors, windows, louvers or other wall openings in masonry occur,

control joints shall be placed at locations and spacings shown on the Drawings, but in no case less than 12'-0" o.c.

2. Locate joints at points of natural weakness in supporting structure, at wall openings and at control joints located in the floor slab when walls are supported on the slab.

D. Stone Veneer Control Joints: Refer to Section 04400. 3.12 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, build-in door and window frames, electrical and mechanical accessories, anchor bolts, plates, specialties and other items supplied by others. Place items plumb and true to line.

3.13 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit sleeves and other items as required. Cooperate fully with other Sections to ensure correct size, shape and location.

B. Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on the Drawings or which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work.



3.14 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION AND OTHER FILL MATERIALS

A. Pourable Masonry Cell Insulation: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Refer to Section 07210.

3.15 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. General: All new and/or existing concrete unit masonry, where exposed to view in the completed work and not scheduled to be painted, shall be thoroughly cleaned upon completion of the work.

B. Adhere to the following procedures for cleaning concrete unit masonry. Never clean concrete unit masonry before mortar has set, minimum 14 days. 1. Dry clean wall with wood paddles or scrapers, removing large particles of mortar. 2. Presoak wall with clean water, scrub with a solution of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate and

1/3 cup household detergent to one gallon of water. Scrub with a stiff fiber brush only. 3. Thoroughly rinse with clean, low-pressure water immediately after scrubbing to remove all

cleaning solution, dirt, and mortar crumbs. C. Clean soiled surfaces exposed to view using a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or

adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. Leave surfaces prepared for further sealers or coatings, if specified.

D. Remove and replace any chipped or broken concrete masonry units. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of masonry work. Point or replace defective mortar to match adjacent work.


A. General: Installation of masonry units, mortar and grout, special curing and workmanship of joints shall be in accordance with the standards approved in the sample panel.

B. All concrete unit masonry units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that may interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the construction.

C. Where masonry units are to be exposed in the completed construction, the face or faces that are exposed shall be free of chips, cracks or other imperfections to the satisfaction of the Architect, except that chips not larger than 1/4" will be considered acceptable.

D. Contractor shall promptly remove any rejected masonry units or portions of the work and replace to match the quality of the approved sample panel.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04400 STONE MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install cut moss rock veneer, caps and other details as shown on the Drawings, including mortar, ties and accessories.

B. Clean new and/or existing stone masonry and remove surplus material and waste. C. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 04100, Mortar and Masonry Grout. 3. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. All stone masonry work shall be in accordance with the recommendations and standards of the

Indiana Limestone Institute. C. Installer shall have five (5) years successful experience installing stone on projects of similar scale

and complexity. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name of installer and quarry from which stone will be received for approval by UCCS. B. Samples: Submit samples of each specified stone material for approval before delivery to the site.

Samples shall include shapes, sizes and kinds in sufficient number to show full range of size, color and texture of each type of stone specified. Final approval shall be by the Architect.


A. Deliver material to the site on platforms or pallets. Keep stone completely covered and free from frost, ice and snow. Handle stone carefully to avoid chipping, breakage, contact with soil or contaminating materials. Store mortar materials in dry place. Damaged materials shall not be used.


A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50° F prior to, during and 48 hours after completion of stone work.

B. During freezing or near-freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to maintain a minimum temperature of 50° F and to protect stone work completed or in progress.

C. Protect partially completed stone masonry against weather when work is not in progress by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2' down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place.

D. Cold Weather Installation: 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. 2. Do not use anti-freeze compounds, calcium chloride or substances containing calcium


chloride in mortar or grout. 3. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace work damaged by frost or freezing. 4. Do not heat water above 106° F. 5. When mortar or grout materials have been combined, temperature of the mixture shall not

be less than 70° F nor more than 100° F. 6. Materials shall be preconditioned and protected as follows:

a. When air temperature is below 40° F and above 32° F, heat mixing water. Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by means of waterproof covers.

b. When air temperature is below 32° F and above 20° F, heat both sand and mixing water. Maintain a temperature of at least 40° F on both sides of walls by means of suitable covers or enclosures for 24 hours.

c. When air temperature is 20° F and below, heat sand, mixing water and block and provide heated enclosures. A temperature of at least 40° F shall be maintained within enclosures for 48 hours.

d. Periods required for protection and maintenance of specified temperatures may be reduced to 1/2 of those specified herein before if Type III Portland cement is used with the Engineer's approval.

E. Hot Weather Installation: 1. During very hot weather and drying wind, the Architect may order very light fog spray of

mortar bedding areas several times during the first 24 hours to prevent premature drying of mortar.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE MATERIALS

A. Moss Rock: Native Colorado moss rock, "Desert Basin". 1. Finish: Natural rough, random weathered faces. 2. Color(s): Natural color range. 3. Depth Range: 3" to 4". 4. Height Range: 3" to 5" for smaller units; 8" to 14" for larger units. 5. Length Range: 8" to 12" for smaller units; 14" to 18" for larger units.

B. Approved Quarries/Supply Yards: 1. Contact UCCS project manager for location of supply yard. 2. Other quarries meeting the requirements of this paragraph are acceptable as approved by

UCCS prior to bidding. 2.02 MORTAR

A. Cement: All cement shall be Portland cement as specified in Section 04100. B. Refer to Section 04100 for specified mortar mixes.

2.03 STONE MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Stone Masonry Veneer Ties: Specified in Section 04220. 2.04 SEALER A. Clear Masonry Sealer: None. PART 3 EXECUTION


3.01 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION

A. Ensure items built-in by other trades for this work are properly located and sized. B. Establish all lines, levels and coursing. Protect from disturbance. Place stone masonry in

accordance with lines and levels indicated on the Drawings, to match existing pattern. C. Sample Section: Stone mason shall lay sample area of approximately 6'-0" x 4'-0" high, showing full

range of unit sizes and proposed pattern, on the retaining wall for review and approval of UCCS and the Architect. Upon approval, sample area shall form the basis of field quality control for the balance of work.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF VENEER TIES

A. General: Install corrugated masonry veneer tie to concrete unit masonry walls at regular intervals not to exceed 16" o.c. both ways over the face of the masonry.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF STONE MASONRY

A. Refer to Section 04100, Mortar, for installation and workmanship requirements for mortar and grout mixes.

B. Lay, level and align corner units first. Lay stone masonry veneer in random bond, matching the existing pattern in size range and mix. Coursing shall be random, terminating in level course at top of veneer or wall cap conditions. Lay first course of stone masonry in full bed of mortar. Lay subsequent courses in mortar bedding properly jointed with other work. Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections. Joints shall be 3/8" average width, subject to approval by UCCS and the Architect.

3.04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS

A. Head joints shall be well buttered for thickness equal to 1/2 face dimension of unit and shall be

shoved tightly so that mortar bonds well to both units. B. Exposed Joints: Tool joints as scheduled. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of

caulking or sealants as required. 1. Exterior Face of Walls: Tooled joints.

C. Concealed Joints: Cut joints flush, unless otherwise shown. D. Joints which are not tight at the time of tooling shall be raked out, pointed and then tooled.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Locate vertical control, expansion and isolation joints in stone masonry as shown on the Drawings, or as recommended by the Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute. Joints shall be continuous through depth of the masonry work, unless otherwise detailed.

B. Maintain control joint voids clear of mortar, grout and debris. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking and sealants.

C. Control Joint Spacing: 1. Masonry Veneer: Locate vertical control joints in continuous runs of masonry veneer so

ratio of horizontal run to vertical height of veneer does not exceed 4:1, or 20'-0", whichever is greater.

2. Locate joints at points of natural weakness in supporting structure. D. Place control joint materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, recessed in

joint for caulking as specified in Section 07900. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. General: All new stone masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned upon completion of the work. Take



care not to dislodge natural moss from the stone units. B. Remove and replace any broken stone units. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of

work. Point or replace defective mortar to match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces exposed to view using a non-acidic solution which will not harm stone or

adjacent materials. Consult manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. Leave surfaces prepared for further sealers or coatings, if specified.


A. General: Installation of stone masonry units, mortar and grout and workmanship of joints shall be in accordance with the standards approved in the sample panel.

B. All stone masonry units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that may interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the construction.

C. Contractor shall promptly remove any rejected stone units or portions of the work and replace to match the quality of the approved sample panel.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish, fabricate and install miscellaneous structural and non-structural steel items. B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcing. 3. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 09900, Painting.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. AISC: Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for

Buildings. 2. AISC: Manual of Steel Construction. 3. AWS: Code for Welding in Building Construction. 4. ASTM A36: Structural Steel. 5. ASTM A307: Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners. 6. ASTM A500-B: Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Structural Steel. 7. ASTM A572-50: High-Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium Vanadium Structural Steel. 8. FS TT-P-31: Iron Oxide, Ready Mix, red and brown. 9. ASTM A525: Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dipped Process. 10. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication of structural steel for projects of similar size

and complexity. C. Welding Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by welders or welding operators currently

certified in accordance with the AWS Code to perform the type of welding involved. 1. All welders shall have evidence of current certification. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Specifications: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions showing compliance with the specifications for filler metal for welding, shop paint and grout.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s written product literature for any miscellaneous or specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of any miscellaneous or specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections.


A. Materials to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast-in-place concrete to the project site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete operations. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices.


B. Handle members in a manner to prevent damage, distortion or abrasion of shop paint. Repair or replace damaged materials, members or structures as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

C. Storage of Structural Steel: Structural steel members stored at the project site shall be above ground on platforms, skids or other supports and stored upright to prevent twisting. Protect steel from corrosion. Store other materials in a weathertight and dry place until ready for use. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES

A. Rolled Steel Shapes, Beams, Channels and Angles: Comply with ASTM A572-50, 50 ksi. B. Structural Tubular Steel: Square, cold-rolled steel tubing, fully welded constructions. Comply with

ASTM A500, Grade B, 46 ksi. C. Structural Steel Pipe: Comply with ASTM A53, Grade B, 46 ksi. D. Solid Steel Bars and Plates: Comply with ASTM A36-81a, 36 ksi.

2.02 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS

A. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: Regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A.

B. Electrodes for manual shielded and metal arc welding shall be covered mild steel electrodes conforming to the AWS Code and ASTM A233, Series E-60 and E-70.

C. Bare electrodes and granular flux for submerged arc welding shall conform to the AWS Code and ASTM A588, Series F-60 and F-70.

2.03 FABRICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. General: Structural steel shall be detailed and fabricated in accordance with the referenced codes, AISC Specifications and standards and in compliance with the final approved shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown.

B. Shop-fabricate and assemble sections in largest practical components for delivery and erection on the site. Extent of shop assembly shall be as approved in the shop drawings.

C. Properly mark and match mark all materials for field assembly. Coordinate fabrication and delivery sequence to expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. Plates and anchor bolts to be built into concrete work shall be shipped loose.

D. Type of connection most suitable to shop or field facilities shall be used, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

E. Cutting and Fitting: Perform necessary cutting, fitting and drilling for the accommodation of other trades. Secure correct information for same, both before and after steel is delivered. Cutting or drilling will not be permitted on the job without the approval of the Structural Engineer.

F. Steel to be Exposed in Finished Structure: All steel beam seats, beams, columns and other items to be exposed in the completed work shall be fabricated and cut square, true and uniform, with uneven, rough or abraded edges sanded smooth prior to shop painting.

2.04 PRIMER AND PAINT

A. Shop Paint: Provide paint conforming to FS TT-P-636, manufacturer's standard red. Field touch-up paint shall be the same as shop paint.

B. Asphaltic Paint: Provide an asphaltic base paint for all surfaces below grade and for all members exposed in crawlspaces, and all exterior members to be in contact with concrete, or as shown on the Drawings. 1. Sonneborn Hydrocide Semi-Mastic.

C. Primer: Conform to FS TT-P-31, red.


2.05 SHOP PAINTING

A. After fabrication, remove all loose scale, rust, weld slag or flux deposit, oil, grease, dirt or other foreign materials.

B. Apply one (1) coat of shop paint to all steel, except as specified herein. Dry film thickness shall not be less than 2 mils.

C. Do not paint surfaces of steel in contact areas to be welded or contact surfaces of friction-type high-strength bolted connections. Protect machine-finished surfaces against corrosion. Do not paint surfaces of steel embedded in concrete.

D. Do not paint/prime interior steel surfaces to receive application of spray-applied fireproofing. 2.06 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Provide factory-packaged non-shrink non-metallic flowable grout where shown on the Drawings, manufactured by Embeco, Five Star or equal. 1. One (1) day compressive strength of 5,000 psi minimum.


A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to commencing work of this Section. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any discrepancies or conditions which may affect the successful installation of the structural steel work. Do not begin work until conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for checking all dimensions, elevations and assuring fit of structural steel members prior to commencing erection.

C. Prior to start of erection of the steel, Erector shall verify the location of embedded anchor bolts and report deviations from the anchor bolt setting plan to the General Contractor in writing.

D. Protect adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during field welding.

E. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Make provision for erection loads on existing structure, and for sufficient temporary bracing as required.

3.02 PREPARATION FOR STRUCTURAL MODIFICATIONS

A. Contractor shall be responsible for checking all dimensions, elevations and assuring fit of structural steel members prior to commencing installation.

B. Contractor shall ensure the structural stability of the roof and floor framing components during removal or modification of any existing connectors, and the installation of new connectors. 1. Shore or brace walls and framing members as necessary.

C. Field welding as a part of this work shall only be allowed where specifically shown on the Drawings or approved by the Architect/Engineer. 1. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions during welding in the vicinity of existing

wood construction. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for the repair or replacement of any existing construction

damaged or destroyed by this work at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Protect adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks

during field welding.


3.03 SHOP AND FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. Weld or bolt shop connections, unless otherwise shown. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections are shown or specified. Use bolts conforming to ASTM A325, unless otherwise shown.

1. All welds exposed to view are to be "Architectural Grade". B. Finish work in accordance with the approved shop drawings. Work shall be true and free from

twists, kinks, buckles, open joints and other defects. 3.04 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. General: Erect steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice and other specified requirements, including special provision of CSHA and COSH.

B. Erection equipment shall be of adequate capacity to perform all work safely. Do not use floor and roof systems of building to support erection equipment.

C. Maintain work in safe and stable condition during erection. Provide temporary shoring and bracing as required.

D. Set structural steel accurately to lines and elevations indicated within specified AISC erection tolerances. Align and adjust various members forming a part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening.

E. Clean bearing and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. 1. Allowable Tolerances: Comply with requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice.

Leveling and plumbing shall be based on a mean temperature of 70° F. Compensate for difference in temperature at time of erection.

F. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates on steel wedges or on other adjustable devices. Tighten anchor bolts after the supporting members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims.

G. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors.

H. Field Modifications: Written approval of the Structural Engineer must be obtained before using cutting torch for field modification or refabrication of structural steel. Contractor shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit in the field.

3.05 CLEANING AND FIELD PAINTING

A. Clean all steel surfaces in preparation for field finishing. B. Paint only when ambient air temperature is above 40° F. Surfaces to be painted shall be free of

rust, oil, dirt and mud. Immediately after erection, touch-up field welds, bolted connections and abrasions of the shop coat.

C. Apply asphaltic paint to portions of columns, including base plate that will be below grade or top of slab-on-grade, and to all connections or other surfaces exposed in crawlspaces or to be in contact with concrete in exterior applications.

D. Wash down all structural steel framing upon completion of erection. E. Refer to Section 09900, Painting, for field finishing of exposed steel surfaces.

3.06 PLACEMENT OF NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Inspect surfaces prior to placement of grout. Check for cleanliness and proper placement and installation of steel work to be in general conformance with the Drawings.

B. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions.

C. Place in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Pack grout solid taking care that there are no voids. Refrain from tightening anchor bolts until grout has set and cured.




A. General: Refer to Structural Drawings for complete steel inspection table or schedule. B. Shop- and field-welding of exposed structural steel members shall be subject to evaluation to the

satisfaction of the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: 1. Alignment and spacing of members. 2. Flushness and plumb of adjacent members. 3. Quality and appearance of finished welds. 4. Alignment of bolts and other attachments, where exposed to view in finished structure. 5. Consistency of bolt length beyond nuts, where exposed to view in finished structure.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS AND GUARDRAILS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish miscellaneous metal and solid bar tube railings, with associated fittings, for installation at existing and new stairs and existing ornamental railings.

B. Furnish and install wrought iron solid bar and decorative strap railings, with associated fittings, for installation at new exterior stairs.

C. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise. D. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete: Fabrications cast into concrete. 3. Section 05120, Structural Steel. 4. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation of salvaged ornamental railings. 5. Section 09900, Painting.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A36: Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53: Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. 3. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code. 4. Railing system shall be designed to conform to building code and ADA requirements for

openings and stress. 5. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any


A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all railing configurations, indicating component materials, shapes, fabrication, finish, layout and configuration, anchorage and mounting details and relationships to adjacent and adjoining work.

1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Handrail and guardrail components shall be fabricated and installed to meet all current building code requirements, whether specifically detailed on the Drawings or not, including but not limited to: 3. Railing extensions at the top and bottom of stair runs and ramps. 4. Railing returns to walls. 5. Uninterrupted grip on railings. 6. Spacing between handrail and guardrail components. 7. Height of handrails and guardrails.

B. Installed railing systems shall resist minimum lateral force of 50 lbs. per lineal foot, or 200 lbs. at any point at top member, whichever is greater, without permanent set or damage to members or anchors.



A. Deliver prefabricated sections to the site in fabricator's original protective packaging. B. Store materials in clean, dry area indoors. C. Protect materials and primed finishes from damage during handling and installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL TUBE RAILING SYSTEM

A. Steel Tube Railing Materials: 1. Structural Steel, Plates and Bars: Comply with ASTM A36-81a, matching specifications of

Section 05120. 2. Structural Tubular Steel: Square, cold-rolled steel tubing, comply with ASTM A500, Grade

B. B. Posts and Rails: Steel tube members, fully welded construction, configurations as shown on the

Drawings: 1. Handrails and Posts: 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" steel tube. 2. Guardrails, Top Rail: 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" steel tube. 3. Bottom and Intermediate Rails: 1" x 1" steel tube. 4. Intermediate Vertical Pickets: 5/8" x 5/8" steel tube or 1/2" square solid bar stock, spaced

4" o.c. maximum or as indicated on the Drawings. C. Brackets and Mounting Accessories: As detailed on the Drawings or recommended by fabricator. D. Embedded Sleeves: Same materials as handrails and/or guardrails being anchored, one (1) size

larger or as recommended by fabricator, hot-dipped galvanized. E. Finish: Shop-prime fabricated items not scheduled for galvanizing, painted in one (1) coat. F. Approved Fabricators: Steel fabricators providing products of the same function, design,

performance and quality are acceptable. 2.02 WROUGHT IRON RAILING SYSTEM

A. Wrought Iron Railing Materials: Match existing materials. B. Posts and Rails: Member sizing, spacing and design as shown on the Drawings. C. Brackets and Mounting Accessories: As detailed on the Drawings or recommended by fabricator. D. Embedded Sleeves: Same materials as handrails and/or guardrails being anchored, one (1) size

larger or as recommended by fabricator, hot-dipped galvanized. E. Approved Fabricators: Wrought iron fabricators providing materials of specified function, design,

performance and quality are acceptable. 2.03 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate metal railing systems in accordance with the approved shop drawings and as detailed on the Drawings.

B. Fabricate metal railing systems to meet the design criteria specified in paragraph 1.04 above. C. Fit and shop-assemble in largest practical sections for delivery and installation as approved in shop

drawings. D. Supply components required for proper anchorage of handrails and guardrails. E. Fabricate removable sections of metal railing system as detailed on the Drawings, using pipe

sleeves for embedded attachments in concrete. F. Shop welding to be "Architectural Grade". Grind all welds smooth and prime. Clean all extraneous

materials from welding. Whenever possible, fabricate with seams on underside of assembled section.

G. Use approved automotive body putty wherever to fill out joints to create smooth, monolithic appearance. Follow manufacturer's directions for application and sanding techniques. Repeat



process until smooth, monolithic appearance is achieved. H. Shop-prime in one (1) coat, as scheduled.


A. Fabricator shall field verify all dimensions and site conditions prior to the fabrication of the metal railing and guardrail systems, and notify the Contractor of any condition that would adversely affect the installation, structural capacity, performance or appearance of the finished installation. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Fabricator.

B. Ensure that items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry are supplied to the site prior to concrete or masonry work, complete with necessary setting templates.

C. Ensure that ferrous metal surfaces have been properly painted where in contact with aluminum or other dissimilar metals as required to prevent electrolysis.

D. Coordinate installation of new railings as required, where scheduled to be attached to existing, salvaged railing systems.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF RAILINGS

A. General: Install metal railing and guardrail systems in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Erect work plumb, rigid, square, level, accurate to sizes and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance.

C. Field grind shop welds as necessary to achieve specified visual quality, to the satisfaction of the Architect. Touch-up shop prime coat.


A. Clean all steel surfaces in preparation for field finishing. B. Protect installed railing and guardrail systems and finish from damage during balance of

construction. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: Installation of railing systems shall be in accordance with the standards approved in the shop drawings.

B. Steel and wrought iron components, surfaces and connections shall be subject to evaluation and approval to the satisfaction of the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: 1. Smoothness and flushness of tube and bar surfaces. 2. Smoothness and appearance of shop and field welds. 3. Smoothness of bends and curved sections. 4. Uniformity and appearance of attachments.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish materials and labor for installation of rough carpentry, including but not limited to: 1. Studs, joists, bridging, blocking and plates for wall and soffit framing. 2. Furring, stripping, blocking and sleepers. 3. Plywood and/or oriented strand board (OSB) floor sheathing. 4. Roof crickets, curbs, blocking and plates. 5. Redwood or pressure-treated wood plates.

B. Furnish and install pressure-treated and/or fire-treated wood materials. C. Furnish nails, screws, bolts, fasteners, construction adhesives, and other related or accessory

materials required for a complete installation. D. Furnish materials and labor for repair/replacement of deteriorated wood roof rafters, floor joists,

floor and roof decking and sheathing and other structural modifications as indicated on the Drawings or required by project conditions.

E. Installation of prefabricated wood beams, floor joists and miscellaneous blocking and bridging. F. Furnish and install peeled pole logs for beams and posts. G. Furnish and install light-gage metal joist/truss connectors. H. Coordination of all other trades as required for a complete installation. I. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Brand or mark new structural wood joists, studs or rafters. J. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Furnish and install epoxy-type wood repair materials, as

indicated on the Drawings or required by existing project conditions. K. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 3. Section 06170, Prefabricated Structural Wood. 4. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry. 5. Section 07221, Tapered Rigid Insulation. 6. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim. 7. Section 09650, Resilient Flooring: Underlayment for sheet flooring.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. PS 1: Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. PS 2: Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural Use Panels. 3. PS 20: American Softwood Lumber Standard. 4. NFPA National Forest Products Association National Design Specification for Wood

Construction. 5. APA: American Plywood Association, Plywood Specification and Grade Guide. 6. AWPA: American Wood-Preservers' Association.

a. AWPA C1: All timber products – preservative treatment by pressure processes. b. AWPA C2: Lumber, timber, bridge ties and mine ties – preservative treatment

by pressure processes. c. AWPA C4: Poles – preservative treatment by pressure processes. d. AWPA C9: Plywood - preservative treatment by pressure processes. e. AWPA C14: Wood for highway construction - preservative treatment by


pressure processes. f. AWPA C15: Wood for commercial-residential construction – preservative

treatment by pressure processes. g. AWPA C17: Playground equipment treated with inorganic preservatives -

preservative treatment by pressure processes. h. AWPA C22: Lumber and plywood for permanent wood foundations -

preservative treatment by pressure processes. 7. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 8. California Redwood Association. 9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Rough Carpentry Lumber: Materials shall carry the visible grade stamp of agency certified by

National Forest Products Association (NFPA). C. Plywood panels shall be identified with APA grade trademark of the American Plywood Association. D. Grading of lumber shall be in accordance with the current edition of the Western Wood Products

Association. E. Pressure-Treated Lumber: Pressure-treated lumber materials shall not contain chromated copper

arsenate (CCA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Preservative Treatment Certification: Treating plant's certification of compliance with specified standards, process employed and preservative retention values.

B. Product Data: For restoration and preservation projects, submit manufacturer's written product literature and installation instructions for specified epoxy-type wood repair materials.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for all construction adhesives. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect lumber and plywood and keep under cover in transit and at jobsite. B. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required to be installed in the work. C. Store on level racks and keep free of the ground to avoid warping. Stack to ensure proper

ventilation and drainage. D. Pressure-Treated Wood Materials: Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional

changes, in accordance with instructions from treating plant. E. Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's original unbroken boxes, cartons or containers, with

labels intact. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

1.05 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's written lifetime warranty for pressure-treated wood products covering defects in materials and workmanship.

B. Provide manufacturer's written 1-year warranty for epoxy-type wood repair materials covering defects in materials and workmanship. 1. Installation Warranty: Installing contractor shall provide a 2-year written warranty

covering installation.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS

A. Framing Lumber: PS 20, grade in accordance with established WPA grading rules, maximum moisture content of 12% to 19% (S-Dry) S4S, of the following species and grades: 1. Structural Framing: Grades and stresses as indicated on the Structural Drawings. 2. Non-Structural Light Framing: Douglas Fir or Hem-Fir, construction grade or better. 3. Blocking and Miscellaneous Furring and Stripping: Douglas Fir or Hem-Fir, construction

grade or better. 4. Sill Plates: Redwood or pressure-treated Hem-Fir, where in contact with concrete or

masonry. Pressure-treated lumber shall not contain CCA. B. Waferboard: Oriented strand board (OSB), exterior APA.

2.02 PRESSURE-TREATED ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS

A. Joists, Beams and other Structural Members: PS 20, grade in accordance with established WPA grading rules, maximum moisture content of 12% to 19% (S-Dry) S4S, with preservative treatment specified below, of the following species and grades: 1. Structural Framing: Grades and stresses indicated on the Structural Drawings. 2. Non-Structural Light Framing: Douglas Fir or Hem-Fir, construction grade or better. 3. Sill Plates: Redwood or pressure-treated Hem-Fir, where in contact with concrete.

2.03 WOOD SHEATHING MATERIALS

A. General: APA-rated wood sheathing, meeting the grading requirements of PS-1 or PS-2. 1. Sizes: Manufacturer's standard 4'-0" wide x 8'-0" long x thicknesses as shown on the

Structural Drawings. 2. Edges: Tongue-and-groove.

B. Exterior/Interior Structural Sheathing: As specified on the Structural Drawings, Exterior APA. C. Exterior Exposed Plywood: N/C, Exterior APA, for infill kickplates and other exposed sheets larger

than 2'-0" wide, for painted opaque finish. D. Exterior Exposed Plywood: A/D or A/C, Exterior APA, for exposed soffits, sheathing and other

semi-exposed areas with sheets narrower than 2'-0" wide, for painted opaque finish. E. Exterior Concealed Sheathing: CDX, Exterior APA. F. Interior Exposed Plywood: A/D or A/C, Interior APA, for painted opaque finish. G. Interior Concealed Sheathing: C/D plugged, Interior APA with exterior glue. H. Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: Underlayment, Interior APA, or Structurwood by

Weyerhaeuser Corp. I. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Weyerhaeuser Corp., Tacoma, WA. 2. Georgia Pacific Corp., Atlanta, GA, (404) 652-4000. 3. Manufacturers providing products of the same design, function, quality and performance

are acceptable. 2.04 PEELED POLE LOGS

A. Peeled Pole Logs for Beams and Posts: Hem-Fir, Douglas Fir, Lodgepole Pine or Ponderosa Pine, grade and stresses as indicated on the Structural Drawings. 1. Logs shall be factory- or hand-peeled, removing all bark and branches. 2. Logs shall be free of splits or checks exceeding 1/4" wide and 2" deep. 3. Logs shall be fully dry, cut after standing dead for five (5) years, and seasoned. 4. Pine beetle-kill logs are acceptable.


2.05 FASTENERS, ACCESSORY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. Nails: Size and type to suit application. 1. Framing: 8d to 16d rosin-coated common. 2. Sheathing: 8d, 2 1/2" long box nails, zinc-coated.

B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Size and type to suit application or as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Medium Carbon Steel: Galvanized for exterior locations, high-humidity locations and

treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations or when in contact with concrete. C. Wood Epoxy Repair System: Two-part epoxy resin repair materials, intended to penetrate and

strengthen existing rotted structural and non-structural wood materials. 1. Liquidwood and Woodepox, manufactured by Abatron Inc., Kenosha, WI, (262) 653-2000. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality are

acceptable.

2.06 CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVES A. Construction Adhesives: Low-viscosity, mastic-type, multipurpose adhesive, formulated for field-

gluing for interior or exterior use, meeting the following specifications: 1. Reference Standards: Comply with the following minimum standards:

a. APA Spec. AFG-01. b. ASTM D3498 and C557. c. HUD/FHA requirements in Bulletin #60.

2. Type: Synthetic elastomeric polymer, VOC compliant. a. Calculated VOC: 47 g/L maximum.

3. Base: Synthetic elastomer. 4. Consistency: Approx. 130,000 cps, Brookfield viscometer. 5. Weight/Gallon: 10.4 lbs. minimum. 6. Solids content: 78%. 7. Strength: ASTM D3498. 8. Aging: Retains flexibility after 500 hrs. at 300 psi and 158° F by ASTM D572-61. 9. Water Resistance: Waterproof. 10. Application Method: Caulking gun or trowel. 11. Application Temperature: 0°-100° F. 12. Service Range: -20° to -120° F. 13. Material Suitability: Select appropriate adhesive product(s) for materials/products to be

field bonded, including but not limited to: a. Medium- and heavy-duty construction adhesives. b. Subfloor adhesive. c. Polyurethane adhesive. d. Repair construction adhesive. e. Multipurpose flooring adhesive. f. Ceramic tile adhesive.

B. Approved Product and Manufacturer: 1. Titebond VOC-Compliant Adhesives, manufactured by Franklin International, Columbus,

OH, (888) 533-9043, as basis of design. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same type, design, quality, performance and VOC

compliance are acceptable.


2.07 LIGHT-GAGE METAL JOIST/TRUSS CONNECTORS

A. General: Light-gage, galvanized metal hangers, clips and base, size and type as indicated on the Drawings, as required to suit job conditions or as recommended by manufacturer for intended application.

B. Finishes: 1. In contact with preservative treated wood for above ground use: Galvanized, ASTM A653,

G185. 2. In contact with preservative treated wood for other than above ground use: Type 304 or

316 stainless steel. 3. All other applications: Galvanized, ASMT G653, G90.

C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA, (800) 999-5099. 2. Timber Engineering Co. 3. KC Metal Products Inc., San Jose, CA, (408) 436-8754. 4. Semco, Jacksonville, FL, (800) 874-0335. 5. Manufacturers providing framing connectors and accessories of same design, function,

performance and structural capabilities are acceptable. 2.08 WOOD TREATMENTS

A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated on the Drawings or specified herein to be pressure-treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA standards C2, C9, C14, C15, C16, C17 or ICBO ER4981, as applicable. Pressure-treat items with waterborne preservatives complying with WPA LP-2, except that in no case shall chromated copper arsenate (CCA) be used. After treatment, kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of 19% for lumber and 18% for plywood. Mark each treated item with the WPA quality mark requirements. 1. Application Rates: Apply specified preservative treatment as follows, or as recommended

by approved manufacturers: a. Preservative treatment for above ground use: 0.25 lb./cu.ft. minimum. b. Preservative treatment where in contact with ground: 0.40 lb./cu.ft. minimum. c. Preservative treatment for wood foundation systems: 0.60 lb./cu.ft. minimum.

2. Treated wood products shall be used in the following locations, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings: a. In contact with roofing, flashing or waterproofing. b. In contact with masonry or concrete. c. In contact, or within 6" of grade. d. Exposed to weather. e. Other locations indicated.

B. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Where fire-retardant or treated lumber or plywood is indicated or required by applicable building codes, comply with AWPA C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood, using types required for interior and exterior use.


A. General: For restoration and preservation projects, the Contractor shall be responsible for the inspection of all existing structural wood components of the structure, and notify the Architect of any condition that may affect the structural integrity, quality or appearance of the completed project. This shall include, but not be limited to, the following general areas: 1. Wood plank roof decking. 2. Wood pole roof joists.


3. Wood floor joists, where scheduled to remain. B. Upon inspection by the Architect and UCCS, the deteriorated materials will be replaced on a unit

price basis. C. Selection of Lumber Pieces:

1. Carefully select the members. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing and will allow for proper connections.

2. Cut out and discard defects which render a piece unable to serve its intended function. 3. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect/Engineer, whether or not it has been installed,

for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting, provided such defects exceed the criteria allowed by referenced standards for the lumber grade specified. The Contractor shall replace rejected material at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROUGH CARPENTRY

A. General: 1. Erect wood framing, furring, stripping and nailing members true to lines and levels; do not

deviate from true alignment more than 1/4" in 10'-0". 2. Space members as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein. 3. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. 4. Construct and erect required built-up beams and headers. 5. Produce joints which are tight, true and well nailed, with members assembled in

accordance with the Drawings and with applicable codes and regulations. 6. Set horizontal and sloped members with the crown up. Crowns to be set in the same

direction for vertical or horizontal application. 7. Make bearings full and uniform for solid support. 8. On framing members to receive a finished surface, align the finish subsurface to vary not

more than 1/8" from the plane of surfaces of adjacent furring and framing members. 9. Where scheduled, leave wood surfaces prepared for finishing specified in Section 09900,

Painting, and Section 09930, Transparent Finishes. B. Fastening:

1. Nailing shall be in accordance with the requirements of applicable sections of the building code, current edition, unless indicated otherwise. a. Nail without splitting wood. b. Prebore as required. c. Remove split members and replace with members complying with the specified

requirements. 2. Bolting:

a. Drill holes 1/16" larger in diameter than the bolts being used. b. Drill straight and true from one side only. c. Do not bear bolt heads on wood, but use washers under head and nut where both

bear on wood, and use washers under all nuts. 3. Screws: For lag screws and wood screws, prebore holes 2/3 diameter as shank, enlarging

holes to shank diameter for length of shank. C. Floor Framing: Conform to the framing requirements of the jurisdiction with authority over this

project, unless more stringent requirements are shown on the Structural Drawings or specified herein. 1. Dimensional Framing: 2x depth and spacing as indicated on the Structural Drawings.

Provide built-up headers and trimmers as shown on the Drawings or required by project conditions.

2. Prefabricated Structural Floor Joists: As specified in paragraph 3.05 below and in Section 06170.

3. Bridging and Blocking: As shown on the Drawings or as required by applicable Building Codes and the jurisdiction with authority over the project. Also refer to paragraphs 3.03


and 3.05 below. 4. Rim Joists: 3/4" plywood, unless prefabricated joists are specified. 5. Sill Plates: 2x redwood or pressure-treated lumber. Bolt to foundations as indicated on

the Structural Drawings. 6. Floor Sheathing: Specified in paragraph 3.05 below.

D. Wall Framing: Conform to the framing requirements of the jurisdiction with authority over this Project, unless more stringent requirements are shown on the Structural Drawings or specified herein. 1. Interior Wall Framing: 2x4 stud framing at 16" o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interior Corners or Partition-to-Wall Connections: Triple stud construction, or as shown on

the Drawings for specific conditions. 3. Jamb Framing at Openings: Double studs at all interior openings or additional members as

indicated on the Structural Drawings. 4. Top Plates in Bearing Partitions: Double and lapped, stagger joints at minimum 4'-0"

intervals. 5. Headers: As shown on the Structural Drawings. Provide built-up headers to match the wall

framing thickness, using 1/2" plywood spacers, continuously nailed and glued. 6. Plates: 2x plates to match wall framing. 7. Blocking: As shown on the Drawings or as required by applicable Building Codes and the

jurisdiction with authority over the project. Also refer to paragraphs 3.03 and 3.05 below. 8. Wall Sheathing: Specified in paragraph 3.05 below.

E. Lowered Ceiling and Soffit Framing: 2x4 stud framing at 24" o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Support from floor or roof trusses above at intermediate points as required by applicable codes. 1. Frame with framing members laid flat where required for ductwork clearances, etc.

Coordinate as necessary with the Contractor. 2. Coordinate lowered ceiling and soffit framing with requirements of gypsum wallboard "pre-

rock" applications specified in Section 09260. F. Furring and Stripping: Member sizes as indicated on the Drawings spaced at maximum 24" o.c.,

unless otherwise indicated.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF BLOCKING A. Firestops, Bracing and Blocking: As shown on the Drawings or required for applicable Building Code

compliance, but spaced to not exceed 10'-0" vertically and horizontally. 1. Provide blocking and/or bracing at all floor and roof framing conditions.

B. Blocking for "Pre-Rock" Gypsum Wallboard Installations: Provide required blocking for project conditions specified in Section 09260.

C. Miscellaneous Blocking: Provide solid blocking for all recessed and surface-mounted equipment and accessories, including but not limited to: 1. Wall-mounted finish hardware, including wall stops. 2. Wall-mounted handrail brackets. 3. Toilet and bath accessories, including grab bars. 4. Cabinets and shelving systems. 5. Signage systems and plaques. 6. Plumbing fixtures. 7. Electrical equipment and fixtures.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD

A. Prefabricated Wood or Parallel Strand Plywood Beams: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and specifications on the

Structural Drawings. Use specified light-gage metal hangers, clips and other attachments as indicated.

2. Adequately support and brace work until tied into building structure.


3.05 INSTALLATION OF SHEATHING

A. Floor Sheathing: 1. Place sheathing with face grain perpendicular to framing members, except where plywood

diaphragm must be continuous to shear walls. 2. Place sheathing with end joints staggered. 3. Panel edges shall bear on framing members and butt along their center lines. Back-block

panel edges which do not bear on framing members with 2" nominal framing. 4. Maintain minimum 1/16" and maximum 1/8" joint spacing. 5. Flooring sheathing shall be glued and nailed continuously along bearing edges and field of

panels, using approved adhesive. 6. Nail heads shall be flush with, but not penetrate, plywood surfaces. 7. Remove all nails that are not accurately installed or flush with plane of flooring so as not

to interfere with installation of floor coverings. B. Underlayment: Refer to Section 09650, Resilient Flooring, for installation of plywood underlayment

for resilient sheet flooring, if applicable. C. Coordination: Contractor shall not allow Subcontractors to cut holes in sheathing for plumbing,

mechanical and electrical penetrations more than 1/2" larger than the piping, conduit or fixture being installed. Holes in excess of this shall be rejected and the sheet of sheathing replaced. All penetrations shall then be sealed with expandable foam sealant, specified elsewhere.

1. Do not allow any holes in roof sheathing to be cut within 18" of any roof valley. 3.06 SISTERING OF NEW FRAMING MEMBERS TO EXISTING

A. General: Installation specifications for sistering of new framing to existing shall be as indicated on the Structural Drawings. 1. Existing framing members shall be left intact to the greatest extent possible.

3.07 TOLERANCES

A. Maintain the following tolerances for all rough carpentry work. Defective work shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

1. Variation from Plumb: a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum 2. Variation in Plan: a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum b. 20' or more: 3/8" maximum 3. Variation in Openings: a. Size: +/-1/8" b. Location: +/-1/4" 3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect waferboard, oriented strand board (OSB) and plywood sheathing from exposure to excessive

moisture and accumulations of snow. Broom snow off uncovered floor sheathing within 4 hours of snowfall.

B. Replace sheathing panels that exhibit delamination, swelling or other deterioration from exposure to moisture, or as directed by UCCS or the Architect.

3.09 REPAIR OF EXISTING FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Refer to paragraph 3.01 for repair/replacement of existing wood structural support members and framing as may be required.



B. Ensure that structures have been adequately supported and braced during removal of any structural system or component. Consult with Structural Engineer as needed before commencing work.

3.10 BRANDING OR MARKING MATERIALS

A. Renovation or Historical Restoration Projects: All new structural wood members shall be field-marked with a date stamp, indicating the month and year of installation. 1. Contractor shall have the option of either branding or marking with permanent markers.

3.11 EPOXY REPAIR OF EXISTING WOOD VIGAS, TRELLIS, TRIMS AND OTHER MEMBERS

A. General: Install specified wood epoxy repair materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

B. Scope of work shall be as indicated on the Drawings, or as directed by the Architect in the field, including but not limited to: 1. Existing wood exterior vigas and trellis. 2. Existing wood door frame lintels, exterior and interior.

C. Epoxy wood repair shall be for structural or cosmetic repairs where full removal and replacement of rotted or damaged pieces is not warranted.

D. Thoroughly remove all decayed material and leave surfaces clean and dry prior to applying epoxy material.

E. After installation, allow material to thoroughly dry, then sand to match adjacent surfaces. Leave surfaces prepped for field finishes specified in Division 9.

3.12 COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination required by all other Sections of the Specifications as a part of the work of this Section. Coordination shall be provided to ensure the proper, timely and complete installation of all materials, equipment and systems of the project.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 06170 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish prefabricated laminated veneer lumber beams. B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Hangers and clips, and installation of prefabricated wood

items. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards and Source Quality Control: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Fabricator shall be licensed by American or Canadian Institute of Timber Construction. 2. Fabricate in accordance with Voluntary Product Standard PS 56-73 and bear AITC or CITC

quality mark. 3. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any


A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications showing compliance with requirements of this Section. 1. Include specifications and product data for all components and parts of structural system.


A. Prefabricated wood beams shall be wrapped separately with heavy water-repellent cover. Protect against damage in transit and on site.

B. Store and handle to ensure maintenance of appearance and to prevent damage. C. Store joists in vertical position, on racks to prevent contact with the ground and cover until ready

for installation. 1.05 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's written lifetime warranty for all prefabricated wood products covering manufacturing errors, and defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFABRICATED LAMINATED WOOD BEAMS

A. Laminated Wood Beams: 2,600 psi fiber stress in bending at 12" nominal depth. 1. Adhesive shall be waterproof meeting requirements of ASTM D2559-76.



B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Micro-Lam by Trus Joist Corp., Boise, ID, as basis of design. 2. Versa-Lam by Boise Cascade Corp., White City, OR, (800) 232-0788. 3. Gang-Lam by Louisiana Pacific, Portland, OR, (800) 223-5647. 4. G-P Lam LVL by Georgia-Pacific Corp., Atlanta, GA, (800) 284-5347. 5. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable as

approved by Structural Engineer prior to bidding. Request for approval shall be accompanied by the following required documentation: a. Manufacturer's product literature and specifications. b. Proposed modifications to spacing and layout of members. c. Data indicating compliance with design criteria for loading, deflection, fire and

sound control assemblies, as applicable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Installer shall examine the existing and/or new foundations, rough framing and other substrates under which the prefabricated structural wood components are to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any condition that will prevent the successful installation of the work of this Section. Do not proceed with the installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Proceeding with the work shall be considered acceptance of substrates and site conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD

A. Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install all softwood finish carpentry, fixed window frames, running and standing trim, and interior stair railing components.

B. Furnish and install wood lavatory casework, aprons and trim. C. Installation of the following items, unless arranged for otherwise:

1. Reinstallation of UCCS-stored handrails, guardrails, light fixtures and other items, as scheduled on the Drawings.

2. Steel sash windows. 3. Wood doors and frames. 4. Solid surface countertops. 5. Finish hardware specified in Division 8. 6. Building specialties specified in Division 10. 7. Building equipment specified in Division 11. 8. Reinstallation of existing range/oven and metal sink cabinet (currently at the Guest

House). 9. Miscellaneous equipment and accessories as specified elsewhere.

D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Redwood fascia and trim. 3. Section 06170, Prefabricated Structural Wood. 4. Section 08210, Wood Doors. 5. Section 08515, Steel Sash Window Repair. 6. Section 09550, Wood Flooring. 7. Section 09900, Painting. 8. Section 09930, Transparent Finishes.


A. Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with recommendations and quality standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).

B. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and quality requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. PS 51: Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. 2. PS 58: Basic Hardwood. 3. NFPA (National Forest Products Association) National Design Specification for Wood

Construction. 4. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 5. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any


A. Samples: Submit one (1) representative sample of each type or style of wood trim or railing specified or required for a complete installation.



A. Do not deliver materials and fabricated carpentry items until site conditions are prepared to receive the work. Protect items from weather while in transit.

B. Store indoors in ventilated areas with a constant, minimum temperature of 60° F, maximum relative humidity of 25-55%.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. Softwood for Restoration and Preservation Projects: Douglas Fir, No. 1, Clear, custom grade, S4S, solid stock graded in accordance with AWI requirements, maximum moisture content of 6%. 1. Sizes and Profiles: As shown on the Drawings or as required by project conditions.

B. Nails: Size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Size and type to suit application; non-rust finish in

concealed location and finish to match material in exposed locations. 2.02 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with recommendations of AWI and in accordance with site-determined measurements.

B. Fabricate running and standing trim and interior stair railing components as detailed on the Drawings. 1. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Match profiles of existing materials, where

applicable. Coordinate with the Architect as necessary. C. Shop-fabricate finish carpentry items to greatest extent practicable. Shop-assemble finish

carpentry items for delivery to site in sizes easily handled and to ensure passage through building openings.

D. Field-fabricated running and standing trim and other finish carpentry items shall be fabricated in accordance with the workmanship standards specified in paragraph 3.02 below.

E. Attachments: Fabricate all finish carpentry items for countersunk attachment to substrates. Provide wood plugs, same species as surrounding wood.


A. Contractor shall field measure conditions as required for the successful installation of all finish carpentry items.

B. Installer shall examine the rough framing, wall blocking, plaster, gypsum wallboard and other substrates and finishes under which the finish carpentry work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of any condition that will prevent the successful installation of the work of this Section. Do not proceed with the installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Proceeding with the work shall be considered acceptance of substrates and site conditions.

C. Installer shall be responsible for inspecting all finish carpentry materials and culling any material not meeting the quality standards of these Specifications, or that exhibit defects such as knots, checks, splits, warping, bowing or excessive variation in color or grain. All materials installed in the finished construction shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.

3.02 WORKMANSHIP FOR SITE-FABRICATED FINISH CARPENTRY



A. General: Site fabricate running and standing trim and other finish carpentry items in accordance

with recommendations of AWI and in accordance with site-determined measurements. B. Scribe, miter and join running and standing trim accurately and neatly to conform to details. C. Layout running and standing trim and other site-fabricated finish carpentry work to balance lengths

of material at each end of runs. Use longest possible lengths of material; joints will not be allowed where single-length pieces can be used, in accordance with the following: 1. Running and standing trim, where grain is parallel to the length of the piece: 8'-0" long

minimum. 2. Running and standing trim, where grain is perpendicular to the length of the piece: 4'-0"

long minimum. 3. No lengths less than 24" long will be allowed.

D. All vertical end joints of finished carpentry along the run of running or standing trim shall have scarf-type joints.

E. Tolerances: Conform to applicable AWI Standards for custom grade finish carpentry. F. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Workmanship and profiles of new/replacement running and

standing trim, casings and base shall match the existing, where applicable. Consult with the Architect as necessary.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS

A. General: Set and secure finish carpentry items in place rigid, plumb and square in a manner consistent with AWI requirements and recommendations.

B. Materials shall be installed in accordance with site-determined measurements. When necessary to cut and fit on site, make material with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. Ensure tolerances of not more than 1/8" in 10'.

C. Tolerances: Conform to applicable AWI Standards for custom grade finish carpentry. D. Countersink semi-concealed anchorage devices used for wall-mount components and conceal with

solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood. Place flush and ensure that direction of grain matches surrounding wood where scheduled for transparent finish.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF ITEMS SUPPLIED BY OTHER SECTIONS

A. Install doors and frames, windows, finish hardware, fixtures, accessories, specialties and equipment supplied under other Sections for installation. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

B. Install handrails, guardrails, light fixtures, etc. salvaged and stored off-site by UCCS. Also refer to Section 01018 and 02070.

3.05 PREPARATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY FOR FINISHING

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.

1. Items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.

2. Items to receive opaque finishes, caulk all joints in running and standing trim. C. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, outlet boxes and other fixtures and equipment.

Verify locations of cutouts from site dimensions. D. Refer to Sections 09900, Painting, and 09930, Transparent Finishes, for field finishing.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07210 THERMAL BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install building insulation materials to provide thermal barrier for existing building walls, including: 1. Pourable loose-fill insulation for new and existing hollow core concrete unit masonry

construction. 2. Foamed-in insulation at perimeter of all new shimmed door and window frames in exterior

walls. B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 07220, Roof Insulation: Rigid board insulation. 3. Section 07221, Tapered Rigid Insulation: Tapered and coordinating flat, rigid board roof

insulation materials. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards,

codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials are free of asbestos and urea

formaldehyde and are non-toxic. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product literature and specifications indicating compliance with the requirements of this Section for each type of insulation material specified. Clearly mark each submittal for R-value of insulation material being furnished.


A. Furnish materials in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation instructions. B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder's torches. C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored tarp or

equal. 1.05 WARRANTIES

A. Provide the manufacturer's written warranty covering materials, workmanship and retention of R-

value of insulation materials for the following terms: 1. Pourable Loose-Fill Insulation: One (1) year. 2. Foamed-in Insulation: One (1) year.



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 POURABLE LOOSE-FILL INSULATION

A. General: FS-HH-I-574B. Inert volcanic glass expanded by heat process and treated with water

repellent to form lightweight granular material. 1. Apply in non-grouted cells of new and existing hollow concrete unit masonry walls. 2. Recycled Content: 25% minimum.

B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Perlite Institute Inc., Staten Island, NY, (718) 351-5723. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.

2.02 FOAMED-IN DOOR AND WINDOW FRAME INSULATION

A. General: Two-component foamed-in-place polyurethane insulation system, Class A fire rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. 3. R-value: 3.8 per inch minimum, ASTM C518. 4. Compressive Strength: 2.8 lbs./sq. in. minimum, ASTM D1621. 5. Tensile Strength: 5.7 lbs./sq. in. minimum, ASTM D1623. 6. Shear Strength: 7.1 lbs./sq. in. minimum, ASTM C273. 7. Apply in all perimeter voids between framing and new shimmed door and window frames.

B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Great Stuff Pro Window and Door by Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI, (800) 232-2436. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.


A. Installer shall examine the surfaces, substrates, wall cavities and conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Ensure that building shell has been completely and properly "dried in" prior to installation of thermal insulation materials.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF POURABLE LOOSE-FILL INSULATION

A. General: Install loose-fill insulation in all non-grouted areas of new 8" and existing concrete unit masonry walls.

B. Installation of pourable loose-fill insulation shall be by masons. Refer to Section 04220. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FOAMED-IN DOOR AND WINDOW FRAME INSULATION

A. General: Install foamed-in-place insulation in all perimeter voids between walls and new shimmed door and window frames, in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations. 1. It is not the intention of this specification to fill the voids of existing door and window

assemblies, unless specifically specified elsewhere. B. Install insulation to completely fill all cavities and voids.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07220 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install fire-rated gypsum underlayment over existing wood roof deck. B. Furnish and install rigid board-type roof insulation to provide thermal and vapor barrier for building

elements and spaces. C. Furnish and install fire-rated glass-faced gypsum or cementitious fiber cover board over rigid roof

insulation, if specified. D. Furnish and install polyisocyanurate cover board over rigid roof insulation, if specified. E. Furnish and install built-up roof drainage crickets. F. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Replacement of existing roof sheathing, if requird. 3. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation. 4. Section 07221, Tapered Rigid Insulation. 5. Section 07536, Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing – Fully-Adhered.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Applicable Federal Specifications (FS) for materials as specified herein. 3. PIMA, Polyisocyanurate Insulation Manufacturers Association: Technical Bulletin 101. 4. ASTM E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 5. CAN/ULC 5770: Long-Term Thermal Resistance of Materials. 6. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Certification: Manufacturer shall certify that insulation materials supplied are compatible with

sheet roofing membrane specified. C. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials supplied are free from asbestos

and urea formaldehyde and are non-toxic. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product literature and specifications indicating that materials supplied meet the requirements of this Section. Clearly mark each submittal for R-value of material being furnished.


A. Furnish material in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation instructions. B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder's torches. C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored tarp or

equal.


1.05 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering materials, workmanship and retention of R-value of insulation materials in conjunction with the warranty specified for the membrane roofing specified in Section 07536. 1. Rigid Board Insulation: Fifteen (15) years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Single-ply membrane roof system supplier and installer shall ensure that roof insulation materials provided are compatible with the roofing system specified and approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use in this system.

2.02 EXTRUDED POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION

A. General: ASTM D1621, closed-cell polyisocyanurate foam insulation board, L1.L. Class A, FM I-90. 1. R-Value: 6.0 per inch, aged per ASTM C518. Provide total roof system R-value of 24

minimum, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Thickness: 4" or as required to meet thermal requirements specified above. 3. Properties:

a. Compressive Strength: 20 psi minimum, ASTM D1621. b. Water Absorption: Less than 1, ASTM C209. c. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 2 perm. inches, ASTM C355-64. d. Dimensional Stability: Less than 2% linear change, ASTM D2126. e. Service Temperature: -100° F to 250° F. f. Product Density: 2, ASTM D1622. g. Flame Spread: Less than 25 (Class A), ASTM E84.

4. Board Size: 4’-0” wide x 8’-0” long or manufacturer's standard. 5. Deck Flute Span: Not applicable. 6. Facings: Manufacturer's standard organic/inorganic facers.

B. Fiber Cants: Provide fiber cants, complying with the sheet roofing manufacturer's requirements and compatible with the insulation materials specified, if required by the manufacturer for the roofing system specified.

C. Accessories: Provide other products as required by manufacturer for a complete and thermally sealed system.

D. Wood Blocking and Stripping: Refer to Section 06100. E. Plywood for Crickets: CDX plywood, 5/8" thick, unless otherwise approved. F. Fasteners: Screws, type and length as recommended by the manufacturer for mechanical

attachment to roof sheathing. 1. Sure-Seal fasteners and insulation plates by Carlisle or equal.

G. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville, Littleton, CO, (800) 654-3103. 2. Apache Building Products, Co., Belvedere, IL, (800) 435-5493. 3. Carpenter Insulation Co., Richmond, VA, (800) 722-2272. 4. NRG Barriers, Inc., Sanford, ME, (800) 343-1285. 5. Rmax, Inc., Dallas, TX, (800) 527-0890. 6. Temple-EasTex, Inc., Diboll, TX, (800) 231-6060. 7. Thermal Systems, Inc., Huntington Beach, CA, (714) 895-7117. 8. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.

2.03 FIRE-RATED COVER OR RECOVER BOARD


A. General: Furnish manufacturer's standard 1/2" (5/8") thick, 1-hour fire-rated, glass-faced gypsum

or cementitious fiber board sheathing, 4’-0” wide x 8’-0” long or manufacturer's standard, if required by applicable building codes or project conditions. 1. Sure-Seal HP Board by Carlisle Tire and Rubber Co., Carlisle, PA, (800) 433-5326. 2. DensGuard by G-P (Georgia-Pacific) Gypsum Corp., (800) 225-6119, as specified in Section

06160. 3. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable, if

approved by roof insulation and/or roofing manufacturer as part of the specified roof assembly.

2.04 POLYISOCYANURATE COVER OR RECOVER BOARD

A. General: Furnish manufacturer's standard 1/4" thick, non fire-rated, high-density polyisocyanurate board sheathing, 4’-0” wide x 8’-0” long or manufacturer's standard, if required by applicable building codes or project conditions. 1. Invinsa Roof Board by Johns Manville, Littleton, CO, (800) 654-3103, as basis of design. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable, if

approved by roof insulation and/or roofing manufacturer as part of the specified roof assembly.

2.05 ADHESIVES AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Insulation Adhesive (Cold Application): 2-part polyurethane insulation adhesive, Johns Manville,

used to attach insulation boards or deck cover boards to the roof deck or to other insulation boards.

1. Approved Products: Johns Manville 2-Part UIA, or equal. B. Modified Asphalt Adhesive (Cold Application): 1-part cold application modified asphalt adhesive,

conforming to ASTM 3019, Type III, Grade 2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Installer shall examine the roof substrate and conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of substrate.

B. Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry, for inspection and replacement of wood plank roof decking, if required.

C. Thoroughly clean the existing wood deck substrate prior to installation of rigid board insulation systems.

D. Ensure that surfaces which are to receive roof insulation are clean, dry, free of deleterious matter and are sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation.

E. Ensure that crickets are properly located, constructed and anchored in place. F. Take all necessary precautions to prevent screws or other attachments from penetrating exposed,

finished surfaces of existing wood plank decking. Contractor shall be responsible for repairing or replacing any damaged decking, at UCCS’s option.

G. Nothing in this Section shall be construed to relieve the Contractor of ultimate responsibility for the satisfactory completion of the work.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROOF CRICKETS



A. General: Install built-up roof crickets, minimum 1/4" per foot slope, whether specifically shown on the Drawings or not, as required for adequate roof drainage, including but not limited to the following locations: 1. Roof parapets, as required to direct water to roof drains or scuppers. 2. Other equipment curbs or other items projecting through the roof surface.

B. Crickets shall be constructed of plywood or other specified roof sheathing material, or tapered rigid insulation, at the Contractor's option, unless otherwise specifically called for on the Drawings.

1. Insulated Roof Decks: Where crickets are a part of an insulated roof deck assembly, construction shall maintain the minimum R-value specified for the assembly.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Install rigid board insulation systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Installation shall be consistent with local building codes and insurance requirements and meet the requirements of the sheet roofing manufacturer. (edit) 1. Installation: Mechanically-attached with cover board specified below. 2. Installation: Adhesive-adhered with specified 2-part polyurethane insulation adhesive.

B. Install roof insulation to maintain continuous and complete thermal protection for building spaces and elements. Boards shall be installed with long joints continuous and end joints staggered. Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt edges and ends tight.

C. Apply treated wood blocking at perimeter parapet, same thickness as insulation, to provide starter strip, if recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Cut around rooftop equipment curbs, pipe vents and exhaust fans to provide tight-fitting joints.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARD

A. General: Install fire-rated cover board in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Installation shall be consistent with local building codes, insurance requirements and meet the fire rating requirements of the sheet roofing manufacturer. (edit) 1. Installation: Mechanically-attached. Fasteners shall extend through the rigid board roof

insulation and be securely attached to original wood roof deck. 2. Installation: Adhesive-adhered with specified 2-part polyurethane insulation adhesive.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Continually protect the roof insulation from moisture by installing only as much insulation as can be properly covered by the sheet roofing each day. Provide temporary water seals and end-of-workday water cut-offs. Protect insulation from wind blow-off during all phases of construction.

B. Clean and protect exposed surfaces of insulation and leave prepared for roofing application. Refer to Section 07536.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07221

TAPERED RIGID INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install tapered rigid board roof insulation system for formed drainage crickets as shown on the Drawings.

B. Furnish and install coordinating flat rigid board roof insulation, as specified in Section 07220, unless arranged for otherwise.

C. Furnish and install fire-rated glass-faced gypsum or cementitious fiber cover board over tapered rigid roof insulation, if specified.

D. Furnish and install polyisocyanurate cover board over tapered rigid roof insulation, if specified. E. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation. 3. Section 07220, Roof and Deck Insulation: Standard rigid board insulation. 4. Section 07536, Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing – Fully-Adhered.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable tests as specified herein of the American Society for Testing and Materials

(ASTM). 2. Applicable Federal Specifications (FS) for materials as specified herein. 3. ASTM E84: Surface burning characteristics of building materials. 4. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials are free from asbestos and urea

formaldehyde and are non-toxic. C. Certification: Manufacturer shall certify that insulation materials supplied are compatible with

sheet roofing membrane specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product literature and specifications indicating compliance with the requirements of this Section. Clearly mark each submittal for R-value of insulation material being furnished.


A. Furnish materials in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation instructions. B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored tarp or

equal. 1.05 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering materials, workmanship and retention of R-value of insulation materials in conjunction with the warranty specified for the membrane roofing specified in Section 07536.


1. Rigid Board Insulation: Fifteen (15) years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Single-ply membrane roof system supplier and installer shall ensure that roof insulation materials provided are compatible with the roofing system specified and approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use in this system.

2.02 ROOF INSULATION MATERIALS

A. General: Composite roof insulation system consisting of tapered rigid board insulation and coordinating flat rigid board insulation, to provide a continuous thermal barrier over the gross area of the roof.

1. Total R-Value: As indicated on the Drawings, or specified in Section 07220. B. Tapered Rigid Insulation System: Factory-tapered extruded closed-cell polyisocyanurate insulation

to provide minimum surface slope of 1/4" per foot when installed over new decking, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

C. Properties: Match rigid board insulation specified in Section 07220. D. Roof Deck Insulation: Refer to Section 07220. E. Fiber Cants: Provide fiber cants, complying with the sheet roofing manufacturer's requirements,

and compatible with the insulation materials specified, if required by the manufacturer for the roofing system specified.

F. Accessories: Provide other products as required by manufacturer for a complete and thermally sealed system.

G. Wood Blocking and Stripping: Refer to Section 06100. H. Fasteners: Screws, type and length as recommended by the manufacturer for application.

1. Sure-Seal fasteners and insulation plates by Carlisle or equal. I. Approved Manufacturers: Match manufacturer of rigid board insulation specified in Section 07220.

2.03 FIRE-RATED COVER OR RECOVER BOARD

A. General: Furnish glass-faced gypsum or cementitious fiber cover board as specified in Section 07220.


A. Installer shall examine the roof substrate and conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed and notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of substrates.

B. Thoroughly clean the existing wood deck substrate prior to installation of tapered rigid and board insulation systems.

C. Ensure that surfaces which are to receive roof insulation are clean, dry, free of deleterious matter and are sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation.

D. Take all necessary precautions to prevent screws or other attachments from penetrating exposed, finished surfaces of existing wood plank decking. Contractor shall be responsible for repairing or replacing any damaged decking, at UCCS’s option.

E. Nothing in this Section shall be construed to relieve the Contractor of ultimate responsibility for



the satisfactory completion of the work. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM

A. General: Install tapered rigid and flat board insulation systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and layout shown on the approved shop drawings. Installation shall be consistent with local building codes and insurance requirements, and meet the requirements of the sheet roofing manufacturer. 1. Installation: Loose-laid, asphalt embedded, or as recommended by the manufacturer for

mechanically-attached cover board. B. Install roof insulation to maintain continuous and complete thermal protection for building spaces

and elements. Boards shall be installed with long joints continuous and end joints staggered. Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit and butt ends and edges together tightly.

C. Where tapered roof insulation is used with multiple layers of rigid board insulation, tapered sections shall be installed between the layers of solid boards to protect tapered edges of insulation.

D. Apply treated wood blocking at perimeter parapet, same thickness as insulation, to provide starter strip, if recommended by manufacturer.

E. Take necessary precautions to prevent breakage of rigid insulation materials laid directly over fluted metal roof deck. Limit foot traffic on completed sections. Remove and replace any broken panels.

F. Cut around rooftop equipment curbs, skylights, pipe vents and exhaust fans to provide tight-fitting joints. Cut into roof drains as required for proper drainage.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARD

A. General: Install fire-rated cover board as specified in Section 07220. 3.04 PROTECTION

A. Continually protect the roof insulation from moisture by installing only as much insulation as can be properly covered by the sheet roofing each day. Provide temporary water seals and end-of-workday water cut-offs. Protect insulation from wind blow-off during all phases of construction.

B. Clean and protect exposed surfaces of insulation and leave prepared for roofing application. Refer to Section 07536.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07245 EXTERIOR PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install new two-coat Portland Cement elastomeric stucco with new metal lath over all existing exterior stucco walls and parapets.

B. Remove existing areas of stucco where damaged or deteriorated, to the extent shown on the Drawings or required by field conditions, and prepare substrates for new materials.

C. Furnish and install two-coat Portland Cement elastomeric stucco system to repair these areas. D. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 09220, Skim-Coat Plaster System: Repair of interior plaster work. 3. Section 01030, Alternates.



jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Applicator Qualifications: Applicators specializing in the installation of exterior stucco systems

with a minimum of 5 years experience in work similar to that required by this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each material, including other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications.

B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full line of standard colors and finishes for selection by the Architect.

C. Sample Panel: Provide minimum 4'-0" x 4'-0" sample panel of finished stucco system, including at least one (1) example of a typical control joint and external corner condition. Sample panel may be freestanding or built into the work at the Applicator's option.


A. Deliver manufactured materials in original unopened packages or containers, with manufacturer's labels intact and legible.

B. Keep materials dry, stored off ground, under cover and away from damp surfaces. C. Remove wet or deteriorated materials from site.


A. Environmental Requirements (Cold Weather):

1. Do not use frozen materials in cement plaster mixes. 2. Do not apply cement plaster to frozen surfaces containing frost. 3. Do not apply cement plaster when ambient temperature is forecast to be less than 40° F

within a 24-hour period following application.


B. Environmental Requirements (Hot Weather): 1. Protect cement plaster from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather. 2. Do not apply cement plaster when the ambient temperature is above 100° F.

1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide maintenance materials in sufficient quantities to repair a minimum of 100 sq. ft. of surface area. Containers of maintenance materials shall be delivered to UCCS unopened, with labels intact.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TWO-COAT EXTERIOR PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO SYSTEM

A. General: Two-coat, fiber-reinforced acrylic-based thin coat stucco system, consisting of one (1) base coat, applied over weather protection barrier and expanded metal lathing, and one (1) tinted elastomeric finish coat.

B. Materials: 1. Sand: Comply with all requirements of ASTM C897 or ASTM C14.

a. Gradation: U.S. standard sieve weight retained. No. 4 0% No. 8 10% No. 16 10 - 40% No. 30 30 - 65% No. 50 70 - 90% No. 100 95 - 100%

2. Water: Potable. C. Stucco System:

1. Fiber-Reinforced Base Coat: Manufacturer's standard pre-mixed, pre-sanded thin-coat stucco base coat consisting of Portland Cement, lime, properly-graded aggregate, alkali resistant fiberglass and acrylic fibers.

2. Primer: Manufacturer's standard primer, consisting of acrylic polymers and proprietary ingredients.

3. Elastomeric Synthetic Plaster Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard tinted acrylic-based elastomeric plaster finish coat consisting of acrylic polymers, properly-graded aggregate, color additive and proprietary ingredients. Color(s) and texture to be selected from manufacturer's full line of standard colors and finishes.

or, as recommended by Installer

3. Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard pre-mixed tinted elastomeric stucco finish coat,

consisting of Portland Cement, lime, properly-graded aggregate, proprietary ingredients and color additive. Color(s) and texture to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors and finishes.

4. Texture(s) and Color(s): Match existing. D. Accessory Materials:

1. Weather-Resistant Protection Barrier: 2-ply, Grade D stucco paper by Fortifiber Corp. or approved equal.

E. Metal Accessories: Manufacturer's standard steel products unless otherwise indicated as Zinc Alloy. 1. Exterior Components: Hot dip galvanized finish, minimum of a 17-gage self-furred stucco

netting. 2. Corner Beads and Casing Beads: Not used. External corners shall match existing.


3. Cornerite/Corneraid: Manufacturer's standard pre-formed interior corner reinforcement made from 2.5 lbs. per square yard of diamond mesh lath.

4. Control Joints: No. XJ15-3 control joint with 1/4" slot, and 1" grounds, or equal. Control joints must be wire tied to the lath and not nailed or screwed to substrate.

5. Weep Screeds: No. 7 Foundation Sill Screed, with holes for drainage. 6. Fasteners: (Stud Applications) Screws or nails composed of galvanized steel of type and

length suitable for at least a 1/2" penetration of the stud system. 7. Expanded Metal Strip-Lath: 3.4 lb. density, for use around windows, doorways, or

openings. F. Secondary Mesh Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard woven fiberglass mesh, consisting of

alkali-resistive treated fiberglass mesh. G. Water Repellent Sealer: Clear penetrating water repellent for above-grade stucco, masonry,

concrete, brick, natural and artificial stone, type as recommended by the manufacturer for this application.

H. Approved System and Manufacturers: 1. Fastwall FRS System by El Rey Stucco, Colorado Springs, CO, (800) 621-1801, as the basis of

design. 2. Manufacturers providing materials and exterior Portland Cement-based stucco systems of

same type, function, design, quality, appearance and performance are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.

2.02 STUCCO MIXES

A. General: 1. Accurately proportion materials for each plaster batch with measuring devices of known

volume. 2. Size batches for complete use within maximum of one hour after mixing. 3. Retemper plaster stiffened from evaporation, but do not use or retemper partially

hydrated cement plaster. 4. Do not use frozen, caked or lumpy materials, and remove such materials from jobsite

immediately. 5. Mix factory prepared cement plaster in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions and recommendations. 6. Concentrate Mixes: Use moist, loose sand in proportions recommended by basecoat

concentrate manufacturer. Withhold 10% of mixing water until mixing is nearly complete, then add as needed to produce desired working consistency.

B. Mechanical Mixing: 1. Clean mixer of set or hardened materials before loading new batch. 2. Maintain mixer in continuous operation while adding materials. 3. Conform to mixing sequence, cycle of operations, and time recommended by the

manufacturer of the basecoat/finish coat mix materials. C. Hand Mixing:

1. Do not hand mix stucco basecoat/finish coat system materials unless authorized by UCCS and/or the Architect.

2. Acrylic-Based Finish Coat: Slight hand mixing with small amounts of water, not to exceed 8 oz., may be added to improve workability of the acrylic-based finish coat. No other admixtures are allowed.



A. Applicator shall inspect the substrates scheduled to receive the exterior stucco systems and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions which will prevent the proper and successful installation of stucco basecoats. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner satisfactory to the Applicator.

B. Completely remove all areas of damaged or deteriorated stucco, including lathing. Verify extent of work with the Architect in the field as necessary. Clean wall substrates and leave prepared for installation of new materials.

C. Verify that surfaces to be plastered are free of dust, loose particles, oil and other deleterious materials which would affect bond or proper hydration of cement plaster.

D. Verify that masonry and concrete surfaces to receive direct-bond application of plaster base-coats are rough, free from form-release agents or otherwise properly prepared to provide adequate bond.

E. Examine substrates, grounds and accessories to insure that finished plaster work will be true to line, plane, level and plumb.

F. Cut and remove cracked, loose or damaged exterior stucco work just to the extent required to adjoin intact stucco. Clean edges and substrate of loose material prior to installing new stucco.

G. Protection: 1. Protect finish surfaces installed prior to plastering. 2. Maintain protection in place until completion of work. 3. Protect finished work when stopping for the day or when completing an area. 4. Protect contiguous work from soiling, spattering and other harmful effects which may

result from plastering. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF WEATHER BARRIER, METAL LATHING, JOINTS AND TRIM MATERIALS

A. General: Install weather-resistant stucco paper, metal lathing, control joints and miscellaneous trims in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

B. Install stucco paper weather barrier as follows: 1. One (1) layer over masonry substrates, in areas designated for repair.

C. Install metal stucco netting and/or lathing over weather barrier and attach to substrate as required by the system manufacturer. Metal lath shall be cut at all expansion and control joint locations.

D. Install control joint trims where shown on the Drawings or required by job conditions, and as follows: 1. All metal control joints, expansion joints and other specified trims shall be wire-attached

to the metal lathing, not screw-attached directly into the substrate. 2. For applications over concrete unit masonry or other solid substrates where metal lathing

is not installed over the entire surface, cut and install minimum 6" wide strips of lathing at control joints, etc. for wire-attachment of these trims.

E. Architect shall inspect locations, placement, spacing, alignment and special patterns of metal lathing, control joints and trims, as shown on the Drawings, prior to application of any exterior stucco base coat materials.

3.03 APPLICATION OF TWO-COAT STUCCO SYSTEM

A. General: Apply stucco base and finish coat systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

and recommendations, and in compliance with requirements of applicable codes, regulations and agencies having jurisdiction. 1. Interrupt or delay plaster application only at junctions of plaster planes, at openings, or at

control joints.



B. Base Coat: 1. Apply base coat to a minimum thickness of 3/8", using sufficient trowel pressure to key

plaster into lath or to create bond to substrates as applicable. 2. Rod surface to true plane. 3. Tool base coat to provide a V-joint at intersection of plaster with frames or other items of

metal, wood, or plastic which act as plaster grounds. C. Tinted Acrylic-Based Finish Coat:

1. Apply primer/conditioner/finish as recommended by manufacturer over all existing and newly repaired stucco, at a rate recommended by manufacturer to obtain complete coverage of substrates. Allow to dry until tacky.

2. Apply exterior wall finish coat to thickness recommended by manufacturer to match existing texture, using sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to bond finish coat to basecoat.

3. Apply exterior wall finish in number of coats and consistency required to achieve texture to match existing.

3.04 CURING

A. Moist cure each coat of stucco basecoat system with fine fog spray of clear water, with sufficiently frequent applications to maintain plaster uniformly moist for a minimum of 48 hours following application. Air cure an additional 7-28 days before application of any finish coat materials, or as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Wet cure cement-based finish coat, by misting with water as recommended by system manufacturer.

3.05 TOLERANCES

A. Allowable Tolerances: Design intent is to match texture and smoothness/flatness of the existing stucco.

3.06 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Patching: 1. Upon completion, point up exterior wall finish coat around trims, windows, doors and other

locations where finish coat terminates or meets dissimilar materials. 2. Cut out and replace defective or damaged exterior wall finish coat. 3. Match pointing and patching to surrounding finish coat in form, texture and color.

B. Cleaning: Remove exterior wall finish and protective materials from perimeter trim and adjacent surfaces. Remove all excess materials from the project site.

3.07 APPLICATION OF SEALER

A. General: Apply water repellent sealer to fully-cured, pre-tinted finish coat in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07536 THERMOPLASTIC SHEET ROOFING – FULLY-ADHERED PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Tear off of existing roofing systems to original roof deck. B. Cleaning of substrate in preparation for roofing and insulation installation. C. Installation of all insulation and protection boards, unless arranged for otherwise. D. Extend existing mechanical equipment curbs and pipe vents required to maintain clearances above

new membrane roof system. E. Furnish and install fully-adhered sheet roofing system. F. Furnish and install miscellaneous roofing specialties as noted, including parapet flashings, edge

flashings and terminations and counterflashings, unless arranged for otherwise. G. Furnish and install built-up roof drainage crickets, unless provided by roof insulation or decking

contractor. H. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 02070, Selective Demolition: Tear-off of existing over-framing gable roofs as part

of building demolition. 3. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation. 4. Section 07220, Roof and Deck Insulation. 5. Section 07221, Tapered Rigid Insulation. 6. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim. 7. Division 15, Mechanical.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable tests as specified herein of the American Society for Testing and Materials

(ASTM). 2. Applicable Federal Specifications (FS) for materials as specified herein. 3. International Building Code, current edition: Wind exposure classification. 4. SMACNA, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition. 5. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Materials and installation shall comply with applicable standards and recommendations of the

Rubber Manufacturers Association and the Single-Ply Roofing Institute (SPRI). C. Materials shall be supplied and installed by a roofing contractor licensed by the manufacturer or

certified by the manufacturer as a qualified installer of the specified products. D. All work of this Section shall be performed by a single installer, who shall have minimum five (5)

years of successful experience with projects of similar size and complexity. E. Installer shall certify that all roof system materials provided are compatible with the roof system

assembly specified and approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use in this system. F. Design Criteria: Roof design shall meet the minimum requirements of the Single-Ply Roofing

Institute for the specified roofing system type, unless more stringent requirements are required by the jurisdiction with authority over the project. 1. External Fire Resistance: UL Class A. 2. Internal Fire Resistance: Factory Mutual (FM) Class I.


3. Wind Resistance: 100 mph, Exposure C (IBC) for fully-adhered systems. 4. Warranty shall meet wind resistance defined above.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for sheet roofing installation, surface conditioner compatibility, elastic flashings, joint cover sheet and joint and crack sealants, with temperature range for application of roofing membrane.

B. Warranties: Submit sample warranties, in accordance with the requirements of Section 01740. C. Design and Specification Approval: Prior to starting roofing, Contractor shall submit a letter

certifying that the roofing design and specifications are proper for this particular project. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Weather Conditions: Proceed with elastomeric sheet roofing work only when weather conditions comply with manufacturer's recommendations and will permit materials to be applied and cured in accordance with those recommendations. Do not exceed temperature limitations recommended by roofing manufacturer. 1. Do not apply sheet roofing during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40°

F. 2. Do not expose membrane and accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180° F. 3. Do not apply sheet roofing to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty or deck surfaces unacceptable to

manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver roofing materials, insulation and accessories in manufacturer's protective containers with labels intact and legible, and comply with manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling.

B. Handle rolled goods as required to prevent damage. Store all materials on clean, raised platforms with weather-protective coverings.

1.06 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's written 10-year system warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship, and covering all specified design criteria.

B. Provide manufacturer's written extended 20-year warranty covering defects in materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Fully-Adhered Thermoplastic Sheet Membrane Roofing System: Single-ply thermoplastic sheet

roofing fully-adhered over fire-rated cover board and rigid board roof insulation. 2.02 ROOF INSULATION

A. Membrane roof system supplier and installer shall ensure that roof insulation materials provided are compatible with the roofing system specified and approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use in this system. 1. Rigid Board Roof Insulation: Refer to Section 07220. 2. Tapered Rigid Roof Insulation: Refer to Section 07221.

2.03 SHEET ROOFING MATERIALS


A. Membrane: Fully-adhered 45 mil thermoplastic membrane, conforming to ASTM D-6878 and the

following minimum criteria: 1. Roll Width: 8'-0" wide, or manufacturer's standard width not less than 6'-0". 2. Color: Tan.

B. Batten Strips: Manufacturer's standard 1" x 18-gage aluminized steel strapping. C. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant type, compatible with materials being

attached. D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard concrete fastener for mechanically-attached insulation into

existing concrete deck. E. Flashing: 1/16" thick thermoplastic forming flashing as furnished by membrane manufacturer. F. Bonding Adhesive: Furnished by membrane manufacturer, compatible with all materials to which

the membrane is to be bonded. G. Splicing Cement and Lap Sealant: For sealing the exposed edge of the splices, shall be trowel or

gun consistency as furnished by membrane manufacturer. H. Lap Sealant: Compatible with materials with which it is used, shall be trowel or gun consistency,

furnished by membrane manufacturer. I. Water Cut-Off Mastic: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane

manufacturer. J. Molded Pipe Flashing: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane

manufacturer. K. Nite Seal: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane manufacturer. L. Pourable Sealer: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane

manufacturer. M. Rubber Nailing Strips and Fasteners: Extruded nailing strips and fasteners furnished by membrane

manufacturer. N. Primer: None required. O. Approved Manufacturer:

1. Johns Manville TPO-45 system, Littleton, CO, (800) 654-3103, as basis of design. 2. Carlisle Sure-Weld TPO, Carlisle SynTec Systems, Carlisle, PA, (800) 233-0551. 3. Duro-Last Thermoplastic Membrane, Saginaw, MI, (800) 248-0280. 4. GenFlex Roofing Systems, Maumee, OH, (800) 443-4272. 5. Firestone UltraPly TPO, Indianapolis, IN, (800) 428-4442. 6. Versico Inc., Carlisle, PA, (800) 992-7663. 7. Tremco, Beachwood, OH, (800) 562-2728. 8. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, design and performance are

acceptable, only as approved by the Architect and Owner prior to bidding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Installer shall thoroughly examine surfaces and substrates to receive fully-adhered sheet roofing materials prior to commencing work. Report in writing to the Contractor any condition that may potentially affect proper application or warranty. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Roofing Subcontractor. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of surfaces.

B. Ensure that sleeves and curbs which pass through surfaces to receive roofing are rigidly installed.


C. Ensure flatness and tightness of joints in deck sheathing. 1. Test pullout capacity of mechanical fasteners in the presence of the roofing manufacturer's

technical representative if required by the manufacturer as a condition of the warranty. D. Ensure that surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves or projections which may be

detrimental to the successful installation of sheet roofing. Remove foreign materials. 3.02 TEAR-OFF

A. Contractor shall propose the method of tear-off of existing materials, transference of materials to

the ground and removal from the site. 1. Method shall be subject to approval by UCCS. 2. Refer to Division 1 for temporary barriers, enclosures and protection of existing materials

and equipment. B. Remove the existing roofing systems in its entirety to the original deck substrate. These systems

include, but may not be limited to: 1. Original System: Gravel surfaced built-up roofing over the existing deck.

C. Materials and roof accessories to remain in place include, but are not limited to: 1. Existing clay tile roof scuppers, if any.

D. Roof accessories to be removed include, but are not limited to: 1. Existing metal flashings and counterflashings. 2. Existing pipe vents, exhaust fans, flues, etc.: Contractor shall cap these services below

the original roof deck, if not scheduled to be reused. 3.03 PREPARATION

A. Reroofing Projects: Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent solvent or adhesive fumes or any other potentially noxious or toxic substance that is a part of the application of the roof membrane system from being drawn in into the building.

B. Protection: 1. Protect pavements and building walls adjacent to hoist prior to starting work. Lap suitable

protective materials at least 6". Secure protective coverings against wind. Leave protective covering in place for duration of roofing work.

2. Protect parapets and adjacent surfaces not designated to receive roofing. C. Deck Surfaces: Dry and broom clean surfaces of foreign matter detrimental to installation of

roofing. D. Joints in Deck: Seal cracks and joints with recommended material and sealant. Use proper depth-

to-width ratio as recommended by the sealant manufacturer in accordance with Section 07900. E. Start the installation only in the presence of the manufacturer's technical representative, if

required as a condition of the warranty. F. Make temporary provisions for supporting existing gas piping, electrical conduit and other services

to remain during reroofing. G. Existing Mechanical Equipment Curbs, Pipe Vents, etc., to Remain: Where existing curbs and vents

are shown or required to remain after the new roofing and insulation systems are installed, such curbs and vents shall be extended if required to maintain minimum 12" clearance to top of curb or vent above the elevation of the new roof membrane.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF ROOF CRICKETS

A. General: Install built-up roof crickets, minimum 1/4" per foot slope, whether specifically shown on the Drawings or not, as required for adequate roof drainage, including but not limited to the following locations: 1. Roof parapets, as required to direct water to roof drains or scuppers. 2. Mechanical equipment curbs. 3. Other equipment curbs or other items projecting through the roof surface.


B. Crickets shall be constructed or plywood or other specified roof sheathing material, or tapered rigid insulation, at the Contractor’s option, unless otherwise specifically called for on the Drawings.

1. Insulated Roof Decks: Where crickets are a part of an insulated roof deck assembly, construction shall maintain the minimum R-value specified for the assembly.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF SHEET ROOFING

A. Install rigid or tapered rigid insulation in accordance with roofing manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations and as specified in Section 07220 and 07221.

B. Install fire-rated cover board (or underlayment) over (beneath) rigid board roof insulation in accordance with roofing manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations, if specified. Refer to Section 07220.

C. Install fully-adhered single-ply sheet roofing in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications, written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Loosely lay sheet membrane over roof insulation. Allow membrane to relax minimum

thirty (30) minutes before adhering or splicing. 2. Membrane: Apply, lap and splice using methods and materials recommended by the

manufacturer. Laps shall run parallel to slope of the roof, unless approved otherwise. Apply adjoining sheets by lapping the edges and splicing. Attach membrane to perimeter edges, nailers and penetrations in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

3. Fasteners: Mechanically attach membrane at maximum 1'-0" o.c. along all seams, unless otherwise required by the manufacturer's installation specifications. Fasteners shall extend through the rigid board roof insulation and cover board and be securely attached to the original wood roof deck.

4. Fasteners (Field and Parapet Conditions): Mechanically attach membrane in the field of the roof as required by the manufacturer's specific requirements for this Project. Spacing of fasteners along projecting parapet walls shall be decreased as necessary in accordance with both the manufacturer and code mandated requirements, based on parapet height and related factors.

5. Flashing: Apply, lap and splice using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer. Flash around penetrations using factory prefabricated pipe seals where possible. Field fabricated seals may be used where necessary using manufacturer's standard details.

D. Installation shall be performed by a roofing contractor licensed by the manufacturer. E. Adhesive apply sheet roofing to perimeter edges, lay seam edges 3" and seal. Seal sheet roofing

with 3" lap where metal collars or flanges are required. F. Apply isolating sections for roof control/expansion joints. G. Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal ends and edges to each other

and to adjoining surfaces with uniform fillet bead of sealant. H. Flash and seal watertight any items projecting through membrane with counterflashing membrane

material. 1. Provide and install prefabricated sheet metal boots at all pipe vents and other roof

penetrations. Solder joints as specified in Section 07621. I. Apply precut disks of sheet roofing material to cover and protect fasteners in the field. J. Manufacturer’s Details: Install the sheet roofing system in accordance with the manufacturer’s

standard details subject to actual field conditions. Installing contractor shall receive approval from the manufacturer’s technical field representative for deviation from any of the manufacturer’s standard details, including but not limited to: 1. Parapet wall terminations. 2. Gravel stop edge flashings. 3. Fastener splice. 4. Membrane splice or lap. 5. Thru-wall scupper flashings. 6. Vent pipe flashings.



7. Equipment curb flashings. 8. Applications where parapet wall terminations and other areas exposed to view are also

subject to approval and modification by the Architect. K. Exercise all required care not to damage the elastic sheet roofing or the completed single-ply

membrane roof assembly. 3.06 TESTING

A. Contractor shall perform a flood test for the watertightness of the roof membrane. The test shall be conducted in the presence of UCCS's principal representative.


A. Inspection: A representative of the manufacturer shall make an inspection upon completion to ascertain that the entire system has been installed according to the manufacturer's specifications and details. Written letters of acceptance shall be sent to UCCS's principal representative and the Architect.


A. Upon completion, remove surplus materials and debris from the site. B. Remove excess adhesives or other materials from adjacent surfaces, including metal surfaces of

flashings and rooftop equipment. C. Adjacent Materials: Do not use oil-based or plastic roof cement. Do not allow waste products

(petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat) or direct steam venting to come in contact with membrane roofing system.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07621 GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install new galvanized sheet metal reglets, gravel stop flashings, counterflashings and overflow scuppers as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Furnish miscellaneous metal flashings to other Sections as required. C. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation. 3. Section 07220, Roof and Deck Insulation. 4. Section 07221, Tapered Rigid Insulation. 5. Section 07536, Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing – Fully-Adhered. 6. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 7. Section 09900, Painting.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. SMACNA, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition. 2. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Fabrication and installation shall be by manufacturer's personnel or manufacturer approved

subcontractor with minimum five (5) years successful experience in projects of similar size and complexity.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and shop drawings indicating materials,

shapes, proposed layout of joints, special details and intersections, and fabrication and assembly details.

B. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard colors of prefinished flashings for selection by the Architect.

C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard profiles of galvanized flashings and trim for selection by the Architect.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. General: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A525, except ASTM 527 for lock-forming hot-dipped galvanized, standard G90 class finish. 1. Gages:

a. 24-gage for cap flashings and step flashings. b. 24-gage for reglets and counterflashings.


c. 24-gage for gravel stops and kick flashings. d. 22-gage for clips, retainers and other concealed backer materials. e. 26-gage for concealed edge and drip flashings and other miscellaneous trims not

specified for other gages. 2. Finish: Supply sheet metal flashings and trim with manufacturer's standard galvanized

finish. No further field finishing will be performed where unexposed to view in the completed project.

3. Profiles: Specified in paragraph 2.04 below. 4. Drip Flashing: Provide roof edge drip flashings, unless integral with gutter section.

2.02 PREFINISHED GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Prefinished Galvanized Metal: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A525, except ASTM 527

for lock-forming hot-dipped galvanized: G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized. 1. Gages:

a. 24-gage for cap flashings and exposed step flashings. b. 24-gage for thru-wall scupper flashings. c. 24-gage for kick flashings. d. 22-gage for clips, retainers and other concealed backer materials. e. 26-gage for edge flashings and other miscellaneous trims not specified for other

gages. 2. Finish: Supply galvanized sheet metal flashings and trim with manufacturer's standard

baked-on enamel finish. Color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors.

3. Profiles: Specified in paragraph 2.03 below, shop formed to extent possible. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. Fasteners: Concealed clip-type of same material as flashings, sized to suit application. B. Nails: Hot-dipped galvanized steel roofing type. C. Screws: Hot-dipped galvanized Phillips head, with neoprene washers. D. Solder and Flux: Type recommended for materials being used. E. Bituminous Paint: Acid- and alkali-resistant type, black color. F. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type, FS SS-C-00153a. G. Sealant: One (1) component silicone, conforming to FS TT-S-00230, non-staining, non-bleeding,

non-sagging, of color suitable for material matching. 1. Dow 790 or equal.

H. Roof Scuppers: New (or existing) roof scuppers, fabricated on clay chimney flue, as detailed on the Drawings.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

B. Form sections in maximum lengths possible. Make allowances for expansion and contraction at joints. 1. Provide for thermal expansion at 10' intervals, unless otherwise shown. Use material in

longest practical lengths. Sections shorter than 3'-0" will not be allowed. C. Form stepped parapet cap flashings as detailed on the Drawings or required by project conditions.

Provide mitered intersections between horizontal and vertical sections. D. Joints and seams exposed to view are to be flat-lock type, except corners, or detailed as flat-butt

joints with back-up plate. Open-lap seams are not permitted for joints exposed to view. Fabricate corners minimum 18" x 18", mitered, soldered and sealed as one (1) piece. Seal all seams with elastic cement.


E. Wipe and wash clean soldered joints to remove traces of flux immediately after soldering. F. Hem exposed edges of flashings to underside 1/2". Hemmed edges shall be straight, square design,

unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. G. Backpaint flashings with bituminous paint where expected to be in contact with cementitious

materials or dissimilar metals. H. Profiles shall conform to current SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual standards and details.

1. Cap Flashings, Reglets and Counterflashings: As shown on the Drawings. 2. Scuppers: Thru-wall scuppers, similar to Figure A, page 1.65 of the SMACNA manual. 3. Drip/Fascia Flashings: As shown on the Drawings or as required by project conditions. 4. Kick Flashings: As required for specific project conditions, but in no case less than 2" high

x 4" long. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which flashing and trim work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions which would prevent the successful completion of this work. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Ensure miscellaneous galvanized metal flashings and trims are fabricated in accordance with paragraph 2.04 above.

C. Coordinate installation of flashings with Contractor for membrane sheet roofing as required. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GALVANIZED SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General: Install scuppers, flashings, reglets, counterflashings and trim in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

1. Ensure adequate clearances for thermal expansion and contraction of fabricated sections of materials.

B. Secure flashings in place using specified fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in locations approved by Architect. When using exposed fasteners, they are to be of same finish as flashings.

C. Conform to applicable SMACNA details, unless otherwise shown. Consult with Architect as necessary. 1. Thru-wall scupper flashings shall be coordinated with installation of clay flue scuppers for

watertight installation. D. Install kick flashings at all roof edge or eave conditions adjacent to vertical walls and other

conditions requiring diversion of drainage away from a particular point. Coordinate specific conditions with Architect as necessary.

E. Apply sealing compound at junction of metal flashings and membrane flashings. F. Lock seams and end joints. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and

straight in planes and lines accurate to profiles. G. Counterflash mechanical, plumbing and electrical items projecting through roofing.

1. Mechanical, plumbing and electrical details may be schematic in nature. Install all flashings in accordance with current SMACNA requirements.

2. Refer to the Drawings for any special flashing conditions.



3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean all exposed galvanized surfaces and leave prepared for field finishing as specified in Section 09900. 1. Remove excess sealants, flux, plastic cement and bituminous paint. 2. Clean soiled surfaces with a solution which will not harm adjacent surfaces.

B. Clean all exposed prefinished galvanized surfaces. Remove smudges and other imperfections using cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer. Remove excess sealant from prefinished materials and leave installation in clean condition.

C. Advise Contractor of measures to be taken to protect prefinished surfaces from damage during the balance of construction.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07900 SEALANTS AND JOINT FILLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Clean and prepare joint surfaces. B. Furnish and install joint backing materials. C. Furnish and install joint caulking and sealants in exterior applications. D. Furnish and install joint caulking and sealants in interior applications. E. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 02515, Exterior Concrete Paving. 3. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork: Joint fillers for cast-in-place concrete work. 4. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 5. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Joint sealants. 6. Section 04400, Stone Masonry: Joint sealants. 7. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashings and Trim. 8. All Sections of Division 8, Doors and Windows. 9. Section 09310, Ceramic Tile. 10. Section 09650, Resilient Flooring. 11. Section 10800, Toilet and Bath Accessories. 12. Division 15, Mechanical. 13. Division 16, Electrical.



jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer of sealants and caulking shall have minimum five (5) years of

successful experience with projects of similar size and complexity. Installer shall be continuously employed in work of this type.

C. Certification: Manufacturer/Supplier of sealant and accessory materials shall certify that materials supplied are acceptable and appropriate for the materials, substrates and conditions under which sealants are to be installed.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for each type of sealant, caulking compound and associated miscellaneous material required.

B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's standard color line for each type of sealant specified for exposed locations for selection by the Architect.

C. Sample Installation: Select a test area for each major exterior building material or system and install caulking. Notify the Architect for approval and acceptance prior to proceeding with caulking. The test area will become the standard for quality control of remaining caulking and sealant work.



A. Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions or when temperatures are below 40° F or above 100° F. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper curing and development of high early bond strength. Where joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of the manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range so that sealant will not be subjected to excessive elongation and bond stress by subsequent low temperatures. Coordinate time schedule with Contractor to avoid delay of project.

1.05 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty covering defects in materials when such materials are properly applied and fully cured as described in the manufacturer's product data sheets. The Contractor further agrees to replace sealants which fail because of loss of cohesion or adhesion, or that do not cure properly due to improper application or curing, or when the materials installed are not appropriate for that application, joint type or other factor beyond the manufacturer's control, for a period of five (5) years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. General: Supplier/Installer of work of this Section shall certify that materials specified and/or furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications for the following criteria: 1. Compatibility of sealant material with adjacent materials. 2. Compatibility of sealant material with type and degree of weather exposure. 3. Compatibility of sealant material with expected use of space. 4. Compatibility of sealant material with joint type, width and depth.

B. Exterior: One- or two-part polyurethane-based elastomeric sealants complying with FS TT-S-00230, Class A, Type I (self-leveling) or Type II (non-sag). 1. One-Part Sealant: Sonolastic NP-1 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by

manufacturer for type of application. 2. Two-Part Sealant: Sonolastic NP-2 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by

manufacturer for type of application. C. Interior: One-part silicone-based non-sag, elastomeric sealant, resistant to mildew complying with

FS TT-S-01543, Class A, and FF TT-S-00230, Class A. 1. Sonolastic Omniseal and OmniPlus by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by

manufacturer for type of application. D. Interior Paintable: One-part non-sag mildew-resistant acrylic emulsion sealant complying with

ASTM C834, paintable. 1. Sonolac by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by the manufacturer for type

of application. E. Concrete Slab Joints: One-part non-priming urethane-based self-leveling pourable sealant

complying with FS TT-S-00230C, Class A, Type 1 (horizontal use). 1. Sonolastic SL-1 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by manufacturer for

type of application. F. Color(s):

1. Colors are to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. 2. Design intent is to match sealant color to color of adjacent material, unless indicated

otherwise. The Architect shall have final authority for color selection, including variations from this policy.


3. Clear silicone sealant shall be installed at the following locations, including but not limited to: a. Perimeter of rimless vitreous china toilet fixtures, water closets, urinals, sinks and

lavatories. b. Perimeter of stainless steel kitchen sinks. c. Joints between plastic laminate finished countertops and backsplashes.

G. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Sonneborne Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 835-3434. 2. Tremco Sealants, Cleveland, OH, (800) 321-7906. 3. Schnee-Morehead Inc., Irving, TX, (800) 255-9427. 4. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are

acceptable. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Primer: Non-staining type for joints as recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type recommended by sealant manu-facturer,

compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Filler: ASTM D1056, round polyethylene foam rod, over-sized 30-50%, as recommended by

manufacturer of sealant used. 1. Provide closed cell or open cell foam rod materials, as recommended by the Installer for

specific applications. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure-sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. E. Joint Fillers for Cast-in-Place Concrete Work: Refer to Section 03100.


A. Installer shall examine joint surfaces, backing and anchorage of units forming sealing rabbet and conditions under which sealant work is to be performed and notify Contractor of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work, performance and curing of sealants. Do not proceed with sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Clean, prepare and size joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

C. Ensure that horizontal and vertical surfaces are of sufficient dimension for required bonding of sealant materials as recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Ensure that sealants are compatible with the substrates to which they are to adhere. E. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant. F. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. G. Install joint filler to achieve required joint depths to allow sealants to perform properly. H. Install bond breaker where required. I. Mask or otherwise protect adjacent surfaces which may be marred or damaged by sealant

materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS

A. General: Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges.

B. Tool joints slightly concave in vertical surfaces and flush in horizontal surfaces. C. Maintain joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges or sags.



D. Ensure that sealant is applied leaving crisp, clean lines with adjacent materials. Do not allow sealant to bleed onto adjacent surfaces. Immediately wipe excess sealant materials off adjacent surfaces.

E. Remove and replace any sealants improperly applied, to the satisfaction of UCCS and/or the Architect.

F. Repair and replace any adjacent materials that have been damaged, marred or discolored by work of this Section, to the satisfaction of the Architect.

PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 SCHEDULE OF SEALANT WORK

A. Exterior: Install sealants as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein, including but not limited to: 1. Expansion joints in exterior concrete flatwork adjacent to buildings and retaining walls. 2. Expansion joints in exterior concrete pavements, aprons, walks and ramps. 3. Vertical expansion and control joints in concrete unit masonry walls. 4. Perimeter of exterior window and door frames. 5. Perimeter of materials and equipment passing through building walls and roofs. 6. Horizontal and vertical joints between exterior Portland cement stucco system and other

materials. 7. Perimeter joints of metal flashings, counterflashings, reglets and similar accessories. 8. Miscellaneous vertical and horizontal joints between dissimilar materials, where required

for contraction and expansion of joints, or where required to maintain the weathertightness of the project.

9. Other joints as indicated, as required for neat appearance, or as directed by UCCS or the Architect.

B. Interior: Install sealants as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein, including but not limited to: 1. Expansion joints and control joints in new and existing interior concrete slabs where

surfaces are scheduled to be sealed and/or exposed to view. 2. Perimeter of casework, cabinetry, countertops and backsplashes. 3. Horizontal and vertical joints between walls, ceilings, soffits and running and standing

trims. 4. Perimeter of interior window and door frames. 5. Perimeter of toilet fixtures, water closets, urinals, sinks and lavatories. 6. Perimeter of materials and equipment passing through building walls and roofs. 7. Miscellaneous vertical and horizontal joints between dissimilar materials, where required

for contraction and expansion of joints, or where required to maintain the weathertightness of the project.

8. Other joints as indicated, as required for neat appearance, or as directed by UCCS or the Architect.

C. Refer to other Division 2 sections for sealants required for site concrete work and other materials.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish raised panel, rail and stile wood exterior and interior doors, mortise and tenon construction, to match existing doors.

B. Furnish rail and stile, full lite wood exterior doors, mortise and tenon construction, pre-hung in frames.

C. Furnish solid-core flush wood doors, pre-hung in frames. D. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation. 4. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation: Foam insulation at perimeter of door and

window frames. 5. Section 08700, Finish Hardware. 6. Section 08710, Specialty Finish Hardware: Access control systems. 7. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing. 8. Section 08810, Replacement Glass and Glazing. 9. Section 09930, Transparent Finishes: Site finishing of doors.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. AWI: Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. 2. NWMA Industry Standard I.S. 1-78: Wood Flush Doors. 3. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s written product literature indicating door core materials and construction, veneer species, types, characteristics and factory finishing, if applicable.

B. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames, using same reference marks or numbers for doors and details as that shown on the Drawings.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings illustrating door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, special blocking, bevels or undercuts where required, and cut-outs for glazing and louvers.

D. Samples: 1. Submit two (2) samples of typical door construction for each type of door specified,

minimum 10" x 10" cut from top corner of door. 2. Submit three (3) mounted samples of each door veneer specified, minimum 8" x 10",

illustrating wood grain, veneer species, cut and match, specified stain color(s) and sheen. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver material in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation and finishing instructions. Do not deliver doors until gypsum wallboard work is completed and humidity in the building has reached average relative humidity for the locality.


B. Protect wood doors and frames before, during and after installation as recommended by the manufacturer. Take special care to protect doors and veneers from exposure to moisture and ultraviolet radiation.

1.05 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty for replacing, including the cost of rehanging and refinishing, wood doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship, including delamination; bow, cup, warp or twist exceeding 1/4" in any direction; telegraphing of any part of the core through to face; and deviations from NWMA or AWI tolerances, for the following period: 1. Rail and Stile Wood Doors: Lifetime of project for interior doors; two (2) years for exterior

doors. 2. Solid-Core Flush Wood Doors: Lifetime of project. 3. Hollow-Core Flush Wood Doors: Two (2) years.

B. Manufacturer shall be responsible for advising the Architect of any conditions specified for the work of this Section, such as size of glazed opening cutouts, which may affect warranty coverage specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOLID-CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS

A. Flush Interior Doors: Flush-faced type, 1-3/4" thick, 5-ply minimum, cross-banded, solid-core construction with specified face veneers, custom grade. 1. Face Veneer: 1/50" thickness minimum after sanding.

a. Custom grade for transparent finish. 2. Veneer Species: Douglas Fir. 3. Veneer Cut: Plain slicing. 4. Veneer Match: Book matched. 5. Assembly of Spliced Veneer on Door Face:

a. Balance match: 5 maximum individual pieces of veneer. 6. Core Material: Particleboard that contains no added urea formaldehyde resins. 7. Rails and Stiles: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 1-3/8".

B. Edge Banding: Provide doors with edge strips of same species as used for face veneers, 1/2" minimum thickness.

C. Frames: Refer to paragraph 2.03 below for wood frames. D. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard Type 1, waterproof bonding adhesive for plys and face veneers. E. Approved Manufacturers: All doors shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the project.

1. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc., Marshfield, WI, (715) 384-2141, as basis of design. 2. Haley Architectural Doors, Inc., Buena Park, CA, (800) 854-5951. 3. Ampco Products Inc., Hialeah, FL, (305) 821-5700. 4. Eggers Industries, Two Rivers, WI, (414) 793-1351. 5. Fenestra Corp., Oshkosh, WI, (414) 233-6161. 6. Graham Manufacturing, Marshfield, WI (715) 387-2581. 7. Ideal Architectural Doors, New Albany, IN, (800) 626-6271. 8. Southwood Door Co., Quitman, MS, (601) 776-2164. 9. VT Industries, Holstein, IA, (800) 827-1615. 10. Buell Door Company, Dallas, TX, (800) 556-0156. 11. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, quality, appearance, function and

performance are acceptable. 2.02 RAIL AND STILE WOOD DOORS


A. Rail and Stile Exterior and Interior Doors: 1-3/4" thick, vertical beveled plank over rail and stile, solid mortise and tenon construction of specified species, custom grade, to match existing doors. 1. Rails and Stiles: Veneered stave core with matching end bands. Veneer shall be minimum

1/8" thick before sanding. a. Match width and depth of rails and stiles to existing doors. Coordinate with

Architect as necessary. 2. Planks: Full length wood plank with beveled edges, width and depth to match existing. 3. Face Veneer Species: Douglas Fir for transparent finish. 4. Veneer Cut: Plain slicing. 5. Veneer Match: Book matched. 6. Door Profiles:

a. Exterior Doors: 1-panel full lite, Model K-6010 by Karona as basis of design. b. Interior Doors: Rail and stile construction to match existing. c. Exterior Doors: Rail and stile construction to match existing.

B. Wood Vision Lite Frames: Hardwood glazing stops, square, as detailed on the Drawings, mitered corners. 1. Species: To match paneled doors. 2. Glazing: Refer to Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.

C. Frames: Solid wood jamb and head members, dadoed and screwed in place. Jambs shall be machined to receive standard "T" style rabbeted stops with mitered corners. 1. Species: Manufacturer's standard for door grade specified, species to match doors. 2. Face Width of Frame: 7/8" minimum. 3. Stop Depth: 1/2" minimum.

D. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard Type 1, waterproof bonding adhesive. E. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Karona Inc., Grandville, MI, (800) 829-9233, as basis of design, for full-lite exterior doors. 2. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc., Marshfield, WI, (715) 384-2141. 3. Eggers Industries, Two Rivers, WI, (414) 793-1351. 4. Maiman Co., Springfield, MO, (800) 641-4320. 5. Pinecrest Doors, Minneapolis, MN, (800) 443-5357. 6. Selrite Millwork Corp., Union, NJ, (800) 672-1036. 7. Buell Door Company, Dallas, TX, (800) 556-0156. 8. Simpson Doors, McCleary, WA, (800) 952-4057. 9. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, quality, appearance, function and

performance are acceptable. 10. Rail and stile interior, vertical plank doors shall be custom fabricated, if required to match

existing construction detailing.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate solid-core and rail and stile wood doors and frames in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWI Quality Standards.

B. Provide flush doors with 1-3/8” edge stiles of wood species to match face veneer. C. Bond stiles and rails to specified core material. Sand bonded core prior to applying crossbanding

and face veneers. D. Ensure that wood doors have been properly conditioned to prevailing relative humidity prior to

hanging. E. Make cutouts and provide stops or vision lite frames for glass. F. Bevel strike edge of single-acting doors 1/8” in 2”. G. Prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for hardware requirements. Factory

machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. 1. Hardware supplier to furnish necessary hardware templates to fabricator. 2. Hardware supplier to furnish hinges specified in Section 08700 to fabricator.


H. Factory pre-fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on the shop drawings, and shop hang doors in frames to door manufacturer’s specifications.


A. Installer shall inspect the conditions under which wood doors shall be installed and notify Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with fabrication until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Contractor shall field verify dimensions, details and tolerances of existing doors and all framed openings scheduled to receive new doors and frames prior to proceeding with fabrication.

C. Do not begin installation until it has been determined that building conditions of temperature and humidity have been attained within requirements of the manufacturer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF WOOD DOORS

A. General: Install wood doors and frames in strict accordance with the requirements and recommendations of the specified AWI Quality Standards. Refer to Section 06200, Finish Carpentry, for installation.

B. Install doors into prepared frames in designated locations. Install wood doors and frames plumb and square.

C. Installation Tolerances: 1. Diagonal Distortion: 1/8" maximum. 2. Head and Jamb Clearances: 3/32" preferred; 1/8" maximum. 3. Meeting Stile: 1/8" maximum. 4. Bottom Clearance at Threshold: 1/8" preferred; 1/4" maximum. 5. Bottom Clearance at Floor: 1/2" maximum, measured from floor finish.

D. Ensure that foam insulation, specified in Section 07210, has been installed around all door and window frames prior to installation of gypsum wallboard and/or interior casings and trims.

E. Install finish hardware in locations designated by approved finish hardware schedule, in accordance with requirements of Section 08700.

F. Doors shall be handled, installed and prepared for finishing as per manufacturer's recommendations. Undercut doors to clear floor coverings. Install plumb and true to operate freely but not loosely, without sticking or binding after being finished.

G. Install wood vision lite frames and leave openings prepared for glazing as specified in Section 08800.

H. Trim and case doors as detailed on the Drawings or as specified in Section 06200.

3.03 FIELD FINISHING OF WOOD DOORS

A. Doors are to be finished without hardware. Coordinate with painting trades. Masking of hardware is not acceptable.

B. Seal top and bottom edges, and all edges of field cuts, within 48 hours. C. Field Finished Doors: Entire surface of the door shall be fully block sanded with 150 to 180 grit

sandpaper for an average of 4 to 5 minutes per side before any stain or finish is applied. Refer to Section 09930.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Field finished doors shall be covered and protected after hanging with minimum 4 mil poly until Substantial Completion.



END OF SECTION

SECTION 08515 STEEL SASH WINDOW REPAIR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Repair of historic steel sash fixed and operable windows, fixed frames, and screens, as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the repair classification(s) specified herein, including but not limited to: 1. Refurbish exterior and interior surfaces of all steel frames and operable sashes as

necessary, including repairing or replacing missing or broken exterior trims. 2. Refurbish existing hardware, or furnish new where missing or broken. 3. Replace damaged or torn screening where needed. 4. Replace cracked, broken or missing glazing specified in Section 08810 where needed.

B. Provide temporary closure panels for window openings where sashes have been removed for shop refurbishing.

C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry. 2. Section 08510, Steel Sash Windows. 3. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing. 4. Section 08810, Replacement Glass and Glazing. 5. Section 09900, Painting. 6. Section 09905, Strippers and Paint Removers.


A. Qualifications of Steel Window Repair Contractor: Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years of primary experience in steel sash wood window repair and replacement projects of similar scope and complexity.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and hardware schedule for all new finish hardware, including weatherstripping.


A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50° F prior to, during and 48 hours after completion of steel sash window repair work.

B. During freezing or near-freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to maintain a minimum temperature of 50° F and to protect steel sash window repair work completed or in progress.

1.05 WARRANTIES A. Repair Warranty: Installing contractor shall provide a 2-year written warranty covering repairs.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WINDOW HARDWARE

A. General: Furnish new or replacement hardware items of the type, function, quality and quantity, as required to match the existing hardware. Submit product literature on proposed hardware items to Architect for approval.

B. Finish: US 10B. C. Approved Manufacturers:

1. _________________________________________________________________________. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of the same design, quality, appearance, function and

performance are acceptable. 2.02 WEATHERSTRIPPING

A. General: Match new weatherstripping materials to existing where appropriate. Consult with Architect as necessary.

2.03 SCREENING

A. Window Screens: 18x14 mesh, 0.013" diameter aluminum wire (fiberglass not acceptable), in refurbished metal frames. Provide new metal frames to match existing profiles only if existing frames are deteriorated beyond repair, or missing.

2.04 STEEL SASH WINDOW REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Metal Body Filler Repair System: 1. ____________________________________________________________________________. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality are

acceptable. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Strippers and Paint Removers: Refer to Section 09905. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Steel sash window repair contractor shall examine existing steel sash window frames, sashes, screens and trim that are to receive work of this Section and notify the Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with refurbishing or replacement until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Steel sash window repair contractor shall coordinate the extent of work with UCCS and/or the Architect in the field.

C. Strip paint or other existing finish materials from steel sash windows requiring repair, using specified products. Intent is to remove paint down to the next intact finish layer, not to strip the metal clean, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to Section 09905.

D. When paint removal is complete, remove all loose material.


3.02 REMOVAL OF EXISTING MATERIALS

A. Remove existing hardware to be retained and reinstalled. Refurbish as specified in paragraph 3.03 below.

B. Remove existing hardware where broken or damaged. C. Remove all metal screen mouldings and replace screen and moulding to match existing where

scheduled on the Drawings. D. Remove existing woven wire screening over interior of operable windows and discard. E. Coordinate glass replacement with Section 08810, as necessary.

3.03 REFURBISHING FINISH HARDWARE

A. General: For restoration and preservation projects, the existing finish hardware shall be refurbished and reinstalled on existing windows to the extent specified by the Hardware Groups at the end of this Section, or as required for a complete and operational installation. This finish hardware may also be supplemented by new hardware as specified. 1. All work of this Section shall meet the requirements of the Secretary of the Interior’s

Standards for Rehabilitation of Historic Buildings and the Colorado Historical Society. B. Finish hardware items shall be carefully removed, labeled as to location within the building and

packed as individual items prior to being removed from the site. C. Hardware shall be reconditioned and the finishes refurbished to restore the items to fully

operational condition. D. Reinstall hardware into the existing or new steel sash windows as scheduled. Ensure that all work

to refurbish existing windows has been completed, and the windows have been finished, prior to reinstalling finish hardware.

3.04 REHABILITATION OF EXISTING STEEL SASH WINDOWS

A. General: Refurbish steel frames and operable and fixed sashes as necessary, including repairing or replacing missing or broken trims, and hardware. 1. All work of this Section shall meet the requirements of the Secretary of the Interior’s

Standards for Rehabilitation of Historic Buildings and the Colorado Historical Society. 2. Repair of existing steel window materials shall always be undertaken before replacement is

authorized. Consult with the Architect on site as necessary. B. Design Intent: Unless otherwise specified, design intent is not to return the historic windows to

"like new" condition, but rather to return them to operational use and repair/stabilize the sashes, frames and glazing per the repair class(es) specified below.

C. Window rehabilitation shall be in accordance with the following standards: 1. Repair Class I (Minor Deterioration/Operationally Sound): Routine maintenance work,

minor repairs to frames and sashes, putty repair or replacement, reglazing (where required) and new weatherstripping.

2. Repair Class II (Moderate Deterioration): Structural stabilization, repair of partially rusted or deteriorated steel, but where members are structurally intact and sound, and hardware replacement.

3. Repair Class III (Severe Deterioration): Splicing or replacement of bent, broken or damaged window components or parts, and sash replacement where specifically indicated. Windows needing rehabilitation specific to these repair classes are identified on the Drawings.

D. Approved Window Restoration Subcontractors: 1. Phoenix Window Restoration, Thornton, CO, (303) 778-9487. 2. Colorado Sash and Door, Loveland, CO, (970) 667-9580. 3. Empire Carpentry, Bellvue, CO, (970) 493-3499.



4. Restoration subcontractors providing restoration services of the same quality and performance are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.

3.05 STRUCTURAL REPAIR OF EXISTING STEEL SASH WINDOWS, FRAMES AND TRIMS

A. General: Install specified metal body filler repair materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.

B. Scope of work shall be as indicated on the Drawings, or as directed by the Architect in the field, including but not limited to: 1. Existing steel sash window frame, sash and trim members.

C. Metal body filler repair shall be for structural or cosmetic repairs where full removal and replacement of rusted or deteriorated pieces is not warranted.

D. Thoroughly remove all rusted or deteriorated material and leave surfaces clean and dry prior to applying filler material.

E. After installation, allow material to thoroughly dry, then sand to match adjacent surfaces. Leave surfaces prepared for field finishes specified in Section 09900.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF NEW HARDWARE

A. General: Install new hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations, using proper templates. New hardware shall only be used where existing is missing, broken, damaged or cannot be satisfactorily refurbished.

B. Install new items as close to the same location as existing hardware. 3.07 CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean all existing refurbished and repaired steel sash window frames, operable sashes, screens and trims, and leave prepared for field finishing specified in Section 09900.

PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 HARDWARE GROUPS

A. Refer to the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 08520

ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install aluminum architectural windows complete with hardware and related items as shown on drawings and specified in this section.

B. All windows shall be Custom Window Series 8300 AW-100 grade fixed, and casement. Other manufactures requesting approval to bid their product as an equal must submit the following ten days prior to close of bidding: 1. A sample window (size and configuration) as per requirements of architect. 2. Test reports documenting compliance with requirements of Section 1.5.

C. Glass and glazing: 1. All units are to be factory glazed. 2. Reference Section 08800 for Glass and Glazing.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 REFERENCES 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.05 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Test Units: Air, water and structural test unit sizes and configuration shall conform to

requirement set forth in AAMA 101-97. B. Test Procedures and Performance Standards:

1. Windows shall conform to all ANSI/AAMA 101-97, AW-100 requirements. 2. Air Infiltration Test:

a. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at static air pressure of 6.24 psf.

b. Air infiltration shall not exceed .03 cfm per foot of perimeter crack length. 3. Water Resistance Test:

a. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 331 at static pressure difference of 12.00 psf.

b. There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage. 4. Uniform Load Deflection Test:

a. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at a static air pressure difference (positive and negative) of 100 psf.

b. During the course of the test, no member shall deflect more than 1/175 of its span.

5. Uniform Load Structural Test: a. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance

with ASTM E 330 at a static air pressure difference of 150 psf. b. At conclusion of test there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to

fasteners, hardware parts, support arms or actuating mechanisms, nor any other damage which would cause the window to be inoperable.


6. Condensation Resistance Test (CRF): a. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance

with AAMA 1502.7. b. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) shall be not less than 58.

7. Thermal Transmittance Test (Conductive U-value): a. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance

with AAMA 1503.1. b. Conductive thermal transmittance (u-value) shall be not more than .49

BTU/hr/sf/F0. 8. Unless otherwise specified, windows tested for condensation resistance and thermal

transmittance shall be glazed with no more than two lites of clear annealed glass. Sealed insulating glass shall be of standard construction.


A. Provide test reports from AAMA accredited laboratories certifying the performance as specified in 1.5.

B. Test reports shall be accompanied by the window manufacturer’s letter of certification stating that the tested window meets or exceeds the referenced criteria for the appropriate ANSI/AAMA 101-97 window types.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications, recommendations and standard details for

window units. C. Shop Drawings: Include typical unit elevations, full- or half-scaled detail sections and typical

installation details. Include type of glazing, screening, and window finish. D. Finish Samples: Two samples of each required finish, on an extruded shape of aluminum sheet. E. Samples: If required by Architect, submit samples showing fabrication techniques,

workmanship of component parts, design of hardware, and other exposed auxiliary items. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store and handle windows and other components in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Protect units against damage from the elements, construction activities and other hazards before, during, and after installation.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. The responsible contractor shall assume full responsibility and warrant for one year the satisfactory performance of the total window installation which includes that of the windows, hardware, glass (including insulated units), glazing, anchorage and setting system, sealing, flashing, etc. as it relates to air, water and structural adequacy as called for in the specifications and approved shop drawings. Any deficiencies due to such elements not meeting the specifications shall be corrected by the responsible contractor at his expense during the warranty period.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T5 alloy and temper. B. Hardware:

1. Casement Ventilators: Concealed 4-bar zinc plated or stainless steel balanced arms or 900 egress hinges as specified and cam locking handles.

C. Weatherstrip: All weatherstrip shall be Monsanto Santoprene or equal. D. Glass and Glazing: As specified in Section 08800. E. Thermal Barrier:

1. Thermal barrier material shall be poured-in-place two part polyurethane. 2. Specified hardware shall not bridge the thermal barrier.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Aluminum frame and sash extrusion shall have a nominal wall thickness of .094”. 2. Mechanical fasteners, welded components and hardware items shall not bridge thermal

barriers. Thermal barriers shall align at all frame and sash corners. 3. Depth of frame and sash combined shall not be less than 3 1/2”. 4. True divided light muntins shall be a maximum of 7/8” wide, with profiles to match

architectural drawings. B. Frame: Frame components shall be mitered or butt jointed, as appropriate to the type of

construction required. All joints shall be welded or incorporate mechanical fasteners. C. Sash:

1. All sash extrusions shall be tubular. 2. Each corner shall be mitered, reinforced with an extruded aluminum corner key,

hydraulically crimped, and "cold welded" with epoxy adhesive. 3. Each sash shall have two rows of Monsanto Santoprene weatherstripping installed in

specially designed dovetail grooves in all four sides of the sash extrusion. D. Screens: Screen frames shall be extruded or roll formed aluminum. E. Glazing: Shop and Field glazed units are to be glazed with glazing tape and extruded aluminum

glazing beads. Exterior silicone cap bead shall be applied at all perimeter edges. F. Finish:

1. Organic a. Finish all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components with

*Enter Description & AA Designation* AA Description Description AAMA Guide Spec.

AA-M12-C42-R1X Kynar 500(r)/Hylar5000(tm) Fluropon 2605-98 AA-M12-C42-R1X Kynar(r)/Hylar(tm) Acroflur(r) 2604-98 AA-M12-C42-R1X Flurocryl(tm) 2603-98

Color is to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of colors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Job Conditions: Verify that openings are dimensionally within allowable tolerances, plumb, level, contain solid anchoring surfaces and are in accordance with approved shop drawings.



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Use only skilled tradesman with work done in accordance with approved shop drawings and specifications.

B. Plumb and align window faces in a single plane for each wall plane. Erect windows and materials square and true, adequately anchored to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal and building movement and specified wind loads.

C. Adjust windows for proper operation after installation. D. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weathertight installation at all joints and intersections

and at opening perimeters. Wipe off excess material and leave all exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. After completion of window installation, windows shall be inspected, put into working order and left clean, free of labels, dirt, etc. Protection from this point shall be responsibility of general contractor.

END OF SPECIFICATION

SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish finish hardware for new interior and exterior doors, other than that specified in specific door Sections.

B. Furnish keys in keyed groups as indicated, and deliver keys to Owner as specified. C. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation. 3. Section 08210, Wood Doors. 4. Section 08515, Steel Sash Window Repair: New and refurbished hardware. 5. Section 10440, Interior Signage: Door signage and numbers.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. BHMA: Applicable standards for finish door hardware. 2. ANSI A115.2: Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4" Doors. 3. ANSI A115.9: Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single-Acting. 4. ANSI A156.1: Butts and Hinges. 5. ANSI A156.2: Locks and Lock Trim. 6. ANSI A156.4: Door Controls (Closers). 7. ANSI A156.6: Architectural Door Trim. 8. ANSI A117.1-1998 or current: Specifications for Handicapped Accessibility. 9. Americans with Disabilities Act, 1990: Specifications for Handicapped Accessibility. 10. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any


A. Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule of each type of hardware required for the Project in accordance with Section 01340, indicating door location, type, quantity required, style, finish and keying group.

B. Templates: Supply hardware templates to Section 06200, Finish Carpentry, and respective Sections of Division 8 prior to hardware installation.

C. Provide manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary tools required for proper maintenance of hardware.

1.04 KEYING

A. Provide two (2) change keys for each lock. B. Provide two (2) master keys for each master keyed group. C. Provide one (1) master key for installation in each key access box, specified in Section 10520, for

fire department use. D. Master Key Groups (review with UCCS):

1. Key entire building to UCCS's existing Master key system. 2. Key all building entry doors together.


E. Individual Key Groups (review with UCCS): 1. East Office.

F. Stamp or engrave each key with appropriate keying designation (MASTER, 1AA, 2AA, etc.). When keys are turned over to UCCS at completion of the project, secure keys with same keying designation on same ring, one (1) ring for each keying designation.

G. Key Blanks: Provide UCCS with specified quantity of blanks for keying separate from this contract. 1. Quantity: 10. H. Deliver keys to UCCS as specified in paragraph 1.06.B. below.

1.05 HARDWARE FUNCTIONS – CYLINDER LOCKS (BHMA)

A. F-75 (410) Passage Latch: Latchbolt operated by knob from either side at all times. B. F-76 (420) Privacy Lock: Latchbolt operated by knob from either side. Outside knob locked by

push button inside and unlocked by emergency key from outside or rotating knob from inside. C. F-81 (451) Office or Entry Lock: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by knob from either side, except

when outside knob is locked by turn button in inside knob. When outside knob is locked, latchbolt is operated by key in outside knob or by rotating inside knob. Turn button must be manually rotated to unlock outside knob.

D. F-86 (457) Storeroom/Utility Space Door Lock: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by key in outside knob or by rotating inside knob. Outside knob is always fixed.

E. Deadlocks: 1. E-2151: Deadbolt operated by key from outside and turn button or lever from inside. Bolt

automatically deadlocks when fully thrown. 1.06 HARDWARE FUNCTIONS – MORTISE LOCKS (BHMA)

A. F01 Passage Latch: Latchbolt retracted by lever or knob from either side at all times. B. F04 Office and Inner Entry Lock: Latchbolt retracted by lever or knob from either side unless

outside is made inoperative by key outside or by rotating inside turn piece. When outside is locked, latchbolt is retracted by key outside or by lever or knob inside. Outside lever or knob remains locked until thumbturn is returned to vertical or by counter clockwise rotation of key. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed.

C. F07 Storeroom Lock: Latchbolt retracted by key outside or by lever or knob inside. Outside lever or knob always in operative. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed.

D. F20 Entrance Lock: Latchbolt retracted by lever or knob from either side unless outside is locked by 20° rotation of thumbturn. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by 90° rotation of thumbturn. When locked, key outside or lever or knob inside retracts deadbolt and latchbolt simultaneously. Outside lever or knob remains locked until thumbturn is restored to vertical position. Throwing deadbolt automatically locks outside lever or knob. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed.

E. F14 Store/Utility Room Lock: Latchbolt retracted by knob or lever from either side. Deadbolt extended or retracted by key from either side.


A. Neatly and securely package hardware items and identify for individual location and use. B. Keys shall be delivered directly to the Owner by certified mail, unless arranged otherwise at the

Pre-Construction Conference or by subsequent written direction from the Owner. 1.08 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS


2.01 FINISH HARDWARE

A. General: Furnish hardware items of the type, function, quality and quantity to meet the requirements of this Section and for a complete and operational installation. Products listed are indicative of the design, grade, construction, size and type to be used by the listed manufacturer. Alternate products of same quality, function, performance and design are acceptable, unless limited by the specific requirements of Division 1 or this Section. 1. Hinges: Stanley, Bommer, Hager, Mont-Hard or McKinney. 2. Mortised Reproduction Locksets and Latchsets: Designer’s Brass Series by Baldwin Brass or

Omnia Industries. 3. Closers: LCN, Norton or Dorma. 4. Cylinder Locksets and Latchsets:

a. Commercial Line: Schlage. b. Reproduction Line: Baldwin Brass or Rejuvenation.

5. Deadbolts: Corbin Russwin, Sargent or Schlage. 6. Thresholds and Weatherstripping: Pemko, Reese, Zero, Master Manufacturers or Barrier

Systems by Hager. 7. Trim, Stop and Holders: Hager, Trimco, Rockwood, Quality or Master Manufacturers. 8. Panic Sets: Corbin Russwin, Sargent, Dorma or Von Duprin. 9. Door Gaskets and Sweeps: Pemko, Reese, Zero, National Guard Products Inc. or Barrier

Systems by Hager. 10. Manufacturers furnishing finish hardware items of the same function, design, appearance,

quality and performance are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding except where restricted in Section 01600 or elsewhere in this Section.

B. Consistency: Hardware lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer, at a minimum to the extent scheduled: 1. All closers shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the project. 2. All cylinders, locksets and passage sets shall be by the same manufacturer and of the same

finish, unless otherwise indicated. Coordination of keying shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier for these items.

3. All finish door hardware shall be of the same, or correlated (brushed stainless steel with satin chrome), finish, unless specifically indicated for different finish(es).

4. All reproduction locksets and latchsets shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the project.

5. Deviations from consistency of one manufacturer are only acceptable when available designs are not satisfactory.

C. Handing: Handing shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier, to be reviewed by the Architect as a part of the Hardware Schedule submittal.

D. Special Requirements: 1. All hinges shall be ball-bearing type, unless otherwise indicated. Provide non-removable

pins in all hinges of exterior outswinging doors. 2. All cores of cylinder locksets shall be interchangeable, unless otherwise specified. 3. All deadbolts specified for required exit or egress doors shall be provided with lever or

paddle type operators on the interior. 4. All panic hardware shall be capable of being “dogged” open, except for panic sets in

exterior exit doors. 5. Provide concave-shaped wall stops where scheduled with privacy-type push button

locksets. Use convex-shaped wall stops elsewhere. 6. Where kickplates are specified for only one side of each door leaf, install on active side, or

as recommended by the supplier. 7. Closers shall be provided with hold-open capability, except where part of a fire-rated door

assembly. 8. Closers shall be parallel arm type for push side applications, and mounted on the room side


of all doors where possible. Regular arm-type closers are acceptable for pull side applications.

E. Accessibility: Door hardware shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A117.1, current edition, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) for handicapped accessibility, and the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards. 1. All doors shall have lever trim as scheduled in this Section.

F. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Refer to paragraph 2.01.A. above for approved manufacturers for specific types of finish

hardware. 2. Baldwin Brass, San Bruno, CA, (415) 588-8480. 3. Bommer, Landrum, SC, (800) 334-1654. 4. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware, Charlotte, NC, (800) 543-3658. 5. Dorma Architectural Hardware, Reamstown, PA, (800) 523-8483. 6. Glynn-Johnson, Indianapolis, IN, (317) 613-8940. 7. Hager Companies, St. Louis, MO, (800) 325-9995. 8. LCN, Princeton, IL, (800) 526-2400. 9. Pemko, Ventura, CA, (800) 283-9988. 10. Sargent Manufacturing Co., New Haven, CT, (800) 727-5477. 11. Schlage Lock Co., Colorado Springs, CO, (719) 264-5300. 12. The Stanley Works, New Britain, CT, (800) 337-4393. 13. Trimco, Los Angeles, CA, (323) 262-4191. 14. Von Duprin, Indianapolis, IN, (317) 897-9944. 15. Manufacturers providing products of same quality, function, performance, design and

finishes are acceptable in conformance with Section 01600, unless limited by the specific requirements of Section 01600 or this Section.

2.02 COMMERCIAL HARDWARE DESIGNS AND FINISHES (Exterior Doors Only)

A. General: Design of finish hardware shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 2.01 above.

B. Commercial Line: Heavy-duty, commercial grade hardware, Schlage Everest B Family, patented restricted keyways, small format cores. No substitutions.

C. Commercial Grade Trims: 1. Lever trim: Omega by Schlage as basis of design. 2. Knob trim: Orbit by Schlage as basis of design.

D. Panic Set Trims: FLW Design by Sargent or equal. E. Commercial Line Finish: US10B, Antique Bronze Oiled or match existing. F. Threshold Finish: Extruded bronze.

2.03 REPRODUCTION HARDWARE DESIGNS AND FINISHES (Interior Doors Only)

A. General: Design of finish hardware shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 2.01 above.

B. Reproduction Line: Forged brass medium-duty commercial hardware, L521.469.RPVCBA ball tip lever with arched rose in dark bronze finish by Baldwin Brass, 2-3/4" backset with emergency exit interlock feature, as basis of design.


2.04 SCHEDULE OF HARDWARE ITEMS

A. Approved Models and Manufacturers, as basis of design: 1. Locksets and Latchsets: Product lines specified above, 2-3/4" backset. 2. Mortised Reproduction Locksets, Latchsets and Deadbolts: Forged brass, narrow backset

mortised lockset, product lines specified above, with compatible 2-3/4" backset mortised lock.

3. Hinges: McKinney TA2714, Stanley or Hager BB1279, steel, full-mortised, 5-knuckle ball bearing, 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", NRP.

4. Deadbolts: a. Commercial Line: Heavy-duty, with interchangeable core, Schlage B-700 Series, as

basis of design. b. Integral with mortise locksets specified above.

5. Panic Set, Rim Type: Sargent 8500 Series, plated steel, with lever trim. 6. Closers: LCN 4000 Series, with full molded cover. Provide delayed-action option where

scheduled. 7. Kickplates: Trimco, 10" x length recommended for door width, 16-gage, (.050" aluminum),

beveled edges. 8. Saddle Thresholds: Pemko 271A-5, flat, or Reese S483AV-5" with integral vinyl stop. All

thresholds shall be handicapped accessible. 9. Door Shoes/Sweep: Pemko 217 AV extruded aluminum with vinyl insert for 1-3/4" doors.

Verify compatibility with specified threshold. 10. Sweep: Pemko 307AV. 11. Door Smoke Gaskets: Pemko S88D. 12. Weatherstripping: Pemko 303AV for wood doors/frames; Pemko 316AV for hollow metal

doors/frames. 13. Wall Stop: Ives 407. Use wall-type, unless door position requires otherwise. 14. Floor Stop: Ives 438.

B. Furnish hardware items as listed in Schedule at the end of this Section, complete to the function intended.

C. Furnish all accessory hardware items as required for a complete installation, including strikes and anchorage devices.

2.05 SPECIALTY DOOR SIGNAGE

A. General: Specialty door signage normally furnished by finish hardware supplier. Refer to Section 10440 for materials, finishes and balance of required door signage, if applicable. 1. Door Signage: Signage to read "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS

HOURS", type, materials and colors to match signage specified in Section 10440. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Installer shall examine the doors, frames and other substrates that are to receive finish hardware and notify the Contractor of any existing condition that will be detrimental to the successful installation and performance of the hardware. Do not install hardware until such conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer.

B. Ensure that door cutouts or bores for hardware and frame cutouts for strike plates are properly aligned.

C. Do not install finish hardware until doors, frames and other substrates have been painted, stained or otherwise finished as specified in other Sections.


3.02 INSTALLATION OF HARDWARE

A. General: Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations, using proper templates. Installation is specified in Section 06200.

B. Mounting Heights: Maintain following mounting heights for new doors, from finished floor to center line of hardware item: 1. Locksets and Latchsets: 40", unless special height requirements are specified elsewhere. 2. Deadlocks: 48".

C. Verify compliance of mounting heights with current ANSI A117.1 and ADA requirements. D. Contractor shall ensure that proper blocking has been provided for all wall-mounted hardware in

gypsum wallboard partitions, particularly door stops. E. Ensure proper operation of all finish hardware items. Adjust alignments as necessary for smooth

operation. F. Adjust operating force for all door closers for compliance with applicable codes and handicapped

accessibility standards. 3.03 HARDWARE FURNISHED TO OTHER SECTIONS

A. Section 08210, Wood Doors: 1. Hardware supplier to provide templates to door fabricator. 2. Hardware supplier to furnish hinges to door fabricator for pre-hanging in door shop. 3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. General: While the following Hardware Schedule is intended to cover all doors and other movable parts of the project and establish a type and standard of quality, it shall be the specific responsibility of the finish hardware supplier to examine the Drawings and Specifications and furnish proper hardware for all openings, whether listed or not. If there are any omissions in the hardware groups, the hardware supplier shall notify the Architect prior to bid opening for instruc-tions; otherwise, the list will be considered complete. No extras will be allowed by the Owner or the Architect.

B. It is intended that the following groups be complete in the coverage of required items, but it is the responsibility of the hardware supplier to furnish finish hardware necessary for a complete installation, particularly in regard to fire-rated door assemblies. Where items are referred to in the singular, they shall be furnished in numbers sufficient for a complete installation.

C. Every attempt has been made to coordinate the finish hardware items between each other and with doors, etc. to which they are to be installed. It is the responsibility of the hardware supplier to ensure the compatibility of the finish hardware supplied with both related hardware items and the doors, etc. to which they are to be used.

D. Hardware Notes: 1. Ea. refers to each leaf. 2. LH refers to left-hand leaf only. 3. RH refers to right-hand leaf only. 4. All other handing shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier.



PART 4 SCHEDULE 4.01 HARDWARE GROUPS Group A Exterior Entrance/Exit Doors 1-1/2 pr. Hinges 1 ea. Panic device, rim type, with lever trim to exterior 1 ea. Kickplate 1 ea. Closer 1 ea. Sweep 1 set Weatherstripping 1 ea. Door stop (door #102 only) Group B Exterior Entrance/Exit Doors 1-1/2 pr. Hinges 1 ea. Lockset, F-81, with lever trim 1 ea. Deadbolt, E-2151, with lever or paddle trim 1 ea. Kickplate 1 ea. Closer 1 ea. Sweep 1 set Weatherstripping 1 ea. Door stop Group C Interior Office Door 1-1/2 pr. Hinges 1 ea. Lockset, F-81, with lever trim 1 ea. Door stop Group D Interior Unisex Public Restroom Door 1-1/2 pr. Hinges 1 ea. Lockset, F-76, with lever trim 1 ea. Kickplate 1 ea. Closer 1 ea. Door stop Group E Interior Private Restroom Door 1-1/2 pr. Hinges 1 ea. Lockset, F-81, with lever trim 1 ea. Kickplate 1 ea. Closer 1 ea. Door stop

END OF SECTION

SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install glass and glazing for new wood fixed window systems at dining room. B. Furnish and install glass and glazing for wood door vision lites. C. Furnish and install glass and glazing for new steel sash windows. D. Furnish and install frameless mirrors. E. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 08210, Wood Doors: Glazed vision lites. 3. Section 08510, Steel Sash Windows. 4. Section 08515, Steel Sash Window Repair. 5. Section 08810, Replacement Glass and Glazing: Glass for rehabilitation of historic

windows.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Factory Sealed Insulated Glass Units: ASTM E774-84a, Standard Specifications for Sealed

Insulating Glass, when tested in accordance with ASTM E773-83, Standard Test for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass.

2. ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings. 3. CPSC 16 CFR 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. 4. FS DD-G-4151C: Glass, Plate, Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses. 5. FS DD-G-1403B: Glass, Plate (Float), Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered. 6. FS TT-S-001543: Sealing Compound, Silicone Base (for caulking and glazing in buildings and

other structures). 7. NAAMM #SS-1B-68: Non-Skinning Resilient Preformed Compounds-Tapes, Ribbons, Beads

with Release Paper. 8. Sigma #67-7-2: Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Manufacturer: Certified by the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). C. Installer: All exterior glass and glazing shall be installed by a single installer. Use adequate

numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

D. Design Criteria: 1. Wind Load (horizontal): 100 mph, Exposure C in accordance with the International Building

Code, or as required by the governmental agencies having jurisdiction over this Project. E. Glazing Standards: FGMA Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual, and recommendations of GANA.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product literature and specifications for factory sealed insulated glass units, tempered glass, all glass with special coatings or film, unless glazing is part of submittal by manufacturer of doors or windows specified elsewhere.


B. Samples: Submit minimum 12" x 12" samples of specified types of glass for approval of the Architect.

C. Certifications: Submit certificates of compliance from glass and glazing materials manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for Project comply with specified requirements. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent label designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authority having jurisdiction over this Project.


A. Schedule glass deliveries to coincide with glazing schedules. B. Deliver glass lites and glazing materials to the site in manufacturer's original, sealed cartons. C. Support cases on both sides when stored vertically. D. After unpacking, place interleaving protection between individual lites. Keep glass and

interleaving dry by storing inside where temperatures are above dewpoint. If outside storage is necessary, cover the glass and interleaving with opaque tarpaulins or plastic and inspect periodically.

E. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer’s directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with

insulating glass fabricator’s recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.

F. Stack individual lites on edge and lean against sturdy supports at a slope of 5°-7° from vertical. Cushion the bottom edges with soft, firm pads free of dirt, grit, glass chips or other foreign material.

G. Avoid rotating or cartwheeling factory sealed insulated glass units over their corners. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40° F.

1.06 WARRANTIES

A. Coated Glass Products: Provide manufacturer’s written warranty signed by coated glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions. 1. Warranty period: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than 5 years after date of

Substantial Completion. B. Insulating Glass: Provide manufacturer’s written warranty signed by manufacturer for insulating

glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions. 1. Warranty period: Manufacturer’s standard but not less than 10 years after date of

Substantial Completion. C. Tempered Glass: Provide manufacturer’s written warranty signed by glass manufacturer agreeing

to furnish replacement for those laminated glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty


period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions. 1. Warranty period: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than 1 year after date of

Substantial Completion, stating that the glass meets ASTM 1048 safety requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR GLASS AND GLAZING

A. General: Furnish all types and thicknesses of glass shown on the Drawings or specified herein. 1. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to install tempered glass and/or safety glass at all

locations where required by current codes. Advise Architect of any locations or conditions where these requirements will apply where not already shown on the Drawings.

B. Exterior Fixed Wood and New Steel Sash Window Glass, Low-E Coating (Restoration and Preservation Projects): Hermetically sealed, insulated glass units, PPG Solarban 60 Low Emissivity coated glass, outer pane of 1/4" clear glass with soft coat Low-E coating on #2 surface and inner pane of 1/4" clear glass with 1/2" dead air space, low exterior reflectance, as basis of design. Glass to be tempered at locations required by current codes. 1. Glass Design: PPG Clear as basis of design. 2. Visible Light Transmittance: 69% minimum. 3. Shading Coefficient: 0.44 maximum. 4. Low emissivity coating shall be applied to the #3 surface of glass if tinting is specified. If

both panes of glass are clear, the low emissivity coating shall be applied to the #2 surface. 5. Increase glass thicknesses for glazing units exceeding 64 sq. ft. as follows:

a. Outer Pane: 5/16" thick minimum for 80 mph wind load. b. Inner Pane: Remains 1/4" thick. c. Dead Air Space: Reduce to 7/16".

6. Metal spacer bars inside the sashes that separate the two panes of glass shall be black or anodized bronze finish, not bright aluminum.

C. Exterior Historic Replacement Glass for Existing Steel Sash Windows: Refer to Section 08810. D. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Plate or Float Glass and Tempered Glass: a. Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co. (PPG), Pittsburgh, PA, and represented in Denver, CO,

(303) 534-6241. b. Libby-Owens-Ford (LOF), Toledo, OH, (419) 247-4892. c. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc., Clinton, NC, (919) 591-7101. d. AFG Glass, Kingsport, TN, (800) 251-0441. e. Interpane Glass Company, Clinton, NC, (800) 334-1797. f. Oldcastle Glass, Plano, TX, and represented in Denver, CO, (303) 371-5511. g. Pilkington Building Products, Toledo, OH, (800) 221-0444.

2. Manufacturers providing materials of same appearance, function and performance are acceptable.

2.02 INTERIOR GLASS AND GLAZING



B. Mirrors: FF DD-G-451C, polished plate or float glass recommended for high humidity use with raised edges, minimum 1/4" thick, sizes as indicated on the Drawings, standard silvered-back coating.


C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Plate or Float Glass and Tempered Glass:

a. Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co. (PPG), Pittsburgh, PA, and represented in Denver, CO, (303) 534-6241.

b. Libby-Owens-Ford (LOF), Toledo, OH, (419) 247-4892. c. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc., Clinton, NC, (919) 591-7101. d. AFG Glass, Kingsport, TN, (800) 251-0441. e. Interpane Glass Company, Clinton, NC, (800) 334-1797. f. Oldcastle Glass, Plano, TX, and represented in Denver, CO, (303) 371-5511. g. Pilkington Building Products, Toledo, OH, (800) 221-0444.


2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric, neoprene or silicone material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85

+/- 5. D. Glazing Gaskets: Extruded or neoprene molded fabricated into frames with molded corners, ASTM

C542. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side-

walking). F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonextruding, non-

outgassing, strips of closed-cell plastic foam of density, size, and shape to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant performance.

G. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl type, NAAMM SS-1B-68, with integral spacing devices, 10-15 durometer hardness, paper release, by Kawneer or equal. 1. Color: Clear or white for painted wood or hollow metal frames; dark bronze for bronze

aluminum frames. H. Silicone Sealer: Clear GE Silicone Sealer or equal. I. Glazing Putty: Refer to Section 08810.

2.04 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND GLAZING PRODUCTS

A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required for glazed openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.


A. Installer shall examine the steel sash openings and fixed wood framing systems into which the glass and glazing is to be installed and report any conditions in writing to the Contractor which may prevent the successful installation of the work. Do not begin the glazing installation until these conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Clean glazing channels, stops and rabbets to receive the glazing materials, making free from obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work.


1. Remove protective coatings which might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of sealants. 2. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately prior to

application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes. 3. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. C. Verify site dimensions of all tempered or other glazings that cannot be field cut prior to ordering.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Take all necessary precautions to protect the existing historic glass and glazing in the existing steel sash windows to remain in the completed project. Refer to Section 08810 for replacement of any cracked, broken or missing lites.

B. Unpack the glass from cases in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Do not move partially unpacked cases or "end pick" individual lites.

C. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation. 1. Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges or are scratched,

abraded or damaged in any other manner. D. Prevent contact of surfaces of individual lites; do not slide one lite over another. E. Installation personnel shall wear gloves, safety shoes, hard hats and glazing gauntlets at all times

during the handling and installation of the glass. F. Protection: Completely cover glass during spray painting, texturing or other construction

operations that might cause damage to glass. Complete clean down of stucco shall be completed prior to installation.

G. Door Vision Lites: Supplier shall furnish specified insulated glass lites to wood door fabricator for installation in the shop.

H. Glazing Putty Replacement: Refer to Section 08810. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GLASS AND GLAZING

A. General: All glazing shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Comply with applicable FGMA and/or GANA standards. 1. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

2. Glazing channel dimensions shall provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by site conditions during installation.

B. Glazing of fixed wood windows shall be done from the exterior of the building. Glazing shall be performed using the dry-pressure preformed glazing channel method, unless otherwise approved by the Architect.

C. Clean surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry. Cut glazing channel to proper length and install on glass pane. Weld joints by butting channel and dabbing with sealant.

D. Locate setting blocks at sills 1/4 of the width of the glass in from each end of the glass, unless otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer. 1. Use blocks of proper size to support the glass in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. 2. Provide spacers for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, to separate glass from

stops, except where continuous glazing gaskets or felts are provided. a. Locate spacers no more than 24" apart and no closer than 12" to a corner. b. Place spacers opposite one another. c. Make bite of spacer on glass 1/4" or more.

E. Set glass in a manner which produces the greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance. 1. Install glass so distortion waves, if present, run in the horizontal direction.

F. Do not use two different glazing materials in the same joint system, unless the joint use is



approved in advance by the Architect. G. Mask or otherwise protect surfaces adjacent to installation of sealants. H. Miter-cut and seal the joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations, to provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations where joints are required.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF FULL PLATE MIRRORS

A. General: Frameless plate mirrors shall be fully adhered to walls, unless otherwise shown or required by specific project conditions. Plastic or metal setting clips shall not be used unless approved by the Architect.

B. Renovation Projects: Where plate mirrors are scheduled to be installed on existing walls that are not square, plumb or flush, or exhibit other conditions that would prevent the successful installation of the mirrors by the fully-adhered method, Contractor shall propose alternative method of installation for approval by the Architect.


A. Protect installed glass with screens of plywood or plastic wherever welding, cutting, sandblasting, fireproofing, painting or other potentially damaging work is in process.

B. Do not mark glass with X or other identity symbol after glazing. C. Final clean all glass surfaces in accordance with Division 1, and remove all labels.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 08810 REPLACEMENT GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install replacement glass and glazing for historic steel sash windows, where existing glass is cracked, broken or missing.

B. Remove window putty from existing steel window sashes, clean and prepare glazing, and install new window putty.

C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Fixed wood windows, site-built. 3. Section 08210, Wood Doors: Glazed vision lites. 4. Section 08515, Steel Sash Window Repair. 5. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing: Glass for new window units.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Factory Sealed Insulated Glass Units: ASTM E774-84a, Standard Specifications for Sealed

Insulating Glass, when tested in accordance with ASTM E773-83, Standard Test for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass.

2. ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings. 3. CPSC 16 CFR 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. 4. UL 10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 5. FS DD-G-4151C: Glass, Plate, Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses. 6. FS DD-G-1403B: Glass, Plate (Float), Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered. 7. FS TT-S-001543: Sealing Compound, Silicone Base (for caulking and glazing in buildings and

other structures). 8. NAAMM #SS-1B-68: Non-Skinning Resilient Preformed Compounds-Tapes, Ribbons, Beads

with Release Paper. 9. Sigma #67-7-2: Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 10. Glazing Standards: FGMA Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual. 11. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Manufacturer: Certified by the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). C. Installer: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

D. Design Criteria: 1. Wind Load (horizontal): 100 mph, Exposure C in accordance with the International Building

Code, or as required by the governmental agencies having jurisdiction over this Project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product literature and specifications for specialty replacement glass.


B. Samples: Submit minimum 12" x 12" samples of specified types of glass for approval of the Architect.

C. Certifications: Submit certificates of compliance from glass and glazing materials manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for Project comply with specified requirements. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent label designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authority having jurisdiction over this Project.


A. Schedule glass deliveries to coincide with glazing schedules. B. Deliver glass to the site in manufacturer's original, sealed cartons. C. Support cases on both sides when stored vertically. D. After unpacking, place interleaving protection between individual lites. Keep glass and

interleaving dry by storing inside where temperatures are above dewpoint. If outside storage is necessary, cover the glass and interleaving with opaque tarpaulins or plastic and inspect periodically.

E. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer’s directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with

insulating glass fabricator’s recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.

F. Stack individual lites on edge and lean against sturdy supports at a slope of 5°-7° from vertical. Cushion the bottom edges with soft, firm pads free of dirt, grit, glass chips or other foreign material.

G. Avoid rotating or cartwheeling factory sealed insulated glass units over their corners. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40° F.

1.06 WARRANTIES

A. Insulating Glass: Provide manufacturer’s written warranty signed by manufacturer for insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions. 1. Warranty period: Manufacturer’s standard but not less than 10 years after date of

Substantial Completion. B. Tempered Glass: Provide manufacturer’s written warranty signed by glass manufacturer agreeing

to furnish replacement for those laminated glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions. 1. Warranty period: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than 1 year after date of

Substantial Completion, stating that the glass meets ASTM 1048 safety requirements.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR REPLACEMENT GLASS AND GLAZING



B. Exterior Fixed Wood Window and Door Lite Glass (Restoration and Preservation Projects): Refer to Section 08800.

C. Exterior Historic Replacement Glass: Match existing 1/4" historic float glass, clear, at existing steel sash windows. 1. Approved Replacement Glass: Light Restoration (Circa 1900) by Bendheim Glass, as basis

of design. D. Approved Manufacturers/Suppliers of Historic Replacement Glass:

1. Bendheim Restoration Glass, represented in Oakland, CA, (800) 900-3499, as the basis of design.


2.02 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric, neoprene or silicone material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85

+/- 5. D. Glazing Gaskets: Extruded or neoprene molded fabricated into frames with molded corners, ASTM

C542. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side-

walking). F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonextruding, non-

outgassing, strips of closed-cell plastic foam of density, size, and shape to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant performance.

G. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl type, NAAMM SS-1B-68, with integral spacing devices, 10-15 durometer hardness, paper release, by Kawneer or equal. 1. Color: Clear or white for painted wood or hollow metal frames; dark bronze for bronze

aluminum frames. H. Silicone Sealer: Clear GE Silicone Sealer or equal. I. Screens: Refer to Section 08515. J. Glazing Putty: Dap or equal.

2.03 FABRICATION OF REPLACEMENT GLASS AND GLAZING PRODUCTS

A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required for glazed openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.

PART 3 EXECUTION


3.01 INSPECTION

A. Installer shall examine the existing steel sash windows into which the replacement glass and glazing is to be installed and report any conditions in writing to the Contractor which may prevent the successful installation of the work. Do not begin the glazing installation until these conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Clean glazing channels, stops and rabbets to receive the glazing materials, making free from obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work. 1. Remove protective coatings which might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of sealants. 2. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately prior to

application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes. 3. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. C. Verify site dimensions of all tempered or other glazings that cannot be field cut prior to ordering.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Take all necessary precautions to protect the existing historic glass and glazing to remain in the completed project.

B. Unpack the glass from cases in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Do not move partially unpacked cases or "end pick" individual lites.

C. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation. 1. Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges or are scratched,

abraded or damaged in any other manner. D. Prevent contact of surfaces of individual lites; do not slide one lite over another. E. Installation personnel shall wear gloves, safety shoes, hard hats and glazing gauntlets at all times

during the handling and installation of the glass. F. Protection: Completely cover glass during spray painting or other construction operations that

might cause damage to glass. Complete clean down of stucco shall be completed prior to installation.

G. Glazing Putty Replacement: Remove all existing glass and glazing putty or other compounds completely from existing steel window sashes. Clean and leave surfaces prepared for installation of new glazing putty.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF REPLACEMENT GLASS AND GLAZING

A. General: All replacement glass and glazing shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Comply with referenced FGMA standards. 1. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

2. Glazing channel dimensions shall provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by site conditions during installation.

B. Replacement Glazing in Restoration and Preservation Projects: Install replacement glass in existing steel sashes where existing glass is cracked, broken or missing. All undamaged historic glass shall remain in place. Coordinate with the Architect on site as necessary.

C. Clean surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry. Cut glazing channel to proper length and install on glass pane. Weld joints by butting channel and dabbing with sealant.



D. Locate setting blocks at sills 1/4 of the width of the glass in from each end of the glass, unless otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer. 1. Use blocks of proper size to support the glass in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. 2. Provide spacers for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, to separate glass from

stops, except where continuous glazing gaskets or felts are provided. a. Locate spacers no more than 24" apart and no closer than 12" to a corner. b. Place spacers opposite one another. c. Make bite of spacer on glass 1/4" or more.

E. Set glass in a manner which produces the greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance. 1. Install glass so distortion waves or patterns, if present, run in the horizontal direction or as

required to match existing historic glass to remain. F. Do not use two different glazing materials in the same joint system, unless the joint use is

approved in advance by the Architect. G. Mask or otherwise protect surfaces adjacent to installation of sealants. H. Miter-cut and seal the joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations, to provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations where joints are required.

3.04 REINSTALLATION OF GLAZING PUTTY

A. General: New glazing putty shall be installed in all existing steel sash windows to remain in the project. Glazing putty shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

B. Ensure that all existing compounds have been removed and the frames cleaned and properly prepared prior to installation of the new glazing putty.


A. Protect installed glass with screens of plywood or plastic wherever welding, cutting, sandblasting, fireproofing, painting or other potentially damaging work is in process.

B. Do not mark glass with X or other identity symbol after glazing. C. Final clean all glass surfaces in accordance with Section 01710, and remove all labels.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09220 SKIM COAT PLASTER SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install interior skim coat plaster system as repair to existing plastered foundation walls and ceilings.

B. Texture finished surfaces as specified. C. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 07245, Exterior Portland Cement Stucco System. 3. Section 09900, Painting.


A. Applicator: System shall be installed by a company specializing in cement plasterwork with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

B. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature and installation instructions, indicating materials to be supplied, characteristics and limitations of products furnished for this Section.

B. Samples: Provide sample area, minimum 4'-0" x 4'-0", illustrating thickness, surface finish and color for repaired interior plaster work, for approval by the Architect. This area, when approved, will serve as the standard for field quality for the balance of work.


A. Contractor shall inspect bagged plaster system products for dryness prior to accepting delivery. B. Store bagged materials in a cool, dry, interior area. Do not expose materials to high humidity, rain

or snow conditions. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply plaster system when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 50 degrees F or more than 80 degrees F.

B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during and after installation of plaster system.

1.06 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard 6-month warranty covering defects in the materials furnished. B. Installer shall warrant the workmanship of the installation of the plaster system for a period of one

year. PART 2 PRODUCTS

09220 – 1 Heller Center Rehabilitation Bid Package 2

2.01 SKIM COAT PLASTER SYSTEM

A. General: Single-component, cement-based, polymer-modified, non-shrink patching and repair mortar system, to be trowel-applied to existing concrete unit masonry walls and plastered ceilings where exposed to view in the final construction.

B. Design Strengths: 1. Compressive strength: Minimum 2,000 psi at 1 day; 6,250 psi at 28 days. 2. Bond strength: Minimum 1,000 psi at 1 day; 1,200 psi at 28 days. 3. Expansion after drying: Maximum 0.05%, when tested in accordance with ASTM C157.

C. Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, or as recommended by the plaster system

manufacturer. 2. Sand: ASTM C144, or as recommended by the plaster system manufacturer. 3. Aggregate: As required to match the existing finish and texture. 4. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can adversely

affect plaster. D. Bonding Agent: Type recommended by manufacturer for bonding specified plaster system to

concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces. E. Finish: As required to match existing finishes, or as selected by the Architect. F. Color: Natural, to be field painted as specified in Section 09900. G. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Conpatch V/O manufactured by Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Co., Inc., Kansas City, MO, as the basis of design.

2. Sonneborne Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, and represented locally by The Stan South Co., Boulder, CO, (303) 449-4860.

3. Thoro System Products, Miami, FL, and represented locally by The Rio Grande Co., Denver, CO, (303) 825-2211.

4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality, appearance and performance are acceptable.


A. Installer shall examine the areas of walls and ceiling surfaces to receive the skim coat plaster system and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions which would prevent the successful completion of this work. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer.

B. Ensure that miscellaneous items within walls for other Sections of work have been properly installed and approved.

C. Ensure that surfaces adjacent to the work of this Section are adequately protected from damage or disfiguration.

D. Ensure that all concrete or concrete unit masonry surfaces are sound and free of all foreign materials, including oil, grease, dust, laitance or other surface contaminants.

E. Ensure that existing concrete unit masonry walls have been repaired and tuckpointed prior to installation of the skim coat plaster system.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Cut and remove cracked, loose or damaged interior plaster work just to the extend required to adjoin intact plaster. Clean edges and substrate of loose material prior to installing new plaster.

B. Dampen concrete and/or masonry surfaces with clean water.



C. Prepare bond coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not allow bond coat to dry prior to applying the skim coat plaster system.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Mix and apply the skim coat plastering system in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

B. Mix mortar system using mortar batching and mixing equipment. Mix only the amount of material that can be applied during the setting period.

C. Trowel apply plaster materials in lifts not to exceed 2" thick, providing multiple layers as may be required to build up surfaces to the specified thickness, or as required for uniformly smooth and flush surfaces. 1. If multiple lifts are required, allow initial layer to set and then scratch the surface for

bond to subsequent layer(s). D. Float finish coat to match existing finish. E. Tolerances:

1. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/4" in 10'-0". F. Cure plaster system as recommended by the manufacturer. Protect surfaces from premature or

uneven drying due to high wind, low humidity or high temperature conditions. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of other work upon completion of the plaster system installation. Promptly remove plaster smears from peeled pole logs, door frames, windows, trims and other surfaces which are not to be plastered. Repair floors, walls and other surfaces which have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work is complete, remove unused materials, containers and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris.

B. Installer shall advise the Contractor of requirements for the protection of the skim coat plaster system from deterioration and damage during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Leave surfaces prepared for field finishing, specified in Section 09900, Painting.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09260 GYPSUM WALLBOARD PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install interior gypsum wallboard materials, adhesives, accessories and trim. B. Furnish and install interior gypsum wallboard, adhesives and accessories as required for "pre-rock"

applications, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Furnish and install interior gypsum wallboard, adhesives and accessories for required blocking and

draft stops. D. Tape and finish joints of gypsum wallboard. E. Texture and finish gypsum wallboard surfaces to the level specified. F. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry. 4. Section 08210, Wood Doors. 5. Section 09900, Painting.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM C473, Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products. 2. ASTM C518, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by

Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 3. ASTM C630, Standard Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. 4. ASTM C840, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 5. ASTM C1396, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. 6. ASTM D3273, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 8. ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Install gypsum wallboard in accordance with applicable Gypsum Association (GA) publications,

including but not limited to: 1. Gypsum Board Finishes: GA-214-96. 2. Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board: GA-216-96. 3. Weather Protection: GA-220.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s written product literature for all gypsum wallboard materials and accessory products specified or required for Project conditions.

B. Samples: Texturing subcontractor shall prepare a series of minimum 24" x 24" samples of each type of finish/texture specified for approval of the Architect.

C. Sample Area: Contractor shall prepare a wall/ceiling area within one room for approval of general quality and workmanship by the Owner and Architect, to include gypsum wallboard installation, taping, joint preparation, sanding, finishing and texturing, if applicable. Sample area, when


approved, shall be used for the standard of comparison for the balance of work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the site in original unopened packages, containers or bundles with labels intact bearing type, sizes and thicknesses, brand name and name of manufacturer.

B. Handle wallboard carefully to avoid abrading surfaces or edges. C. Store materials flat, under cover, on level platforms, with edges, ends and surfaces properly

protected from weather, undue sagging and damage. D. Protection During Construction: Contractor shall adequately protect all gypsum wallboard

materials, wall and roof/ceiling assemblies during construction from weather and moisture penetration, when these materials are installed prior to the structure being enclosed and "dried-in". Also refer to paragraph 3.01 below.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures at not less than 55° F for the period of 24 hours before drywall finishing, during installation and until compounds are dry.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. General: Provide gypsum wallboard materials in 48" widths complying with FS SS-L-30D. B. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: 5/8" thick as indicated on the Drawings, maximum

permissible lengths, tapered edges. C. Approved Manufacturers:

1. United States Gypsum Co. Chicago, IL, and represented locally in Denver, CO, (303) 721-9394.

2. G-P Gypsum (Georgia-Pacific) Corp., (800) 225-6119. 3. Gold Bond Building Products, Charlotte, NC, and represented locally in Lakewood, CO,

(303) 988-5005. 4. American Gypsum, Albuquerque, NM, (800) 545-6302. 5. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.

2.02 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide gypsum wallboard accessories in accordance with GA 216. B. Corner Beads and Edge Trim: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel beaded units with flanges

for concealment in joint compound. C. Shims: 2" wide cardboard or paper drywall shims, for shimming wood or metal stud frame

construction. D. Joint Tape: Perforated or nylon mesh type, as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Joint Compound and Finishing Systems: ASTM C474 and C475, Type I and Type II, ready-mixed vinyl

type for interior use. Use two (2) separate grades: one specifically for bedding tapes and filling depressions, and one for topping and sanding. 1. Beadex Drywall Accessories, Renton, WA, (800) 726-2397. 1. Hamilton Materials, Orange, CA, (714) 637-2770. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable.

F. Fasteners: Type W bugle head, lengths as recommended by manufacturer of gypsum wallboard material for installation in wood construction.

G. Control Joints: E-Z strip vinyl expansion joint or as recommended by manufacturer of gypsum wallboard.


H. Primer: Products as recommended by the manufacturer, compatible with both the gypsum wallboard and texturing materials furnished.

I. Texturing: Provide materials, equipment and accessories as required to provide finish/texture(s) as specified in paragraph 3.07 below.

J. Adhesive: Manufacturer-approved drywall adhesive, oil-based. 1. Formula 38 Drywall and Construction Adhesive, Ohio Sealants, Inc. or equal.

K. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

L. Provide auxiliary materials and accessories for gypsum drywall work of the type and grade recommended by the gypsum wallboard manufacturer.


A. Installer shall examine the wall, ceiling and soffit rough framing, and adjacent, existing substrates to receive gypsum drywall and the conditions under which gypsum drywall is to be installed and notify Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Ensure that wood stud framing has been properly installed, providing substrates that will permit the gypsum wallboard systems to be installed creating level, smooth and flush surfaces, sharp and straight edges and corners, and plumb and even returns. 1. Install gypsum wallboard shims where necessary to remove minor variations in framing and

to provide finished surfaces of specified levelness and flushness. 2. Advise Contractor to remove and replace sections of wall, ceiling or soffit framing that

cannot adequately be corrected by the installation of shims. C. Underlayment Applications: Ensure that plywood underlayment has been properly installed over

metal framing for interior gypsum wallboard applications where indicated on the Drawings. D. Ensure that gypsum wallboard used in demising wall or other "pre-rock" installations is entirely

protected from exposure to weather until the building is completely enclosed and "dried-in", or at the Contractor's option, use a fire-rated wallboard product suitable for temporary exterior exposure.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. General: Install gypsum wallboard in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, specifications and applicable Gypsum Association (GA) publications, including but not limited to: 1. Gypsum Board Finishes: GA-214-96. 2. Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board: GA-216-96. 3. Weather Protection: GA-220.

B. Install gypsum wallboard in locations as specified in the Installation Schedule at the end of this Section, or as required by applicable codes or standards.

C. Installation Method: 1. Gypsum Wallboard for Interior Wood Stud Walls: Nail and screw. 2. Gypsum Wallboard for Interior Soffits and Ceilings: Screw only.

D. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture-resistant gypsum wallboard with sealant.


E. Wood Frame Construction: Install specified cardboard or paper shims as necessary to correct minor defects and alignment in wood framing members.

F. Refer to paragraph 3.04 for installation of expansion joints, corner and edge trims, and other miscellaneous trims.

G. Tape, fill and sand exposed joints, edges, corners, openings and fixtures to produce surface ready to receive surface finishes. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32". Taping, filling and sanding are required at all locations. Apply primer coat prior to texturing.

H. Tolerances: Install, tape and finish all gypsum wallboard surfaces to maintain tolerances required by the referenced standards.

I. Remove and reinstall defective work. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF "PRE-ROCK" GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. General: The installer shall furnish and install gypsum wallboard for miscellaneous "pre-rock" applications, whether specifically indicated on the Drawings or not, including but not limited to: 1. Areas as may be required by applicable building codes, or by state or local building officials

or inspectors. B. Protection During Construction: Contractor shall adequately protect all gypsum wallboard

materials, wall and roof/ceiling assemblies during construction from weather and moisture penetration, when these materials are installed prior to the structure being enclosed and "dried-in". Contractor shall remove and replace any moisture-damaged gypsum wallboard materials prior to final cover-up. Also refer to paragraph 3.01 above.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF BLOCKING AND DRAFT STOPS

A. General: The Installer shall furnish and install gypsum wallboard for miscellaneous blocking and draft stops, whether specifically indicated on the Drawings or not, including but not limited to: 1. Draft stops in soffit or other concealed spaces. 2. Other areas as may be required by applicable building codes, or by state or local building

officials or inspectors. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS TRIMS

A. General: Install specified metal corner, edge and joint trims as specified herein or shown on the Drawings, or where required by field conditions to provide a complete and finished installation.

B. Expansion and Control Joints: Place expansion/control joints at locations as indicated on the Drawings or in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Joints shall not be placed at intervals greater than that recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer. Coordinate locations where joints are not specifically shown with the Architect in the field prior to layout.

C. Corner Beads: Place corner beads at all external corners using longest practical lengths, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Edge and Miscellaneous Trims: Place edge trim where gypsum wallboard abuts dissimilar materials and at reveals, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Wrap all exposed edges of gypsum wallboard with specified edge or reveal trim, unless conditions allow the use of full-size corner bead trims. 1. Install trims at walls or ceilings of dissimilar materials straight and flush with surfaces. 2. Install trims at columns, beams or other materials protruding from the plane of the gypsum

wallboard straight and accurate, with consistent tolerance of 1/4" maximum joint width, unless otherwise shown.


3.06 PRIMING OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. General: Prime all gypsum wallboard surfaces to receive texturing and further finishing in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Use only priming materials that are compatible with the drywall and texturing materials to which they are applied.

B. Application of primer coat shall occur prior to texturing, unless otherwise approved. C. Additional priming after texturing, if any, shall be provided by the painting subcontractor as

specified in Section 09900. 3.07 FINISHING OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. General: Apply texturing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced standards. Ensure uniform coverage and appearance, using specified equipment. Do not texture walls to receive ceramic tile or other similar finishes.

B. Specified Level(s) of Gypsum Wallboard Finish: Finishes shall comply with current standards and recommendations of the Gypsum Association (GA) for the finish level(s) specified. Refer to publication GA-214. 1. Level 3: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and

one additional coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with two (2) separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Note: It is recommended that the prepared surface by coated with a drywall primer prior to the application of final finishes. a. Locations: Interior wall and ceiling surfaces to receive medium to heavy hand-

applied textures, to match existing plaster finish. C. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Match existing texture and finish of adjacent surfaces.


A. Remove soil, stains and extraneous materials from adjacent surfaces caused by installation of drywall materials. Remove and replace materials that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned.

B. Leave gypsum wallboard surfaces clean and prepared for further finish work specified in other Sections.

C. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protection of the gypsum wallboard work from damage and deterioration during the remainder of the construction period.

D. Refer to paragraph 3.03 above for other protection requirements during construction. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Finishes and/or texturing shall be subject to evaluation to the satisfaction of the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: 1. Consistency. 2. Coverage. 3. Uniformity. 4. Compliance with specified finish levels and approved sample(s). 5. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Satisfactory match to adjacent surfaces.

B. Texturing which exhibits bubbles after drying shall be removed and reapplied.



PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Install 5/8" moisture-resistant gypsum wallboard in the following locations: 1. Interior infill walls of new public unisex restrooms. 2. Interior wall of furred-out private restroom. 3. Moisture-resistant gypsum wallboard panels shall not be installed on ceilings or horizontal

soffits.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install ceramic wall, floor and coved base tile using thin-set method. B. Furnish and install polyethylene cavity membrane tile underlayment. C. Furnish and install prefabricated metal edge and transition trims. D. Furnish and install tile mortar, grout, mastic and other accessory materials. E. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01022, Unit Costs. 2. Section 09650, Resilient Flooring. 3. Section 10800, Toilet and Bath Accessories. 4. Division 15, Mechanical: Toilet fixtures.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the requirements and recommendations of

applicable portions of the Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA) "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation", current edition.

2. ANSI A108.4, Ceramic Tile Installed with Water-Resistant Organic Adhesives. 3. ANSI A118.4, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 4. ANSI A136.1, Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. 5. TCA 137.1, Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. 6. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Quality Control: All materials used for work in this Section shall be made in one (1) batch or

consecutive batches to give the greatest assurance in consistency of color, texture and size. Sufficient quantities, plus replacement of material damaged due to shipping or handling, shall be produced with reserve retained by the manufacturer for no less than 90 days from date of order.

C. All materials shall be shipped with clear labeling or stamping to identify batch numbers, dates of manufacture and other pertinent information.

D. Installer shall employ only tile setters who are thoroughly trained and experienced in tile work for projects of similar size and complexity. Installer shall certify that tile setters are completely familiar with the requirements and recommendations of the referenced standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions and recommendations, illustrating pertinent details for each type of ceramic tile, underlayment membrane, edge and transition trim, and accessory specified.

B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full range of colors and/or patterns of the ceramic tile materials, within the pricing categories specified, for selection by the Architect. Include all internal and external corners, bullnose and other specialty trim units.

C. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer’s full range of grout colors for selection by the Architect.



A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original sealed cartons, with labels legible and intact

identifying brand name and contents. Tile cartons shall be grade-sealed by manufacturer in accordance with ANSI A137.1, Section 9, with grade seals unbroken.


A. Provide sufficient heat and ventilation in areas where work of this Section is to be performed to allow ceramic tile to properly set. Take precautionary measures necessary to ensure that excessive temperature changes do not occur.

B. Make necessary provisions for dust control. Use dustless operations wherever possible. C. Vent temporary heating devices directly to the outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to new tile

work. 1.06 MAINTENANCE STOCK

A. Contractor shall furnish Owner at least one (1) unopened carton of replacement tiles in each color, size, and type used on the project. Refer to Section 01600.

1.07 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 CERAMIC TILE

A. General: Glazed ceramic tile, mounted-type, conforming to ANSI A137.1, Section 5, standard grade. Ceramic tile work is covered by an Allowance. Refer to Section 01020.

B. Material: Standard buff body. C. Face Finish: As scheduled below. D. Edges: Cushioned, with spacer lugs on edges. E. Thickness: 3/8" minimum. F. Styles and Sizes:

1. Wall Tile: 6" x 6", Color Blox by Crossville, glazed, non-vitreous. 2. Floor Tile: 12" x 12", Color Blox by Crossville, unglazed, non-vitreous. 3. Base Tile: Coved 6" x 12", Universal Cove Tile by Crossville to coordinate with wall and

floor tile, unglazed, non-vitreous. 4. Miscellaneous trims and shapes as required for a complete installation, including bullnose

outside and inside corners. 5. Grout joints between wall tile, base tile and floor tile shall align.

G. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Crossville Ceramics, Crossville, TN, (615) 484-8418. 2. Dal-Tile, Dallas, TX, distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 744-1743. 3. American Olean, Lansdale, PA, distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 371-9596. 4. Buchtal Ceramics, Roswell, GA, (404) 442-5500. 5. Florida Tile, Lakeland, FL, distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 744-2433. 6. Mannington Ceramic Tile, Lexington, NC, (704) 249-3931. 7. Monarch Tile, Florence, AL, distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 777-6651. 8. Summitville Tile, Summitville, OH, distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 744-1743. 9. U.S. Ceramic Tile Co., East Sparta, OH, distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 373-9090. 10. Impo Glaztile, Inc., Fiorano, Italy, and distributed from Denver, CO, (303) 722-4627. 11. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function, performance and color range


specified are acceptable. 2.02 POLYETHYLENE CAVITY MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT

A. General: Polyethylene Sheet Underlayment: Vacuum-formed polyethylene membrane with fleece laminated to the underside, for use as ceramic tile underlayment in thin-set applications. Vacuum-formed cavities allow moisture in the tile substrate to evaporate, neutralizing vapor pressure allowing the substrate to breathe, and minimizes tile cracks caused by transfer stresses from the substrate or structure. 1. Roll Dimensions: 30m x 1m, or manufacturer's standard. 2. Thickness: 1/8" (3mm) minimum. 3. Weight: 42 lbs. per roll.

B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Schluter-DITRA by Schluter Systems L.P., Plattsburgh, NY, (800) 472-4588. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function, quality and performance are

acceptable. 2.03 PREFABRICATED EDGE AND TRANSITION TRIMS

A. General: Prefabricated metal edge and transition trims, designed to embed in thin-set mortar bed, protect the edge of grouted tile installations and provide tapered transition to other materials. 1. Height/Depth (Tapered Design). 2. Thickness: 1/8".

B. Materials: Solid aluminum or brass, as specified for finishes below. C. Mounting: Tapered. D. Finish: Solid brass. E. Special Shapes: Provide manufacturer's perforated anchoring leg where radiused installations are

shown on the Drawings or required by project conditions. F. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Schluter-SCHIENE by Schluter Systems L.P., Plattsburgh, NY, (800) 472-4588, as basis of design for flush installations.

2. Schluter-RENO-U by Schluter Systems L.P., Plattsburgh, NY, (800) 472-4588, as basis of design for tapered installations.

3. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function, quality and performance are acceptable.


A. Mastic: Water-resistant latex solvent-based mastic CMC-52, as manufactured by Chicago Mastic Corp. or equal.

B. Additives: Laticrete International, Ker-Kote Products, or equal. C. Mortar (Thin Set): Unmodified, conforming to ANSI A118.1. D. Epoxy Mortar (Thin Set): Laticrete Latapoxy 300 epoxy adhesive or equal. E. Epoxy Grout: Laticrete Latipoxy SP-100 epoxy grout or equal. Follow manufacturer's printed

instructions for mixing and application. 1. Approved Manufacturers: Mapei or approved equal.



A. Installer shall examine surfaces that are to receive ceramic wall, floor and base tile and report unsatisfactory conditions to Contractor. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Proceeding with installation of materials will be construed as evidence of acceptance of conditions.

B. Ensure that surfaces are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10'. Level as necessary prior to beginning work.

C. Lay out work prior to installation to center and balance tile to greatest extent possible. Refer to Drawings for stripes, patterns or other special layouts required. Consult with Architect on the site as necessary during layout of all ceramic tile work.

D. Coordinate installation of plumbing rough-ins, prefabricated shower stalls, shower floor receptors, and other work to be built into the ceramic tile.

E. Whenever possible, Contractor shall schedule installation of ceramic tile work prior to installation of plumbing fixtures, countertops, toilet partitions or accessories.

F. Backsplashes: Ensure that casework and plastic laminate countertops are properly installed and approved prior to beginning installation.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage, soiling, adhesives and extraneous materials. Take precautions to protect plumbing fixtures in the vicinity of the ceramic tile work by covering with cardboard or other protective coverings. Protect ceramic tile work from damage by weather and moisture.

B. Close spaces to traffic that are to receive work of this Section and keep closed until tile is firmly set.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF POLYETHYLENE MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT

A. General: Install polyethylene cavity membrane tile underlayment in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

1. Install for floor tile installations only. B. Cut membrane from rolls to dimensions required for application. If additional widths or sections of

membrane are needed, butt end and side sections together without overlap or gaps exceeding 3/8". C. Trowel-apply approved thin-set mortar over substrate. Install underlayment membrane, fleece

side down. Work the membrane into the mortar using a float or screed trowel to thoroughly embed the fleece backing into the mortar.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF PREFABRICATED EDGE AND TRANSITION TRIMS

A. General: Install prefabricated metal trims in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

B. Use full length pieces to greatest extent possible. Where multiple lengths are required, butt ends of pieces together tightly with 1/16" gap maximum.

C. Accurately lay out lines and radii to create tiled areas and patterns shown on the Drawings. D. Install trims where shown on the Drawings or required for transitions to other materials.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF CERAMIC TILE

A. General: Set ceramic tile in place with mastic in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Lay out tile work on floors and lengthwise on walls so that wherever possible no tiles less than half full-size will occur. For heights stated in feet and inches,



unless tile work is intended to exactly fill vertical spaces, maintain courses full to produce nearest attainable height within variation, above or below, equivalent to less than one-half course.

B. Align joints of wall, base and floor tile and trim shapes. Properly lay out and space work, creating required stripes, patterns or other special layouts. Install ceramic tile maintaining required tolerances.

C. Form intersections and returns perfectly. Cut and drill tiles neatly without marring surface. Carefully grind and joint-cut edges of tiles against any trim, finish and built-in fixtures. Fit tile close around electric outlets, plumbing pipes, fixtures and fittings so that usual plates, collars or covering will overlap tile.

D. Form internal wall angles of wall tile square and external angles bullnosed. E. Form internal and external angles of coved base tile bullnosed. F. Wainscot: Use full-size bullnose wall tile units, or specialty quarter round tile units where shown

on the Drawings, to cap ceramic tile wainscot, or other wall tile where less than full height. G. Backsplashes: Install backsplashes as one (1) course of specified ceramic tile, using bullnosed

pieces. Extend tile to ends of all countertop runs, and return corners as may be applicable due to project conditions. Consult with Architect in the field as necessary.

H. Use a neat bead of silicone sealant applied in all corners and at junction with ceiling. I. Thoroughly grout all joints so they are completely filled with grout material. Ensure tile joints are

uniform in width, subject to normal variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Ensure joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout. Pinholes in grout are not acceptable. Grout over sealant.

J. Finish floors level and plumb with no variations exceeding 1/8" in 10' from required plane. K. Finished tile work shall be clean and free of pitted, chipped, cracked or scratched tiles. Replace

broken tile or materials with marred surfaces to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Allow no traffic in tile-laying areas after start of work and for a period of 72 hours after completion, allowing a minimum of 72 hours to damp-cure grout.

B. Clean ceramic tile work in accordance with TCA instructions and recommendations. C. Clean all mastic and grout from face of tile. All joints shall be clearly struck and polished after

grouting. D. Clean all grout from adjacent fixtures, countertops and other materials or equipment installed

prior to ceramic tile work.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09550

WOOD FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install wood strip flooring, complete with finish and anchoring/attachment. B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01022, Unit Prices. 2. Section 01030, Alternates. 3. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06250, Finish Carpentry.


A. Referenced Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. Wood flooring shall conform to the following grading and installation standards: 1. Fir flooring shall comply with grading rules of the Fir Flooring Manufacturers Association. 2. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: Wood flooring to be installed and finished by a Contractor with at least

five (5) years experience in the installation and finishing of wood floors for projects of similar scope and complexity. Evidence of experience shall be available upon request of the Architect.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s written product literature and installation and maintenance instructions.

B. Finish Samples: Prepare samples of selected finishes and submit for approval by the Architect. Remake samples until a satisfactory finish is obtained.

C. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer’s full line of prefinished finishes for approval by the Architect.


A. Handle and store wood flooring materials in manufacturer's original packaging, with seals and labels intact. Protect materials against damage or water penetration during delivery, handling and storage.

B. Do not store finish flooring in the building until all plastering, gypsum wallboard and concrete work is completed and thoroughly dry.

C. Store flooring in the space which it is to be installed for a minimum of three days prior to installation under proper and protected ventilation. The temperature of the room shall not be more than 70° F nor less than 50° F.


A. Maintain room temperature of not more than 70° F or less than 50° F continuously during installation and finishing of the wood flooring.


B. Maintain adequate ventilation during finishing to ensure proper curing; however, prevent airborne dust and other particulates from recirculating and settling in freshly finished surfaces.

1.06 WARRANTIES

A. Prefinished Wood Flooring: Provide manufacturer’s written warranties covering defects in materials, workmanship and finish as follows:

1. Structural Integrity: One (1) year. 2. Finish: Five (5) year.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD FLOORING

A. Wood Flooring: Select No. 1 Grade Fir flooring, 3/4 thick with random widths 3-1/4", 5-1/4" and 7-1/4", T&G end matched. Lengths of 2' and up with average length 4-1/4'.

B. Finish(es): Manufacturer’s standard prefinished clear polyurethane-based finish. Tinting color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s full line of finish colors.

C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function, performance, appearance and

finish selection are acceptable. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Building Paper: Rosin sized unsaturated paper weighing 6 lbs./100 sq. ft. B. Plywood Subflooring: Refer to Section 06100.


A. Installer shall examine the spaces and wood and/or concrete substrates to receive the wood

flooring for unevenness, dampness or any other unsatisfactory conditions that may affect the successful installation of the work. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Contractor in writing. Do not proceed until these conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer.

B. Replacement: Installer shall examine the spaces and wood subflooring substrate to receive new wood flooring for moisture damage, insect damage, decay, structural integrity, unevenness, dampness or any other unsatisfactory conditions that may affect the successful installation of the work. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Contractor in writing. Do not proceed until these conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer.

C. Refinishing: 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Field verify all dimensions affecting the work of this Section. B. Installer shall familiarize themselves with the specific characteristics of the space(s) to receive

wood flooring, including but not limited to: 1. Rake of the floor surface. 2. Bowl of the floor surface. 3. Structural framing or support system.


4. Adjacent wall or floor materials. C. Replacement: Replace broken, moisture-damaged or missing sections of existing wood subflooring

with materials to match existing. Completely remove portions of existing subflooring to extent directed by the Owner or Architect and leave remaining subflooring prepared to receive infill of new subflooring materials. Replacement shall be by unit pricing, specified in Section 01022.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF SUBFLOORING

A. Subfloor: Install plywood subfloor over sleepers. Nail at all bearings with 3d common nails located 6" o.c. Plywood sheets shall be gapped 1/8" to allow for expansion.

B. Subfloor: Install plywood subflooring in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations. Plywood sheets shall be gapped 1/8" to allow for expansion.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF HARDWOOD FLOORING

A. Fir Strip Flooring: 1. General: Install softwood flooring in strict accordance with the requirements and

recommendations of the Fir Flooring Manufacturers Association. 2. Apply one (1) layer of rosin sized building paper over entire surface of subflooring. 3. Lay finish wood flooring at right angles to sleepers or subflooring. 4. At the Installer’s option, based upon his professional judgment, metal spacers may be used

between strips at intervals to eliminate the possibility of cupping. 5. Provide vent slots at walls as detailed on the Drawings or required for the conditions of the

project. 3.05 SANDING

A. After flooring is laid, allow to sit for a minimum of two (2) weeks before sanding or finishing, unless otherwise approved by the Owner or Architect.

B. Sand floors only after all other finish trades in the area are completed. Sand all floors with a heavy power-driven sander. Hand scrape in corners and against walls as required. Use coarse, medium and fine sandpaper to produce a uniform, even and smooth surface. Finish sanding across the strip will not be permitted.

C. After sanding, sweep all wood surfaces, completely removing all dust and grit. D. Upon completion of sanding, floor shall be free from machine marks, chatter, grooves, dents and

other imperfections and shall be ready for finishing. 3.06 FINISHING OF FIR STRIP FLOORING

A. General: All floor finishing shall be done by the Wood Flooring Contractor. B. Prior to application of finish, sweep floor thoroughly with bristle brush to remove all dust from

cracks. Wipe floor clean with cloth that is tacky (by immersing in penetrating seal, wringing out and leaving to dry until tacky).

C. Finishing: Apply finish as follows: 1. First Coat: Specified penetrating sealer with stain added. 2. Second Coat: Specified penetrating sealer, clear. 3. Third Coat: Specified penetrating sealer, clear. 4. Burnish with steel wool between coats.

D. Cleaning and Protection: 1. After finishing, vacuum all hardwood floor areas and cover with heavy Kraft paper for

protection, to remain in place until final inspection and acceptance by the Owner. 3.07 PROTECTION



A. Installer shall advise the General Contractor of requirements for protection of the finished wood flooring until acceptance by the Owner, in addition to those specified above.

B. Restrict personnel and equipment traffic as necessary in the areas of finished wood flooring. C. Sand and refinish areas of finished wood flooring that are scratched, dented, abraded or otherwise

damaged by subsequent construction activities to the satisfaction of the Owner.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Prepare subflooring, or other substrates for installation of resilient flooring, including leveling of existing floor systems as required.

B. Furnish and install vinyl composition tile flooring as scheduled on the Drawings. C. Furnish and install resilient base. D. Furnish and install resilient transition strips, flooring reducers, carpet edges, stair nosings, and

other resilient accessories and trims. E. Furnish and install plywood underlayment for resilient sheet flooring, unless arranged for

otherwise. F. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Plywood underlayment. 2. Section 09310, Ceramic Tile: Metal edge transition trims.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM F 2034: Linoleum Sheet Flooring. 2. ASTM E 648-88: Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a

Radiant Energy Source. 3. ASTM E 662-83: Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid

Materials. 4. ASTM F 710-86: Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other Monolithic Floors to

Receive Resilient Flooring. 5. ASTM F 970-87: Test Method for Static Load Limit. 6. ASTM 492: Impact Insulation. 7. NFPA 253-1984: Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a

Radiant Energy Source. 8. NFPA 258-1989: Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid

Materials. 9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Materials shall be free of objectionable odors, blisters, cracks and other imperfections that will

reduce wearability and detract from the appearance of the completed installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, specifications, and installation instructions for each type of resilient flooring, base, and trim specified.

B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of material specified for the Architect's approval and color selection.



A. Deliver materials to the project site in the manufacturer's original unopened containers, clearly marked to indicate pattern, gage, lot number and sequence of manufacture.

B. Carefully handle all materials and store in original containers at no less than 70° F for at least 48 hours prior to installation.


A. Continuously heat spaces to receive resilient flooring materials to a temperature of 70° F for at least 48 hours prior to installation whenever project conditions are such that heating is required. Maintain 70° F temperature continuously during and after installation as recommended by the manufacturer, but for not less than 48 hours.

B. Maintain a temperature of not less than 55° F in areas where work has been completed. 1.06 MAINTENANCE STOCK

A. Contractor shall furnish Owner additional maintenance stock, minimum 1.0% of all sheet products or other materials, but not less than one (1) full case of each tile and base specified.

1.07 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship, as follows: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile: One (1) year.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING (VCT)

A. General: Marbleized or thru-chip tile, with pattern and color extending through total thickness of material, conforming to FS SS-T-312B, Type IV, Compositional.

1. Size: 12" x 12". 2. Thickness: 1/8" minimum. B. Pattern: Marbleized. C. Color: To be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. D. Approved Product: Standard Excelon, Imperial Texture by Armstrong as basis of design. E. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Des Plaines, IL, and represented locally in Englewood, CO, (303) 779-1104.

2. Azrock Industries Inc., San Antonio, TX, (512) 558-6400. 3. Flexco Company, Tuscumbia, AL, (800) 633-3151. 4. Kentile Floors Inc., Chicago, IL, (312) 523-6814. 5. Tajima represented in the U. S. by Architectural Floor Systems Inc., Arlington Heights, IL,

(312) 394-3944. 6. Vinyl Plastics Inc., Sheboygan, WI, (414) 458-4664. 7. Manufacturers furnishing products of same design, function, quality and performance are

acceptable. 2.02 RESILIENT BASE

A. General: Solid rubber base, Roppe as basis of design. 1. Thickness: 1/8" nominal.


2. Size: 4" high throughout x continuous rolls (+/- 120’ length). B. Surface Finish: Smooth. C. Style: Coved at resilient flooring and carpeting. D. Special Shapes: Premolded external corner sections, are required at all external corners. E. Color: To be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. F. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Roppe Rubber Corp., Fostoria, OH, (800) 537-9527. 2. Azrock Industries Inc., San Antonio, TX, (512) 558-6400. 3. Burke Flooring Products, San Jose, CA, (408) 297-3500. 4. Flexco Company, Tuscumbia, AL, (800) 633-3151. 5. Johnsonite Rubber Co., Middlefield, OH, (800) 637-4995. 6. Mercer Products Co., Orlando, FL, (800) 447-8442. 7. Manufacturers furnishing materials of same design, function, quality and performance are

acceptable. 2.03 RESILIENT TRANSITION STRIPS AND TRIMS

A. General: Furnish and install carpet edges, flooring reducers and transitions as recommended by manufacturer for project conditions and as required for material thickness.

B. Locations: 1. Transitions between wood flooring and ceramic tile flooring. 2. Other locations as indicated on the Drawings, as directed by the Architect, or as required

for a complete installation. C. Colors: To be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. D. Prefabricated Metal Transitions at Ceramic or Porcelain Tile: Specified in Section 09310 and/or

09320. E. Approved Manufacturers: By same manufacturer of resilient base specified above.

2.04 PRIMERS, ADHESIVES AND SEALERS

A. Waterproofer: Type recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for specific application. B. Sub-Floor Sealer: White premix latex mixed with water to produce cementitious paste. C. Linoleum Moisture Limiter: High-strength, non-toxic latex compound for encapsulating existing

adhesives and inhibiting moisture emissions from concrete slabs, Forbo Linoleum Moisture Limiter or equal.

D. Adhesives: Type recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for specific application. E. Leveling Compound: Type recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for specific application. F. Sealer: Type recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for specific application.

2.05 COLOR SCHEDULES

A. The Architect will prepare a marked-up floor plan or a color schedule for patterns of resilient flooring. Contractor shall furnish samples of all other related finish materials for coordination in preparation of the color schedule.

B. The Architect may select, allocate and vary colors for different patterns throughout the work, subject to the following: 1. A maximum of three (3) different colors will be used, using full tiles.



A. Installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which resilient flooring work is to be placed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Surface shall be smooth, level and at the required finish elevation without more than 1/8" in 10' variation from level or slopes shown. Existing conditions in excess of these tolerances are subject to approval by the Architect.

C. Install plywood underlayment as required and recommended by the resilient sheet flooring manufacturer.

D. Prior to installation of resilient flooring, broom clean or vacuum all surfaces to be covered and inspect the substrate or subfloor. Ensure that substrates are clean and free of foreign materials such as dust, paint, grease, oils, solvent, curing and hardening compounds, sealers, asphalt and old adhesive residue. Beginning work will indicate acceptance of substrate conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.

E. Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks and depressions in subflooring, underlayment, or concrete floor slabs.

F. Ensure that expansion and/or control joints in concrete floor slabs have been properly formed, with joint filler and sealants installed prior to the installation of resilient flooring.

G. Protect adjacent walls and other materials and finishes from damage during installation. H. Renovation/Remodeling Projects: Remove existing base materials and adhesives in rooms or spaces

to receive new resilient base, and leave wall surfaces prepared for new materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING

A. General: Install vinyl composition tile flooring in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations to produce finished flooring system true to lines and levels.

B. Ensure that substrate is clean. Spread adhesive evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire area of installation. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of flooring before initial set.

C. Lay tile symmetrically about centerline of space, with joints and seams parallel to building lines. Lay tile with directional pattern in same direction throughout room or area. Staggering of pattern is not acceptable. See Drawings for special pattern, if used.

D. Set flooring in place and press with a heavy roller to ensure full adhesion. E. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar,

unless otherwise indicated. F. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets and other appurtenances to produce tight

joints. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT BASE

A. General: Install resilient base and transitions in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Use appropriate tools for cutting and installation of the base and trim materials.

B. Fit joints tight and vertical. Use of pieces shorter than 24" is not allowed. C. Internal and External Corners:

1. Neatly miter cut internal corners. 2. Use only premolded sections for external corners. Exposed ends of base sections and

"birdsmouth" gaps at external corners will not be acceptable.



D. Install base on solid backing. Adhere tightly to wall and floor surfaces with full coating of adhesive. Avoid excess adhesive exposed on wall surface.

E. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. F. Install straight and level to variation of 1/8" over 10'. G. Renovation/Remodeling Projects: Install new resilient base throughout rooms or spaces as

scheduled on the Drawings, or where new base materials cannot be matched to existing to the satisfaction of the Architect.


A. General: Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 48 hours after installation. B. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace

damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to Substantial Completion. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. 1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaning methods recommended

by flooring and base manufacturer. 2. Sweep and vacuum flooring after installation. Do not wash floor until after time period

recommended by tile flooring manufacturer. 3. Damp mop flooring to remove marks and soiling.

C. Sealer: Seal floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, unless provided by others.

D. Linoleum Flooring Drying: Expose installed linoleum to either natural or artificial light to allow "drying room yellowing" (the film is a natural occurrence of the oxidation of the linseed oil in linoleum products) on installed linoleum flooring to disappear prior to initiating temporary protection procedures.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Prepare surfaces to receive opaque painted finishes as specified. B. Furnish materials and finish surfaces as indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section.

Generally, the scope of work shall include painting all exposed surfaces, whether specifically noted or not, and certain concealed surfaces, except where materials are prefinished or where intended to remain unfinished as described in paragraph 1.02 below.

C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard: Priming. 3. Section 09550, Wood Flooring. 4. Section 09905, Strippers and Paint Removers. 5. Section 09930, Transparent Finishes.

1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED

A. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, pipe spaces and duct shafts.

B. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require painting under this Section, except as may be so specified.

C. Materials, fixtures and equipment specified or supplied by the manufacturer as prefinished shall not be painted, unless otherwise indicated in the Schedule at the end of this Section. Materials supplied with factory-applied primer coats shall be field finished by this Section, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Do not paint moving parts of operating units, mechanical or electrical parts such as valve operators, linkages, sensing devices and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Priming or finishing of certain surfaces may be specified to be factory-applied or installer-performed under other Sections.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Finish work shall be performed only by qualified personnel employed by firms specializing in work

of this type, with a minimum of five (5) years successful experience in projects of similar size and complexity.

C. Materials shall be applied with appropriate equipment and tools as specified herein, or as required to provide the specified quality.

D. Coordination of Paint Finishes, Primers and Substrates: 1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used. 2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to be

used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrates.


3. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish materials to assure that compatible prime coats are used.

4. Provide barrier coats over non-compatible primers or remove the primer and reprime as required.

5. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems over prime coatings or substrates supplied under other Sections.

E. Certification: Supplier shall certify that all paint materials supplied contain no lead or other toxic substances.

F. Certification: Paint materials used in interior building applications shall be GreenGuard certified for indoor air quality.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications to show compliance with the specified requirements.

B. Materials List: Submit materials list of all items proposed to be provided under this Section. C. Samples: Painting Contractor shall prepare samples of each substrate and finish specified, as

directed by the Architect, including but not limited to: 1. Paint samples for typical interior plaster and gypsum wallboard. 2. Paint samples for interior and exterior steel sash metal windows. 3. Paint samples for exterior wood trellis and vigas (if painted).


A. Deliver paint materials in original, sealed and labeled containers bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color, designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing.

B. Provide adequate storage facilities to store materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45° F in a well-ventilated area.

C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. General: Follow manufacturer's written specifications and recommendations for product handling and application. Adhere to all applicable OSHA regulations related to product application and handling of removed paint, rinse water and other residual materials.

B. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes, unless moisture contents of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12%. 2. Interior Wood: 6%. 3. Exterior Wood: 15%.

C. Ensure that surface temperature or the surrounding air temperature is above 40° F before applying finishes. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints for interior work is 45° F; 50° F for exterior work.

D. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain temperatures above 45° F for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes.

E. Provide minimum 15 footcandles of lighting on surfaces to be finished. 1.07 PROTECTION

A. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection.

B. Furnish sufficient dropcloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from soiling surfaces not being painted and, in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation area.


C. Place cotton cloths and any material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed, metal containers and remove daily from the site.

D. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to painting operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each area. Do not use solvents to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish.


A. Contractor shall furnish Owner additional maintenance stock of not less than one (1) gallon of each color of finish coating, except that one (1) gallon shall be adequate for all accent and trim colors.

B. Containers are to be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for identification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH MATERIALS

A. Paints, Enamels and Fillers: Type and brand scheduled herein, ready-mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Pigments fully ground maintaining a soft paste consistency, capable of readily and uniformly being dispersed to a complete homogeneous mixture. Paints shall have good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 1. Paint materials shall contain no lead or other toxic substances. Refer to paragraph 1.03.C. 2. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that

comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: a. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. b. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. c. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0% by

weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

d. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: 1) Acrolein 14) Formaldehyde 2) Acrylonitrile 15) Hexavalent chromium 3) Antimony 16) Isophorone 4) Benzene 17) Lead 5) Butyl benzyl phthalate 18) Mercury 6) Cadmium 19) Methyl ethyl ketone 7) Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate 20) Methyl isobutyl ketone 8) Di-n-butyl phthalate 21) Methylene chloride 9) Di-n-octyl phthalate 22) Naphthalene 10) 1,2-dichlorobenzene 23) Toluene (methylbenzene) 11) Diethyl phthalate 24) 1,1,1-trichloroethane 12) Dimethyl phthalate 25) Vinyl chloride 13) Ethylbenzene

B. Paint Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials not specifically

indicated herein but required to achieve the finishes specified, of high quality and approved manufacturer.

C. Color(s) as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full color selection, unless otherwise indicated. Painter shall prepare samples for UCCS's and/or the Architect's approval of each paint color selected. Remake samples until approved, at no additional cost to UCCS.

D. Approved Manufacturers: Use the same brand throughout the project for each type of paint


material specified: 1. Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Series (for exterior) and ProGreen 200 Low-VOC Series (for

interior), as basis of design. 2. Paint: Pittsburgh, Diamond Vogel, ICI Dulux, Fuller O'Brien, Benjamin Moore, Kelly Moore,

Kwal-Howell and Sophir Morris. Using product lines of same quality, function and performance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.

3. Stain, varnish and other transparent finishes: Refer to Section 09930. 4. Strippers and Paint Removers: Refer to Section 09905.

2.02 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT

A. For application of the specified paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for application of the particular paint by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect, except as limited by paragraph 2.02.C.

B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually compatible with the material to be applied and that integrity of the finish will not be jeopardized by use of this equipment.

C. Contractor shall use the following application equipment for the specific condition listed, unless otherwise approved: 1. Steel Sash Windows and Frames: Spray application only. Brushing or rolling is not

permitted. 2. Other areas indicated in paragraph 3.03.


A. The Architect will prepare marked-up elevations or a color schedule with samples for guidance in painting. Contractor shall furnish samples of all other related finish materials for coordination in preparation of the color schedule.

B. The Architect may select, allocate and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the work, subject to the following: 1. Exterior Work: A maximum of two (2) different colors will be used, plus variations for

trim, doors, miscellaneous work and metal work. 2. Interior Work: A maximum of five (5) different pigmented colors will be used, plus

variations for trim and wall surfaces and wainscots. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Subcontractor shall thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted or finished prior to commencing work. Notify the Architect of any condition that may potentially affect proper application and final appearance. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the painting subcontractor. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of surfaces.

3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. General: All preparatory work shall be subject to evaluation and acceptance by the Architect. Painting subcontractor will accept responsibility for the preparation of all surfaces, as specified herein, prior to finishing.

B. Cleaning of all surfaces shall be done with non-toxic, biodegradable products that comply with the California Code of Regulations, Title 17, Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning products.

C. Ensure that the Contractor has corrected defects in all surfaces which may adversely affect work of


this Section, including but not limited to: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Steel sash windows and frames. 3. Gypsum wallboard surfaces and texturing. 4. Plaster surfaces and finishing.

D. Existing Wood Surfaces: Scrape all existing wood trellis members, vigas, trims and miscellaneous items to remove layer(s) of existing paint. Sand all work after scraping. Fill knots, imperfections, cracks and nail holes after primer has dried and resand to a smooth finish.

E. New Wood Surfaces: Wipe dust and grit from hardwood and softwood items and millwork prior to priming. Spot coat knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections with sealer. Fill knots, imperfections, nail holes and cracks after primer has dried and sand smooth. Back-prime interior and exterior woodwork. 1. Back-prime interior woodwork which is to receive paint of enamel finish with enamel

undercoat paint. 2. Back-prime exterior wood with manufacturer's recommended primer.

F. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse well with clean water and allow the surface to dry completely.

G. Remove surface contamination and oils from galvanized surfaces and wash with solvent. Apply a coat of etching-type primer.

H. Remove grease, rust, scale, dirt and dust from steel, ferrous metal and iron surfaces. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing, sandblasting or any other necessary method. 1. Clean unprimed surfaces by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid

solution, ensuring that weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime surfaces as required.

2. Sand and scrape shop-primed surfaces to remove loose primer and rust. Feather out edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent and prime surfaces as required.

3. Back-prime structural steel and ferrous metal surfaces to be in contact with concrete, unless furnished by other Sections.

4. Ensure that excess weld slag or flux deposits are removed, and that all exposed welds are ground or sanded to specified appearance.

I. Priming of gypsum wallboard prior to application of texturing is specified in Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard. No further priming is required for the drywall surfaces by this Section, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.

J. Refer to Section 09930, Transparent Finishes, for preparation of other materials and surfaces prior to staining or application of transparent finishes.

K. Remove all hardware from doors before painting. Masking of hardware is unacceptable. L. Schedule painting prior to installation of prefinished materials, specialties, furnishings and fixtures

to the extent possible, including but not limited to: 1. Toilet fixtures and accessories. 2. Finish hardware. 3. Cabinetry and casework. 4. Surface-mounted mechanical and electrical devices such as thermostats, prefinished grilles

and diffusers, switchplates and outlet cover plates, etc. 3.03 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply finish materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Ensure that surfaces have been properly prepared and primed prior to application of finish coats.

B. Apply each coat at the proper consistency. Allow each coat of finish to dry before the following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer. Sand lightly between coats to achieve the required finish.


C. Brush Applications: 1. Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film. 2. Finish coats shall be finished by roping the paint, moving from wet to dry areas. 3. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness and other surface

imperfections will not be acceptable. D. Spray Applications:

1. Except as specified in paragraph 2.02 or as specifically otherwise approved by UCCS and/or the Architect, confine spray application to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brush work would be inferior.

2. Gypsum wallboard and interior plaster walls, ceilings and soffits shall be finished by spray application, then back-rolled with roller equipment to result in specified mil thickness, moving from wet to dry areas.

3. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding equivalent of brush coats.

4. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two (2) coats in one (1) pass.

E. For completed work, match the approved samples as to texture, color and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with the specified requirements.

3.04 PAINTING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: Painting of exposed equipment, louvers, ductwork, piping, conduits, etc. shall be work of this Section, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Paint all ductwork, piping, conduit and devices to be exposed to view in the completed

project, unless prefinished or in concealed areas as defined in paragraph 1.02. 2. Coordinate extent of field finishing of mechanical and electrical equipment with the

Architect as necessary. 3. Architect retains the right to require prefinished diffusers, grilles and other mechanical or

electrical devices to be field finished, whether or not specifically called for. 4. Prime and paint insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bare ducts,

hangers, brackets, collars and supports in exposed locations, except where items are plated or covered with a prefinished coating, or where located in mechanical chase spaces. Finish paint primed equipment to color selected.

B. Remove grilles, covers and access panels for mechanical and electrical systems from location and paint separately.

C. Paint face(s) and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them. 1. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted over

or spattered. D. Do not paint gas meters, electric meters and similar exterior equipment provided by outside utility

providers, if not permitted by those agencies. Coordinate requirements with the appropriate Subcontractor prior to painting. 1. Exposed gas piping leading to the gas meters shall be painted. 2. Exterior surface-mounted meter centers, disconnects, CT cabinets, exposed conduit and

similar equipment shall be painted, where not specifically excluded above. 3. Interior panelboard cabinet frames and doors shall not be painted, unless specified

elsewhere.


3.05 PAINTING ROOFTOP ACCESSORIES

A. Paint exposed roof penetrations, flues, roof vents, exhaust vent caps, pipe vents, etc., where located on sloped roofs or otherwise exposed to view, unless prefinished or otherwise indicated.

B. Paint housings of rooftop mechanical equipment when not prefinished, as directed by the Architect. 1. Rooftop mechanical equipment, exhaust fan hoods, pipe vents and other roof penetrations

need not be painted where concealed from view by parapet walls at least 2'-0" high or other obstructions, as determined by the Architect. The Architect retains the right to require these items to be painted, if in his sole opinion, they are exposed to view.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Promptly remove paint from adjacent materials or surfaces as work proceeds where spilled, splashed or splattered.

B. Cleaning of all surfaces shall be done with non-toxic, biodegradable products that comly with the California Code of Regulations, Title 17, Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning products.

C. During progress of work, keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.

D. Place cotton cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from the site.

E. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3.07 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Painted finishes shall be subject to evaluation and approval to the satisfaction of the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: 1. Consistency and smoothness of surface. 2. Coverage and mil thickness. 3. Color match between adjacent areas. 4. Compliance with approved sample(s). 5. Renovation Projects: Satisfactory match to adjacent materials or surfaces, where entire

wall or ceiling area is not scheduled to receive new finish. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 EXTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE

NOTE: MWF indicates minimum wet film thickness which is a per coat measurement in mils thickness. Systems are based on Sherwin-Williams (S-W) or as noted.

A. Exterior Hollow Metal or Ferrous Metal Surfaces:

1. Location: Steel sash windows and miscellaneous metal work. 2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss, MWF 4.4 mils. 4. Product: S-W Industrial Enamel. 5. Color(s): To be selected.

B. Exterior Wood Surfaces (Latex): 1. Location: Exterior wood siding, wood fascias and trim, hardboard siding, hardboard fascias

and trim. 2. Primer: Preprimed by manufacturer. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, satin, MWF 4.0 mils. 4. Product: S-W A-100 Satin Latex House and Trim.



5. Color(s): To be selected. C. Metal Boxes, Conduits and Mechanical Equipment:

1. Location: As shown on the Drawings or required by project conditions. 2. Primer: One (1) coat, factory primed. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, MWF 3.6 mils where not factory finished. 4. Product: S-W A-100 Satin Latex House and Trim. 5. Color: To match adjacent surfaces.

D. Exterior Galvanized Surfaces: 1. Location: Galvanized metal flashings, roof vents and flues, where exposed to view. 2. Primer: One (1) coat galvanized steel primer, MWF 3.6 mils. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd-resin enamel, semi-gloss, MWF 4.4 mils. 4. Product: S-W Industrial Enamel. 5. Color: To match adjacent surfaces, or as selected.

E. Refer to Section 09930 for transparent finishes. F. Exterior Stucco Systems: Color added integrally by manufacturer/installer.

4.02 INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE

A. Interior Wood Surfaces, Opaque Finish (Latex):

1. Location: ___________________________________________________________. 2. Primer: PrepRite Classic Latex Primer, MWF 1.6 mils. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, satin, MWF 1.6 mils per coat. 4. Product: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel. 5. Color(s): To be selected.

B. Interior Hollow Metal or Ferrous Metal Surfaces: 1. Location: Steel sash windows and miscellaneous metal work. 2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss, MWF 4.4 mils. 4. Product: S-W ProGreen 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. 5. Color(s): To be selected.

C. Interior Gypsum Wallboard and Plaster Surfaces: 1. Location: Walls, ceilings and soffits as scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Primer: Vinyl emulsion sealer, flat, MWF 3.6 mils. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, satin, MWF 3.6 mils per coat. 4. Product: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex, Satin Latex. 5. Color(s): To be selected.

D. Refer to Section 09930 for transparent finishes. E. Cabinetwork: All surfaces prefinished by manufacturer. F. Concrete Floors: Finishes specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. G. Fire Protection Specialties: Prefinished by manufacturer. H. Toilet Accessories: Prefinished by manufacturer. I. Door and Cabinet Hardware: Prefinished by manufacturer. J. Interior Signage: Prefinished by the manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09905 STRIPPERS AND PAINT REMOVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive paint strippers. B. Protect adjacent materials, fixtures and equipment. C. Furnish and apply paint strippers for steel sash window frames, operable and fixed sashes and

miscellaneous trims, to the next "sound" layer of existing paint. Window frames shall be stripped in place.

D. Remove excess stripping materials and rinse windows. E. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 08515, Steel Sash Window Repair. 3. Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard: Priming. 4. Section 09900, Painting. 5. Section 09930, Transparent Finishes.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Stripping work shall be performed only by qualified personnel employed by firms specializing in

work of this type, with a minimum of five (5) years successful experience in projects of similar size and complexity.

C. Materials shall be applied with appropriate equipment and tools as specified herein, or as recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Certification: Supplier shall certify that all stripping materials supplied contain no lead or other toxic substances.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature, specifications, application instructions and MSDS reports to show compliance with the specified requirements.

B. Samples: Contractor shall prepare sample area, minimum 4'-0" x 4'-0", in an inconspicuous location directed by the Owner and Architect, to demonstrate the application of the specified strippers on existing steel sash windows, and other substrates as specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. 1. Contractor shall not continue work until UCCS's representative has accepted sample

area(s). 2. Clean and rinse sample area, and let dry thoroughly prior to requesting approval. Reapply

strippers as necessary to meet specified results. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver stripping materials in original, sealed and labeled containers bearing manufacturer's name, type of product, and instructions for mixing and application.


B. Provide adequate storage facilities to store materials at minimum ambient temperature of 50° F in a well ventilated area.

C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. D. Applicators shall wear protective gloves and safety glasses while handling and applying strippers. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. General: Follow manufacturer's written specifications and recommendations for product handling and application. Adhere to all applicable OSHA regulations related to product handling and application, and handling of removed paint, rinse water and other residual materials.

B. Ensure that surface temperature or the surrounding air temperature is above 50° F before applying strippers. Consult manufacturer if stripping must be done at temperatures below the minimum.

C. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain temperatures above 50° F for 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after application.

D. Interior Applications: Provide minimum 15 footcandles of lighting on surfaces to be stripped. Maintain adequate ventilation in work area. Do not use products in basements or other unventilated areas.

1.06 PROTECTION

A. Test sample area to ensure that stripping products will not damage the existing steel substrates. B. Adequately protect adjacent surfaces from strippers and related damage. Repair damage as a

result of inadequate or unsuitable protection. C. Furnish sufficient dropcloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent strippers from soiling

surfaces not being treated, or contaminating soil adjacent to the building. D. Take necessary precautions to prevent rinse and washdown water, removed paint and other

residual materials from entering off-site streams and other natural waterways adjacent to the site. E. Place cotton cloths and any material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed, metal containers

and remove daily from the site. F. Remove electrical lighting fixtures, finish hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to stripping

operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each area. Do not use solvents to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRIPPING MATERIALS

A. Paint Strippers and Removers: Type and brand scheduled herein or as recommended by the applicator or manufacturer for the specific types of paint, asphaltic dampproofing or other materials to be removed. Contractor shall apply any or all of these products as necessary to fully remove all paint materials, to the satisfaction of UCCS and the Architect. 1. All products used shall be non-abrasive. 2. All products used shall be environmentally safe.

B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Cathedral Stone S-303 Architectural Paint Stripper by Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.,

Hanover, MD, (800) 684-0901. 2. Peel Away 1 or 7, by Dumond Chemicals, Inc., New York, NY, (212) 869-6350. 3. Strypeeze Biodegradable by The Savogran Co., Norwood, MA, (800) 225-9872. 4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality and performance are

acceptable.



A. For application of the specified stripper, use only such equipment as is recommended for application by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect.


A. Subcontractor shall thoroughly examine painted steel sash windows, frames and trims scheduled to be stripped prior to commencing work. Notify the Architect of any condition that may potentially affect proper application and final appearance. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of substrates.

B. Advise UCCS in writing of any applicable OSHA or other regulations that will affect the handling and disposal of the existing stripped paint, including potential lead-based paint.

C. Prepare surfaces prior to application of strippers as required by the manufacturer. D. Remove light fixtures and other items prior to beginning work, as specified in paragraph 1.06.

Protect other adjacent materials, fixtures and equipment to remain in place during stripping work. 1. Remove all finish hardware from windows before stripping. Masking of hardware is

unacceptable. E. Design intent is to remove paint on steel surfaces down to the next intact, "sound" layer. 3.02 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply stripping materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Ensure that surfaces have been properly prepared prior to application.

B. Apply each coat at the proper consistency. Allow each coat to set before the following coat is applied, as directed by the manufacturer.

C. Thoroughly rinse all stripper solution and loosened paint materials between each coat, or series of coats, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Also refer to paragraph 3.04 below.

D. Paper-Backed Strip Remover: Apply strip material as directed by the manufacturer; however, strips may need to be left in place considerably longer than the manufacturer's instructions indicate to be effective. Verify that brick and stone will not be damaged or discolored by leaving the stripper in place for extended periods of time.

E. Window Sashes, Frames and Casings: Stripping of removable, operable sashes may be performed offsite at the subcontractor's controlled facility. Window frames and fixed units shall be stripped in place. Contractor to propose method(s) of paint removal to the Architect for comment prior to beginning work.

3.03 RESIDUE REMOVAL

A. General: Comply with all OSHA and other agency regulations applicable to this work. 1. Contact the City of Colorado Springs Wastewater Department for other specific

requirements. B. If required, Contractor shall collect all rinse and washdown water, removed paint and other

residual materials and dispose of offsite in a legal landfill with facilities for handling these materials.

C. Do not allow rinse and washdown water, removed paint and other residual materials to be flushed into the City's stormwater drainage system. Allow materials to enter sanitary sewer system only if permitted by the City.

3.04 CLEANING



A. General: Refer to appropriate Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for Rehabilitation of Historic

Buildings, “Preservation Briefs”, for recommended cleaning methods for steel sash windows. B. Promptly remove stripping materials from adjacent materials or surfaces as work proceeds where

spilled, splashed or splattered. Touch up painted surfaces as required to their original condition, unless scheduled for new finishes.

C. During progress of work, keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.

D. Place cotton cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from the site.

E. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09930 TRANSPARENT FINISHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Prepare surfaces to receive transparent finishes as specified. B. Finish surfaces as indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section. C. Thoroughly clean all existing peeled pole log beams, ceiling decking and other softwood materials

scheduled to be refinished, unless arranged for otherwise. D. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 08210, Wood Doors. 3. Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard: Priming. 4. Section 09550, Wood Flooring. 5. Section 09900, Painting.

1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED

A. Unless otherwise indicated, finishing is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces and duct shafts.

B. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finishing under this Section, except as may be so specified.

C. Materials, fixtures and equipment specified or supplied by the manufacturer as prefinished shall not be finished under this Section.

D. Priming or finishing of certain surfaces may be specified to be factory-applied or installer-performed under other Sections.



jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Finish work shall be performed only by qualified personnel employed by firms specializing in work

of this type, with a minimum of five (5) years successful experience in projects of similar size and complexity.

C. Materials shall be supplied with appropriate application equipment and tools as specified herein, or as required to provide the specified quality.

D. Coordination of Transparent Finishes, Primers and Substrates: 1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used. 2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to be

used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrates. 3. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish materials to

assure that compatible prime coats are used. 4. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating

systems over prime coatings or substrates supplied under other Sections. E. Certification: Supplier shall certify that all finish materials supplied contain no lead or other toxic

substances. 1.04 SUBMITTALS


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications to show compliance

with the specified requirements. B. Materials List: Submit materials list of all items proposed to be provided under this Section. C. Samples: Finish Contractor shall prepare samples of each substrate, stain (if applicable) and finish

specified, as directed by the Architect, including but not limited to: 1. Transparent finish samples for interior softwood trim and interior doors. 2. Transparent finish samples for interior or exterior exposed wood trellis beams, vigas and

ceiling decking.


A. Deliver finish materials in original, sealed and labeled containers bearing manufacturer's name, type of stain or finish, brand name, color, designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing.

B. Provide adequate storage facilities to store materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45° F in a well-ventilated area.

C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes, unless moisture contents of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Interior Wood: 6%. 2. Exterior Wood: 15%.

B. Ensure that surface temperature or the surrounding air temperature is above 40° F before applying finishes. Minimum application temperature for varnish and polyurethane finishes is 65° F.

C. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain temperatures above 45° F for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes.

D. Provide minimum 15 footcandles of lighting on surfaces to be finished. 1.07 PROTECTION

A. Adequately protect other surfaces from finish materials. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection.

B. Furnish sufficient dropcloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from soiling surfaces not being finished and, in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation area.

C. Place cotton cloths and any material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed, metal containers and remove daily from the site.

D. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to finishing operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each area. Do not use solvents to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish.

E. Provide protective clothing, eyewear, etc., as necessary for workers handling solvents and other flammable or hazardous materials.


A. Contractor shall furnish Owner additional maintenance stock of not less than three (3) gallons of each type and color of finish coating.

B. Containers are to be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for identification.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH MATERIALS

A. Varnishes, Polyurethanes, Stains and Fillers: Type and brand scheduled herein, ready-mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Pigments fully ground maintaining an adequate consistency, capable of readily and uniformly being dispersed to a complete homogeneous mixture. Finishes shall have good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 1. Finish materials shall contain no lead or other toxic substances. Refer to paragraph 1.03.c. 2. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Stains, Varnishes and Fillers: Provide

products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions. Also refer to Section 01050. These requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: a. Varnish: VOC content of not more than 350 g/L. b. Lacquer: VOC content of not more than 550 g/L. c. Stains: VOC content of not more than 250 g/L. d. Shellac: VOC content of not more than 730 g/L.

B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials not specifically indicated herein but required to achieve the finishes specified, of high quality and approved manufacturer.

C. Color(s) as selected by UCCS and the Architect from manufacturer's full color selection, unless otherwise indicated. Painter shall prepare samples for the Architect's approval of each stain color selected. Remake samples until approved, at no additional cost to UCCS.

D. Approved Manufacturers: Use the same brand throughout the project for each type of varnish, stain or transparent finish material specified: 1. Stain: Olympic, Sherwin-Williams, Penofin, Cabot's, Okon or Devoe. Using product lines of

same quality, function and performance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.

2. Solid Body Stain: Cabot’s PRO.V.T. 0800 Series System, as basis of design, with 12-year warranty for shop finished Bid Alternate. Base Bid shall be field finished. Olympic, Sherwin-Williams, Penofin or Okon are approved, provided all aspects of the specifications and color matches are available. Other manufacturers may be approved by the Architect prior to bidding.

3. Clear Polyacrylic Blend Finish: Environment Friendly by General Finish or approved equal. 4. Clear Polyurethane Sealer: Watco or as recommended by Manufacturer. 5. Varnish: Match tint of existing, as applicable. 6. Paint: Refer to Section 09900.


A. For application of the specified finish, use only such equipment as is recommended for application of the particular paint by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect, except as limited by paragraph 2.02.C.

B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually compatible with the material to be applied and that integrity of the finish will not be jeopardized by use of this equipment.

C. Contractor shall use the following application equipment for the specific condition listed, unless otherwise approved: 1. Interior doors and trim: Brush or hand wiped only, as appropriate. Spraying is not

permitted. 2. Other areas indicated in paragraph 3.03.



A. The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance in finishing. Contractor shall

furnish samples of all other related finish materials for coordination in preparation of the color schedule.

B. The Architect may select, allocate and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the work, subject to the following: 1. Exterior Work: A maximum of two (2) different pigmented stains will be used. 2. Interior Work: A maximum of four (4) different pigmented stains will be used.


A. Subcontractor shall thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencing work. Notify the Architect of any condition that may potentially affect proper application and final appearance. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the painting subcontractor. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of surfaces.

3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. Ensure that the Contractor has corrected defects in all surfaces which may adversely affect work of this Section, including but not limited to: 1. Interior softwood doors, trim and other finish carpentry items. 2. Casework and cabinetwork. 3. Exposed wood trellis beams, vigas and interior ceiling decking.

B. Vacuum and wipe dust and grit from existing pole beams and ceiling decking, and other softwood items and millwork prior to finishing. Spot coat knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections with sealer. Fill knots, imperfections, nail holes and cracks after stain has dried and sand smooth. Back-prime interior and exterior woodwork. 3. Back-prime interior woodwork which is to receive stain and/or clear finish with gloss

varnish reduced 25% with mineral spirits. 4. Back-prime exterior wood with manufacturer's recommended primer.

C. Shop Finished Wood Materials: Prime ends of shop finished wood siding and trims prior to installation.

D. Refer to Section 09900, Painting, for preparation of other materials and surfaces prior to painting. E. Remove all hardware from doors before finishing. Masking of hardware is unacceptable. F. Schedule finishing prior to installation of prefinished materials, specialties, furnishings and fixtures

to the extent possible, including but not limited to: 1. Toilet accessories. 2. Door and cabinet finish hardware. 3. Cabinetry and casework. 4. Surface-mounted mechanical and electrical devices such as thermostats, prefinished grilles

and diffusers, switchplates and outlet cover plates, etc. 3.03 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply finish materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

B. Apply each coat at the proper consistency. Allow each coat of finish to dry before the following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer. Sand lightly between coats to achieve the required finish.

C. Where clear finishes are required, ensure that tint fillers match wood. Work fillers well into the grain before set. Wipe excess from the surface.


D. Brush Applications: 1. Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film. 2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness and other surface

imperfections will not be acceptable. E. For completed work, match the approved samples as to texture, color and coverage. Remove or

refinish work not in compliance with the specified requirements. 3.04 CLEANING

A. Promptly remove finishes from adjacent materials or surfaces as work proceeds where spilled, splashed or splattered.

B. During progress of work, keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.

C. Place cotton cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from the site.

D. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3.05 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Transparent finishes shall be subject to evaluation and approval to the satisfaction of the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: 1. Consistency of stain application, if applicable. 2. Consistency and smoothness of surface. 3. Coverage. 4. Color and sheen match between adjacent areas. 5. Compliance with approved sample(s). 6. Renovation Projects: Satisfactory match of tint and sheen to adjacent materials or

surfaces. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 EXTERIOR FINISHING SCHEDULE

A. Exterior Wood Surfaces (Stained): 1. Location: Exterior wood trellis beams, posts, vigas, decorative details and miscellaneous

trim. 2. Primer: As recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Finish: One (1) coat semi-transparent water-repellent natural linseed oil stain. 4. Sealant: Integral with finish. 5. Product: Olympic Weather Screen Semi-Transparent Water-Repellent Oil Stain. 6. Color: To be selected.

B. Refer to Section 09900 for painted finishes. 4.02 INTERIOR FINISHING SCHEDULE

A. Interior Wood Surfaces, Transparent Finish: 1. Location: New interior doors (where not specified as factory finished), and existing wood

peeled pole log beams and ceiling decking, shelving and miscellaneous standing and running trim.

2. Primer: One (1) coat polyacrylic blend, satin finish. 3. Stain: One (1) coat, satin finish. 4. Finish: Two (2) coats polyacrylic blend, satin finish, clear. 5. Product: Environment Friendly by General Finish.



6. Color(s): Stain or tint color to be selected. Beams and ceiling deck will have different tints, to match existing.

B. Refer to Section 09900 for painted finishes. C. Interior Wood Doors: Stain and finish. D. Door and Cabinet Hardware: Prefinished by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10440

INTERIOR SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish surface-mounted engraved and raised-letter metal signage as scheduled on the Drawings. B. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 08700, Finish Hardware: Miscellaneous door signage, in addition to that specified

in this Section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards,

codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Interior signage system(s) shall be fabricated by a manufacturer with

minimum five (5) years successful experience in projects of similar size and complexity. C. Signage systems shall comply with all applicable requirements of current ANSI 117.1 and the

Americans with Disabilities Act, 1990, including signage size, lettering style, symbols, raised Braille and signage location, placement and mounting heights.

D. Manufacturer/Installer shall certify that interior signage components to be installed in exterior locations (i.e., handicapped accessible entry signage) are of materials and tamper-proof attachments consistent with the anticipated weather exposure.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and schedule of required signage, indicating type, size, style and method of installation. 1. Schedule shall illustrate each required sign for size, style and copy, and indicate quantity

required for each. B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full line of standard finishes for selection by the

Architect. Submit one (1) full-size sample of representative signage system. Sample will be returned upon approval.


A. Package separately or in like groups of names, labeled as to the names enclosed. Include installation template, hardware or adhesives and installation instructions.

1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer’s standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and

workmanship.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENGRAVED CAST METAL SIGNAGE SYSTEMS

A. Type: Cast bronze for interior signage systems, with manufacturer’s standard engraving through finish to expose core, and 1/32" raised characters. All signage shall include raised Grade 2 Braille symbols.

B. Mounting: Screw or other tamper-proof mounting system recommended by the fabricator/installer. C. Size: 2" high x 4" long, except name and symbol signage shall be 6" high x 6" long. Supplier to

verify that sizes specified will adequately accept specified messages and notify Owner of any discrepancy.

D. Letter Size: 7/8" with a 60% height to width ratio. E. Copy Position: Center/Center. F. Letter Spacing: Normal. G. Capitalization: All caps. H. Letter Style: Helvetica. I. Copy: As scheduled at the end of this Section, or on the Drawings. Men’s and women’s restrooms

shall have "MEN" and "WOMEN" names as well as symbols. J. Symbols: As required by standards of the Americans with Disabilities Act.

1. All accessible building entries shall have handicapped accessibility symbol. 2. All accessible restrooms shall have handicapped accessibility symbol.

K. Edges: Beveled. L. Plaque Finish Background: Smooth. M. Frames: None. N. Finish(es): As selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s standard finish selections. O. Approved Signage Style and Fabricators:

1. Metallic Arts, Spokane Valley, WA, (800) 541-3200. 2. ASI Sign Systems, Inc., Dallas, TX, (800) 274-7732. 3. ABC Sign Works Inc., Fort Collins, CO, (970) 223-9211. 4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, design, appearance, quality and

performance are acceptable. 5. Custom signage companies offering design services and fabrication capabilities meeting the

design intent of this Section are acceptable upon approval by the Architect prior to bidding.


A. Installer shall inspect the surfaces, substrates and conditions under which the signage is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions which will prevent the successful installation of the signage.

B. Fabricator shall acquire digital graphics for UCCS's logo or other signage graphics from the Owner prior to submittal of signage schedule and shop drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signage after doors or walls are painted and finished, in locations scheduled on the Drawings or specified herein, using adhesives and/or tamperproof attachments as scheduled.

B. Install centered, level and in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Install signage in locations and mounting heights as required by the Americans with Disabilities Act,

1990. Consult with the Architect as required for exact placement. 1. Signage shall be mounted at 54" above finished floor to the center of the sign.



2. Signage shall be mounted on wall surfaces adjacent to the latch side of single doors, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Exterior locations shall be installed with tamperproof screws or other approved fasteners. D. Clean, polish and remove excess adhesive.

PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 SCHEDULE OF INTERIOR SIGNAGE

A. Interior signage shall be installed at the following doors/rooms, mounted in locations and at heights described in paragraph 3.02: 1. All handicapped accessible building entries, as shown on the Drawings: Handicapped

accessibility symbol. 2. All handicapped accessible restrooms to read: "RESTROOM" (for unisex facilities), with

handicapped accessibility symbol. 3. Office #9 to read: "OFFICE". 4. Restroom directional sign, located as shown on the Drawings, to read: "RESTROOM", with

directional arrow ↑ .

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish key access box for use by the local fire department, complete with mounting hardware. B. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Division 16, Electrical: Fire alarm system.

1.02 WORK FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS

A. UCCS shall furnish and install portable fire extinguishers and surface-mounted wall brackets, if desired.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. UL Labels: Provide units that have been approved and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. 2. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. All fire protection specialties shall be furnished by one (1) manufacturer throughout the project.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data on all fire protection accessories and specialties for approval by the Architect.

1.05 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 KEY ACCESS BOX

A. Furnish surface-mounted, heavy-duty key access box, complete with all mounting hardware, as required by the governing fire authority, located as shown on the Drawings.

1. Series 3200 Knox-Box, manufactured by the Knox Company, Newport Beach, CA, (714) 650-2885, or equal approved by the agency with jurisdiction.

B. Quantity: One (1). C. UCCS shall furnish a facility master key for use by the fire department.




A. Installer shall examine the substrates and conditions under which the fire protection specialties are to be installed and notify the Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire protection accessories where shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Securely fasten all components in position, square and plumb, in accordance with recognized industry practices.

B. Install key access box in location(s) as shown on the Drawings and at mounting height to comply with requirements of the governing fire department: 1. Knox-Box: 6'-0" to centerline of access door, or as required by the governing fire authority.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish stainless steel, commercial quality toilet accessories and associated hardware. B. Furnish rough-in frames supplied to other Sections. C. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise. D. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Framing of rough openings and blocking. 3. Section 08800, Glazing: Mirrors. 4. Section 09310, Ceramic Tile.


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A167: Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 2. ASTM A366: Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets, Commercial Quality. 3. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any

jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Accessory lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer throughout the project.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product list and data sheets indicating materials, components, finishes and method of installation.


A. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them.

B. Pack accessories individually in a manner to protect accessory and its finish. C. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces and work from damage during installation of the

work of this Section. 1.05 WARRANTIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty for all accessories covering defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

A. Type: Surface-mounted or semi-recessed construction, commercial quality accessories, as scheduled in paragraph 2.02.

B. Stainless Steel or Metal Components:


1. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366, cold-rolled stretcher leveled, 1.25 oz./sq. ft. galvanized coating. 2. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, commercial grade, 22-gage. 3. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, commercial grade, seamless welded. 4. Brass: Solid brass alloy.

C. Anchorage and Attachment Devices: 1. Adhesive: Epoxy-type contact cement. 2. Fasteners, Screws and Bolts: Hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel. 3. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead or rubber as recommended by manufacturer for component

and substrate. 4. Anchor Plates: Steel anchor plates as recommended by manufacturer for secure

installation. D. Fabrication:

1. Weld and grind smooth all joints of fabricated components. 2. Form exposed surfaces from one (1) sheet of stock, free of joints. 3. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes. 4. Form surfaces flat and without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or

dents. 5. Back-prime components where accessories will be in contact with dissimilar building

finishes to prevent electrolysis. 6. Hot-dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. 7. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.

E. Keying: Key all new accessories together. F. Finishes:

1. Chrome/Nickel Plating: Dark or oil rubbed bronze. 2. Stainless Steel: Dark or oil rubbed bronze.

G. Mounting: Concealed-screw mounting, unless otherwise indicated. Surface-mounted type, unless scheduled as semi-recessed.

H. Approved Manufacturers: 1. General: Accessory lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer throughout

the project, at least to the extent scheduled. Deviations from consistency of one manufacturer are only acceptable when available designs are not satisfactory.

2. Commercial Accessories: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., N. Hollywood, CA, (818) 982-9600, and represented locally in Denver, CO, (303) 429-0133, as basis of design.

3. Bradley Corporation, Menomonee Falls, WI, (414) 354-0100. 4. American Specialties, Inc., Yonkers, NY, (914) 476-9000. 5. A&J Washroom Accessories, New Windsor, NY, (914) 562-3332. 6. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (Gamco), Durant, OK, (800) 451-5766. 7. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance, design and appearance

are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. 2.02 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES NOTE: Owner to provide all toilet accessories for installation by the General Contractor. Schedule shown is

for reference only.

A. Grab Bars, as basis of design: 1. 3-Piece Horizontal and Vertical at HC Accessible Toilet Compartments: Bobrick B-6206 x

18", 36" and 42" to 48" lengths with peened gripping surfaces, concealed mounting, 1-1/2" diameter.

B. Toilet Paper Dispensers/Holders, as basis of design: 1. Single-Roll Toilet Paper Holder: Bobrick B-685 single-roll surface-mounted holder with

concealed mounting. C. Paper Towel Dispensers/Waste Receptacles, as basis of design:

1. Paper Towel Dispensers: Bobrick B-262 surface-mounted dispensers with concealed


mounting. D. Soap Dispensers, as basis of design:

1. Liquid Soap Type: Bobrick B-8221 lavatory-mounted dispensers. E. Mirrors: Full frameless mirrors specified in Section 08800.


A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to the job site at appropriate time for building into the work. Provide templates and rough-in measurements to the Contractor as required.

B. Before starting work, notify the Contractor in writing of any conflicts detrimental to the installation or operation of the accessories.

C. Ensure that proper blocking has been provided in walls as required for installation of recessed and surface-mounted accessories and grab bars.

D. Coordinate exact location of accessories with the Architect as necessary. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES

A. General: Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

B. Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. 3.03 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Install accessories in public restrooms at mounting heights to comply with American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) publication A117.1-2003 and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), 1990, for handicapped accessible accessories:

1. Mounting Heights (above finished floor): a. Horizontal Grab Bars, Toilet Compartments: 33"-36". b. Vertical Grab Bars, Toilet Compartments: 39"-41" from wall and finished floor. c. Toilet Paper Dispensers: 20" to centerline of roller. Verify clearances with grab

bars. d. Paper Towel Dispensers: 48" maximum to dispenser opening; 60-1/2" to top of

unit. e. Mirrors: 38" to bottom edge, or as shown on the Drawings.

B. Balance of accessories not located in handicapped accessible areas to be mounted at manufacturer's recommended height. Comply with all governing regulations.

PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

NOTE: Owner to provide all toilet accessories for installation by the General Contractor. Schedule shown is for reference only.

A. Quantities are the responsibility of the Contractor. Refer to the Drawings for locations.



B. Unisex Public Restroom #5: 1. Grab Bars, 3-piece. 2. Toilet Paper Holder: One (1) single-roll holder. 3. Paper Towel Dispenser: One (1). 4. Soap Dispenser, Liquid Soap Type: One (1) lavatory-mounted dispenser. 5. Full Mirror.

C. Private Restroom #10: 1. Grab Bars, 3-piece. 2. Toilet Paper Holders: One (1) single-roll holder. 3. Paper Towel Dispenser: One (1). 4. Soap Dispenser, Liquid Soap Type: One (1) lavatory-mounted dispenser. 5. Full Mirror: One (1).

END OF SECTION

SECTION 16010

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. General requirements specifically applicable to Division 1 in addition to Division 1 provisions.

2. All work as required to provide complete, operating systems, including completion of all details and items of work not specifically shown on the Drawings or within these Specifications.

3. General references 4. Regulatory requirements 5. Submittals 6. General standards for materials 7. General workmanship requirements 8. Utility coordination

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work specified in this Division with the work of other trades.

B. Order the progress of the electrical work so as to conform with the progress of the other trades.

C. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the other work within the facility will permit.

D. Any cost resulting from ill-timed work performed under this Division shall be borne by the Electrical Contractor.

E. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of the project to ascertain and establish all conditions affecting the proposed electrical work. Make provisions within the Bid Amount for the cost of such conditions and factors.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/IEE C2 – National Electrical Safety Code and other publications

B. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC)

C. NECA – Standard for Installation

Heller House 16010 - 1 GENERAL ELECTRICAL March 2010 REQUIREMENTS

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspections required.

B. Furnish to the Owner a certificate of final inspection and approval from the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) over the electrical installation.

C. Conform to all aspects of the NEC, with all local or jurisdictional interpretations, modifications, and ordinances.

D. Conform to applicable building codes plus International Mechanical Code (IMC) or Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC), as applicable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Materials and Equipment: Acceptable to the AHJ as suitable for the use intended.

B. All materials shall be new and conform to applicable standards.

1. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL)

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

4. Insulated Power Cable Engineer’s Association (IPCEA)

C. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced in a manner meeting approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. Such work shall be performed prior to final acceptance by the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. Install all electrical systems and perform all work using procedures defined in the NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise indicated within these Specifications or on the Drawings.

B. The Work shall also include completion of such details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems defined within these Contract Documents.

C. The Drawings and Specifications shall take precedence when they are more stringent than applicable codes, ordinances, or standards in effect.



3.2 SITE UTILITY AND SERVICE COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the existing electrical and telephone services already installed at the site with the respective Utility Companies.

B. The installation shall meet all of the requirements of all Utility Companies.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Perform all cutting, channeling, chasing, drilling, etc. as required to remove any electrical equipment or materials in areas of remodel. Where installed in new conditions, order the work so as to minimize such methods and use only where inadvertent omissions have been made during the construction process.

B. Perform all such work as required to conceal conduits, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or as within these Specifications.

C. Perform all such work in a manner to minimize damage to portions of wall finishes, surfaces or structure which are not being demolished, refinished, etc.

D. Provide refinish, resurface, and repair of finishes damaged during electrical construction.

E. All openings made in fire walls or ceilings: Penetrate and patch so as not to affect the fire rating. Use only red colored fire rated caulk, mortar, blocks, pads, etc. to match the assembly rating and application. Follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

F. All penetrations in existing concrete or existing masonry shall be by use of core drill or saw cutting, except as specifically permitted on the Drawings and specifically coordinated with the architect. Caulk, mortar into place and waterproof all penetrations in below grade walls or floors. Take special care to respect the historic nature of the facility with all installations.


SECTION 16020

ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section is supplementary to any General requirement or Division 1 section. Where conflict in content occurs, the more stringent criteria shall apply,

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit on all equipment as listed within this Division and/or as shown on the Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS PRIOR TO ORDERING

A. Maximum of 30 days after award of contract or less as required to meet proposed project schedule. See individual Sections within this Division for specific equipment submittals that will be required.

B. Allow fourteen (14) working days for review of such submittals.

C. Where shorter review periods are required to maintain delivery times within the Project Schedule, submit a separate written request for shorter periods with the submittals and list specific equipment or systems where shorter review time is dictated.

1.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Submit Ten (10) copies for each item requested or other number of copies as specified with the previous divisions of these Specifications. Hard copy 8-1/2” wide by x11” long or folded to that size. Electronic or FAX transmission of submittals not permitted.

B. Electrical submittals must have a cover sheet for each group or system submitted. Cover shall include name of project, owner, electrical contractor and supplier. Leave minimum 5” square space for shop drawing stamp. Staple or bind into individual sets.


Heller House 16020 - 1 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS March 2010 AND SHOP DRAWINGS

SECTION 16040

SECONDARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECONDARY SERVICE

A. 120/240 Volt, 1 phase, 3 wire service and associated revenue metering for the facility is existing. Refer to the electrical one-line.


PROJECT NAME 16040 - 1 SECONDARY DATE ELECTRICAL SERVICE

SECTION 16120

WIRE AND CABLE - 600 VOLT AND LESS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70

C. NEMA WC 3 – Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

D. NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable for Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BUILDING WIRE

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, or XHHW.

Heller House 16120 - 1 WIRE AND CABLE March 2010 600 VOLT AND LESS

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. 6. As approved

C. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders and Services: Copper for all feeders and services, solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. Motor and equipment connections to be made using copper conductor only.

B. Aluminum conductor not permitted for any size or application.

C. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

D. Use Type THHN/THWN for supply conductor connection to ballasted light fixtures.

E. Control Circuits: Copper stranded Type THHN/THWN

F. Fire Alarm Circuits: Copper, solid conductor Type THHN/THWN

3.2 GENERAL WIRING METHODS

A. All conductors to be installed in an approved raceway system, regardless of voltage or application.

B. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in the same raceway.

C. Neatly train and lace or wire-tie wiring inside boxes, cabinets, equipment, and panelboards.

D. Make parallel circuit conductor lengths equal.


3.3 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS

A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes of proper size and volume.

B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for solid copper wire splices and taps. Stranded conductors #8 AWG and smaller to be connected using pressure connectors only after the conductors are solder tinned.

C. For copper conductors #8 AWG and larger, using insulated solderless compression connectors.

D. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape and insulated splice caps.

E. Thoroughly clean all conductors before installing lugs or connectors.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS

A. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant for conductor sizes larger than #4 AWG and where necessary. Compound may be equal to Ideal “Yellow” and must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

B. Install wire into conduit in building interior after building has been physically protected from the weather, with all concrete and plastering work completed and after all mechanical work likely to damage wire completed. Do not install conductors in incomplete conduit runs.

C. Completely swap all raceways before installing conductors.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Identify and color-code conductors and cables.

F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

G. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. All terminations in underground, exterior or wet location boxes to be watertight.

H. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 8 inches of slack.

I. Conductor bends shall be made in a neat, consistent manner. Conductors larger than #6 AWG shall be bent to avoids stress points on the insulation where routed through bushings or other openings. Any insulation so stressed shall result in replacement of the entire conductor length at the Engineer’s discretion.




A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Perform continuity test on all power and branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing connections prior to energizing three-phase equipment.

3. Provide megohm meter (i.e. Megger) testing of all feeder and service conductors larger than #4 AWG. Use 600 volt megohm meter and submit results to the Engineer. .

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.

D. Recheck all splices and terminations and make tight during a 15 day period immediately prior to final acceptance of the work.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

F. Conductors that are nicked during the process of insulation removal shall be replaced at the discretion of the Engineer with no additional cost to the Owner.


SECTION 16130

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.



B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC): ANSI C80.1.

B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): ANSI C80.3.

C. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): Zinc-coated steel.

D. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. PVC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

Heller House 16130 - 1 RACEWAYS March 2010 AND BOXES

B. Fittings for PVC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. 4. As approved

C. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type or flanged-and-gasketed type for NEMA 3R as indicated on the Drawings .

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Thomas & Betts Corporation. b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). c. As approved

B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division. b. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division. c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division. d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. e. Panduit Corp. f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). g. As approved

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable] rectangular.

E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum, with gasketed cover.

H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

I. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:


1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC 3. Underground Conduit to within 5 feet of building: PVC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct

buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Above ground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, in

damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size except that 3/8” size may be used for fixture connections.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded GRC fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. Use of FMC in concealed spaces to be limited to 48 inches maximum and only with prior approval of each specific location from the Engineer.



H. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

I. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

J. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.

2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of

raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

K. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

L. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of FMC for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures in accessible ceilings and all exposed equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

M. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

N. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

O. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.


SECTION 16140

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Receptacle 2. Receptacles with integral GFCI 3. Snap switches 4. Wall-box dimmers 5. Communications outlets 6. Associated device plates

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 5. As approved

Heller House 16140 - 1 WIRING DEVICES March 2010

2.2 DEVICE COLOR

A. Except for special purpose devices and as otherwise indicated in these Specifications and on the Drawings, device and matching device plate color shall be BROWN OR BRONZE FACE.

2.3 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), CRB5362 (duplex), or PT5362 with PTRA6STR

(pigtail).

B. All Receptacles located outdoors or in damp locations must be Weather Resistant type in accordance with 2008 NEC 406.8. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following; a. Pass & Seymour, WR5362, WR20TR. b. As approved

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. GFCI Receptacle shall have trip and not reset if critical components are damaged and ground fault protection is lost or if miswired, power to receptacle is disconnected.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 Ampere:



a. Cooper; GF20 b. Pass & Seymour; 2095, PT2095 c. Hubbell GFR5352 d. As approved

2.5 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 UL 20, and shall be Federal Specification WC596 compliant. Marking should be clearly identifiable on device face or strip. Prewired pigtail connectors that accommodate Fed. Spec. switches are approved. Must be crimped and welded terminal right angle application within connector.


B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 Ampere:



a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224

(four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four

way). d. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2 or PT20AC1 (single pole), CSB20AC2 (two pole),

CSB20AC3 or PT20AC3 (three way), CSB20AC4 (four way). e. approved

2.6 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Pass & Seymour: Titan Series

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.

1. 600 watt, minimum; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. Single-Pole control up to 2000 Watts. Preset 3-way control up to 2000 Watts. High end to be minimum of 95% of line voltage. Provide user adjustable ‘at full’ voltage output control, which must be accessible without removing the device but hidden from the general end user, under the wall plate. a. Products: Single-Pole; Pass & Seymour CD700, CD1100, CD1600, CD2000.

Three Way; Pass & Seymour CD703-P, CD1103-P, CD1603-P, CD2003-P.

D. Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) Transformer Dimmers: High end to be a minimum of 95% of line voltage. Provide circuitry specifically designed to control and provide symmetrical AC waveforms to the input of the MLV transformer per UL 1472. Single-pole control up to 2000 VA. Preset 3-way control up to 2000 VA. Provide user adjustable ‘low end’ voltage output control. Must be accessable without removing the device, but hidden from the general end user, under the wall plate. 1. Products: Pass & Seymour; CDLV_series, and CDLV_-P series.

2.7 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

A. Telephone Outlet:




a. Cooper; 3560-6. b. Leviton; 40649. c. As approved

3. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1 complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.

2.8 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Metal, dark bronze, oil rubbed bronze finish. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with in-use style lockable cover by Hubbell, Carlon or as approved. Nonmetallic assembly not permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:


a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 8 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the

manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates, except on masonry surfaces. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.


A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not

acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.



6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above.


SECTION 16410

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Single, Separate Enclosed: 1. Non-fusible switch. 2. Switch with thermal overload device. 3. Enclosures.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

B. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. As approved

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 1200A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses where required, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

Heller House 16410 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES March 2010 AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses where required, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Provide with voltage rating for system being applied.

E. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when specific Class R fuses are specified.

4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 SWITCH WITH THERMAL OVERLOAD

A. Outlet box mounted switch with integral thermal device for all 120 volt, 1-phase motor loads as shown on the Drawings, including self-protected motors.

B. Size heater at 115% of the full load current or as otherwise required by the manufacturer

C. Mount on or directly adjacent to the motor load.

D. Equip with device plate to meet requirements of the location.

E. Provide engraved label on switch or engraved device plate defining load served.

F. Switch/Fuse combination units (e.g. SKU) expressly prohibited.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R 3. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with NECA 1.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.


SECTION 16511

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts 2. Emergency lighting units 3. Exit signs 4. Lighting fixture supports

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In Luminaire Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Refer to appendix within the specifications for reference to the existing light fixtures that are to be reused on this project. The Owner shall be responsible for supplying the electrical contractor with these existing fixtures for installation by the electrical contractor.

Heller House 16511 - 1 INTERIOR LIGHTING March 2010

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A. Prewired with protection to prevent overheating

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

2.3 BALLASTS

A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.

1. Sound Rating: A. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 4. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.

B. Ballasts for Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher for Li near Fluorescent Lamps: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types.

C. Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations

on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.

2.4 EXIT SIGNS

A. Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Minimum letter height on exit signs to be 6 inches. 1. Lamps for AC Operation: Green LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.



2. Rating: Exit fixture emergency power system will include spare capacity for up to three additional remote egress heads that will operate on power failure only. Battery rating will support exit and remote heads for minimum of 90 minutes before automatic cutoff due to low voltage.

3. Remote heads shall be as shown on the Drawings with weatherproof units on exterior locations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. Coordinate fixture locations with the Architectural Reflected ceiling Plan. Coordinate space requirements with the Mechanical Contractors and other trades prior to rough-in.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports.

C. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures according to manufacturer’s or Engineer’s criteria to provide required light footcandle intensities

D. Mount all fixtures and outlets at a position and height to clear all ductwork, piping, etc.

E. Install grid clips or other approved methods required to secure the fixtures to the ceiling system.

F. Relamp all fixtures which have failed lamps prior to Substantial Completion and clean all lenses and diffusers. Clean all paint splatters, dirt and debris from interior and exposed exterior surfaces of fixtures.


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.


SECTION 16700 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Summary

A. This specification document provides the requirements for the installation, pro-gramming and configuration of a complete fire alarm system, include, but not be limited to, system cabinet, power supply, LCD annunciator, built in Digital Com-municator associated peripheral devices, batteries, wiring, conduit and other re-levant components and accessories required to furnish a complete and opera-tional Life Safety System.

1.2 Labeling

A. All fire alarm system equipment shall be listed for it’s intended purpose and be compatibility listed to assure the integrity of the complete system.

1.3 Standards

A. The fire alarm equipment and installation shall comply with the current provisions of the following standards and shall be listed for it’s intended purpose and be compatibility listed to insure integrity of the complete system.

National Electric Code, NFPA 70Article 760.

National Fire Protection Association Standards:

NFPA 15 Water Spray Fixed Systems NFPA 16 Deluge Foam Water Systems NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code

NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Local and State Building Codes

Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

a. All equipment shall be approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for its intended purpose, listed as power limited by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

a. All visual Notification appliances and manual pull stations shall comply with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act.

Heller House 16700 - 1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL March 2010

1.4 Submittals

A. The contractor shall submit three (3) complete sets of documentation within thirty (30) calendar days after award of the purchase order. Indicated in the document will be the type, size, rating, style, catalog number, manufacturer’s names, pho-tos, and /or catalog data sheets for all items proposed to meet these specifica-tions. The proposed equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Archi-tect/Engineer and no equipment shall be ordered or installed on the premises without that approval.

B. Submittal of shop drawings shall contain at least three (3) copies of the manufac-turer specification and installation instruction sheets. All equipment and devices on the shop drawings to be furnished under this contract shall be clearly marked in the specification sheets.

1.5 Warranty

A. Warranty all materials, installation and workmanship for a one (1) year period, unless otherwise specified. A copy of the manufacturer warranty shall be pro-vided with the closeout documentation.

1.6 Product Specification

A. The contractor shall provide a completely electrically supervised fire alarm con-trol panel equal to Silent Knight Model SK-2224. The system shall contain a fire alarm control panel capable of operating and supervising smoke detection devic-es, alarm notification devices, and an on-board annunciator. It shall be compati-ble with a digital communicator accessory which shall be housed in the control cabinetry.

B. The fire alarm control panel shall have a 2.5 amp power limited supply, two Class B initiation circuits which shall accommodate heat detectors, smoke detectors, and manual pull stations. Smoke detection shall be achieved with either 2- or 4-wire detectors that are compatible with the system. The initiation inputs shall be programmable as 1) verification zones in which detectors are automatically reset one time before signaling an alarm condition; 2) enhanced verification zones which can recognize pull stations when smoke verification is in use in a zone and will signal an alarm immediately (will not reset) if the alarm has come from a pull station; and 3) water flow delay zones in which the system waits 30, 60, or 90 seconds, as programmed, before signaling an alarm condition.

C. The FACP shall have two 1.25 amp notification outputs which are programmable as silenceable or not silenceable and ANSI cadence or steady. The FACP shall be capable of supporting four remote LED annunciators and shall have dedicated relays for alarm and trouble and an auxiliary power output rated at .5 amp.

D. The FACP shall have an on-board annunciator to indicate alarm, supervisory, trouble, and status conditions. The annunciator must include LEDs for AC, GENERAL TROUBLE, SYSTEM SILENCED, WALK TEST, GROUND FAULT, AND LOW BATTERY. The annunciator shall also contain LEDs to annunciate



alarms, troubles, and supervisory by zone. The FACP must be fully operational from the annunciator and include buttons for ACKNOWLEDGE, SILENCE, RESET, and WALK TEST. The annunciator must also have separate DISABLE switches for each zone and notification circuit; SILENCE, RESET, and WALK TEST.

E. Provide with the following accessories: SK-2884 Serial Driver Board, Provides a serial interface with up to four expan-sion devices (listed below). SK-2104 Digital Dialer (Requires SK-2884) UL Listed dual phone line DACT. SK-2866 LED Annunciator (Requires SK-2884) Provides up to 12 LEDs for alarms, supervisory, and trouble conditions. SK-2880 I/O Module (Requires SK-2884) Provides 34 pre-defined open collector outputs, Two supervised switch inputs, and 3 form C relays.
